Home

IBM PC Server Hardware Maintenance Manual

1. B BOON mn EH LOE ph cla h h D Ed uM foe Lj aS C B 92 PC Server HMM System Board Continued porn m n ene o m c 5 MRD WP J38 J37 Riser connector Modem Ring Detect jumper Diskette drive write protect jumper Diskette drive connector Hard disk drive connectors On Off Switch Power Supply Connector On Off Switch Connector Power supply connectors J26 J27 Bus CPU Speed MHz J101 v 256KB 1MB Cache jumpers Processor connector Bus Core Ratio Cache connectors Memory connectors Bank 2 Memory connectors Bank 1 Memory connectors Bank 3 Video memory modules Power on password jumper Battery Display connector Parallel connector Serial connector Serial connector Keyboard connector Mouse connector Audio input jack Audio output jack IDE CD ROM Audio connector Mouse jumper PC Server 310 Type 8639 93 Jumper Settings The following tables contain the jumper setting information D indicates the default setting Jumper Setting Description MRD 2 3 D Modem answer on ring 1 2 Modem no answer ring WP 2 3 D Enable
2. mue 38 1019 J41 Cabs E J42 J28 J20 J39 J35 MCASLOT6 29___ J16 MCA 5101 5 30____ J17 MCASLOT4 J31 J15 Ca MCA SLOT 3 J32 _ J10 an MCA SLOT2 J33 _ J2 2 1 J34 n J4 PCISLOT2 J36 J6 PCI SLOT 2 _J36 a nee PCISLOT1 J37 8 Cm J12 Lm Lm J9 condany 88888888 427426 026 Bor 01290 40 2966990 BTY J14 d PC Server 520 8641 305 System Board Connections Header Configuration Connect To J2 SCSI LED connector Yellow SCSI LED J3 IDE Hard Drive IDE hard drive connector J4 System Fan System fan connector J5 Cache Card Slot Cache Card 6 Speaker connector Speaker J8 Primary CPU Fan Fan connector J9 Secondary CPU Fan Fan connector J10 Power LED Pins 1 3 connector J13 IDE Hard Drive IDE hard drive connector J19 Parallel Port Parallel device connector J20 Diskette Drive Diskette drive connector J21 Serial Port COM B Serial device connector J24 Serial Port COM A Serial device connector J28 SCSI Standard SCSI device connector J35 SCSI Fast Wide Internal SCSI internal connector Fast Wide device J38 Power supply
3. Routine Boot Mode Code 01 Its A Reset Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 00 Init Chip NS Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 12 Periph Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 03 Disable Video Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 05 Phase 1 Enter Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Big Real Enable Local Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD APIC 06 Cache Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 07 Init Refresh Cold Restore Mfg 08 Wait For RTC Cold Restore Mfg 0A Std CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS Mid CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS 0C Ext CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS C SET INIT Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 0 Check Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg NonParity 1 Disable Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD B1 Init Seattle Cold Restore Mfg SAD 3 Test CPU Regs Cold Restore Mfg 4 Init RTC Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 6 Init Timer 0 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 7 Init Timer 2 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 8 Test DMA Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 9 Test Page Regs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD A Verify Refresh Cold Restore Mfg B Enable Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Save ID Warm SAD D Test First 64k Cold Restore Mfg Clear First 64k Cold Warm Restore Mfg F POST with Stack Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 20 Enable SAD BIOSE000 21 BIOS Shadow Cold Warm Restore Mfg B2 Shadow SCSI Cold Warm Restore Mfg 23 Phase 2 POST Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 24 Enable BIOS SAD F000 24 Shadow VPD Cold Warm Restore Mfg
4. Redefining Space in Array You can redefine space in a disk array in a number of ways For example you can combine a number of small logical drives to create a larger one or you can redefine the existing logical drive into several smaller drives Also you can install additional hard disk drives to create a larger logical drive than was possible with the existing storage capacity One method to redefine space in an array is to change the RAID level assigned to a logical drive For example if you assigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decided you needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5 you can use this procedure to replace the existing logical drive with a logical drive assigned the new RAID level To redefine the space in a disk array first you must delete the array The last disk array defined must be the first deleted r Warning In all cases when you delete an array all the data and programs in the array are lost If you have data and programs that you want to save they must be backed up and then restored It is suggested you use a high speed backup device such as a tape drive To redefine the space in an array 1 Back up all data and programs in the array 2 f needed install additional hard disk drives Refer to the User s Reference for information about selecting drive sizes 3 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette th
5. Server HMM 66 Module Test Menu Attention A customized setup configuration other than default settings might exist on the computer you are servicing Running the Setup Utility program might alter those settings Note the current configuration settings and verify that the settings are in place when service is complete To start the Setup Utility program see Setup Program on page 73 At the start of the diagnostic tests the Module Test Menu is displayed Normally all adapters and devices installed in the computer are highlighted on the menu If an adapter or device that is not installed in the computer is highlighted on the menu use the procedure in Undetermined Problem on page 83 to find the problem If an adapter or device is installed in the computer and is not highlighted on the menu you have one of the following conditions The diagnostic code for the adapter or device is not on the diagnostic diskette Run the diagnostics provided with that device The SCSI controller failed on the system board or SCSI adapter unrecognizable adapter is installed missing device is defective or it requires an additional diskette or service manual defective adapter caused the device not to be highlighted on the menu If a device is missing from the list replace it If this does not correct the problem use the procedure in Undetermined Problem on pag
6. y smoly pue 1ueseud eui 9 sjuawuBbisse pue suondo palesu y pue y pejreisur jo y e 1sisuoo y pexoeq Kieneq ay ui peJojs y saJojsaJ 10 dn syoeq seDueuo 195 senexsip ueis s jo 1 payepdn ue eui 0 5 y jo uoisJ8A MoU e 91409 uiejs S JO sso ejueprooe eseo ulejs S eui siy uonimieg ueis S eui dnyoeq 5 eui uonnaed uiajs S ay 015 ainpaooid eui 10 senexsip GZ 2914 1see peeu noA Oud snidvo pue onsouDeiq eoueJejed Anyoeq os v dnyoegq eui uonnieg 5 eui uejs s eui uonnaeg uiejs S dn xoeg senexsip OHd SNIdVO
7. 10 A base 23 with upgrade PC Server 720 Type 8642 363 Acoustical Noise Emission Values e Average sound pressure levels at operator position 1 hard disk drive low fan speed 40 GB operating 38 dB idle 1 hard disk drive high fan speed 42 dB operating 44 dB idle hard disk drives low fan speed 40 dB operating 38 dB idle hard disk drives high fan speed 42 dB operating 42 dB idle e Average sound pressure at bystander position 1 meter 1 hard disk drive low fan speed 396 dB operating 35 dB idle 1 hard disk drive high fan speed 38 dB operating 38 dB idle hard disk drives low fan speed 36 dB operating 35 dB idle hard disk drives high fan speed 38 dB operating 38 dB idle Declared upper limit sound power levels 1 hard disk drive low fan speed 5 5 bels operating 5 4 bels idle 1 hard disk drive high fan speed 5 7 bels operating 5 6 bels idle hard disk drives low fan speed 5 5 bels operating 5 4 bels idle hard disk drives high speed 5 7 bels operating 5 7 bels idle 364 PC Server HMM Starting or Stopping the System See the following topics e Starting or Powering On the System Stopping or Powering Off the System e Power On Off Scenarios on page 366 See also Service Processor Requirements on page 362 Starting or Powering On the System To
8. Defining Logical Drives After you have created an array you must define a logical drive You cannot leave the RAID configuration program until you define the logical drives for any created arrays To define a logical drive 1 Select Define Logical drive from the Create Delete Array menu The following screen appears the cursor is active in the Array list IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Create Delete Array 1 Help ch 1 Ch 2 2 Define hot spare drive Array 3 te disk array Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 0NL A 1 0NL B 6 Exit Arr Array Log Size RAID Date ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status 3 Lona Lone 5760 0 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 4 ONL ONL D B 5760 Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good C 3840 A2 1005 RA 1 03 24 94 Good 5 B 5 ont D D 5760 BO 1500 24 94 Good 81 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 6 Lon D CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good Cl 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 7 7 5 Select array to define logical drive and press Enter Press Spacebar to view the stripe order lt 2 Use the Up 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the array you want to define then press 470 Server HMM Enter The Select RAID Level pop up window appears and the cursor is act
9. Extended Memory Test Failed Extended memory error Memory Module 2 System Board Floppy Drive Failed 1 Diskette Drive Diskette drive s failed 2 System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable General Function Failed 1 Any Adapter Remove one adapter at a 2 System Board time until the symptom goes away 3 Processor Hard Drives Failed Hard Disk Drive test error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board Incorrect DOS version 1 Ensure you are using DOS version 3 0 or higher INT Mask Register Failed INT Mask Register error 1 Microprocessor 2 System Board Invalid Date Clock DOS date mismatch 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board Invalid Time Clock DOS time mismatch Back up clock and DOS time of day settings do not match 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board 112 Server HMM Error Message Symptom FRU Action Linear Cylinder Access Test Failed Hard disk drive error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Logic Function Failed 1 Microprocessor CPU Logic test error 2 System Board Loopback Error 1 System Board COM Port Test or Parallel 2 Wrap Plug Port error A wrap plug must be installed to successfully complete these tests Main Components Failed 1 System Board System board error 2 Processor
10. eui jo uonezipeniur Buung eui jo uonezieniui Buung pueo eui jo ewou Jaye pue Buung 53018 1 ped JosseooJd NIU pejeisur 10sseooJd d ZIN palesu 1015 e 1015 1g 8031 1015 5 uo q31 347 PC Server 720 8642 pied JosseooJd p129 au jo uejqoud eue jos JosseooJd y uo ON Josseooud uo si 8194 pue uonezijeniui Buung s q31 eui jo uonezi eniur jnjisseoong y jo Buung s q31 eAnoejeq aqq e nosjeg jo ee os peo eui jo uonezijeniur ewou Jaye pue Buung Q31 pie PC Server 348 Light Emitting Diodes Liquid Crystal Display agag 6 OK 3 Light Emitting Diodes The following is a list of the front operator panel light emitting
11. J13 E 123 PCI 3 gg J22 PCI 2 iwi Shared J21 PCI 1 PCI EISA Slot UPGRADE MAIN J20 EISA Slot 6 Jig EISA Slot 5 CPU CPU J18 EISA Slot 4 1 5 W36 017 EISA Slot 3 3 W5 Uz8 U28 we ge w14 1 U27 030 Ji6 EISA Slot 2 U26 U31 ge U25 U32 W24 Elan econdary Cache W12 J15 EISA Slot 1 Memory Upgrade Sockets PC Server 320 Type 8640 161 Connections Header Configuration Connect To W12 W31 Speaker Speaker W18 W37 Power LED Pins 1 3 W24 W38 IDE Hard Drive LED IDE Hard Drive W35 CPU Fan Connector Fan W36 CPU Fan Connector Fan J1 J2 J26 Power Supply P1 to J1 Connector P2 to J2 P3 to J26 J6 Mouse Connector Mouse J8 Keyboard Connector Keyboard J9 Parallel Port Parallel Device Connector J10 Floppy Drive Diskette Drive Connector J11 Serial Port COMM A Serial Device Connector J12 Serial Port COMM B Serial Device Connector J13 ISA IDE Connector IDE Hard Drive N A SCSI LED SCSI Option Card N A SCSI Device SCSI Option Card Connector Jumpers Jumper Description Setting 1 11 Write Back Default Closed L1 Write Through 2 Reserved Open W5 L2 Cache Size Pins 1 2 L2 Cache Size 256K Default Pins 2 3 L2 Cache Size 512K W6 CPU Clock Pins 1 2 Pentium 60 90MHz Pins 2 3 Pentium 66 100MHz 162 PC Server HMM Jumper Description Setting
12. PC Server 520 Type 8641 313 Routine Boot Mode Code 25 nit Key Board Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Data 26 Save ID Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD B3 Check P54C Cold Mfg 27 nit Q Boot Cold Warm Restore Mfg 28 Periph Config Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 2A nit Timeout Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Tables 2B Pos_Setup Cold Warm Restore Mfg 2F Test DMA Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Locations B4 nit DMA Regs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 30 Test PICs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 31 nit Vector Table Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 32 Enable Timer Int Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 33 nit Keyboard Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 34 Clear Memory Cold Restore Mfg Size Error 35 Check Cold Warm Restore Mfg Configuration 36 Mfg Boot Fork Cold Restore Mfg 37 PCI Reset Cold Warm Restore Mfg B5 NVRAM check Cold Warm Restore Mfg 38 PCI Video Cold Warm Restore Mfg 3B Sign On Cold Warm Restore Mfg 3C Test Timer Tick Cold Restore Mfg 3F Enable Video SAD 40 CSET BFR Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD SIZMEM 41 Size Memory Cold Warm Restore Mfg Above 64k 42 CSET AFT SIZ Cold Warm Restore Mfg MEM 43 Test Timer 2 Cold Warm Restore Mfg 44 Password Not Cold Restore Entered 45 Test PS 2 Mouse Cold Warm Restore Mfg 46 Check For Cold Restore Mouse Buttons 47 Init Key Board Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Flags 48 Test Key Board Cold Warm Restore 4B Memory
13. Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Insert the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics diskette into drive A Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses 1 One beep 2 Readable instructions or the Main Menu DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES Yes No 002 Find the failure symptom in the Symptom to FRU Index for the system you are servicing 003 Run the Advanced Diagnostics Test If necessary refer to Diagnostics QAPlus PRO on page 5 If you receive an error go to the Symptom to FRU Index for the system you are servicing 4 PC Server HMM Diagnostics QAPlus PRO The following tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware related problems e Power on self test POST POST Beep Codes Test programs Error messages Diagnostics Diskette Power On Self Test POST Each time you turn on the system it performs a series of tests that check the operation of the system and some options This series of tests is called the power on self test or POST POST does the following e Checks some basic system board operations e Checks the memory operation Starts the video operation Verifies that the diskette drives are working Verifies that the hard disk drive is working If the POST finishes without detecting any
14. If you have a non disk array model an illuminated drive tray knob means the drive is a good one An unilluminated drive tray knob means the drive is defective or no power is being supplied to the drive To remove a drive from bank C D or E do the following 1 Find the drive you plan to remove 2 f you have a disk array model and a drive has failed ensure that you have selected the correct drive for removal by verifying that the light on the tray s knob is blinking 3 Unlock the drive by turning the knob directly above it 90 degrees 4 Disconnect the drive from the connector on the backplane by grasping the handle on the drive tray and pulling the drive out of the server Store the drive in a safe place Note If you have a disk array model you must reconfigure your disk arrays after removing hard disk drives See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 for details PC Server 720 Type 8642 361 Service Processor Requirements The service processor SP follows the following rules for each power on and off cycle The following functions are complete at power up See also Starting or Stopping the System on page 365 Because the SP runs continuously in this version an internal interrupt is generated each time the Start Stop button is pressed This interrupt will set the Power State bit in the RTC s SRAM and set the PAB bit to zero 0 turning on the power supply A
15. Microprocessor Complex Configuration S 390 After the S 390 Microprocessor Complex has been successfully initialized the S 390 Configuration program can be accessed by clicking on the 390 370 Configuration Icon in the System 390 System 370 Group on the OS 2 Desktop See Icons System 390 on page 235 The Configuration program is a menu driven program that provides two main functions e It allows you to describe the mapping between the input output I O devices available on the PC Server System 390 and the System 370 devices they emulate See Device Map on page 230 e t provides an easy way for Virtual Machine Enterprise Systems Architecture VM ESA users to create and maintain new VM userids on the PC Server System 390 and minidisks associated with these userids Changes are made to the system configuration by changing the values in the data menus 226 PC Server HMM The following example of reading a 9336 DASD summarizes how the 370 I O subsystem emulates operations on the PC Server System 390 1 2 The 390 operating system does a system I O instruction to real device 100 The 390 Licensed Internal Code LIC passes all I O instructions to the 370 I O subsystem running on the PC Server Processor Complex The 370 channel emulator executes the 370 channel program and passes the request to the device manager that claims that range of devices in DEVMAP In this example it would be an fixed b
16. 0 6 1357 2468 Sets SCSI IDs to high ee SCSI IDs 8 to D J12 HI 1357 440 Server HMM Hot Swap Tray FRU No 06H8631 07H0774 Notes 1 The following trays are shown with drives installed 2 Each hot swap drive installed must have a Hot Swap Drive Tray attached Unlocked Position Amber Light Green Light Power Off Switch Z Locked d q Position f d d Y The Hot Swap Drive Tray for the expansion enclosure has a small switch that stops the movement of the disk drive The tray also provides two LEDs one green and one amber to indicate the current state of the drive and tray The following table summarizes the LED states on the hot swap tray and their meanings Green Amber Description On Off The Drive tray is powered on the hard disk drive is inactive and the drive should not be removed Blinking Off The hard disk drive is inactive The hot swap drive can be removed safely On On or The hard disk drive is in use and Blinking should not be removed Off Off The drive is defective or no power is being supplied to the drive The hot swap drive can be removed safely PC Server Type 3518 441 Front Panel LED Status Indicators Power OK Indicator Power Enable Indicator All Subsystems E Good Indicator Processor Complex Error Indicator
17. 300 PC Server HMM Locations Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL e Controls Indicators e Expansion Bays on page 302 e Input Output Connectors on page 303 e Memory Module Connectors on page 304 e System Board Locations page 305 System Board Connections on page 306 System Board Jumpers on page 307 Controls Indicators Power OK Indicator Hard Disk Drive Activity Indicator Power On Off Switch PC Server 520 Type 8641 301 Expansion Bays Open Bays gs CD ROM Drive Bay A1 Diskette Drive Bay A2 Bank C Bays1 6 Bank D Bays 1 6 Open Bays Bank E Bays1 6 Note For additional internal drive information see Internal Drives Type 8641 on page 278 Open Bays Your server s special design gives you the flexibility to use combinations of 3 5 inch or 5 25 inch hard disk tape and rewritable optical disk drives Your server can use up to 18 hot swappable 3 5 inch hard disk drives For additional internal drive information see Internal Drives Type 8641 on page 278 CD ROM Drive All models come with a SCSI 4X CD ROM drive Diskette Drive The 3 5 inch 1 44MB diskette drive uses 1MB or 2MB diskettes Hard Disk Drive The number and capacities of the hard disk drives vary depending on your model 302 PC Server HMM Input Output Connectors ___ Monitor
18. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change the configuration You must correctly exit from the Setup program to save the configuration information 5 Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit menu option on the menu bar 6 Select Exit menu from the menu bar 7 Select Save changes and exit PC Server 320 Type 8640 153 Specifications Size e With pedestal Depth 473 mm 18 6 in 585 mm 23 0 in with cable cover Height 651 mm 25 6 in Width 315 mm 12 4 in e Without pedestal Depth 473 mm 18 6 in 585 mm 23 0 in with cable cover Height 622 mm 24 5 in Width 195 mm 7 7 in Weight e Minimum configuration as shipped 19 0 kg 42 Ib e Maximum configuration as shipped 19 5 kg 43 Ib Environment Air temperature System on 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Altitude 0 to 914 m 3000 ft System 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Altitude 914 m 3000 ft to 2133 m 7000 ft System off 10 to 43 50 to 110 Maximum Altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Humidity System on 896 to 8096 System off 896 to 8096 e Maximum altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Electrical Input e Sine wave input 50 to 60 Hz is required e Input voltage Low range Minimum 90 V ac Maximum 137 V ac High range Minimum 180 V ac Maximum 265 V ac Input kilovolt amperes kVA approximately Minimum configuration as shipped
19. 113 DMA Timeout Usually a software error but possibly a hardware failure system board If itis a 70 A21 with a 113 error see ECA056 run CHKDSK Contact the software vendor for more information If it is any other system with a 113 error refer to ECA023 Check the hardware OS 2 Problems during a New Installation If you have determined that you do not have a hardware failure and you cannot get the operating system to work assist the customer in recopying the OS 2 software to the hard disk If this is not a new installation have the customer order the replacement diskettes If this is a new installation and the customer does not have the diskettes order replacement diskettes by doing the following 1 Write down the machine type and serial number 2 Call 1 800 342 6672 weekdays 9 a m to 9 p m eastern time 3 Identify yourself as an IBM service representative or IBM authorized servicer 4 For OS 2 Version 2 0 request diskette package P N 41G3329 For OS 2 Version 2 00 1 request diskette package P N 52G9973 The IBM telephone operator will supply the correct package part number for later versions of OS 2 Supply the machine information and shipping address for either package After you receive the OS 2 diskettes refer to the pamphlet supplied with the diskettes for OS 2 installation instructions The PS 2 diagnostic tests are intended to test only IBM marketed products Products not marketed by I
20. Attention If you select Yes in the Confirm pop up window information in the logical drive will be overwritten with zeros C Select Yes to confirm that you want to initialize this logical drive The initialization process begins and you can See its progress in the Pct Int Percent Initialized column of the Logical Drive list d To stop the initialization at any time press Esc Then press Esc again to return to the menu or press Enter to continue initializing the drive 9 To back up the disk array configuration to diskette you will need a 3 5 inch formatted diskette To back up the disk array configuration a Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu b Select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen A pop up window shows the default file name of CONFIG You can change the file name by typing over the default The Backup program will assign a file name extension of dmc Related Service Information 473 Defining a Hot Spare Drive To define a drive as a hot spare drive 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears 3 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The following screen appears Adapter in Sl
21. beep or beep check the monitor and the information panel 2 f an error message appears on the information panel or the expansion enclosure stops running during testing or normal operation see Symptom to FRU Index on page 446 3 If an error message appears on the monitor Screen the monitor screen is blank or the server stops during normal operation refer to the diagnostic information for the server PC Server Type 3518 427 Power Supplies Attention Always unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before replacing the power supply to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge The expansion tower is shipped with a primary power supply An additional or optional power supply can be added to the computer Connectors are used to transfer the primary power supply voltages and signals from the primary power supply to the optional power supply The following illustrations show how the two power supplies are connected Attention When replacing the primary power supply cover plate rotate the plate 180 This will leave an opening for the primary power supply connector cable that connects to the optional power supply Failure to do so will cause the power supply connector cable to be crimped when the plate is replaced Note Tabs are located on the side of each power supply to secure them together Power Supply LED and Button The power good LED and
22. 24 PC Server HMM Locations 486DX2 System Board Memory connectors U31 U32 U33 and U34 Processor socket ISA IDE hard disk drive LED jumper W46 PCI IDE hard disk drive LED jumper W39 Power LED pins 1 3 W12 Speaker connector J5 EISA slots J12 J13 J14 15 and J16 PCI slots J18 J19 and J20 Mouse port J2 PCI IDE hard disk drive connector J21 Keyboard port J1 Serial port COM1 J11 Power supply connector P2 J7 Power supply connector P1 J6 Serial port COM2 J10 Parallel port J8 Diskette drive connector J9 Real time clock socket IDE 2 hard disk drive connector J22 BEEEEEEREEBoeseosos m PC Server 300 Type 8640 25 Jumper Settings 486DX2 System Board A label diagram showing the following jumper locations is located on the top of the base frame assembly inside the system unit Jumper Settings Central Processing Unit CPU Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W2 486SX Pins 2 3 All other CPUs Default 1 2 amp 3 4 W3 P24T CPU Not installed All others CPUs Default Installed W16 25MHz Not installed 33MHz Default Installed W20 25MHz Installed 33MHz Default Not installed W33 DX4 Pins 1 2 DX4 internal double clock Pins 2 3 468SX DX2 DX and DX4 Not installed internal clock tripler Default ISA IDE Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W42 ISA IDE uses ISA IRQ 14 Pins 1 2 ISA IDE uses ISA IR
23. Beep Symptom FRU Action 3 4 2 POST is searching for video ROM Video Adapter 2 System Board 4 Video Adapter 2 System Board All other beep code sequences 1 System Board One long and one short beep during POST Base 640KB memory error or shadow RAM error 1 Memory Module 2 System Board One long beep and two or three short beeps during POST Video error 1 Display Adapter if installed 2 System Board Three short beeps during POST 1 See System Board Memory on page 79 2 System Board Continuous beep 1 System Board Repeating short beeps 1 Keyboard stuck key 2 Keyboard Cable 3 System Board No Beep Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action No beep during POST but computer works correctly 1 System Board No beep during POST 1 See Undetermined Problem on page 83 System Board Memory Module Any Adapter or Device Riser Card Power Cord Power Supply TU Qo dorm PC Server 310 Type 8639 97 Numeric Error Codes In the following index X can represent any number Error Code FRU Action 000 SCSI Adapter not enabled 1 Be sure adapter device and Bus Master fields are enabled in configuration program See documentation shipped with computer 02X 1 SCSI Adapter 08X 1 SCSI Cable Check SCSI terminator 2
24. Host Device System 390 and System 370 3270 Information Display PC Server Equivalent Device Monochrome or Color Display CKD and FBA DASD OS 2 File 5088 Graphics Control Unit 5080 PC Server Adapter 3215 2703 2540 Card Reader OS 2 Presentation Manager session Serial COM Ports OS 2 File 1403 Printer OS 2 Print Spooler 3088 CTC Token Ring 3420 Tape OS 2 File Special VM Host Transparent File Access Special VM Import Export PC Data ICA SDLC VTAM Connection 3172 LAN VTAM Connection 3172 LAN VM TCP IP Connection 9346 1 4 inch tape 230 PC Server HMM Diagnostic Flow Chart S 390 Customer s Responsibility User Gets Message Refer to the P 390 Software manuals shipped with the computer Refer to the P 390 Disabled Yes Software manuals shipped with the computer Servicer s Responsibility Run the P 390 Replace Diagnostics Failing Program FRU 1 Configuration Problem Contact Support 2 OS 2 Software Programming Possible Problems Errors 1 Configuration AWSERROR LOG 3 If you suspect a hardware 2 Programming Error problem go to General Checkout in your manual for the system you are servicing v Virtual Machine Enterprise Systems Architecture VM ESA Virtual Storage Extended Enterprise System
25. PC Server 720 Type 8642 389 PLSC QEET Information 0500 0000 ROM checksum error on second 16K portion of 32K ROM 0600 0000 ROM access control port error QEET Errors other than 0000 These are specific QEET error codes preceded by a DDD indicating an adapter Note A number in slot S indicates an error on the adapter or device attached to the adapter in slot S If S is 0 suspect the system board QEET Information 001x 8032 80188 80C186 ROM test failure 002x Local RAM test failure 003x Bad fuse or bad termination or local RAM address failure on SCSI adapter if RDDD is 0112 004x Internal peripheral test failure 005x Buffer control chip test failure or LTB failed or System board SCSI failed if RDDD is 0037 006x Undefined error condition or buffer RAM test failure on SCSI adapter if RDDD is 0096 007x System interface control chip test failure 008x SCSI internal interface test failed 00Ax SCSI external interface test failed 107x Adapter hardware failure 10Cx Command failed 10Ex Command error invalid command or parameter 10Fx Sequencing error 110x Adapter internal error log contains entries Reported if no other errors on adapter exist 180x Time out 181x Adapter busy error 182x Unexpected interrupt presented by adapter 183x Adapter register test failure 184
26. W10 W16 W17 L2 Cache Size Reserved Reserved Pins 1 2 L2 Cache Size 256K Default Pins 2 3 L2 Cache Size 512K Pins 1 2 Default Closed Default W20 Monitor Selection Open Monochrome Monitor Setting Closed Color Monitor Setting Default W21 Reserved Open AT Style Keyboard Closed PS 2 Style Keyboard and Mouse Default W22 Reserved Open Default W23 Reserved Open Default W25 ISQ IDE IRQ Select Pins 1 2 ISA IDE using IRQ 14 Primary IDE Controller Default Pins 2 3 ISA IDE using IRQ 15 Secondary Controller W30 Reserved Open Default PC Server 320 Type 8640 163 Symptom to FRU Index This index supports Type 8640 computers Always start General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 The Symptom to FRU lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this Symptom to FRU Index and the Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes and model numbers X can be any number or letter Where the model number is used to identify an error XX used in place of the last 2 digits can be any number or letter Note For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus PRO diagnostics code refer to the manual
27. For information on Go to Additional service help For example voltage checks 0S 2 Trap errors or processor board errors Related Service Information on page 107 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Possible software and hardware mismatch problems Not repairable by replacing FRUS Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 181 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Memory Configuration Problems Memory on page 260 Resolving Memory Address Conflicts on page 408 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Replacing the system board does not correct the problem See System Board Replacement Type 8641 on page 290 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 101 102 System and microprocessor error 1 System Board System and microprocessor error 0103 1 System Board System Timer error 106 1 System Board 308 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0110 1 Memory SIMM Parity Check 1 XXXX run 2 System Board Setup 111 1 Memory SIMM channel check error 2 System Board 114 1 Run Diagnostics Adapter read only memory 2 Failing Adapter error 0115 1 Memory SIMM Parity Check 1 XXXX run 2 System Board Setup 0120 1 Run Setup Previous boot incomplete 2 Battery CMOS Chip default configuration used 3 System Board 0130 1 Battery CMOS Chip Invalid NVRAM media type 2 S
28. Re run Because Of Error In Relocating Program Diagnostics failed to relocate the Diagnostics Test programs so the memory space it resides in was not tested Diagnostic Diskette Memory Module 3 System Board RAM Memory Error Block n Bad bits n An error was detected in RAM Memory Module 2 System Board RAM Test Failed Test Result Summary message Memory Test failed Memory Module 2 System Board Read error on cylinder n Hard disk drive physical format error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board PC Server 300 Type 8640 43 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Read Errors 1 Diskette Diskette drive read error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Receive Error Serial Port Cable Serial Port loopback test 2 System Board error Refresh Failure 1 Memory Module The Diagnostics Test 2 System Board detected an error while testing the DMA controller s RAM refresh cycle RTC Interrupt Failure 1 Real Time Clock The Diagnostics Test cannot Assembly detect the Real Time clock 2 System Board interrupt Serial Chip Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error general 2 System Board Serial Compare Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error information 2 System Board transmitted is not the same as information received Serial Time out Error
29. 2 GGG JJJ LLL PP3 JJJ KKK LLL In some situations you may want to try LS parity placement to improve performance The default parity placement is RA Read ahead On Normally the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter transfers data from disk to its local cache in steps of stripe unit size This provides excellent overall performance when workloads tend to be sequential However if the workload is random and system I O requests are smaller than stripe unit size reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will result in a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted disk utilization When read ahead is set to Off the size of data transfer from the disk to local cache is equal to the system I O request size and no read ahead to the end of the stripe unit is performed Notes 1 The read ahead setting can be changed without destroying data in a logical drive 2 When the configuration is saved on a diskette the RAID parameters are saved also Related Service Information 489 Display If the screen is rolling replace the display assembly If that does not correct the problem replace the system board If the screen is not rolling do the following to run the display self test 1 Power off the computer and display 2 Disconnect the display signal cable 3 Power on the display 4 Turn the brightness and contrast controls clockwise to their maximum setting 5 Check for the following conditio
30. Abort all tests The test program stops and returns to the previous menu 88 PC Server HMM Vital Product Data Each computer has a unique vital product data VPD code stored in the nonvolatile memory on the system board After you replace the system board the VPD must be updated To update the VDP see Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure on page 69 Locations The following location information is for the PC Server 310 Type 8639 Expansion Slots Riser Cards e Keylock Assembly Exploded View on page 91 System Board on 92 Expansion Slots Riser Cards All Type 8639 computers have seven expansion slots two of which are PCI expansion slots The other five expansion slots are either Micro Channel or ISA depending on model The PCI slots and their adjacent Micro Channel or ISA expansion slots are shared expansion slots This means that an adapter can be installed in either the expansion slot or the adjacent Micro Channel or ISA expansion slot but not in both A SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter is installed in one of the PCI expansion slots An Ethernet adapter is installed in one of the Micro Channel or ISA slots This leaves one PCI slot and three Micro Channel or ISA slots available for future expansion For example you can add adapters to provide communications specialized graphics and sound PCI Micro Channel Models The following illustration shows the location
31. Advanced functions Changes the write policy the way data is written to the drive saves your configuration information to a diskette restores it from a diskette or changes RAID parameters This choice also allows you to do a low level format Drive information Displays information about the SCSI devices hard disk CD ROM tape and so on connected to the RAID adapter Exit Leaves the Main Menu 368 PC Server HMM Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics If the diagnostics identified a processor failure on a multiprocessor computer but could not identify which processor is failing the FRU replacement is any processor in the Symptom to FRU Index do the following 1 Power off the computer and remove all of the installed processors 2 Reinstall one of the processors and run the diagnostics 3 If the processor is good remove the good processor and follow this procedure for each processor previously removed from the computer until you locate the defective processor 4 When you locate the defective processor replace it and reinstall the remaining processors you removed from the computer Viewing the RAID Configuration Before creating or changing a disk array you can look at the current configuration by selecting View Configuration from the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program To view the disk array configuration 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Star
32. CFFFFh Disabled C8000h CBFFFh Disabled C0000h C7FFFh Enabled Adapter Video BIOS Secure Diskette Drives Disabled Serial Port A Address 3F8h IRQ 4 Serial Port B Address 2F8h IRQ Shadow RAM 384KB Startup Drive First Diskette Drive 0 Startup Drive Second Hard Disk 0 Startup Drive Third Disabled Startup Drive Fourth Disabled SureTest Disabled System ROM F000h FFFFh Video Controller SVGA Video Display Type User Defined Video Memory 024KB Virus Detection Enabled 288 PC Server HMM Specifications Type 8641 Size With pedestal Depth 755 mm 29 7 in 835 mm 32 8 in with cable cover Height 622 mm 24 5 in Width 353 mm 13 9 in Weight e Minimum configuration as shipped 31 29 kg 69 Ib Environment Air temperature System on 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Altitude 0 to 914 mm 3000 ft System on 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Altitude 914m 3000 ft to 2133 m 7000 ft System off 10 to 43 C 50 110 F Maximum Altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Humidity System on 896 to 8096 System off 8 to 80 e Maximum altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Heat Output Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units BTU per hour Minimum configuration 150 BTU 44 watts Maximum configuration 3600 BTU 1055 watts Electrical Input e Sine wave input 50 to 60 Hz is required Input voltage Low range Mi
33. Enter to select option Esc to exit default Host Adapter SCSI Termination configures host adapter SCSI termination The following menu is displayed if an AHA 2940 adapter is installed AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Enabled Disabled Both ends of the SCSI bus should be terminated Host Adapter termination should be disabled if you attach SCSI devices to both internal and external connectors since the host adapter would then be in the middle of the SCSI bus Device Connection Termination Internal devices only Enabled External devices only Enabled Internal and External devices Disabled pe keys to move cursor Enter to select option Esc to exit default Related Service Information 537 The following menu is displayed if an AHA 2940W adapter is installed AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Low ON High ON Low OFF High OFF Low OFF High ON Both ends of the SCSI bus should be terminated Host Adapter termination should be disabled if you attach SCSI devices to both internal and external connectors since the host adapter would then be in the middle of the SCSI bus Device Connection Termination Internal devices only Enabled External devices only Enabled Internal and External devices Disabled Arrow keys to move cursor Enter to select option Esc to exit default SCSI Device Configuration allows you to configure certain parameters of each
34. Error Message Symptom FRU Action Read error on cylinder n Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive format error 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board Read Errors 1 Diskette Diskette drive read error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Receive Error 1 Serial Port Cable Serial Port loopback test 2 System Board error Refresh Failure 1 Memory Module Diagnostics Test detected 2 System Board an error while testing the DMA controller s RAM refresh cycle RTC Interrupt Failure 1 Real Time Clock Diagnostics Test cannot Assembly detect the Real Time clock 2 System Board interrupt Serial Chip Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error general 2 System Board Serial Compare Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error information 2 System Board transmitted is not the same as information received Serial Time out Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error time 2 System Board interval is too long between transmitted and received data Serious Memory Error 1 Memory Module Diags Cannot Continue 2 System Board Memory Test error Sorry You Need A Mouse 1 Mouse Mouse or mouse driver was 2 System Board not detected System Hangs 1 Any device Go to Undetermined 2 Any adapter Problem on page 83 3 System Board The Address Exceeds The 1 Enter correct address Size Of Your Memory 2 Memory Module An invalid memory address 3 System Boa
35. Skip to The test program skips the remaining tests in next group the current test group Abort all The test program stops and returns to the tests previous menu QAPIus PRO Diagnostics Control Keys The following is a list of the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Control Keys when used and a description of the diagnostics response Control When Used Diagnostics Response Keys Ctrl A Main Menu Allows you to select test from the sub menus that are highlighted with red letters Attention If selected these tests will erase the information stored on the diskette or hard disk drive 12 PC Server HMM Control When Used Diagnostics Response Keys Up and Main Menu Highlights an item you want to Down Module Test select Arrow Menu Keys Test Group Menu Space Module Test Adds a diamond to the left of Bar Menu the highlighted test The test Test Group will run when Run All Menu Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Also removes the diamond to the left of the item The test will not run when Run All Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Tab Main Menu Selects the additional test for Key Module Test the menu you are in Menu Test Group Selects additional test The Keys Menu LUN displayed on the top right Test Group Menu shows which test is selected and how and remain example LUN 1 of 2 General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus
36. Upgradable EEPROM on the system board e POST BIOS upgrades when available Integrated Functions LED usability support Video port Two serial ports Parallel port Auxiliary device port e Keyboard port e Battery backed clock and calendar SCSI2 1 16 bit external connector 2 connectors one 8 bit and one 16 bit IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter disk array system Two 16 bit internal connectors One 16 bit external connector Power Supply 430 watt with voltage switch 115 230 V ac e Built in overload and surge protection Power supply upgrade expansion option 220 watt automatic range voltage selection add on Built in overload and surge protection PC Server 520 Type 8641 247 Diagnostics and Test Information Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE The following is a list of problems and references for diagnosing the above named computers Notes The QAPlus PRO diagnostic program recognizes the primary processor as LUN 1 and the secondary processor as LUN 2 During testing the program automatically tests LUN 1 You must select LUN 2 if you want the program to test the secondary processor The type of DASD diagnostics required to test the hard disk controller adapter and drives is determined by the type of hard disk adapter installed in the computer Always start General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Problem Ref
37. You must delete disk arrays in descending order the last one created must be the first one deleted d Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears Attention All the data in the array will be lost during this procedure Be sure to back up all data and programs that you want to save e If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use the hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array After you make your selection the Confirm pop up window will disappear and the cursor will be active in the menu PC Server HMM 10 11 If you want to define a hot spare drive refer to Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 474 for step by step instructions Create a new disk array and define logical drives See Creating a Disk Array on page 469 for instructions on creating a disk array and defining logical drives After you have established the new array and logical drive or drives select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive to prepare the drives in the array to receive data This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing in the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the proper value Insert a 3 5 inch formatted diskette in the primary diskette drive select Ad
38. can use this cable to attach an American Power Conversion APC uninterruptible power supply UPS After the UPS is installed the software support must be loaded on the server To do this refer to the ServerGuide CD documentation 514 PC Server HMM Keyboard Note If a mouse or other pointing device is attached remove it to see if the error symptom goes away If the symptom goes away the mouse or pointing device is defective 001 Power off the computer Disconnect the keyboard cable from the system unit Power on the computer and check the keyboard cable connector on the system unit for the voltages shown All voltages are 5 Pin Voltage Vdc 5 0 Not Used Ground 5 0 5 0 Not Used ARE THE VOLTAGES CORRECT Yes No 002 Replace the system board 003 On keyboards with a detachable cable replace the cable If the problem remains or if the cable is permanently attached to the keyboard replace the keyboard If the problem remains replace the system board Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement RAID Array Use the following procedure for fixed disk replacement under 8641 002 which provides for the replacement of specific 2 25 GB fixed disk drives Refer to RETAIN record H13646 for important additional information This process may also be used any time multiple fixed disk
39. 11 5 12 6 PC Server 720 8642 357 Power Supply Shutdowns If the power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems Too many devices are set to start instantly See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 549 There are too many large capacity devices installed such as hard disk drives The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning guide form number G41G 2927 for more information Also ensure that the fans operate when the machine is powered on Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 358 Server HMM Redefining Space in an Array You can redefine space in a disk array in a number of ways For example you can combine a number of small logical drives to create a larger one or you can redefine the existing logical drive into several smaller drives Also you can install additional hard disk drives to create a larger logical drive than was possible with the existing storage capacity One method to redefine space in an array is to change the RAID level assigned to a logical drive For example if you assigned RAID level 1 to
40. 1YT MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZ1 MZO MZV 100 105 1 2 Inch Hard Disk Drive Adapter Tray Models ODO ODV OTO OXT OYO OYT MDO MDS MDV MYO MYR MYT MZO MZ1 MZV Hard Disk Drtive see DASD PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 DASD Tray Hot Swap Wide Models 100 105 1Y0 1YT MDO MDS MDV MYO MYR MYT MZO MZ1 MZV DASD Tray Hot Swap Option Models 1D0 1DS 1Y0 1YT 1Z0 Base Frame Models 000 ODV OTO OXT OYO OYT 1D0 1DS 1Y0 1YT 120 Base Frame Models MDO MDS MDV MYO MYR MYT 40 MZ1 MZV Front Bezel Door Assembly Keylock with Keys Keylock with Keys 1 2 Inch Blank Bezel 1 4 Inch Blank Bezel CD ROM Drive see DASD PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 16 8 BIT SCSI Converter Models OTO OXT OYT MYO MYT MYR MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV 000 00 Speaker Card Guide Models 000 ODV 070 OXT OYO OYT 100 1DS 1Y0 1YT Card Guide Models MDO MDS MDV MYO MYR MYT 20 MZ1 MZV Fan Assembly with Connector Models 000 ODV OTO OXT 0YO OYT 100 105 1YO 1YT Fan Assembly with Connector Models MDO MDS MDV MYO MYR MYT 40 MZ1 MZV Pedestal PC Server HMM 06H8930 06H7669 06H5068 06H5070 06H2652 06H3956 71G6292 06H8933 06H8934 06H8935 33F8433 33F8433 71G0770 71G0771 92F0324 06H2649 71G0757 96G2111 06H2647 96G2112
41. 378 PC Server HMM CP Code FRU 154 Bridge DMA Initialization Bridge Card System Board Default Processor Card Memory Card ROOM 155 1 Default Processor Enable Fault Error Detection Card and Enable Interrupts 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 156 1 Default Processor Enable Default Processor Card Card Parity and L1 Cache 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 4 Memory Card 157 1 Default Processor Start of Test Cases Card 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 158 1 Default Processor Video Initialization Card 2 System Board 3 Bridge Card 159 1 Keyboard Keyboard Initialization 2 System Board 15A 1 System Board Global Initialization 2 Default Processor Card Try removing the wrap plug from the serial port Test Error Indication EP In some cases the early POST code will detect errors during the running of the test cases and display corresponding test errors to the information panel The information is displayed in the following format EP 1XXS 1XX Error values as described below S Slot number of the card board issuing the error EP Code FRU 1043 104X 1 Memory Adapter Memory Error First reseat the memory adapter 106s 1 Processor Card Processor Card Error PC Server 720 Type 8642 379 Test Point Codes TP The following list contains test points that can be displayed on the information panel during early portions of the POST code If the
42. 4 Diskette Drive Cable with power 92F0423 5 Parallel DATA Cable 06H2166 6 Serial DATA Cable 06H2165 7 SCSI Fast Wide Internal External Port Cable 06H6864 Models 1D0 105 1Y0 1YT 120 8 LED Cable Assembly 06H8936 C2 Cable Assembly 06H8767 DASD Status Cable Models 1YO 1YT 06H7766 MDS MZ1 1D0 1DS Keylock Cable 06H8766 SCSI Short Cable to I O Casting Models 96G2102 MDO MDV MDS MYO MYT MYR MZO MZ1 MZV 174 PC Server HMM Keyboards 101 102 Key Keyboards 101 102 Key Arabic 1391490 Belgium Dutch 1391414 Belgium French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia Croatia Bosnia 1393669 South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss French 1391412 Swiss German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286 U K English 1391406 U S English Models 0X0 OXT OYO OYT 71G4646 1Y0 1YT MYO MYT U S English Models MDO MDV 20 MZV 06H9743 MDS MZ1 000 ODV 020 OZV 100 1DS 1Z0 U S English E ME A use only 1396790 PC Server 320 Type 8640 175 Power Cords 176 Power Cords Arabic Belgium Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark
43. 442 Server HMM Side Cover 443 PC Server Type 3518 System Board J7 Ss 10 1 2 PCI Slots E 3 4 11 ISA Slots JT J4 J6 J12 J13 i System Board Connections Connector Description Connect To J3 Power Supply P1 Connector J6 Power Supply J7 Operator Panel Operator Panel Connector J12 Power Supply P2 Connector J13 Power Supply P2A Connector Note The following slots connectors on the system board are not currently supported Slots Connectors Description PCI Slot 0 64 Bit PCI connector PCI Slots 1 to 4 32 Bit PCI connectors ISA Slot 1 System Maintenance Adapter for Reporting Trouble SMART ISA Card J11 C2 Security Connector 444 PC Server HMM U Bolt Security Optional PC Server Type 3518 445 Symptom to FRU Index This index supports the PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518 The system management subsystem consists of a main processor that acts as the controller The controller monitors the system temperature the power supply the fan rotation and the system voltages If a non fatal error is detected an
44. Device Type or Information 0112 SCSI adapter without cache 0206 SCSI 2 adapter RDDD Codes for Devices RDDD Device Type or Information 0208 Unknown device type 0209 Direct access removable media and or other than 512 byte blocks 0210 Direct access hard disk 512 byte blocks 0211 Sequential access tape 0212 Printer 0213 Processor 0214 Write Once Read Multiple W O R M 0215 Read only CD ROM 0216 Scanner 0217 Optical memory read write optical disk 0218 Changer multiple tray CD ROM 0219 Communications B Codes B Device Type or Information Dual SCSI adapter internal bus Dual SCSI adapter external bus QEET 0000 Codes Refer to this list if the DDD indicates an adapter followed by a QEET of 0000 For example 01120100 0000 PLSC Information 0100 0000 On systems with NVRAM SCSI setup data not located or the checksum did not verify On systems without NVRAM Model 50 for example setup data must be on the 1st hard disk 0200 0000 Configuration error No hard disk found at PUN 6 LUN 0 for 161 162 165 system error path Might be an unsupported configuration 0300 0400 0000 No space available in extended BIOS data area for SCSI data table possibly too many adapters installed 0000 ROM modules not found on adapter IML based systems only Running setup might correct it
45. Error Description Message Diagnostic Displayed when a test program finds a Error problem with a hardware option Messages Software Displayed if a problem or conflict is found by Generated an application program the operating system Error or both For an explanation of these Messages messages refer to the information supplied with that software package Multiple The first error that occurs can causes Messages additional errors Follow the suggested action of the first error displayed In this case the system displays more than one error message Always follow the suggested action instructions for the first error message displayed Return Codes For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion To register the test properly in the test log the test programs must generate one of the following return codes Return Description Code 0 Indicates that the device passed its test 1 Indicated that the device failed its test 2 or Indicates that the test stopped or was greater aborted General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO 7 Using the Test Programs The test programs provide advanced functions and utilities for power users and service or support professionals to troubleshoot even the most difficult problems Program Navigation You can maneuver within the test programs by typing the first letter of
46. IBM Logo restricted 5 25 Inch Hard Disk Drive Bezels with Spacer Control Panel Bezel CD Storage Tray 06H8028 06H8031 06H9989 96G2648 06H9360 06H9361 82G3618 82G3594 06H3407 82G3609 06H3596 06H8057 82G3603 82G3608 06H8631 06H3956 06H8973 82G3606 82G3596 82G3601 06H8684 06H3595 06H5060 PC Server 520 Type 8641 319 Index System Unit PC Server 520 Type 8641 continued 320 16 8 Bit SCSI Converter 92F0324 512K Cache Models MDE MDL MZS 96G2413 MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV 16MB EOS Memory SIMM Models ED1 11H0634 EDE EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV 20 EZV 16MB EOS Memory SIMM Models MDE 11H0646 MDL MZS MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 06H8629 Models ED1 EDE EDL EDO EDV MDE MDL MDO MDV DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 06H8388 Models EZ1 EZS EZE EZL 20 EZV MZS MZE MZL MZO MZV DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602 Ethernet PCI Card 82G3602 Models EDL EZL MDL MZL Hinges 2 each 82G3600 Hot Swap Cam Spring Shaft amp Knob 06H5059 Keyboard with Cable see Keyboards 101 102 Key on page 323 LED Speaker Power Switch 06H8037 Cable Assembly Memory High Rise Card 96G3692 Models MDE MDL MDO MDV Memory High Rise Card 96G1339 Models MZS MZE MZL 20 MZV Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611 C2 Spring EMI Ground Clips 4 each Lock Pawl Screws 4 each System Board Mounting Boss 2 eac
47. Pad Aes Supported Systems Network Operating System Requirements IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette Operation Modes Traditional Adapter Mode VNET Switch Mode Configuration Examples Traditional Adapter Mode VNET Switch Mode Configurations VNET Switch Mode Single VNET VNET Switch Mode Multiple VNETs VNET Switch Mode Combined VNETs and Traditional Nets Locations 10Base T Adapter 10Base2 Adapter Cabling for 10Base T Networks Straight Through Crossover or ERE Cabling for 10Base2 Networks Symptom to FRU Index LED Indications Error Codes IR e oe NetWare Load Time Error Messages NetWare Run Time Messages Parts Listing a s a External SCSI Devices Termination Requirements Cabling Requirements 2 Setting SCSI IDs for External Devices Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8388 SCSI ID Jumper ROM Address Jumper Setting Termination Hot Swap Back Plane IDE Controllers Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply Keyboard we tk ERRORES ue Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement RAID Array Network Adapters Supported Dual Processor Servers se eee de OS 2 Tr
48. Return Code Description 0 Indicates the device passed its test 1 Indicated the device failed its test 2 or greater Indicates the test stopped or was aborted 72 PC Server HMM Setup Program The Setup Utility configuration program is stored in the permanent memory of the computer This program includes setting for the following e Devices and I O Ports e Date and Time Security Start Options e Advanced Setup ISA Legacy Resources Rapid Resume Manager To run the Setup Utility program do the following 1 Power off the computer and wail for a few seconds until all in use lights go off 2 Power on the computer 3 When the Setup Utility prompt appears on the screen during start up press F1 The Setup Utility menu appears 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Rapid Resume Manager Personal computers come with built in energy saving capabilities If the computer you are servicing was shipped with DOS and Windows preinstalled Rapid Resume Manager is available Rapid Resume Manager reduces the power consumption of the computer The following are features of Rapid Resume Manager e Rapid Resume e Standby Scheduler Wake Up on Ring Rapid Resume With Rapid Resume activated the computer saves its current state when you power it off with the power switch Rapid Resume retains all current settings remembers which programs were active and saves the position and size o
49. Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array screen appears Select Define hot spare drive The cursor will become active in the Bay Array selection list Note Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY ONL DDD OFL or HSP state SCSI tape and CD ROM drives are not shown They appear when you select drive information Refer to Bay Array Selection List on page 340 for the drive status meanings The numbers shown on the left are the bay IDs See Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 on page 345 for an explanation of the bay IDs Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RDY ready drive you want to define as the hot spare then press Enter The RDY changes to HSP hot spare You can press Enter again to toggle between HSP and RDY Press Esc when you have finished The cursor will become active in the Create Delete Array menu If you want to create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 351 If you are finished a Select Exit or press Esc A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your change Note The changes you make are not saved until you confirm them by selecting Yes in the Confirm pop up window b Select No if you do not want the drive you Selected to be a hot spare select Yes to define it as a hot spare drive c Back up the disk array configur
50. The status of the logical drive also is shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data on that drive is lost The Logical Drive Size pop up window shows the space in this array that is available for logical drives Type the size in megabytes that you want for the logical drive then press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action Information about the new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive list Note The size appearing in the Logical Drive list might be different from the size you typed because it appears in binary equivalent The size of a logical drive is determined by a number of factors but basically the size must be divisible by the number of drives in the array Consider the following examples Example 1 There are three 1GB drives in the array You assign RAID level 0 which uses all the drives in the array with no parity storage and type 1000MB The Size MB will be 999 which is the number closest to and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3 Example 2 There are three 1GB drives in the array and you assign RAID level 5 Data is striped across all three drives in the array but the space equivalent to that of one drive is u
51. Type 8640 Index Cables Indicators PC Server 300 Type 8640 17 18 19 20 21 Power Cord see Power cords SCSI 2 Fast PCI Bus Adapter Models OPT 1PT SVGA Card Models OPO 1P0 1PT 1NO 1NJ VGA Card Miscellaneous Parts Kit EMC Ground Contacts 4 each Screws 6X32X5 16 6 each I O Blank 1 each Nut Screws 4 40 2 each Power Switch Bracket 1 each Screws 3x8mm Plastite 3 each Screws 3mm Diskette Drive 2 each Screws 6 32 Hard Disk Drive 2 each System Board Edge Support 1 each Shadow Box Cable Cover with Lock LED Cables Activity with Amber LED Serial Cable Parallel Cable IDE Hard Disk Drive Cable 2X Models ONO ONJ 1 1NO 1NJ SCSI Cable Assembly 4X Models OPT 1 SCSI Cable Assembly 7X Models OPO OPT 1 1PT Diskette Drive Signal Cable with power C2 Cable Assembly Index DASD PC Server 300 Type 8640 14 14 15 1 44MB Diskette Drive Assembly 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Assembly 270MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 364MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 527MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 728MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI Enhanced Internal CD ROM II Drive 53G0382 71G0031 71G0030 06H8940 96G2411 06H5072 06H8936 06H2165 06H2166 92F0424 82G3626 06H2181 92F0423 06H8767 93F2361 64F4102 82G5926 82G5927 92F0405 92F0406 82G5929 92F0428
52. Unable to assign requested resources PCI vendor ID xxxx device ID xxxx in slot x 1 A requested PCI resource from the PCI Device Configuration Block could not be assigned as requested due to a conflict with a non PCI device or to a conflict with another requested PCI resource PC Server 720 Type 8642 397 Testing Adapter Cards Some but not all adapter cards are supplied with diagnostic tests If diagnostics are available Run the appropriate diagnostics for the adapter suspected of failing e If the test fails or is unable to locate the adapter the adapter is defective Replace the adapter and retest If diagnostics are not available Use the customer s reported symptom s to locate the failing PCI adapter then replace it Also see Accessing Checking the PCI Device List If multiple PCI adapters are failing e Remove all PCI adapters e Install the adapters one at a time to isolate the failing adapter If isolation to a single adapter is not possible replace 1 Bridge Card 2 System Board Note Failing adapters may cause the system to hang when loading the operating system or diagnostics If this symptom occurs remove all non essential PCI adapters and retest the system to diagnose this type of failure Accessing Checking the PCI Device List To access and check the PCI device list do the following 1 Access the list a Restart the system from
53. 0 07 kVA Maximum configuration 0 64 kVA Total Power Available for Drives Nominal Operating Current allowed 5Vdcline 9 3 12 line 6 0 Heat Output Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units BTU per hour Minimum configuration 150 BTU 44 watts Maximum configuration 1434 BTU 420 watts 154 PC Server HMM System Board Replacement Type 8640 computers have one or two processors and other components installed on the system board When replacing the system board remove all of the installed components from the old system board and install them on the new system board If the problem remains check the following The primary processor is installed and seated correctly in socket U2 on the system board If installed the secondary processor is seated correctly in socket U3 on the system board All other components removed from the old system board are installed and seated correctly on the new system board Note If the processor s are not seated correctly intermittent problems can occur Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing Some PC Server computers incorporate a 90MHz Pentium processor and a second upgradeability processor socket on the system board to support Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing SMP The SMP capability extends processing performance by allowing tasks to be dispatched to the next available processor rather then being queued until th
54. 1 Help Ch 1 Ch 2 2 Define hot spare drive Array Array 3 Delete disk array Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 ONL A 1 ONL 6 Exit 2 ONL A 2 ONL 3 ONLI A 3 ONL 4 ONL B 4 RDY Select a RDY drive and Enter to add to array Esc to make array 5 Select each drive you want in the array by using the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the drive and then pressing Enter As you Related Service Information 469 select each drive the status will change from RDY Ready to ONL Online If you change your mind after selecting the drives for an array you can delete the array by selecting Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu and then begin again 6 When you have selected all the drives you want to include in the array press Esc The cursor will become active in the menu 7 f you have drives you did not use in this array and you want to create another array you can do one of the following Define the logical drive or drives for this array then create another array and its logical drives See Defining Logical Drives Create another array now by repeating steps 2 through 5 in this procedure then define logical drives for both arrays Note You must define at least one logical drive for each created array before you can exit from the configuration program
55. 1 or Down Arrow key to advance through the items on the screen Change selections by first advancing to the item you want to change then use the Right Arrow gt or Left Arrow keys lt to make the change Press F1 for on line Help information on for each selection 266 PC Server HMM Starting the Configuration Setup Utility Program Note If a configuration error occurs a prompt appears before the operating system starts see Configuration Conflicts on page 274 To access the Configuration Setup utility program 1 Power on the server and watch the screen 2 When the message Press F1 to enter Configuration Setup appears press F1 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change the configuration 4 Select Exit Setup and press Enter If you changed any settings the utility program prompts you to confirm the changes When you press Enter the system restarts Note You must correctly exit from the Configuration Setup utility program to save the configuration information Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit Setup option on the menu bar and then select Save changes and exit System Summary Select System Summary to view information about the system including the type and speed of the microprocessor amount of memory and the number of disk drives connected to the server Changes that you make on other menus are reflected on this summary screen You cannot edit any of the
56. 4 Verify that the host adapter and the SCSI devices are properly configured and installed 5 Be sure to power off then power on the computer after changing any values on the host adapter in Setup or on a SCSI device 6 Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated 7 Be sure the disk is formatted and has a DOS partition Run the Format Disk utility accessible through SCSISel ect See SCSI Disk Utility on page 542 8 Check cable connections 546 Server HMM SCSISelect Utility Program The SCSI 2 controller has a built in menu driven configuration utility program that allows you to view and change SCSI settings You can use the SCSISelect Utility program to e Change the default values e Verify and change configuration conflicts Format a new SCSI hard disk Starting the SCSISelect Utility Program You can access this program when you start the server The SCSISelect prompt appears after the IBM PC Server screen appears briefly and then disappears Press Ctrl A immediately after the SCSISelect prompt appears Use the Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow key to move the highlight bar to the various menu choices Press Esc to return to the previous menu Also you can press F5 to switch between color and monochrome modes if your display permits To change the current settings of the items displayed in the menus follow the directions on the screen SCSISelect Utility Program Options The following options are di
57. Bay B supports One 5 25 inch full high removable media or non removable media device or One 5 25 inch half high removable media device and one 3 5 inch half high removable media device or Two 3 5 inch or two 5 25 inch slim high or half high removable media devices Note Only one of the devices installed in bay B can be a SCSI device e You cannot install hot swappable drives in bay B PC Server 500 supports eighteen 3 5 inch slim high hot swappable hard disk drives or nine 3 5 inch half high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks C D and E 192 Server HMM Banks C D and E can accommodate six slim high drives or three half high drives or a combination of both drive sizes If you use a combination remember that one half high drive uses the equivalent space of two slim high drives e If you install drives in bank D or E you will remove the fan assembly on the rear of the server install a direct access storage device DASD backplane in banks D and E and install an optional 220 watt power supply e Each backplane has six connectors to support up to six hard disk drives Performing Common Tasks The Create Delete Array menu of the RAID configuration program contains the more common tasks for configuring disk arrays Procedures to complete these tasks are contained in this section as follows Defining a Hot Spare Drive Deleting a Disk Array on page 194 e
58. Creating a Disk Array on page 195 Defining Logical Drives on page 196 Defining a Hot Spare Drive To define a drive as a hot spare drive 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array screen appears 3 Select Define hot spare drive The cursor will become active in the Bay Array selection list Note Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY ONL DDD OFL or HSP state SCSI tape and CD ROM drives are not shown They appear when you select drive information Refer to Bay Array Selection List on page 188 for the drive status meanings The numbers shown on the left are the bay IDs See Installing Internal Drives on page 191 for an explanation of the bay IDs 4 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RDY ready drive you want to define as the hot spare then press Enter The RDY changes to HSP hot spare You can press Enter again to toggle between HSP and RDY 5 Press Esc when you have finished The cursor will become active in the Create Delete Array menu 6 If you want to create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 195 7 f you are finished PC Server 500 Type 8641 193 a Select Exit or press Esc A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your change Note The changes you make are not saved until you c
59. EISA Configuration Diskette You must use the EISA Configuration Diskette anytime you want to change resource allocations such as e Adding or removing devices Moving devices Changing device function e Resolving conflicts Adding or removing PCI adapters Each time you use the EISA Configuration Diskette to configure the server the configuration information is saved in a System Configuration Information SCI file and in the NVRAM configuration Only devices that you install and configure correctly appear on the EISA Configuration screens Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette Use an operating system command such as the DOS DISKCOPY command to make a complete backup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette Using the backup copy can prevent damage to the original diskette The operating System documentation provides information on backing up diskettes Making Menu Selections When you start the EISA Configuration Diskette an introductory screen appears Type CF at the prompt After you press Enter the main menu Steps in configuring the computer appears The EISA Configuration program main menu contains five steps Step 1 Important EISA configuration information This step provides information about the differences between the ISA configuration process and the EISA configuration process Step 2 Add or remove boards If the server is configured correctly this step provides a list of the devices installe
60. Hard Disk Drive Capacities With a server it is important to understand the implications of hard disk drive capacities and how they influence the way you create disk arrays Drives in the disk array can be of different capacities For example if the model came with two 1GB hard disk drives and you install a 2GB hard disk drive to create a RAID 5 disk array the total capacity of the array is 3GB instead of 4GB Therefore when creating arrays it is wise to add drives of equal capacity Additional Storage Capacity When you add hard disk drives to the server you must configure a new disk array before the drives can be used You can either reconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacity offered with the added drives or group the added drives into their own array see Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array on page 352 You also can create an array with only one drive The RAID Configuration Program Screens When you configure the disk array or even just view its configuration you will be using the IBM RAID configuration program on the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A Option Diskette also called the IBM RAID controller diskette The following figure is a compilation of many of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration also called the IBM RAID configuration program screens The list below the figure gives explanations of the numbered areas of the figure 1 This pop up allows you to select t
61. OYT 1Y0 1YT Heat Sink with Clip Models MYO MYT MYR System Board without Memory and Processor Models OTO OXT OYO OYT 1Y0 1YT ODO ODV 1D0 1DS System Board with SVGA and SCSI Fast Wide Models MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV PC Server HMM 33F8354 06H2191 06H3398 73G3233 73G3234 96G2121 96G2413 95G9613 06H6142 95G9614 75H8846 96G2415 96G2423 06H9492 06H6137 95G9612 06H2173 96G3694 Index 15 15 23 DASD PC Server 320 Type 8640 1GB Hard Disk Drive Fast Models OTO OXT MXT 1GB Hard Disk Drive Fast Wide Models OYT MYO MYT MYR 2GB Hard Disk Drive Fast Wide Models MDV MDS MZ1 MZV ODV OZV 1DS 2X SCSI CD ROM Drive Models 1Y0 1YT OYO OYT MYO MYT MYR 4X SCSI CD ROM Drive Models 000 ODV OTO OXT 1D0 1DS MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV 1 44MB Diskette Drive 06H6416 06H3371 06H8561 06H3847 88G4921 93F2361 PC Server 320 Type 8640 173 Cables Index Cables PC Server 320 Type 8640 1 Cable Cover with Lock 06H5072 2 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable 4X 82G3626 Models OTO OXT 0YO SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable 7X 06H6440 Models OTO OXT OYT 000 ODV 1D0 1DS 1Z0 3 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable 2X 06H5065 Models 1D0 1DS 1YO 1YT 1Z0 MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV
62. POST Ethernet Port 2 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 2 2 10Base2 Adapter 027728S0 POST Ethernet Port 3 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 3 2 10Base2 Adapter 027729S0 POST Ethernet Port 4 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 4 2 10Base2 Adapter 027730S0 027731S0 027732S0 027733S0 027791S0 027792S0 027793S0 02779950 1 10Base2 Adapter 1 Run Setup and verify the adapter configuration 2 10Base2 Adapter NetWare Load Time Error Messages Error Message FRU Action 050 The board cannot be found The driver assumes that the adapter has not been installed 1 Verify that the adapter is properly installed 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 058 The board does not respond 070 The board has failed The driver cannot communicate with the adapter 1 Restart the computer or run your system configuration program to check for possible system conflicts 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 504 Server HMM Error Message FRU Action 073 Unable to allocate memory The driver was not able to 1 Unload the driver and unnecessary NLMs and try again allocate sufficient memory to 2 Reload the server and perform its functions try again 3 Install additional memory into the server 110 Unable to download 1 Restart your the fir
63. Pin 11 Route to ISA IRQ11 Pin 12 Route to ISA IRQ12 Pin 13 Route to ISA IRQ14 Pin 14 Route to ISA IRQ15 Cache Selections Jumper Configuration Setting w1 Secondary cache in write through Pins 1 2 mode Pins 2 3 Secondary cache in write back mode Default W4 Internal cache in write through Not installed mode Default Installed Internal cache in write back mode W5 128KB of secondary cache Not installed 256KB of secondary cache Installed Default PC Server 300 Type 8640 27 Default Jumper Configuration Setting W21 Secondary cache not installed Installed Secondary cache installed Not installed Default W22 128KB of secondary cache Installed 256KB of secondary cache Not installed Default W23 128KB of secondary cache Not installed 256KB of secondary cache Installed Default PCI IDE Selection Jumper Configuration Setting w35 PCI IDE uses ISA IRQ 14 Installed Default Not Installed PCI IDE does not use ISA IRQ 14 W37 PCI IDE uses PCI INTR_A Installed Default Not Installed PCI IDE does not use PCI INTR_A Default W38 PCI uses ISA IRQ 15 Installed PCI does not use ISA IRQ 15 Not Installed Jumper Ws Reserved Jumpers Setting Installed 28 PC Server HMM Locations Pentium System Board o m Memory connectors J7 J8 J9 J10 433 and J34
64. Power Supply 416 Symptom to FRU Index Supplement 416 Parts Listing 420 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 405 Features Important For additional information about the 3517 refer to the 3517 Model 001 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Service Guide SY32 0400 Media Bays Two media bays support 8 bit 4 mm tape drives Hot Swap Bays Five hot swap bays support 1 1 gigabyte GB 2 2GB and 4 5GB single ended SCSI 2 disk drives mounted on easily removable carriers Hot Swap Carriers Each carrier contains the following features as shown at the bottom of the illustration on page 412 A pushbutton power switch that allows power to be removed from and returned to the disk drive Agreen light to indicate that power is being supplied to the disk drive The green light will flash if the power switch on the carrier is pushed off or if the cooling fan is malfunctioning e yellow light to indicate that the 3517 is connected to the system and the disk drive is available A latch to lock the disk drive into the hot swap bay to maintain connection with the bus The carrier is locked into the bus when the latch is in the horizontal position Power Supply e Non autoranging see Attention page 416 Low voltage 115 volts setting 90 137 V ac 6 3 Amps 0 76 kVA 378 Watts High voltage 230 volts setting 180 265 V ac 4 0 Amps 0 96 kVA 480 Watt
65. Q internal 1 external Capacity of the device Slot number of the device LUN usually 0 PUN SCSI ID Device Number Reserved Digit usually 0 As an example if you have SCSI error code 021050A0 each digit decodes as follows Digit Information 0 Reserved digit usually 0 210 Device number 210 indicates hard disk 5 SCSI ID assigned is 5 0 Logical Unit Number not used usually 0 A The device capacity is 60MB 60MB 0 The device is connected to the internal bus RDDD Codes for Adapters RDDD Device Type or Information 0037 SCSI on the system board 0096 SCSI adapter with cache 0112 SCSI adapter without cache 0206 SCSI 2 adapter RDDD Codes for Devices RDDD Device Type or Information 0208 Unknown device type 0209 Direct access removable media and or other than 512 byte blocks 0210 Direct access hard disk 512 byte blocks 0211 Sequential access tape 0212 Printer 0213 Processor 0214 Write Once Read Multiple W O R M 0215 Read only CD ROM 0216 Scanner 0217 Optical memory read write optical disk 0218 Changer multiple tray CD ROM 0219 Communications PC Server 500 Type 8641 211 B Codes Device Type or Information Dual SCSI adapter internal bus Dual SCSI adapter external bus QEET 0000 Codes Refer to this list if the DDD indicates an adapter followed by a QEET of 0000
66. Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications Replacing a Faulty Drive Drivers uu ee ot Front Operator Panel Front Panel Buttons Menu Buttons and Enter Button i Power Enable Button Start Stop Button Installing Internal Drives 8642 Considerations LEDs System Board and Adapter Light Emitting Diodes Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diodes Liquid Crystal Display Performing Common Tasks RAID Configuration Defining a Hot Spare Drive Deleting a Disk Array Creating a Disk Array Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array Defining Logical Drives Power Supplies Power Supply LED and Button Primary Power Supply Voltages Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages Power Supply Shutdowns Redefining Space in an Array Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E Service Processor Requirements Specifications Copyright IBM Corp 1996 327 328 330 331 331 331 332 332 332 334 334 336 337 337 337 337 339 340 340 340 341 342 342 343 344 344 344 344 345 345 346 346 349 349 349 349 350 350 351 352 353 356 356 357 357 358 359 361 362 363 325 Starting or Stopping the System Starting or Power
67. Run Diagnostics Hardware error 2 System Board 184 1 Run Power on password Configuration Setup corrupted 185 1 Run Drive startup sequence Configuration Setup information corrupted 186 1 Run System board or security Configuration Setup 2 System Board 189 1 Run Configuration An attempt was made to enter the access the computer with administrator an invalid password password 201 1 Memory SIMM Memory test error 2 System Board 0214 1 Memory SIMM Extended RAM failed at offset XXXX System RAM failed at 2 System Board offset XXXX 0215 1 Memory SIMM Failing Bits XXXX 2 System Board 0216 1 Memory SIMM System Board 0221 Shadow RAM failed at offset Memory SIMM 2 System Board 0254 System board Cache error Cache disabled zi System Board Cache 2 System Board 229 Cache memory test error Be sure the cache memory is enabled Cache memory 2 System Board 0301 Keyboard or keyboard controller error Keyboard 2 System Board 310 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0302 1 Unlock the keyboard Keyboard locked 2 Keyboard 3 System Board 0303 1 Keyboard Keyboard Error stuck key 2 System Board 604 1 Diskette Drive Diskette drive error 2 Drive Cable 3 System Board 0610 1 Run Setup Incorrect drive A type 2 Diskette Drive 3
68. SCSI Terminator installation 3 SCSI Device 4 SCSI Adapter 101 1 System Board Interrupt failure 102 1 System Board Timer error 106 1 System Board 110 1 Memory Module System board parity error 2 System Board 111 1 Reseat adapters channel parity error 2 Any Adapter 3 System Board 114 1 Memory Module External ROM checksum 2 System Board error 129 1 Processor Internal cache test error 2 L2 Cache Memory 3 System Board Bad CMOS battery 151 1 System Board Real time clock failure 161 1 Run Setup 2 Clock Battery See Battery Notice on page 461 98 PC Server HMM 3 System Board 162 1 Diskette Drive And unable to run 2 System Board diagnostics 3 Diskette Drive Cable 162 1 Run Setup 2 Clock Battery See Battery Notice on page 461 3 System Board Error Code FRU Action 163 Time and Date Set Clock not updating or invalid 2 Clock Battery time set See Battery Notice on page 461 3 System Board 164 1 Run Setup Check POST detected a base System Summary memory or extended menu for memory memory size mismatch size change See error Setup Program on page 73 2 Run the Extended Memory Diagnostic tests 17X 18X 1 C2 Security 175 1 Riser Card 2 System Board 176 1 Covers were removed from the computer 177 1 Riser Card Corrupted Administrator 2 System Board Password
69. System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 0612 1 Run Setup Incorrect drive B type 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 0632 1 Run Setup Diskette drive A error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 0642 1 Run Setup Diskette drive B error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 662 1 Run Diskette drive configuration Configuration Setup error 762 1 Run Processor configuration Configuration Setup error 2 Run Diagnostics 962 1 Disconnect external Parallel port error cable on parallel port 2 Internal Cable 3 System Board 1162 1 Disconnect external System board serial port 1 cable on serial port or 2 error 2 Run Configuration 1300 1 Run Setup with Operating system not known good diskette found 2 Fixed Disk Drive 3 Fixed Disk Adapter 4 Diskette Drive 5 System Board 1701 1 Run Setup Fixed Disk X failed 2 Fixed Disk Drive 3 Fixed Disk Adapter 4 System Board 1702 1 Run Setup Fixed Disk Drive Controller 2 Fixed Disk Adapter failed 3 Fixed Disk Drive 4 System Board PC Server 520 Type 8641 311 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 1801 1 Run Reference No room for PCI option Diskette ROM 2 Failing Adapter 3 System Board 1802 No more I O space available for PCI adapter 1 Run Reference Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board 1803 No more memory above 1MB for PCI adapter 1 Run Refer
70. These messages indicate that errors have occurred during the recovery process The driver will attempt to recover control of the adapter at periodic intervals 229 The adapter alert 1 N A condition has been corrected This message indicates the successful recovery from one of the above run time error conditions 388 Ethernet Media Port 1 Check cables 1 Tx Carrier Sense Errors adapter cables or check your cable concentrator 389 Ethernet Media Port 2 Tx Carrier Sense Errors check your cable 390 Ethernet Media Port 3 Tx Carrier Sense Errors check your cable 391 Ethernet Media Port 4 Tx Carrier Sense Errors check your cable 395 Ethernet Media Port 1 N A 1 Tx Carrier Sense Errors corrected 396 Ethernet Media Port 2 Tx Carrier Sense Errors corrected 397 Ethernet Media Port 3 Tx Carrier Sense Errors corrected 398 Ethernet Media Port 4 Tx Carrier Sense Errors corrected Problem is solved Related Service Information 507 Unrecoverable Errors If you receive an error that is not described in the preceding error message lists you might have an Unrecoverable fatal error The error message indicates that the adapter has experienced an Unrecoverable run time error To make the adapter functional unload the drivers then reload them If unloading and reloading the drivers does not make the adapter functional restart the computer and try again If the above procedures do
71. This information is useful when a resource configuration conflict occurs Conflicts in the configuration occur if device is installed that requires the same resource as another device For example if you install an ISA network adapter and an EISA network adapter both requesting RQ 5 only one of the adapters can be configured e device resource is changed for example changing jumper settings e device function is changed for example assigning COM 1 to two different serial ports Aninstalled software program requires the same resource as a hardware device for example an expanded memory specification EMS device driver that uses the address required by the SVGA video adapter The steps required to resolve a configuration error are determined by the number and variety of hardware devices and software programs install in the system The following information for resolving these types of conflicts are divided by machine type and model number General type and model information e Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts e Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts Changing the Software Configuration Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE hardware configuration error is detected a configuration error message appears after the server completes POST but before the operating system starts You can bypass the error or start one of the configuration utility programs Press F1 to bypass the
72. appears PC Server 320 Type 8640 137 4 Use the Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow key to advance through the items on the screen Use the Tab key to select choices on the bottom of the screen Press the Esc key to return to a previous menu 5 Press Enter to make a selection 6 Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change edit the configuration information Note Adapters installed in the server appear automatically on the EISA Configuration screens after you copy the adapter s configuration file file with an extension of CFG to the EISA Configuration Diskette If you want to manually add an adapter that you have not yet installed in the server add it using Step 2 from the menu To configure ISA adapters follow the instructions on the screen Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function Locking an ISA adapter reserves the selected resources and prevents the system from using them to resolve resource conflicts Use the Advanced function to lock ISA boards An exclamation mark appears next to locked adapters To use the Advanced functions do the following 1 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 137 2 At the main menu select Step 3 View or edit details screen appears 3 Press F7 The Advanced functions screen appears 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to a Lock or unlock boards b View additional syst
73. assigned to the existing drives Creating a Disk Array To create a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 Note To create an array using hard disks in an existing array refer to Redefining Space in an Array on page 359 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Create disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Bay Array selection list PC Server 720 Type 8642 351 4 m Important In the following step when you press Enter to select a drive for an array you cannot deselect it by pressing Enter again as you can with the hot spare selection process Carefully determine which drives you want to include in the array before beginning the selection process If you change your mind after selecting the drives for an array you can delete the array by selecting Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu and begin again Select each drive you want in the array by using the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the drive and then pressing Enter As you select each drive the status will change from RDY Ready to ONL Online When you have selected all the drives you want to include in the array press Ese The cursor will become active in the menu If you have drives you did not use in this array and you want to create another array
74. page 547 SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter see Disk Array Configuration on page 461 Memory General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Power Supply Voltages Power Supplies on page 199 Miscellaneous General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Additional Service Information The following information is for the PC Server 500 Type 8641 Administration Monitoring Utilities e Advanced Functions on page 180 e Configuring the Disk Array on page 185 Drive Maintenance on page 187 Drivers on page 191 Installing Internal Drives on page 191 Performing Common Tasks on page 193 Power Supplies on page 199 e RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective on page 200 e Redefining Space in an Array page 202 Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E on page 204 e Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 e Viewing the RAID Configuration on page 206 Administration Monitoring Utilities Several of the operating systems that your server supports also support for disk array models RAID monitoring programs The monitoring programs are OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor e 05 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager PC Server 500 Type 8641 179 OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for Net
75. the parallel port and run the diagnostic tests to determine which FRU failed If the diagnostic tests with the wrap plug installed do not detect a failure replace the printer cable If that does not correct the problem replace the system board or adapter connected to the printer cable 524 PC Server HMM SCSI Fast Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters AHA 2940 2940W The AHA 2940 and AHA 2940 Wide are PCI Fast and PCI Wide SCSI adapters These adapters are supported on computers with a PCI 5v bus master slot Note The Type 8642 computer is shipped with the AHA 2940 Wide SCSI adapter only The adapters support the following Adapter Connectors Devices Supported AHA 2940 1 each internal Supports a maximum Adapter 8 bit SCSI of seven 8 bit connector single ended SCSI 1 each external devices 8 bit SCSI connector AHA 2940W 1 each internal Supports a maximum Adapter 8 bit SCSI of fifteen 8 bit and connector 16 bit single ended 1 each internal SCSI devices 16 bit SCSI connector 1 each external 16 bit SCSI connector Related Service Information 525 Adapter Locations 50 pin Internal SCSI Connector 68 pin Wide Internal SCSI External LED Connector ic em e Termination jumper for multiple computer configurations See Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations on page 545 526 PC Server HMM BIOS Startup Messages After you have installed the host adapt
76. 1 You must select LUN 2 if you want the program to test the secondary processor The type of DASD diagnostics required to test the hard disk controller adapter and drives is determined by the type of hard disk adapter installed in the computer e Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Problem Reference DASD CD ROM or SCSI For non disk array models see Problems SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 For array models see Disk Array Configuration on page 461 Error Codes Error Symptom to FRU Index Messages on page 308 e Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual e Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Power Supply Voltages See Power Supplies Type 8641 on page 283 Miscellaneous General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 PC Server 520 Type 8641 251 Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes The Reference Diskette and Diagnostic Diskettes supplied with the server contain a copy of the system programs Collectively these diskettes are referred to as the System Diskettes The System Diskettes normally are used under the following conditions configure and test Micro Channel adapters To test computer hardware Using the System Diskettes Note Always use the backup copy of the system diskettes when configuring and troubleshooting the
77. 101 102 Key RD Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key BS Power Cords PC Server HMM Features Note All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup Microprocessor Pentium microprocessor with 16KB of internal cache clock rate varies by model Cache Memory e 256KB of level 2 cache Memory Standard 16MB min expandable to 192MB 70 ns parity Six single inline memory module sockets in three banks Diskette Drives e Standard One 3 5 inch 1 44MB e Optional internal 3 5 inch 2 88MB 3 5 inch 1 44MB Hard Disk Drives Number and capacities of hard disk drives varies by model Supports up to three internal hard disk drives CD ROM Drive Standard SCSI 2 Keyboard and Auxiliary Device e 101 key keyboard e Mouse Expansion Slots Two 32 bit PCI slots five 32 bit Micro Channel slots or five 16 bit ISA slots depending on model The PCI slots and adjacent Micro Channel or ISA slots are shared slots The number of slots available for expansion varies by model Expansion Bays Two 5 25 inch drive bays Three 3 5 inch drive bays The number of bays available for expansion varies by model Video Super video graphics array SVGA controller Compatibility Video graphics adapter VGA Color graphics adapter CGA Security Features e Bolt down capability Door lock e LogicLock security feature set e Power on and administra
78. 5 When you have selected all the drives you want to include in the array press Esc The cursor will become active in the menu 6 If you have drives you did not use in this array and you want to create another array you can do one of the following e Define the logical drive or drives for this array then create another array and its logical drives See Defining Logical Drives on page 196 Create another array now by repeating steps 2 through 5 in this procedure then define logical drives for both arrays PC Server 500 Type 8641 195 Note You must define at least one logical drive for each created array before you can exit the configuration program e Continue with Defining Logical Drives Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array To add storage capacity to your server without disturbing existing data 1 2 3 Install the additional hard disk drive or drives See Installing Internal Drives on page 191 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 Create a new disk array and define logical drives see Creating a Disk Array on page 195 for additional information Defining Logical Drives After you have created an array you must define a logical drive You cannot leave the RAID configuration program until you define the logical drives for any created arrays To define a logical drive 1 196 Select Define Logical
79. 552 Problem Determination Tips 553 Phone Numbers U S and Canada 555 Trademarks 557 Contents vii General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO The following Maintenance Analysis Procedure MAP and diagnostic information should be used to isolate problems on servers that are supported by the QAPLus PRO Diagnostics test Copyright IBM Corp 1996 3 General Checkout QAPlus PRO This general checkout procedure is for computers that are supported by the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics test Diagnostic error messages appear when a test program finds a problem with a hardware option For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion See Return Codes on page 7 General error messages appear if a problem or conflict is found by an application program the operating system or both For an explanation of these messages refer to the information supplied with that software package Notes 1 If multiple error codes are displayed diagnose the first error code displayed 2 If the computer hangs with a POST error go to the Symptom to FRU Index for the system you are servicing 3 If the computer hangs and no error is displayed go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 4 f a device cannot be select from the Module Test menu that device may be defective 001
80. 6 A6 5 2 7 CD ROM 6 Table 5 One Internal and One External Channel Mapping You must set a unique SCSI ID for each external SCSI device connected to the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter Therefore do not set the SCSI IDs for external devices to the values that you use for internal devices Refer to the instructions supplied with the SCSI devices for more information about setting a SCSI ID The default ID for the SCSI 2 adapter is 7 The ID for the preinstalled CD ROM drive is 3 on non disk array models and 6 on disk array models If the disk array server was supplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive in bay 1 the ID is 0 Note If you install a second SCSI 2 adapter you can use the same SCSI IDs that you use for the preinstalled SCSI 2 adapter Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8388 Front View HI 512 Server HMM SCSI ID Jumper If two backplanes are connected to the same adapter one backplane must be set to high and the other one to low SCSI ROM Address ID Description Jumper Setting HI High Assigns SCSI IDs 8 to D to the backplane LO Low Assigns SCSI IDs 0 to 5 to the backplane Rear View om address umper ROM Address Jumper Setting r Notes f more than one backplane is installed in the computer each backplane m
81. Architecture ISA The following hardware configuration utility programs are supplied with the server Built in Setup program Configures system board functions such as the integrated drive electronics IDE controller and serial and parallel port assignments that you install It also allows you to set passwords for starting up and accessing the Setup program PC Server 520 EISA Configuration Diskette Configures EISA and ISA adapters boards Built in SCSI 2 adapter utility program SCSISelect Utility program Configures SCSI devices installed in non disk array models e Configuration Option Diskette Configures SCSI devices in disk array models Assigning Interrupt Levels A rotational interrupt technique to is used to configure PCI adapters This technique enables you to install a variety of PCI adapters that currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts Always use the IBM PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette for the system you are servicing when assigning interrupts for EISA and ISA adapters You cannot assign an EISA or ISA adapter the same interrupt that you have assigned to a PCI adapter This is because the server does not support interrupt sharing among PCI EISA and ISA adapters If a situation occurs where you need an additional interrupt you can use an interrupt from another function that you might not need such as the IDE controller Interrupt 14 or COM2 Interrupt 3 PC Server 320 Type 8640 135
82. Beep Symptom FRU Action The computer hangs while 1 CD ROM Drive loading the operating 2 SCSI Cable system the CD ROM doesn t install during the Adaptec BIOS routines or the CD ROM is not available to the operating System Blank display otherwise 1 Display Adapter computer operates normally 2 Video Memory if used Run the Display Self Test 3 System Board Memory count hangs during 1 System Board the display See Undetermined Problems on page 552 POST Memory 2 Memory Option if installed 3 System Board 4 Processor 5 Bridge Card No beep fan runs 1 System Board power on indicator is on 2 Processor Card and computer hangs during 3 Bridge Card POST without message on 4 Memory Card 384 Server HMM No Beep Symptom FRU Action No beep fan runs 1 System Board power on indicator is on 2 Processor Card and computer hangs during 3 Bridge Card POST with a message on 4 Power Supply the display See Undetermined Problems on page 552 System slows down 1 Check the processors 2 System Board Beep Symptoms Beep Symptom FRU Action One beep and the computer 1 Any Device or hangs Adapter See Undetermined Problems on page 552 One beep and the displayed memory size is incorrect 1 Memory Card Continuous beep and a 1 Display Adapter blank display 2 Video Memory if used Run the Display Self Test 3 S
83. CD ROM DR 88G4921 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT SCSI Hard Disk Drive Cable PCI 5X5 06H6062 Models 000 ODT 020 OZT OXT MDT MXT MZT PC Server HMM Keyboards 101 102 Key RD Keyboards 101 102 Key RD Arabic 71G4617 Belgium French 71G4618 Belgium Dutch 71G4639 Bulgarian 71G4619 Czech 71G4620 Danish 71G4621 Dutch 71G4622 French 71G4624 French Canadian 06H2963 German 71G4625 Greek 71G4626 Hebrew 71G4627 Hungarian 71G4628 Iceland 71G4629 Italy 71G4630 Latin Spanish 82G3291 Norwegian 71G4631 Polish 71G4632 Portuguese 71G4633 Romanian 71G4634 Russian Cyrillic 71G4635 Serbian Cyrillic 71G4636 Slovak 71G4637 Spanish 71G4638 Swedish Finnish 71G4623 Swiss French German 71G4640 Turkish 71G4642 Turkish 8203255 UK English 71G4643 US English 71G4646 US English E ME A use only 71G4644 Yugoslavian Latin American 71G4647 PC Server 310 Type 8639 123 Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key BS 124 Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key BS Arabic Belgium French Belgium Dutch Bulgarian Czech Danish Dutch Finnish French French Canadian German Greek Hebrew Hungarian Iceland Italy Latin Spanish Norwegian Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Cyrillic Serbian Cyrillic Slovak South African Spanish Swedish Swiss French German Turkish UK English US English US English E ME A use only Yugoslavian Latin American PC Server HMM 8125417 8125418 8125439 812541
84. Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Interrupts 55 C2 Security Restore Check 56 Init Key Board Cold Warm Restore SAD 57 Test RTC Cold Warm Restore SAD 58 Check For NPX Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 59 reset hdctl Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5A FD INIT Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5B Set Floppy Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Config BA Unlock Early Cold Restore 5C nit A20 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5D Cache Config Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5E HD SETUP Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 62 Verify CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Config 70 Check For Setup Cold Warm Hot Key 63 Clear Screen Cold Warm Restore SAD BB nit IRQ Levels Cold Restore 65 BM Cirrus DDC Cold BC PACP Arbitration Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD BD Enable Planar Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD SCSI 66 CSET BFR Cold Warm Restore Mfg OPROM 132 PC Server HMM Routine Boot Mode Code BE Do ROM Scan Cold Warm Restore 2C TCPC Cold Warm Restore Mfg 49 TCPC Errors Cold Warm Restore 2D Find Serial Ports Cold Warm Restore Mfg 2E Find Parallel Cold Warm Restore Mfg Ports 68 CSET AFT Cold Warm Restore Mfg OPROM BF Get MC Data Cold Warm Restore 69 PCI Configure Cold Warm Restore Mfg 6A MFG Hook 65 MFG 6B Init Time Of Day Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 6C Check For Cold Warm Restore SAD Locked Key Board 6D Init Enable NMI Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 6E Set Boot Speed Cold Warm Restore Mfg 6F Set Key Board Cold W
85. Connector SCSI Connector Disk Array Model Expansion Slots Mouse Connector Keyboard Connector SCSI Connector Non Disk Array Model Serial Connectors Lem X Parallel Connector Power Connector Display Connector The display signal cable attaches to this connector Mouse Connector The mouse cable attaches to the server through this connector The mouse connector sometimes is called an auxiliary device or pointing device port Keyboard Connector The cable from your keyboard connects here SCSI Connector External SCSI devices attach here Serial Connectors The server has two 9 pin serial connectors A and B The serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device usually connects here you are using a 25 pin signal cable you need a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter cable For port assignments see Configuring Devices and Ports page 268 Parallel Connector The server has one 25 pin parallel port This is where the signal cable for a parallel printer or other parallel device connects to your server Power Connector The server power cable connects here PC Server 520 Type 8641 303 Memory Module Connectors Bank Bank 3 304 PC Server HMM System Board Locations Note A black square indicates pin 1
86. Device vendor unique error 40Ax Copy operation aborted by device 40Bx Device command aborted 40Cx Device search data command satisfied 40Dx Device volume overview residual data remains in buffer 40Ex Device mismatch source data did not match medium data 500x Check condition on device no sense data returned 501x No index or sector 502x Seek incomplete 503x Write fault 504x Drive not ready 505x Drive not selected 506x No track zero found PC Server 720 Type 8642 391 QEET Information 507x Multiple drives selected 508x Logical unit communication failure 509x Head positioning error track following error 510x CRC or ECC error on ID field 511x Unrecoverable read error 512x No address mark ID field 513x No address mark data field 514x Record not found 515x Seek error 516x Data synchronization error 517x Recoverable read without ECC error 518x ECC recovered read error 519x Defect list error 51Ax Parameter overrun 51Bx Synchronous transfer error 51Cx Primary defect list not found 51Dx Compare error 520x Invalid command 521x Illegal logical block address LBA 522x Illegal function for device type 524x Illegal command block field 525x Invalid LUN 526x Illegal field in parameter list 528x Media changed 529x Power on or bus device reset occurred not an error 52Ax
87. Disk Drive Cable The Hard Disk Drive Test 3 Hard Disk Drive detected mismatch between Adapter if installed the data read and the data 4 System Board stored on the drive Clock Stopped 1 Real Time Clock The real time clock has Assembly stopped working 2 System Board CMOS Clock Test Failed 1 Real Time Clock The Time and Date Settings Assembly for CMOS and DOS do not 2 System Board Match COM Port Tests Failed 1 Serial Cable Test failed with wrap plug 2 System Board attached Controller Diagnostic Test 1 Hard Disk Drive Failed Adapter if installed An error was detected while 2 Hard Disk Drive testing the Hard Disk 3 System Board Controller Adapter Cylinder 0 errors 1 Hard Disk Drive The test detected an error 2 Hard Disk Drive reading the first cylinder of Adapter if installed the hard disk drive 3 System Board Device is Not Ready 1 Ensure the device is Ready the Device powered on or 2 Replace failing device Press Any Key 3 Device Adapter if installed 4 System Board PC Server 300 Type 8640 39 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Disk Error Encountered Opening Output File Press Any Key To Continue Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board DMA X Failed The Main Components Test detected an error while testing the DMA controller 1 System Board DMA Page Register Failed An error was detected while outputting all possible valu
88. EISA Configuration Diskette for the system you are servicing into diskette drive A Start the configuration utility program At the main menu select Step 2 Add or remove boards At the next menu select the slot in which you installed the adapter At the next screen select OK At the next screen press F5 then select Create CFG file Press Enter At the Create a board CFG file screen type in the adapter manufacturer and description for example IBM Token Ring then press Enter Refer to the adapter documentation for information about specific configuration parameters such as IRQ or DMA channel required for the adapter Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter the appropriate parameters on the menu Notes a Normally ISA adapters do not use every parameter Most adapters require only a PORT address b The SVGA video adapter in the server requires specific memory and I O address assignments to function properly To avoid configuration conflicts do not assign the following SVGA memory and I O addresses to other adapters or options in the server e Memory address space AQOOH C7FFH address spaces 02bE0h O2EFh 03B0h 03DFh 46E8h After you type in all of the appropriate parameters press F10 At the next screen carefully verify that the information is correct then press Enter At the Add Confirmation window press Enter again PC Server HMM 13 In the next window a
89. Failure 318 SRAM Trip 96 bit Wide Failure 319 SRAM Quad 128 bit Wide Failure 320 SRAM Addressability Failure 321 Timer Failure 322 Port 1 Internal Loopback Failure 323 Port 2 Internal Loopback Failure 324 Port 3 Internal Loopback Failure 325 Port 4 Internal Loopback Failure 1 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 326 Ethernet Port 1 External Loopback Failure 327 POST Ethernet Port 2 External Loopback Failure 328 POST Ethernet Port 3 External Loopback Failure 329 POST Ethernet Port 4 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of the port 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 330 Port 1 Device Verification Failure 331 Port 2 Device Verification Failure 332 Port 3 Device Verification Failure 333 Port 4 Device Verification Failure 1 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 506 PC Server HMM NetWare Run Time Messages Itis possible that an Unrecoverable or recoverable error might occur during normal operation of the adapter The following table describes the run time errors that might be displayed Recoverable Errors and Warnings Error Message FRU Action 58 The board does not 1 If the driver is not respond able to recover from 110 Unable to download any of these errors the firmware after several minutes 111 Invalid Pipe replace the 10Base T Command or 10Base2 adapter 112 The board watchdog failed 113 Adapter resetting please wait
90. For example 01120100 0000 PLSC Information 0100 0000 On systems with NVRAM SCSI setup data not located or the checksum did not verify On systems without NVRAM Model 50 for example setup data must be on the 1st hard disk 0200 0000 Configuration error No hard disk found at PUN 6 LUN 0 for 161 162 165 system error path Might be an unsupported configuration 0300 0000 No space available in extended BIOS data area for SCSI data table possibly too many adapters installed 0400 0000 ROM modules not found on adapter IML based systems only Running setup might correct it 0500 0000 ROM checksum error on 2nd 16K portion of 32K ROM 0600 0000 ROM access control port error QEET Errors other than 0000 These are specific QEET error codes preceded by a DDD indicating an adapter Note A number in slot S indicates an error on the adapter or device attached to the adapter in slot S f S is 0 suspect the system board QEET Information 001x 8032 80188 80C186 ROM test failure 002x Local RAM test failure 003x Bad fuse or bad termination or local RAM address failure on SCSI adapter if RDDD is 0112 004x Internal peripheral test failure 005x Buffer control chip test failure or LTB failed or System board SCSI failed if RDDD is 0037 006x Undefined error condition or buffer RAM test failure on SC
91. Grounding Requirements 460 Battery Notice 461 Disk Array Configuration 461 Device Drivers 462 Administration Monitoring Utilities 462 RAID Technology 462 Hard Disk Drive Capacities 463 Additional Storage Capacity 463 The RAID Configuration Program Screens 463 Starting the RAID Configuration Program 465 Viewing the RAID Configuration 468 Performing Common Tasks 469 Creating a Disk Array 469 Defining Logical Drives 470 Defining a Hot Spare Drive 474 Deleting a Disk Array 476 Redefining Space in an Array 477 Drive Maintenance 479 Obtaining Drive Status 479 Bay Array Selection List 480 Blank Status 481 Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure 481 Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications 482 Replacing a Faulty Drive 482 Advanced Functions 483 Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration 483 Restoring the Disk Array Configuration 484 Using the Advanced Functions 485 Changing the Write Policy 485 Formatting Drives ss 487 Changing the RAID Parameters 488 Display e eR kas t Sere ee uel 490 Ethernet Quad BT and B2 PeerMaster Micro Channel Adapters 490 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 453 Features sistas GOP
92. IDE hard disk drive LED connector W10 IDE hard disk drive adapter connector Power LED connector W9 Speaker connector J11 Processor socket EISA slots J23 J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 PCI slots J30 J31 and J32 Mouse port J15 Keyboard port J14 Serial port COM1 J20 Power supply connector P1 J12 Power supply connector P2 J17 Serial port COM2 J21 Parallel port J18 Real time clock socket Diskette drive connector J19 Power supply connector P3 J37 IDE 2 hard disk drive connector J22 IDE hard disk drive adapter connector Jumper Settings Pentium System Board A label diagram showing the following jumper locations is located on the top of the base frame assembly inside the system unit Parity Check Selections Jumper Configuration Setting J1 Pentium parity check enabled Installed Default Not installed Pentium parity check disabled Jumper W14 DRQ Selection Configuration Setting DRQ6 Pins 1 2 DRQ7 Pins 2 3 Secondary Cache Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J40 5 volts for the Installed Jumper blocks Pentium all pins 5 3 volts for the Installed Power module Pentium PC Server 300 Type 8640 29 Jumper Configuration Setting J41 5 3 volts for Installed Power module ground ground J42 5 3 volts for Installed Power module ground ground Default Settings Jumper Default Setting J3 Pins 2 3 J4 P
93. Keys The following is a list of the Diagnostics Control Keys when used and a description of the Diagnostics response PC Server 310 Type 8639 77 Control Keys When Used Diagnostics Response Main Menu Allows you to select test from the sub menus that are highlighted with red letters Attention If selected these test will erase the information stored on the diskette or hard disk drive Up and Down Arrow Keys Main Menu Module Test Menu Test Group Menu Highlights an item you want to select Space Bar Module Test Menu Test Group Menu Adds a diamond to the left of the highlighted test The test will run when Run All Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Also removes the diamond to the left of the item The test will not run when Run All Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Tab Key Main Menu Module Test Menu Selects the additional test for the menu you are in Keys Test Group Menu Selects additional test The LUN displayed on the top right Test Group Menu shows which test is selected and how and remain example LUN 1 of 2 78 PC Server HMM System Board Memory The following matrix cross references the name of the computer printed on the logo and the size speed and type of memory modules supported in the computer Computer Memory Module Name Siz
94. LOG this file can be edited with a text editor Icons System 390 The System 390 System 370 Group located on the OS 2 Desktop contains the following icons IPL 390 370 Processor Starts the S 390 Microprocessor Complex programs End 390 370 Processor Stops the S 390 Microprocessor Complex programs 390 370 Configuration Starts the 390 370 Configurator Program 390 Manual Operations Debugging tool see Software Facilities Server System 390 on page 238 370 I O Trace Debugging tool see Software Facilities Server System 390 on page 238 370 Snap Shot Dump Debugging tool see Software Facilities Server System 390 on page 238 Initialization S 390 To Initialize start the 5 390 Complex click on the IPL 390 370 Processor icon in the System 390 System 370 Group on the OS 2 Desktop See Icons System 390 Machine Check Error Messages Note The diagnostic and error reporting programs may refer to the P 390 as a P 370 If an error is detected during or after the P 390 card is initialized a dialog box containing a Machine Check error is displayed on the screen This error may be caused by one or more of the following Missing or bad ADF or DGS files Missing or incorrect statement in the congif sys file The statement for the P 390 should be the last line in the config sys file Missing or incorrect code on the P 390 card e Defect
95. Memory test cannot run at 1 Memory Module this location in memory 2 System Board Not enough free memory available to start the memory test Missing QAPlus PRO Files s One or more diagnostic support files are missing 1 Diagnostic Diskette NO LOOP BACK PLUG Skipping External loopback test 1 Install wrap plug on the serial port rerun test No wrap plug installed 2 System Board Not ready 1 Ready Printer Printer not on line or not 2 Printer ready 3 Printer Cable 4 System Board No type amatic repeat 1 Keyboard At least one repeat key 2 System Board must be tested during this test or an error will occur Type amatic test error Not used by any standard device IRQ is not currently being used by a non standard device 1 System Board Numeric Proc Failed NPU test error Microprocessor 2 System Board Parallel Ports Failed Test Report Summary message 1 System Board Pass N Errors Drive X Failed Diskette drive read write test error Diskette Drive System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable PC Server 310 8639 113 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Pass N Drive Not Ready Diskette drive door is open or defective 1 Ensure diskette drive is ready Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable RON Pass N Drive X Write Protected or Unformatted 1 Insert a non write
96. Micro Channel Error Symptoms Codes on page 384 Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Related Service Information on page 107 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Check point codes Corollary Error Codes on page 376 328 Server HMM Problem Reference Memory General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Run the memory tests Micro Channel adapter problems errors Micro Channel Error Symptoms Codes on page 384 Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Miscellaneous General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual PCI error PCI Error Format and Error Codes Messages on page 395 POST error Corollary Error Codes on codes messages page 376 Power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on Power Supply Shutdowns on page 358 Power supply light goes out while the computer is powered on Corollary Error Codes on page 376 Power supply voltages Power Supplies on page 356 SCSI Fast Wide Adaptec Adapter AHA 2940W FRU No 06H6431 problems Self Diagnostics AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 543 SCSI 2 Fast Wide RAID Adapter FRU No 06H3059 problems SCSI Non SCSI Error Code Format on page 388
97. Module Testing mode provides a method to run individual tests on a single module For example you can run an individual test for the diskette drive or you can run groups of tests for several modules In the Module Testing mode you can define how many times each test should run and how the test program should log the errors To start the Module Testing mode 1 Start the Diagnostics diskette See Starting the Diagnostics Diskette 2 Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu 3 Select Module Tests from the next menu 4 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the highlight bar from one selection to the next 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Note As you scroll down the selection menu the Test Group window to the right changes to correspond to the highlighted Module Running Selected Module Tests To run all selected tests for a test group 1 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the cursor to your selection 2 Press Enter Note A appears next to your selection Running All Selected Modules To run all selected test modules 1 Use the down arrow key to move the cursor to the last choice Run All Selected Modules 2 Press Enter Note A 0 appears next to your selection PC Server 310 Type 8639 87 Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups To change selected tests in a Test Group 1 In the Module Tests Menu use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the cursor to y
98. Note The following is a list of minimal requirements for the Type 8642 computer to successfully complete POST Bridge Card 1 each Memory Card 64MB 1 each e Processor Card 1 each PC Server 720 Type 8642 327 Diagnostic Information The Server 720 is supported by the following diagnostic information and procedures Additional information may be required for optional features not originally shipped with the computer Important General Checkout Micro Channel page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Related Service Information on page 107 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual e Symptom to FRU Index page 376 Additional Service Information on page 330 Self Diagnostics AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 543 The following list contains problems and references for diagnosing a PC Server 720 Problem Reference Adapter LEDs LEDs System Board and Adapter on page 346 Adaptec adapter LED LED AHA 2940 2940W stays on Adapters on page 531 Hot Swap Tray LED fails DASD Tray SCSI IDs LED to light or blinks Hot Swap on page 339 continuously Diagnostic errors Symptom to FRU Index on page 376 Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Display problems
99. ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Diskette Drive see DASD PC Server 310 Type 8639 Hard Disk Drive see DASD PC Server 310 Type 8639 Power Supply Assembly 210W 3 3V 06H2968 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT System Board see System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 Base Frame 06H9405 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MZT Card Guide 06H1779 Models ODO ODT OXT 020 027 Card Guide 06H1778 Models MDT MXT MZT DASD Tray Removal 06H1780 Models 000 ODT 020 OZT OXT MDT MZT DASD Tray Non Removal 06H1781 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT Floor Stand Assembly 07H0516 Models ODO ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel 96G2484 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT Blank Bezels 06H1784 Models MDT MXT MZT Bottom Cover 06H1791 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT C2 Switch Assembly 06H1788 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MZT Cover Latch 06H1783 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MZT Door Assembly 96G2446 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT Door Hinge 96G2447 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT EMC Clip 06H5734 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT EMC Shield 06H1782 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MZT Fan Assembly 06H1796 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MZT Front Beze 96G2445 Models ODO ODT
100. P1 and P2 connector J39 SCSI Fast Wide External SCSI external connector Fast Wide J40 Video connector Video J41 Keyboard connector Keyboard J42 Mouse connector Mouse 306 PC Server HMM System Board Jumpers Jumpers Description Setting J12 Spare Jumper Parked Pin 1 only Default J15 Password Write Disabled Pins 1 2 Enabled Pins 2 3 Default J16 C2 Cover Open J17 C2 Key Lock J25 Reset switch J26 SCSI Select System Board Pins 1 2 Default Adapter Pins 2 3 J27 Video Select System Board Pins 1 2 Default Adapter 2 3 J43 Clock Select 60MHz Pins 1 2 50Mhz Pins 2 3 PC Server 520 Type 8641 307 Symptom to FRU Index This index supports Type 8641 computers Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 The Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO Supplement lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this Symptom to FRU Index and the Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes and model numbers X can be any number or letter Where the model number is used to identify an error XX used in place of the last 2 digits can be any number or letter Note For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus PRO diagnostics code refer to the manual for that device
101. PP3 JJJ KKK LLL PC Server 720 Type 8642 335 In some situations you may want to try LS parity placement to improve performance The default parity placement is RA Read ahead On Normally the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter transfers data from disk to its local cache in steps of stripe unit size This provides excellent overall performance when workloads tend to be sequential However if the workload is random and system I O requests are smaller than stripe unit size reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will result in a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted disk utilization When read ahead is set to Off the size of data transfer from the disk to local cache is equal to the system request size and no read ahead to the end of the stripe unit is performed Notes 1 The Read ahead setting can be changed without destroying data in a logical drive 2 When the configuration is saved on a diskette the RAID parameters are saved also Configuring the Disk Array The following information applies only to disk array models Use this information to perform the tasks necessary to configure add change or delete one or more disk arrays e f you did not create an IBM RAID controller diskette see the ServerGuide CD documentation e Familiarize yourself with the information contained in this manual and the RAID redundant array of independent disks information in the User s Reference ship
102. PRO 13 PC Server 300 Type 8640 Features Lm ase 225 Syed ee hese eee s 17 Diagnostics and Test Information 18 Additional Service Information 18 Adapters Supported 18 MeMory e xe EA ele a e 19 Power Supply Voltages 20 Setup BIOS Utility 21 Starting Setup During the POST 21 System Utilities 21 Formatting Diskettes 21 Using the Low Level Format Program 22 When To Use the Low Level Format Program 22 Hard Disk Drive Preparation 22 File Editor 2 PA 22 File Edit Function Key Usage 23 System Board Replacement 24 Locations 486DX2 System Board 25 Jumper Settings 486DX2 System Board 26 Jumper Settings Central Processing Unit CPU Selection 26 ISA IDE Selection 26 Keyboard Selection 26 Tag Selection gt s cu so 26 BIOS Mode Selection 27 Selection 27 PCI Port Selection 27 PCI Compilant IRQ Jumper Header 27 Cache Selections 27 PCI IDE Selection 28 Reserved Jumpers 28 Locations Pentium System Board 29 Jumper Settings Pentium System Board 29 Parity Check Selections 29 DRQ Selection 29 Sec
103. Press F3 to return to the Main Menu Copy an Option Diskette Some options come with a diskette that includes test and configuration information Select Copy an option diskette from the Main Menu to copy this information to the system diskettes To copy an option diskette 1 Select Copy an option diskette from the Main Menu and follow the instructions on the screen 2 Remove the option diskette from the diskette drive 3 Repeat the preceding steps until all option diskettes have been copied 4 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Testing the Computer The Test the computer utility program tests the system board and installed options To verify that your server is working correctly 1 Select Test the computer from the Main Menu 2 To test the system board disk drives video and other system components select System board diagnostics then press Enter When prompted remove the Reference Diskette and insert the System Board Diagnostic Diskette Follow the instructions on the screen 3 To test Micro Channel adapters select Micro Channel diagnostics then press Enter When prompted remove the Reference Diskette and insert the Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskette 4 When all tests are completed the system prompts you to remove the Diagnostic Diskette and press Enter to restart the system 254 PC Server HMM To get help information about any of the diagnostic tests then press F1 System Board Diagnostics To r
104. RAID 1 03 24 94 Good s Lone s Lon p D 5760 BO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 81 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 6 Lon D CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good Cl 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 7 7 Note logical drive Because the level you assign can influence the space needed for the drive you must assign a RAID level before you enter the size of the The Logical Drive list contains the logical drive ID the size of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date that the logical drive was created The status of the logical drive also is shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline Related Service Information 471 4 472 means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data on that drive is lost The Logical Drive Size pop up window shows the space in the array that is available for logical drives IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Enter Size i Create Delete Array 3840 E ch 1H ch 2 2 Define hot spare drive fm ray 3 Delete disk array Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 Lon a 1 Lon 6 Exit 2 Lona 2 Lonc Arr Array Log Size RAID Date I
105. Readable instructions or the Main Menu 8 If you received the correct responses press Ctrl A Test the Computer screen appears Select Options diagnostics and follow the instructions on the screen 9 If you did not receive the correct responses go to Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 Dio Oros om PC Server 310 Type 8639 59 To Test the Base System Notes 1 Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled before starting this procedure 2 f Rapid Resume is displayed during this procedure see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 3 Re run the Diagnostics tests To test the base system do the following 1 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Insert the Reference Diskette into drive A Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses a One beep b IBM Logo c Readable instructions or the Main Menu 8 If you received the correct responses do the following a Press Ctrl A Test the Computer screen appears b Select System board diagnostics and follow the instructions on the screen c When the QAPlus Pro Main Menu appears press Ctrl A d Select Diagnostics e Select Module Test If the Module Test Menu is correct run diagnostics If the Module Test Menu is not correct go to Module Test Menu on page 67 9 If you did not receive the corr
106. Recoverable read without ECC error 518x ECC recovered read error 519x Defect list error 51Ax Parameter overrun 51Bx Synchronous transfer error 51Cx Primary defect list not found 51Dx Compare error 520x Invalid command 521x Illegal logical block address LBA 522x Illegal function for device type 524x Illegal command block field 214 PC Server HMM Information 525x Invalid LUN 526x Illegal field in parameter list 528x Media changed 529x Power on or bus device reset occurred not an error 52Ax Mode select parameters changed not an error 531x Medium format corrupted 532x Defect spare location unavailable 540x Device RAM failure 541x Data path diagnostic failure 542x Power on diagnostic failure 543x Message rejected 544x Internal controller error 545x Device was unable to reconnect 547x Interface parity error 548x Initiator detected error 549x Illegal command or command out of sequence error Format in progress not error 5F1x Spinup in progress 601x SCSI bus reset occurred 602x SCSI interface fault 610x Selection timeout error device not available 611x Unexpected bus free 612x Mandatory SCSI message rejected 613x Invalid SCSI phase sequence 620x Short length record error 702x Device not ready removable media devices 704x Device not ready non removable media devices 728x M
107. See Configure View Host Adapter Settings on page 547 for information about setting the scanning order The SCSI 2 adapter has both internal and external ports Depending on the server configuration you can attach additional SCSI drives by chaining them connecting them together with cables Depending on the type of SCSI 2 adapter installed in the server the adapter supports a total of 14 or 15 SCSI drives internal and external To configure the SCSI devices that you install in a non disk array model use the built in SCSI 2 adapter utility program SCSISelect See SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 For disk array models use the RAID configuration program See Disk Array Configuration on page 461 There are two types of SCSI devices wide and narrow You must use 16 bit cables to attach wide devices Use 8 bit cables to attach narrow devices Wide device IDs can be set to any number from 0 to 15 Narrow devices can only have their IDs set from 0 to 7 The preinstalled 4X CD ROM drive in bay A is a narrow device Two devices connected to the same bus internal or external cannot have the same ID however you can use the same ID for an internal device and an external device The primary partitions on SCSI drives that are connected to the internal bus on a given adapter are assigned drive letters before the external drives that are connected to the same adapter are assigned drive letters If multiple adapters are installed in
108. Stop button is pressed the service processor SP sends an interrupt causing the count down timer to start When the timer reaches zero 0 the computer is powered off The default value for this timer is zero 0 seconds The SP also interrupts the host system through the SP or NMI interrupts if these features are enabled The SP will display a message on the LCD indicating that the computer will power off in XX seconds If enabled this feature can be canceled by pressing the Enter button PC Server 720 Type 8642 365 Power On Off Scenarios The computer is designed with a soft power on and off function This function requires the following changes in how the computer is powered on and off The SMART function looks at the hardware at power on and takes control of the power off function The first change is a Power Enable button This button is a logical emergency power off EPO switch that does not remove all power from the computer it continues power to the bus as long as AC is connected but it will power off all other components of the computer immediately and prevent it from being powered on until the Power Enable button is pressed again The second change is that after any AC power interruption to the computer the computer will power on to determine what state it should be in on or off If the computer was powered off before the AC power interruption it will power off when power is restored If the computer was powe
109. Switch Power Supply connector System Board Power Supply connectors 3 Check the power cord Power Cord for proper continuity 4 Check the power on Power on Switch switch for continuity If these are correct check the following voltages System Board Connections Note These voltages must be checked with the power supply cables connected to the system board If the voltages are not correct and the power cord is good replace the power supply If the voltages are correct and the computer you are servicing has a power supply connector on the riser card check the following riser card voltages Riser Card Connections Note These voltages must be checked with the power supply cable connected to the riser card If the voltages are not correct and the power cord is good replace the power supply PC Server 310 Type 8639 71 Processor Replacement Looking from the front of the computer install all processors with the beveled corner located at the right rear corner of the processor socket Important If the processor is not installed correctly the system board and the processor can be damaged Return Codes For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion To register the test properly in the test log the test programs must generate one of the following return codes
110. Switch off the power if necessary Use only one hand when working with powered on electrical equipment keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back Remember There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock By observing the above rule you may prevent a current from passing through your body When using testers set the controls correctly and use the approved probe leads and accessories for that tester Stand on suitable rubber mats obtained locally if necessary to insulate you from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information Use extreme care when measuring high voltages Related Service Information 457 Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational condition Do not use worn or broken tools and testers e Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit First check that it has been powered off Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area Examples of these hazards are moist floors nongrounded power extension cables power surges and missing safety grounds Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental mirror The surface is conductive such touching can cause personal injury and machine damage Do not servi
111. System Board 1715 The Hard Disk Drive Configuration information is not correct 1 Run Setup and enter the correct hard disk drive information See Setup BIOS Utility on page 21 1726 Hard disk drive read error Press F1 to restart the system 1 Hard Disk Drive 182X 1 SCSI Adapter 190X 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 1XXX 1 SCSI Adapter not listed above 221X 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 222X 224X 1 SCSI Adapter 2401 1 Correct the switch The monochrome color setting switch is not set correctly 2 Display Adapter 3XXX 1 Check SCSI Check for proper installation of SCSI terminators terminators for proper installation SCSI Cable SCSI Terminator SCSI Device SCSI Adapter Qu Bor PC Server 300 Type 8640 37 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 4XXX 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 6XXX 1 SCSI Device GP COM 1 System Board The serial port test detected an error GP FDU 1 Diskette Drive The diskette drive test 2 System Board detected an error 3 Diskette Drive Cable 4 Diskette GP HDU 1 Hard Disk Drive The hard disk dr
112. The drive must be start up drive is corrupted formatted do the following 1 Attempt to access and recover back up the failing hard disk drive 2 Using the operating systems programs format the hard disk drive 3 Go to Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use on page 75 The drive is defective Replace the hard disk drive When To Use the Low Level Format Program Note Before formatting the hard disk drive make a back up copy of the files on the drive to be formatted Use the Low Level Format program e When you are installing software that requires a low level format When you get recurring messages from the test programs directing you to run the Low Level Format program on the hard disk e Asa last resort before replacing a hard disk drive Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use When the Low Level Format program is finished restore to the hard disk all the files that you previously backed up 1 Partition the remainder of the hard disk for your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 2 Format the hard disk using your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 3 Install the operating system You are now ready to restore the files PC Server 310 Type 8639 75 File Editor The File Editor is an ASCII text edito
113. a logical drive and then decided you needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5 you can use this procedure to replace the existing logical drive with a logical drive assigned the new RAID level To redefine the space in a disk array first you must delete the array The last disk array defined must be the first deleted Warning In all cases when you delete an array the data and programs in the array are lost If you have data and programs that you want to save they must be backed up and then restored It is suggested you use a high speed backup device such as a tape drive To redefine the space in an array 1 Back up all data and programs in the array 2 f needed install additional hard disk drives Refer to the User s Reference for information about selecting drive sizes 3 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette then press Ctrl Alt Del to start the RAID configuration program 4 Delete the existing array a Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array menu will disappear b Select Delete disk array The cursor will be active in the Bay Array list c Review the Logical Drive List Date Created column then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array Note You must delete disk arrays in descending order the last one created must be the first one deleted d Press Del The Confirm pop up win
114. a menu choice using the function keys or using command line options Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice Throughout the test programs pressing the first letter of an option on a menu is the same as moving to that item with the cursor and pressing Enter however this function is not enabled on Test Group Screens Using the Function Keys Use the following keys to maneuver throughout the test programs Keys Action Enter Select an item run the test module or run the test Down Moves the cursor down Arrow Up Arrow Moves the cursor up 1 F1 Calls up the appropriate Help information Use the up arrow key 1 or the down arrow key to scroll through the information Pressing F1 from within a Help screen provides a help index from which you can select different categories One of the important help categories is function key usage Pressing Esc exits Help and returns to where you left off Esc Go back to the previous menu Additional functions are available in the Test Module Selection screen and the Test Group screen using the following keys Keys Action Tab Move to test group or move to parameters Spacebar Toggle modules on off or toggle tests on off F2 View test results log F10 Local menu Next logical unit number for example LUN 1 LUN 2 and so on Previous logical unit number 8 PC Server HMM Command Line Options The
115. array are assigned RAID levels 1 5 or a combination of these two levels Then no data will be lost but the system will operate at reduced performance until the defective drive is replaced and rebuilt Example 3 If more than one drive fails all data is lost Therefore it is important that you replace and rebuild a defective drive as Soon as possible PC Server 500 Type 8641 189 Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped A single hard disk drive failure indicated by a DDD status in the Bay Array selection list causes logical drives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 to have a Critical status Data remains in logical drives with a Critical status but you must replace the one defective hard disk drive promptly because if two hard disk drives were to fail all of the data in the array would be lost After you install a new hard disk drive the Replace process changes the drive status from DDD to OFL if there is a Critical logical drive After the Rebuild process the hard disk drive status changes from OFL to ONL A single or multiple hard disk drive failure causes logical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 to have an offline status Data in logical drives with an offline status is lost However with a multiple disk drive failure when the defective drives are part of
116. button are located on the side of the primary power supply button The LED when lit indicates that the power supply is good If the LED fails to come on when the computer is powered on do the following While observing the LED on the power supply press the power supply button If the LED fails to light while you are holding the button in you may have a defective power supply If the LED lights when the button is pressed go to Power Supply Shutdowns on page 431 428 PC Server HMM Primary Power Supply Voltages Ifthe voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK Connector P1 1 4 if Key Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 1 4 8 5 25 4 2 4 8 5 25 Connector P2 1 4 L L Key Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 1 3 3 3 5 4 2 3 3 3 5 Server 3518 429 Connector P3 1 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 4 11 52 12 6 2 5 11 52 12 6 2 8 10 8 13 2 2 10 4 8 5 25 Connector P4 5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 ZIT LAN A B C D Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B A 48 5 25 B D 11 52 12 6 Optional P
117. by pressing Esc or selecting Exit while on the Main Menu A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your action Reinstall your operating system and device drivers then restore your data and programs PC Server HMM Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E Locate the drive you are removing You do not have to power off the server to remove a drive from banks C D or E Warning If you are removing a failed hard disk drive that is part of a disk array in bank C D or E you must not accidentally remove a good drive Before you attempt to remove a defective drive thoroughly review the information displayed on your server s screen to determine the location of the failed drive Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications on page 342 explains the codes that your server uses to indicate a defective drive When a hard disk drive fails a blinking green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray When a hard disk drive is good a solid green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray If you partially or completely remove a good drive instead of the defective one your server might lose valuable data This situation is especially relevant if you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array However the RAID controller can rebuild the data you need provided that certain conditions are met See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 for more details
118. can install an operating system from ServerGuide or you can install your own operating system and still use many of the features available on ServerGuide For example you can install NetFinity which is a LAN systems management program run demonstration programs use the performance tuning feature and do much more Refer to the ServerGuide CD documentation Software Hardware Mismatch Problems If a failure appears to be the result of a defective FRU but the diagnostic tests run error free there might be a software and hardware mismatch These problems might be intermittent and they are usually difficult to diagnose If you are experiencing this type of problem and the operating system is of the direct driver variety which bypasses the BIOS interface such as e AIX e Netware SCO XENIX Some windowing interfaces 550 PC Server HMM e Other Unix based software the most likely cause of the problem is a mismatch between the software and the hardware Applications that use the Multiprotocol Adapter A magnetic tape drives and some SCSI devices such as CD ROM require direct software drivers There is no BIOS interface for these devices in PS 2 products The following information is provided to help you resolve these problems Software Can Be Sensitive to the Hardware Direct driver software is sensitive to variations in hardware design The resulting incompatibilities are usually addressed with a revisi
119. comes with two 9 pin serial ports You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in one of the expansion slots Software recognizes serial ports from their serial port assignments No two serial ports can have the same serial port assignment This normally is handled by the Configuration Setup utility program but you might have special hardware or software that requires you to change these assignments You can set either serial port as Serial 1 through Serial 4 Configuring Video Options The server supports a wide assortment of displays Because characteristics of display types vary you should review the documentation that came with the display to determine the display type and refresh rate Select Video Setup then use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to advance through the list of available choices and make your selection Date and Time Select Date and Time to change or Set values for the system date and time You use this option to set the real time clock in the server The system time is in a 24 hour format hour minute second The system date is in standard format for your country for example in the United States the format is Month Day Year Select Date and Time then use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to advance through each data field Type the new information the system saves the information as you type it The Date and Time choice appears only on the full Configurat
120. computer you are servicing If the P 390 card is recognized by the configuration program the P 390 appears on the installed devices list the diagnostics program will instruct you to run the P 390 Diagnostics and Option diskette If the P 390 card is not recognized by the configuration program does not appear on the installed devices list go to Error Reporting P 390 on page 234 1 Power off the computer then power off all external devices 2 Insert the P 390 Diagnostics and Option diskette into drive A 3 Power on all external devices then power on the computer 4 When the Main Menu appears a Select 2 b After the information message press Enter c Select E to run the diagnostic programs with expanded messages The diagnostic program will test the adapter and terminate with the message P 390 in slot X successfully passed all tests or a failure message that includes an error message and error code The error message will identify the failing FRU d If a failure message is displayed it identifies the failing FRU s as 1 The adapter card excluding the memory card PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 239 2 The memory card 3 Both the adapter card and the memory daughter card when the failure cannot be isolated e Record the error code and replace the identified FRU 240 PC Server HMM Locations The S 390 Microprocessor Complex consists of a P 390 Processor Card and an o
121. configuration menu and all of the installed memory will be supported on the server 5 Return to the Main Menu save the configuration and exit from the utility program EISA Configuration Diskette You must use the EISA Configuration Diskette anytime you want to change resource allocations such as e Adding or removing devices Moving devices Changing device function e Resolving conflicts e Adding or removing PCI adapters Each time you use the EISA Configuration Diskette to configure the server the configuration information is saved in a System Configuration Information SCI file and in the NVRAM configuration Only devices that you install and configure correctly appear on the EISA Configuration screens Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette Use an operating system command such as the DOS DISKCOPY command to make a complete backup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette Using the backup copy can prevent damage to the original diskette The operating System documentation provides information on backing up diskettes Making Menu Selections When you start the EISA Configuration Diskette an introductory screen appears Type CF at the prompt After you press Enter the main menu Steps in configuring the computer appears The EISA Configuration program main menu contains five steps Step 1 Important EISA configuration information This step provides information about the differences between the I
122. cord is OK either the power supply is defective or a defective device is causing the power supply to shut off Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are incorrect replace the power supply If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 P1 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 6 1 Power Good 5 6 2 4 8V 5 25V 5 6 3 11 52V 12 60V 5 6 4 10 8V 13 2V P2 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 2 3 4 5V 5 5V 1 2 4 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 5 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 6 4 8V 5 25V P3 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 8V 5 25V 20 PC Server HMM P4 and P6 1 4 L1 mmmm Co Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 4 8V 5 25V 2 3 4 11 52V 12 6 P5 P7 and P8 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 11 52V 12 6 2 3 4 4 8V 5 25V Setup BIOS Utility You can start the Setup Utility program during the POST or in any DOS Full Screen However the procedure for starting the Setup Utility program during the POST depends on the machine type of the computer you are servicing Notes 1 If a configuration error occurs during POST press F1 to bypass the error A configuration error message appears before the operating system loads 2 Do not start the Setup Utility wh
123. diagnostics Installing Additional Test Programs You can add other test programs to the Diagnostic Diskette These other programs are usually provided on the diskette supplied with a device After you add the programs to the Diagnostic Diskette you can include information from the programs in the Test Log Before the test programs can find these programs to run as the User Diags test group information about them must be included in a file called USERDIAG CFG This is an ASCII text file It must include the following three items for each test to run e Program Name COM and EXE files only Test Description of the test to be run e Command line parameters to be passed to the program identified in the first item of this list Notes 1 All of the information for a given test must be on a single line and a semicolon must separate the items on the line 2 Make sure you press Enter at the end of each line of text in the USERDIAG CFG file This creates a carriage return line feed CR LF which is necessary for the User Diagnostics to be found and executed 3 If the program executable file is in a directory other than the QA directory or other directory you have designated to contain the QA files that directory must be listed in the PATH section of the AUTOEXEC BAT 4 You can use a CFG file other than USERDIAG CFG if you use the command line USRCONFIG filename when running the diagnostic programs For examp
124. diodes LEDs followed by the definition for each LED m Color Indications Green proper operation e Yellow alert condition LED Number Definition 1 Hard disk drive activity 2 DASD error 3 Processor Complex Error 4 Color green POWER GOOD 5 Color green POWER Enabled 6 Color green All subsystems good Liquid Crystal Display The Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the front operator panel contains a 2 line by 16 character LCD front panel display driven by the 80C752 microprocessor The front panel display receives and transmits ASCII characters The LCD supports the upper and lower case ASCII character set Errors detected by the computer might be displayed on the LCD and or on the standard display attached to the computer This is helpful when a display is not attached to the computer or the attached display is inoperative Performing Common Tasks RAID Configuration The Create Delete Array menu of the RAID configuration program contains the more common tasks for configuring disk arrays Procedures to complete these tasks are contained in this section as follows Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 350 Deleting a Disk Array on page 350 Creating a Disk Array on page 351 Defining Logical Drives on page 353 PC Server 720 Type 8642 349 Defining a Hot Spare Drive To define a drive as a hot spare drive 1 2 Start the RAID configuration program See
125. drive bays 18 of which are hot swap bays Options Supported e Up to 18 slim high or 9 half high hot swap hard disk drives 1 GB 2 GB and 4 GB Tape autoloader 4 10 GB 3 5 Inch DAT tape drive CD ROM drive Security Features Bolt down capability DASD Door lock Security cover optional Information Panel Two 16 character lines LCD display of diagnostic and status information Integrated Functions LED usability support Power Supply e 470 watt with automatic range voltage selection 115 230 V ac e Built in overload and surge protection e Power supply upgrade expansion option 220 watt automatic range voltage selection Built in overload and surge protection 424 PC Server HMM Diagnostics and Test Information The following is a list of problems and references for diagnosing the Type 3518 Expansion Enclosure Problem Reference Error Codes Error Symptom to FRU Index on Messages page 446 Hot Swap Drives Hot Swap Tray FRU No 06H8631 07H0774 on page 441 Hot Swap Tray LED Hot Swap Tray FRU No indications 06H8631 07H0774 on page 441 Power Supply Voltages See Power Supplies on page 428 PC Server 3518 425 Additional Service Information The following information is for the PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518 Power on Self Test POST Power on Sequence Power Supplies o
126. e It is not necessary to move the jumper back to the previous position 5 Remind the user to enter a new password when service is complete Power On Self Test POST Each time you power on the system it performs a series of tests that check the operation of the system and some options This series of tests is called the power on self test or POST POST does the following e Checks some basic system board operations Checks the memory operation Starts the video operation e Verifies that the diskette drive is working Verifies that the hard disk drive is working If the POST finishes without detecting any problems a single beep sounds and the first screen of your operating system or application program appears If the POST detects a problem an error message appears on your screen A single problem can cause several error messages to appear When you correct the cause of the first error message the other error messages probably will not appear on the screen the next time you turn on the System 70 PC Server HMM Power Supply If the power on indicator is not on the power supply fan is not running or the computer will not power off do the following Check Verify FRU Action 1 Verify that the Correct the voltage selector switch voltage selector switch is set for the correct setting voltage 2 Check the following for Reseat proper installation Power Cord e On Off Switch connector e On Off
127. error and load the operating system Press F2 to start the Setup program To start the EISA Configuration Diskette insert the diskette in the diskette drive and press F1 The Setup program and the EISA Configuration program configure only the system hardware These programs do not consider the requirements of the operating system or the application programs Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts 274 PC Server HMM Run the Setup program to view and change resources used by the system board functions Record the current settings before making any changes See Setup Program Type 8641 on page 286 for instructions Determine which adapter or device is causing the error The EISA Configuration program specifies how the server checks for resource conflicts Initially this verification mode is set to automatic When the mode is set to automatic the EISA Configuration program tries to resolve configuration conflicts for you Use the Advanced selection of the EISA Configuration Diskette s View or edit details screen to change the setting see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 263 If the automatic verification mode is set the configuration program attempts to resolve conflicts for you However this might disable adapters or system board features For example if you choose IRQ 4 for an adapter the program disa
128. error code or error message is displayed on the information panel Fatal errors are logged to the system EEPROM and displayed at the next power on Use this Symptom to FRU Index to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the expansion enclosure For information on Go to Power supply problems Power Supplies on page 428 Error Code Symptom FRU Action E700 AC Failure 1 Power Cord Power lost while the 2 Power Supply enclosure was running The error is displayed the next power on E701 Power Supply 1 Power Supply Redundant power supply indicates a bad condition Error is non fatal and can be cleared by pressing the front panel Enter button E702 5V Failure Power Supply Enclosure 5V input is low 2 System Board Planar or too high If too low non fatal error is written to the information panel If to high enclosure is shutdown and the error is displayed the next power on 703 12V Failure Power Supply Enclosure 12V input is low 2 System Board Planar or too high If too low non fatal error is written to the information panel If to high enclosure is shutdowns and the error is displayed the next power on 446 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action E704 Fan Failure In a non fatal situation a fan has failed If multiple fans fail the enclosure is shutdown and the enclosure will not run until the failure is co
129. for DOS Drives more than 1GB allows you to enable or disable extended translation for SCSI hard disk drives with a capacity greater than 1GB It is only valid if the BIOS is enabled The default setting is Enable If this option is enabled the following translation schemes are used SCSI hard disk drives with a capacity of 1GB or less use a translation scheme of 64 heads 32 sectors per track SCSI hard disk drives with a capacity greater than 1GB use a translation scheme of 255 heads 63 sectors per track BIOS Support for more than 2 Drives allows you to enable or disable BIOS support for more than two and up to eight SCSI hard disk drives The host adapter BIOS must be enabled This feature is supported by DOS 5 0 and above The default setting is Enable SCSI Disk Utility AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Select SCSI Disk and press lt Enter gt SCSI 10 1 Quantum P140S 940 40 94xx SCSI ID 2 No Device SCSI ID 3 SyQuest SQ 5110 SCSI ID 4 No Device SCSI ID 5 No Device SCSI ID 6 No Device SCSI ID 7 AHA 2940 2940W a keys to move cursor lt Enter gt to select option lt Esc gt to exit default Note The menu for the AHA 2940W adapter displays SCSI IDs 0 to 15 542 PC Server HMM When you select SCSI Disk Utilities from the Options menu the SCSISelect utility scans the SCSI bus and lists all SCSI devices installed on the SCSI bus When you highlight
130. for that device For information on Go to Additional service help For example 0S 2 Trap errors or Related Service Information on page 453 Possible software and hardware mismatch problems Not repairable by replacing FRUs Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 550 Memory Configuration Problems Memory on page 141 Replacing the system board does not correct the problem See System Board Replacement on page 155 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 101 102 System and microprocessor error 1 System Board System and microprocessor error 0103 1 System Board System Timer error 106 1 System Board 0110 Parity Check 1 run Setup Memory SIMM 2 System Board 111 channel check error Memory SIMM 2 System Board 164 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action 114 Adapter read only memory error 1 Run Diagnostics 2 Failing Adapter 0115 1 Memory SIMM Parity Check 1 XXXX run 2 System Board Setup 0120 1 Run Setup Previous boot incomplete 2 Battery CMOS Chip default configuration used 3 System Board 0130 1 Battery CMOS Chip Invalid NVRAM media type 2 System Board 151 1 Run Diagnostics Real time clock error 2 System Board 161 1 Battery Real time clock battery error 0162 Models EXX Configuration error fo
131. from disk to its local cache in steps of stripe unit size This provides excellent overall performance when workloads tend to be sequential However if the workload is random and 184 PC Server HMM system I O requests are smaller than stripe unit size reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will result in a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted disk utilization When read ahead is set to Off the size of data transfer from the disk to local cache is equal to the system I O request size and no read ahead to the end of the stripe unit is performed Notes 1 The Read ahead setting can be changed without destroying data in a logical drive 2 When the configuration is saved on a diskette the RAID parameters are saved also Configuring the Disk Array The following information applies only to disk array models Use this information to perform the tasks necessary to configure add change or delete one or more disk arrays e f you need to create an IBM RAID controller diskette refer to the ServerGuide User s Guide that was shipped with the system e Familiarize yourself with the information contained in this manual and the RAID redundant array of inexpensive disks information in the User s Reference shipped with the server e Verify the disk array configuration The disk array model comes configured as one logical drive view the disk array configuration go to Viewing the RAID Configuration on
132. from the system but no devices to spin up the drives Refer to the are available system publications for more information Remove the following FRUs then run the system diagnostics after each FRU is replaced a System SCSI Cable b Internal SCSI cable c Backplane to the system 4 If there is still a problem after all the FRUs have been replaced one of the hot swap hard disk drives may be defective a Unseat all of the hot swap hard disk drives except the one in hot swap bay 0 b Disconnect the internal SCSI cable if installed from the manual plug devices c Send the command from the system to spin up the drives Refer to the system publications for more information 5 If the command is successful reseat the next hot swap hard disk drive and send the command from the System to spin up the drive 6 Repeat step 5 on page 418 until the failure symptom returns Then remove and replace the FRUs in the following order and run the system diagnostics after each FRU is replaced a Hot swap hard disk drive carrier b Hot swap hard disk drive 418 PC Server HMM Symptom FRU Action One hot swap hard disk drive is not available to the system 1 Verify that the hot swap hard disk drive carrier cables are correctly connected 2 If the green light on the hot swap hard disk drive is flashing press the power switch on the drive 3 Send the command from the system to spin
133. guide form number G41G 2927 for more information Attention Unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before checking voltages to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge On some models there is an access cover fan to cool the processor If that fan does not work you have one of the following problems No power to the fan 12 V dc 1 4 V dc required at the two fan cable pins on the base Defective J28 cable check cable continuity Defective fan To test the fan use a two wire jumper to connect the fan terminals to the cable pins on the base Defective system board Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective Symptom A single drive failed but 2 RAID fixed disk drives appear as DDD Defunct the drive is not responding to 200 PC Server HMM commands Routine recovery procedures are ineffective in bringing the DDD drive s back on line Note The system may have run without problems for some time Problem Isolation Aids The system is a Server 500 RAID Array 8641 e The system diagnostics do not fail The RAID Administration program appears normal e More than one DASD backplane is installed Fix
134. hangs the host adapter may be interfering with the operation of the computer It may not Related Service Information 529 support First Parity DMA that is Bus Master data transfers Connectivity Cables Devices If you attach both internal and external SCSI devices to the host adapter you must terminate the last external device and the last internal device This applies to both the AHA 2940 and AHA 2940W adapters m Important If you connect external devices to the AHA 2940W adapter you can only attach devices to one of the internal SCSI connectors If you connect both internal and external SCSI devices you must also change the host adapter termination settings from the default because the host adapter is now in the middle of the SCSI bus See Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 544 of all cables connected internally and externally to each adapter Component Requirement Maximum external cable 3 m 9 8 ft length Maximum combined length 6 m 19 7 ft SCSI Devices Supports single ended devices only CD ROM Drive The CD ROM drive has a 50 pin connector If it is connected to the 68 pin connector on the adapter using a 68 pin to 68 pin cable a 16 8 Bit Converter must be used to connect the CD ROM drive to the 68 pin cable AHA 2940 and AHA 2940W 50 pin to 50 pin SCSI 50 pin internal connector ribbon cable AHA 2940W 68 pin internal 68 pin to 68 pin SC
135. hard disk drives or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the computer This configuration might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group Or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the system which might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group From either the Module Test Menu or the Test Group window you can change to a different LUN where applicable by pressing the plus key next LUN or the minus key previous LUN Test Group Specifications In the upper right hand portion of the testing screen or just the upper portion if you switched to an individual test group screen are the specifications for the related test group Note In the Hard Disk Test Group specification area if a 86 PC Server HMM software program was to compress your drive the indicated size is the compressed size of the logical drive Starting the Diagnostics Diskette 1 Insert the Diagnostics diskette into drive A 2 Power on the computer 3 When the Diagnostics Main Menu is displayed press Ctrl A The screen will not change 4 Select Diagnostics then press Enter 5 Follow the instructions that appear on your screen If an error is displayed go to Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 Module Testing Mode If the test programs do not find a problem or you want to perform in depth testing the
136. illustrated above the adapters indicating software that is required to route traffic internally running on the server Cross subnet traffic such as traffic from Net 1 to Net 2 must be forwarded by a router The router can be internal to the server or an external stand alone device The advantage of the Traditional Adapter mode is that a router restricts cross subnet traffic to only those data packets that are uniquely addressed to the target network The disadvantage of this mode is that server responsiveness might be heavily impaired due to the burden of packet routing This mode should be used only when little or no cross subnet traffic is expected Related Service Information 495 VNET Switch Mode Configurations The following information describes three configurations using the VNET switch mode VNET Switch Mode Single VNET This illustration above shows two Quad BT PeerMaster adapters Card 1 and Card 2 forming a single VNET The adapter provides the functions of a high performance network adapter combined with the power of an Ethernet switching hub Note The same principles apply to Quad B2 configurations however concentrator hubs are not required for 10Base2 operation All segments configured as Network number 1 Net 1 Curved arrows indicating the flow of data across ports connected by the VNET switch 496 PC Server HMM The VNET switch performs all cross segment traffic and therefore s
137. incorrect responses go to Printer on page 524 If the display has problems such as jittering rolling shifting or being out of focus go to Display on page 490 58 Server HMM General Checkout Models MDT MXT MZT This general checkout procedure is for Type 8639 Models MDT MXT MZT servers On Type 8639 Models MDT MXT MZT Micro Channel computers you can start the advanced diagnostics programs in one of three ways 1 From the PC Server 310 Models MDT MXT MZT Reference Diskette 2 From the PC Server 310 Models MDT MXT MZT Diagnostics Diskette 3 From the System Partition From the Reference Diskette The Reference Diskette is bootable Starting the diagnostic programs from the Reference Diskette allows you to test the options installed in the computer or test the base system To Test Options Notes 1 Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled before starting this procedure 2 f Rapid Resume is displayed during this procedure see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 3 Re run the Diagnostics tests To test the options installed in the computer do the following 1 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Insert the Reference Diskette into drive A Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses a One beep b IBM Logo c
138. installed 3 System Board Incorrect DOS version Insert A Data Disk 1 Ensure you are using DOS version 3 0 or higher 1 Insert a known good data disk into the CD ROM CD ROM Drive System Board CD ROM Cable RON INT Mask Register Failed The INT Mask Register tests detected an error Microprocessor System Board Invalid Date The back up clock and DOS dates do not match 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board Invalid Time The back up clock and DOS time of day settings do not match 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board Keyboard Error One or more keys do not operate correctly Keyboard 2 System Board Linear Cylinder Access Test Failed Hard disk drive error The redundancy check of the sectors read does not match the information on the drive Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Cable 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Logic Function Failed The CPU Logic Test has detected an error Microprocessor 2 System Board Loopback Error An error occurred during the COM Port Test or Parallel Port Test Note A wrap plug must be installed to successfully complete these tests System Board 2 Wrap Plug Main Components Failed A component failure was detected on the system board System Board 2 Processor Memory test cannot run at this location in memory Not enough free
139. is ready Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable Pen Pass N Drive X Write Protected or Unformatted 1 Insert a non write protected formatted diskette into the diskette drive the rerun the test 2 Diskette Drive System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable e 42 PC Server HMM Error Message Symptom FRU Action Pass N Unknown Media 1 Diskette Drive X 2 Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Test error 3 System Board The File Allocation Table ID 4 Diskette Drive Cable on the diskette is invalid Place Hi density Media in 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive The capacity of the diskette 3 System Board installed in the diskette drive 4 Diskette Drive Cable is less then the capacity of the drive Printer Failed 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Printer Fault 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Printer Not Selected 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Program or File 1 Diagnostic Diskette Not Found 2 Diskette Drive Press Any Key The diagnostics cannot find the USER N COM file 3 System Board Program Too Big To Fit In Memory Too many Terminate and Stay Resident programs in memory while loading diagnostics 1 Reboot the system from the Diagnostic Diskette QAPlus PRO Cannot
140. making connections to the rest of the workstations 4 Attach a 50 ohm cable terminator at each end of every segment Symptom to FRU Index The Symptom to FRU index contains the following diagnostic information LED Indications Error Codes e NetWare load time error messages e NetWare run time messages LED Indications r Notes The PeerMaster adapter LED is normally off prior to adapter download and is normally on after successful download LED Indication FRU Action 5 seconds ON then 5 Insert or reseat memory and seconds OFF Repeats try again continuously DRAM Failure DRAM memory stick may be missing or loose 5 seconds ON then 5 Run the adapter diagnostics seconds OFF LED flashes to get the exact error and 3 times then stays off recommended action POST Failure 502 PC Server HMM LED Indication FRU Action 5 second ON then 5 second OFF Flashes 5 times then stays off Flash Checksum Failure Replace Flash with programmed part Error Codes Error Code FRU Action 027601S0 027602S0 027603S0 027604S0 POST Flash Main Sector Checksum Failure 1 10Base T Adapter 027605S0 027606S0 027607S0 027608S0 027609S0 027610S0 027611S0 027612S0 Verify proper seating of the DRAM SIMM on the adapter 1 10Base T Adapter 027613S0 027614S0 027615S0 027616S0 027617S0 027618S0 027619S0 027620S0 POST SRAM failure 027
141. note 7 Application software error contact the 000A software vendor s support 000B 000C If SYS1942 appears contact the software vendor s support If Exception in Device appears refer to note 4 Run CHKDSK other messages Run CHKDSK and check the memory If a 113 error appears see ECA024 000D If SYS1943 A Prog appears contact the software vendor s support If Int Proc Error at 0220 3557 appears set the Token Ring to 16K RAM window install CSD s If double trap 000D appears install the latest CSDs For all other messages or conditions contact the software vendor s support 000 See note 7 Application software error contact the software vendor s support 0010 Hardware of software error Run diagnostics to check math coprocessor If diagnostics find no problem see note 7 contact the software vendor s support Related Service Information 519 Notes il Memory intensive operating systems such as OS 2 AIX or UNIX based operating systems are capable of revealing highly intermittent errors not detected by diagnostics Highly intermittent errors might go undetected by diagnostics tests If no error occurs during the test multiple replacements of memory might be required to resolve the problem Install all software updates This applies to applications and operating systems The enhanced memory adapter FRU 34F2825 might experience Trap 0002 errors if it does not hav
142. on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 3 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 4 on cached adapters gt Adapter buffer enable buffer size retry enable Device assignment sequence Device not ready initial unit attention clearing Device reset Device starting phase Device in process of starting Device block size determination Device self test Device single block read LBA Device double block read LBA Error occurred after device testing completed PC Server 500 Type 8641 217 Parts Listing VIR 218 PC Server HMM Index System Unit Type 8641 1 Base Frame 82G3593 2 LED Information Display Assembly 06H3766 3 System Board 92F2623 without Memory and Processor Spring bracket on system board 06H3796 Pentium 90MHz Processor Card 06H3739 16MB ECC Memory SIMM 96F9100 4 Panel Die Cast 06H3593 5 SCSI RAID Hard Disk Drive Adapter 06H3059 5 SCSI Fast Wide Hard Disk Drive Adapter 92F0160 6 Video Adapter 71G0650 7 Fan Assembly 06H3407 8 Fan Mounting Support without Fans 8203618 9 Flex Plate 06H3594 10 Right Side Door 82G3594 Right Side Door Hinges 82G3600 11 Pedestal Wheel with Axle 82G3609 12 434 Watt Power Supply 06H3596 13 Guide 82G
143. or powered down it shows an empty bay a blank status not a DDD status FMT Format The drive is being reformatted HSP Hot spare The drive will replace a similar drive that becomes defective in real time At that time its status changes to ONL and its array association is displayed OFL Offline The drive is a good drive that has replaced a defective drive in a RAID level 1 or level 5 array It is associated with an array but does not contain any valid data The drive state remains OFL during the rebuild phase 340 PC Server HMM Status Meaning ONL Online The drive is part of an array If this drive fails logical drives defined in the array in which this drive is grouped will have a status of offline if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 0 with a good status or Critical if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with a good status RDY Ready The drive is recognized by the adapter and is available for definition TAP Tape drive installed UFM Unformatted The drive requires a low level format before it can be used in an array Blank Status Any of the following circumstances can cause the status area to be blank No hard disk drive is installed in that bay The bay contains a hard disk drive but the drive is not inserted correctly An array was deleted and a defective drive is still in the bay Anew drive was installed and the c
144. page 206 and select View Configuration from the Main Menu create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 195 Backup the disk array configuration See Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 180 After you configure the disk array you can complete setup by installing an operating system from the ServerGuide compact disc that was shipped with the server or from the diskettes that came with the operating system To install an operating system from the ServerGuide CD refer to the ServerGuide User s Guide RAID Technology RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk drives in a server into an array that can be defined as a single logical drive This ogical drive then appears to the operating system as a single physical drive This grouping technique greatly enhances logical drive capacity and performance In addition if one of the hard disk drives fails becomes defective the server continues to run with no operator intervention required at reduced performance The defective drive can be replaced without powering off the server hot swap For more PC Server 500 Type 8641 185 information about hot swappable hard disk drives see Installing Internal Drives on page 191 Hard Disk Drive Capacities With a server it is important to understand the implications of hard disk drive capacities and how they influence the way you create disk arrays Drives in the disk array can be of
145. ports of adapters that comprise a VNET e Nodes can be configured as needed the adapter places no limit on the number of nodes per port e Ensure that all ports in a VNET are bound to the protocol by way of VNET with a common network number When the adapter is operating in this mode multiple LAN segments are registered with the NOS as a single subnet called a VNET VNETs are multisegment virtual subnets VNETS are made possible by a layer of virtual network software that binds to multiple instances of the adapter LAN driver and registers them with the NOS as a single subnet Multiple PeerMaster adapters may be configured to interoperate in various ways such as Traditional subnets One large VNET Multiple independent VNETs e combination of VNETs and traditional subnets All physical segments within a VNET are configured to the same network number Cross segment traffic within a VNET is switched by the adapter instead of by the server allowing the server to be more productive External internetworking devices are not required to provide communication between segments with a VNET Related Service Information 493 Configuration Examples Configuration Examples Description s Traditional Adapter mode An 8 port network with two PeerMaster adapters configured in the Traditional Adapter mode see Traditional Adapter Mode on page 495 VNET Switch mode An 8 port netw
146. position the host adapter is forced into a solid SCSI reset state which halts normal operation Related Service Information 531 Other Problems and Solutions The screen is difficult to read when running the SCSISelect utility Press F5 to toggle the display between color and monochrome modes This may make the screen easier to read Important When the format verify utility is attempted on a disk device an Unexpected SCSI Command Failure pop up box containing error information is displayed This probably means that the utility encountered a problem with the disk device or the media and cannot run The following information is displayed in the pop up window SCSI Target ID of the device SCSI CDB Sent for example 2F 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 e Host Adapter Status for example 11h Selection Timeout Target Status for example 00h Good Status e Sense Key for example 06h Unit Attention e Additional Sense Code e Additional Sense Code Qualifier You can probably determine from the Sense Key information both the cause of the problem and its solution The following are more common Sense Key values and their meanings 02h Not ready The media is not ready to format Be sure that media is inserted in the drive 03h Medium error The disk media may be defective If itis a removable media drive try using a different media disk If it is a hard disk drive the di
147. power on the computer under normal conditions you must have the power enable button active and push the start stop button When the computer is powered on it may be shut down by pressing the start stop button This causes one of the following scenarios to occur in the service processor SP non maskable interrupt NMI is generated and sent to the host processor and a count down timer to power off the computer is started When the timer reaches zero 0 the system is powered off This option requires a NMI device driver to flush cache and close the file system before the time out SP interrupt is generated and sent to the host processor and a count down timer to power off the computer is started When the timer reaches zero the computer is powered off This option requires an SP device driver to interface to the operating system to close the file system before the timeout No interrupt is generated and the computer is powered off after the count down timer times out The default value for the count down timer is zero or power off immediately A message is displayed requesting that the enter button be pressed to power off the computer Note When changing the Real Time Clock module or resetting the CMOS RAM you must press and hold the start stop button in until a message is displayed saying the real time clock RTC has been updated or reset Stopping or Powering Off the System When the Start
148. programs Press F1 to bypass the error and load the operating system Press F2 to start the Setup program To start the EISA Configuration Diskette insert the diskette in the diskette drive and press F1 The Setup program and the EISA Configuration program configure only the system hardware These programs do not consider the requirements of the operating system or the application programs Changing the Software Configuration The best way to resolve memory address conflicts is to change the addresses used by the application program or the device driver To do this use the EISA Configuration program If a device driver is causing a memory address conflict refer to the operating system documentation or the documentation supplied with the device drivers Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts 1 Run the Setup program to view and change resources used by the system board functions Record the current settings before making any changes See Setup Program on page 153 for instructions 2 Determine which adapter or device is causing the error The EISA Configuration program specifies how the server checks for resource conflicts Initially this verification mode is set to automatic When the mode is set to automatic the EISA Configuration program tries to resolve configuration conflicts for you Use the Advanced selection of the EISA Configura
149. protected formatted diskette into the diskette drive then rerun the test Press Any Key Diagnostics cannot find the USER N COM file 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Pass N Unknown Media 1 Diskette Drive X 2 Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Test error 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Place Hi density Media in 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive Media drive mismatch 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Printer Failed 1 Printer Printer powered on and 2 Printer Cable ready 3 System Board Printer Fault 1 Printer Printer powered on and 2 Printer Cable ready 3 System Board Printer Not Selected 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Program or File 1 Diagnostic Diskette Not Found 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board Program Too Big To Fit In Memory Too many Terminate and Stay Resident programs in memory 1 Reboot the system from the Diagnostic Diskette QAPlus PRO Cannot Be Re run Because Of Error In Relocating Program Diagnostics failed to relocate the Diagnostics Test programs so the memory space it resides in was not tested Diagnostic Diskette 2 Memory Module 3 System Board RAM Memory Error in Block n Bad bits n Memory error Memory Module 2 System Board RAM Test Failed Memory error Memory Module 2 System Board 114 PC Server HMM
150. received a message telling you the drive is in a Critical state Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Array list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process During an initialization process the Write Policy area displays the percent initialized during a synchronization process it displays the percent synchronized 6 The information area tells you the action you can perform on this screen or pop up Starting the RAID Configuration Program To start the RAID configuration program insert the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and power on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del From the PC DOS start up menu select Start RAID Configuration Program then press Enter If you have more than one RAID adapter installed you will get an adapter selection screen similar to the following otherwise the Main Menu appears Notes 1 The version numbers and slot numbers on the Screens might be different 2 The primary diskette drive is the first diskette drive that the system tries to start from Vendor ID IBM Model DFHSS2W 17170014 Version 6728 Capacity 2150 MB Soft Error 229 62 Misc gl You can select Help from any menu To return to the previous screen or to the previous work area of a screen
151. second 10MB per 8 bit channel The valid settings are SCSISelect AHA 2940 AHA 2940W Transfer Rate Effective Transfer Rate Effective Transfer Rate 10 0 10MB per second 20MB per second 8 0 8MB per second 16MB per second 6 7 6 7MB per second 13 4MB per second 5 0 5MB per second 10MB per second Notes 1 In most cases you can use the maximum value of 10 0 If the host adapter is set not to negotiate for synchronous data transfer Initiate Sync Negotiation is set to no the value selected here is the maximum rate that the host adapter accepts from the device during negotiation Some older SCSI devices do not support Fast SCSI data transfer rates 10 0 8 0 and 6 7 This might cause the computer to operate erratically or hang if the transfer rate is set to high Select a Maximum Sync Transfer Rate of 5 0 for these devices If Initiate Sync Negotiation is set to yes and the attached SCSI devices do not support synchronous negotiation the system may operate erratically or hang Enable Disconnection determines whether the host adapter allows a SCSI device to disconnect from the SCSI bus sometimes called Disconnect Reconnect Disconnect Reconnect allows the host adapter to perform other operations on the SCSI bus while the SCSI device is temporarily disconnected Note You should leave Enable Disconnection set to yes if two or more SCSI devices are connected to the host ad
152. separate FRU from the system board the processor is not included with the system board FRU See System Board Replacement on page 81 PC Server 310 Type 8639 95 Beep Symptoms Beeps symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses intervals without sound See the following examples Beeps Description 1 2 X One beep A pause or break Two beeps A pause or break Any number of beeps 4 Four continuous beeps Beep Symptom FRU Action 1 1 3 1 Run Setup CMOS read write error 2 System Board 1 1 4 1 System Board ROM BIOS check error 1 2 X 1 System Board DMA error 1 3 X 1 Memory Module 2 System Board 1 4 4 1 Keyboard 2 System Board 1 4 X 1 Memory Module Error detected in first 64KB 2 System Board of RAM 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 Run Setup 2 System Board 2 1 X 1 Memory Module First 64KB of RAM failed 2 System Board 2 2 2 1 Video Card 2 System Board 2 2 X 1 Memory Module First 64KB of RAM failed 2 System Board 2 3 X 1 Memory Module 2 System Board 2 4 X 1 Run Setup 2 Memory Module 3 System Board 3 1 X 1 System Board DMA register failed 3 2 4 1 System Board Keyboard controller failed 2 Keyboard 3 3 4 1 Video Adapter Screen initialization failed 2 System Board 3 Display 3 4 1 1 Video Adapter Screen retrace test detected 2 System Board an error 3 Display 96 PC Server HMM
153. setting s of the devices on the SCSI bus do the following 1 Start the SCSISelect utility 2 Select the Configure View Host Adapter Settings menu 3 Set SCSI Parity Checking to Enable for all the devices connected to the SCSI bus Note Some early developed SCSI devices may not support parity checking If one or more of the devices connected to SCSI bus do not support parity checking set SCSI Parity Checking to Disabled for all of the SCSI devices connected to the SCSI bus Try enabling Include in BIOS Scan in the SCSI Device Configuration option of the SCSISelect utility Be sure to power off then power on the computer after changing any value on a host adapter in a Setup program or on a SCSI device Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated See Termination Devices on page 544 Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 544 and Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations on page 545 Be sure the intended boot disk has an active DOS partition and has been formatted Check cable connections Computer Hangs or HOST Adapter Cannot Always Find the Drives Check SCSI parity for consistency and be sure SCSI termination is set correctly See Termination Devices on page 544 Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 544 and Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations on page 545 Check cable length and integrity If the host adapter LED remains on when the computer
154. speaker 2 Check PSTN cable 3 External DAA if installed 4 Modem 10118 1 Run Diagnostics and verify the correct operation of the modem slot 2 Modem 10119 1 Diagnostics detected a non IBM modem 2 Modem 10120 1 Check PSTN Cable 2 External DAA if installed 3 Modem 10132 10133 10134 10135 10136 10137 10138 10139 10140 10141 10142 10143 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 1 Modem 10153 1 Data Fax Modem 2 System Board 101XX 1 Modem Adapter A Not listed above 2 Data Fax Modem 3 System Board 10450 10451 10490 1 Run Advanced 10491 10492 10499 Diagnostics Read write error 2 Riser Card 3 Hard Disk Drive 4 System Board 10452 1 Run Advanced Seek test error Diagnostics 10453 Information only Wrong drive type 10454 1 Run Advanced Sector buffer test error Diagnostics 10455 10456 Controller error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics PC Server 310 Type 8639 105 Error Code FRU Action 10459 Drive diagnostic command error Information only 10461 1 Run Advanced Drive format error Diagnostics 10462 1 Run Advanced Controller seek error Diagnostics 10464 1 Run Advanced Hard Drive read error Diagnostics 10467 1 Run Advanced Drive non fatal seek error Diagnostics 10468 1 Run Advanced Drive fatal seek error Diagnostics 10469 1 Run Advanced Drive soft error c
155. system hangs with one of these test points displayed replace the FRU s in the order listed Test point information is displayed on the information panel as follows Interrupt Initialization TP 1XXS 1XX Test point values as described below 5 Slot number of the card board issuing the error TP Code FRU 101s 1 Current Processor Reset Card 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 102s 1 Current Processor Card Bridge Card System Board 1035 Cache Flush 104s Memory Sizing Next Processor Card Bridge Card System Board ONS Memory Card Bridge Card 3 Current Processor Card 4 System Board 105s Memory Testing 1 Memory Card 2 Bridge Card 3 Current Processor Card 4 System Board 106s Memory Testing Memory Card 2 Bridge Card 3 Current Processor Card 4 System Board 107s 1 Any Processor Card Multiprocessor Cache Test 2 System Board See Undetermined Failing 3 Memory Card Processor Diagnostics on 4 Bridge Card page 369 108s 1 Memory Card Memory Testing 2 Bridge Card 3 Current Processor Card 4 System Board 380 Server HMM TP Code FRU 109s System Board LED Blink Test 2 Current Processor Card 3 Bridge Card 10As 1 Current Processor Interrupt Testing Card See Undetermined Failing 2 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on 3 System Board page 369 4 Any
156. that currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts Always use the IBM PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette for the system you are servicing when assigning interrupts for EISA and ISA adapters You cannot assign an EISA or ISA adapter the same interrupt that you have assigned to a PCI adapter This is because the server does not support interrupt sharing among PCI EISA and ISA adapters If a situation occurs where you need an additional interrupt you can use an interrupt from another function that you might not need such as the IDE controller Interrupt 14 or COM2 Interrupt 3 Memory After you add or remove extended memory you must update the EISA Configuration Diskette Note Not performing the following procedure could result in memory errors and in the operating system not recognizing the added or removed memory 1 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 263 2 Select Step 3 View or edit details The system information appears 3 Under Advanced System Feature Setup select Total System Memory 4 Select the correct amount of memory then press F10 260 PC Server HMM Note It is possible to install single inline memory modules SIMMs in combinations where the total amount of memory installed does not appear on the memory configuration screen In the unlikely event that this occurs select the next lower setting on the memory
157. the same array logical drives in that array will have an offline status This means that data is lost in all the logical drives in that array regardless of which RAID level is assigned Replacing a Faulty Drive Note The hard disk drive indicator light will blink when the drive has failed and needs to be replaced DDD state only To replace a faulty drive 1 3 190 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 If the drive failed while the system was powered down a screen appears the next time the system is powered on showing you which drive is defective If the drive is not damaged for example it is not inserted correctly a Power off the system b Correct the problem c Remove the diskette d Restart the system If the drive is defective a Press Y Yes to reconfigure the system b Press Ctrl Alt Del when instructed to restart the system The Main Menu appears c Select Rebuild device PC Server HMM At this point the drive status shows DDD Warning Removing the wrong hard disk drive can cause loss of all data in the array d Replace the defective drive Refer to Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E on page 204 e After you have replaced the drive press Enter The system will reconfigure to include the drive and the drive s status will change to OFL f Allow the system to complete the
158. the 370 processor LTRENAME EXE Rename the title bar of a CM 2 3270 session RDEVMAP CMD Reconfigure directory and path names in a DEVMAP SYSSOWN CMD Avoid rebuilding the VM central processor CP nucleus when you want to add a new volume 9346CMD EXE Issue tape positioning commands to the 1 4 tape drive PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 225 VSE ESA TMOUNT Utility PC Server System 390 utility program called TMOUNT JCL is also provided for VSE ESA This program runs in a VSE ESA batch partition and performs the same functions for VM ESA and OS 2 respectively Configuration In addition to the configuration program for the Server 500 see Configuration Server 500 a configuration program is provided for configuring the S 390 Microprocessor complex see Microprocessor Complex Configuration S 390 Configuration Server 500 The Server 500 Configuration Program requires the following information for each card adapter and device installed in the computer ADF and DGF files Normally found on the option diskette for the card or device and must be installed on the default drive e device driver statement in the config sys file Required for the computer to load the necessary files required to support the card or device Note The device driver statement for the P 390 card should be the last statement last line in the config sys file
159. the Reference Diskette b From the Main Menu select Set Configuration c From the Set Configuration menu select View PCI Device Configuration 2 Compare the devices listed for each PCI slot with what is physically installed in the system If an installed device does not appear on the list you may have one of the following conditions a The missing device may be defective or require an additional diagnostic diskette or service manual b A defect may have caused the PCI adapter to disappear from the list 398 PC Server HMM Parts Listing PC Server 720 Type 8642 399 Index System Unit Type 8642 1 Base Frame 2X CD ROM 82G3593 Base Frame 4X CD ROM 06H8685 2 Information Display Assembly LED 82G3614 Display Panel Support 06H7961 3 System Board without Memory 06H1810 and Processor 8MB ECC X36 Memory SIMM 06H7760 4 Panel Die Cast 06H3573 5 SCSI Fast Wide Adaptec Adapter 020 Only 0696431 AHA 2940W 6 SCSI 2 Fast Wide RAID Adapter 06H3059 1Z0 2ZS and 4ZS 7 Fan 82G3616 8 Fan Mounting Support without Fans 82G3618 9 Flex Plate 06H3574 10 Right Side Door 82G3594 Right Side Door Hinges with Screws 82G3600 11 Pedestal Wheel with Axle 82G3609 12 470 Watt Power Supply Assembly 06H3589 13 Processor Card Support 06H8683 14 PCI Bridge Card 71G0694 15 512MB Memory Card 71G0
160. the server the drives that are PC Server 520 Type 8641 281 connected to the adapter in the lowest number expansion slot are assigned drive letters first When SCSI devices are chained both ends of the chain cable require a terminator The purpose of these terminators is to ensure that the quality of the signal is maintained throughout the SCSI chain If you attach SCSI devices internal or external you must terminate the last device in the chain or the end of the cable must be terminated Note The backplanes automatically set termination for all the drives in the hot swap bays p 7 104 p Terminator JM The SCSI 2 adapter automatically adjusts for termination 282 PC Server HMM Power Supplies Type 8641 The 520 computer is shipped with a primary power supply An additional or optional power supply can be added to the computer Connectors are used to transfer the primary power supply voltages and signals from the primary power supply to the optional power supply The following illustrations show how the two power supplies are connected r Attention When replacing the primary power supply cover plate rotate the plate 180 This will leave an opening for the primary power supply connector cable that connects to the optional power supply Failure to do So will cause the power supply connector cable to be crimped when the plate is replaced Note Tabs are locate
161. to a predetermined value e For proper operation of RAID levels 1 and 5 Note Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and the corresponding parity information is initialized to the correct value Initialize more than one logical drive at a time Interrupt the initialization process at any time by pressing Esc Restart the initialization process by pressing Enter the process by pressing Esc again Synchronize logical Recomputes and rewrites the drive parity data on the drive You can select this choice to recompute parity data for RAID levels 1 and 5 This selection does not alter data on the drive The synchronization process can be done on multiple logical drives Rebuild device Rebuilds logical drives The rebuild operation is supported only for RAID levels 1 and 5 Advanced functions Changes the write policy the way data is written to the drive to saves your configuration information to a diskette restores it from a diskette or changes RAID parameters This choice also allows you to do a low level format Drive information Displays information about the SCSI devices hard disk CD ROM tape and so on connected to the RAID adapter Exit Leaves the Main Menu Viewing the RAID Configuration Before creating or changing a disk array you can look at the current configuration by selecting View Configuration from the Main Menu of the
162. to do the following Start a program Display a message e Power off the computer If the computer will not already be power on when it is time to start a program or display a message a setting can be selected to power on the computer at the appropriate time To select and activate deactivate or change the Scheduler feature see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 Wake Up on Ring You can select settings so that if the modems receives a call the computer is in the suspend state the computer wakes up on the first ring that is it returns to full power To select the Wake Up on Ring settings feature see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 Formatting Diskettes To format a diskette within the Diagnostic programs select one of the following options Format A high density 1 44MB Format A low density 720KB Format B high density 1 44MB Format B low density 720KB After selecting a diskette format option follow the instructions that appear on the screen Hard Disk Drive Boot Error A hard disk drive boot error error codes 1996 and 1999030 can be caused by the following 74 PC Server HMM Cause Actions The start up drive is not in Check the configuration and the boot sequence in ensure the start up drive is configuration in the boot sequence No operating system In stall an operating system installed on the boot drive on the boot drive The boot sector on the
163. up the drive Refer to the system publications for more information 4 If the hot swap hard disk drive is still not available to the system remove and replace the FRUs in the following order and run the system diagnostics after each FRU is replaced a Hot swap hard disk drive carrier address cable b Hot swap hard disk drive carrier c Hot swap hard disk drive d Backplane One manual plug device is not available to the system 1 Verify that all cables are properly connected 2 Send the command from the system to start the drive 3 If the manual plug device is still not available to the system exchange the FRUs in the following order then run the system diagnostics after each FRU is replaced a Interposer on the manual plug tape drives b Manual plug device c Internal SCSI cable Encolsure 3517 419 Parts Listing PC Server HMM 420 Index SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 1 2 3 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 19 Top Cover Assembly Screws Top Cover Assembly 4 each 4GB 8GB 4 mm Tape Drive Screws 4 mm Tape Drive 4 each SCSI Cable Assembly Internal Screw locks SCSI Cable 2 each Cable Tie Backplane Assembly with 5 bay hot swap cage Screws Backplane Assembly 8 each Control Panel Assembly Blank Media Bay Panel IBM Logo Front Cover Assembly 16 Bit Power C
164. view the IRQ DMA assignments memory usage and device drivers Select System Utilities Run a low level format also contains system utilities Format a diskette 82 PC Server HMM Undetermined Problem Check the power supply voltages See Power Supply on page 71 If the voltages are correct return here and continue with the following steps 1 Power off the computer 2 Remove or disconnect the following one at a time Non IBM devices External devices modem printer or mouse Math coprocessor Any adapters Riser card Memory modules Before removing or replacing memory modules see System Board Memory on page 79 g Extended video memory h External Cache i 1 2 External Cache RAM Hard disk drive k Diskette drive 3 Power on the computer to re test the system 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you find the failing device or adapter If all devices and adapters have been removed and the problem continues replace the system board See System Board Replacement on page 81 PC Server 310 Type 8639 83 Using the Test Programs The test programs provide advanced functions and utilities for users and service or support professionals to troubleshoot even the most difficult problems Program Navigation You can maneuver within the test programs by typing the first letter of a menu choice using the function keys or using command line options Using the First Letter of a
165. you can do one of the following Define the logical drive or drives for this array then create another array and its logical drives See Defining Logical Drives on page 353 Create another array now by repeating steps 2 through 5 in this procedure then define logical drives for both arrays Note You must define at least one logical drive for each created array before you can exit the configuration program e Continue with Defining Logical Drives on page 353 Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array To add storage capacity to your server without disturbing existing data 1 2 352 Install the additional hard disk drive or drives See Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 on page 345 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 Create a new disk array and define logical drives See Creating a Disk Array on page 351 for additional information PC Server HMM Defining Logical Drives After you have created an array you must define a logical drive You cannot leave the RAID configuration program until you define the logical drives for any created arrays To define a logical drive 1 Select Define Logical drive from the Create Delete Array menu The Create Delete Array menu screen appears the cursor is active in the Array list Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the array you want to
166. you power off the server It takes that long for the system to move the data from the cache memory to the storage device Failure to follow this practice can result in lost data Press Enter to change the write policy Notice that WT changes to WB You can press Enter to alternate between WT and WB When you have made your choice press Esc to return to the Advanced Functions menu Select Exit The Confirm pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action To return the setting to its original state select No To save your changes select Yes Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 180 for more information PC Server HMM Formatting Drives You can perform a low level format on drives with RDY ready OFL offline or UNF unformatted status Note The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functions menu provides a low level format If you install a new hard disk drive that requires a standard format use the Format command provided by your operating system The Format program works like the low level format program in the advanced diagnostics portion of the system programs It is provided in the IBM RAID configuration program so that you can perform a low level format on a drive controlled by the RAID adapter To perform a low level format 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configura
167. 0 processor 390 I O Trace Used to trace I O request between the 390 processor and its I O subsystem The trace can be selected by device and can be written to an OS 2 file It can also be displayed in a Presentation Manager window by selecting the 390 I O trace icon See Icons System 390 on page 235 Snap Shot Dump Creates a binary file of the I O subsystem to be used by IBM support personnel during problem determination This program is selected by clicking on the Snap Shot Dump icon 238 PC Server HMM Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics S 390 The IBM P 390 Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette contains the programs used to test the S 390 Microprocessor Complex installed in the computer and the ADF and DGF files required for configuration To run the S 390 Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics programs see Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette S 390 Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette S 390 The Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette is a self booting diskette that contains the P 390 diagnostic programs The diagnostic programs are designed to be used with the diagnostic diskette and diagnostic information in the IBM PS 2 Hardware Maintenance manual for the computer you are servicing The results of the diagnostic tests are reported as a success or failure To run the P 390 diagnostic programs do the following Note First run the diagnostics program for the
168. 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Keyboard with Cable see Keyboards 101 102 Key RD on page 123 Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key BS on page 124 Keylock with Keys 33F8433 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT LED and Cable Power 93F2389 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT Mouse 06H4595 Models 000 ODT 020 OZT OXT MDT MZT Power Button 06H1777 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT PC Server HMM Index System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 ISA Models OXT 020 2 000 ODT Micro Channel Models MDT MXT MZT Power Switch with Cable 60G2258 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Rear I O Panel Assembly 06H1786 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT Rear I O Panel Assembly 06H1787 Models MDT MZT MXT Rear Panel 06H1785 Models ODO ODT 0Z0 OZT OXT MDT MXT MZT Jumper Kit 9320067 Models ODO ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZ Miscellaneous Mounting Screws 93F0041 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Speaker 92F0421 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT 1MB Video DRAM 60ns 92G7432 Models ODO ODT 0Z0 OZT OXT MDT MXT MZT 256KB L2 Cache 12ns 60H7416 Models 000 ODT 020 027 MDT MZT 256KB L2 Cache 15ns 06H6052 Models OXT MXT 8MB Memory SIMM Parity 92G7521 Models ODO ODT 0Z0 OZT OXT MDT MXT MZT Battery 33F8354 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT see Battery Noti
169. 07H0516 Index System Unit PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 continued 20 20 21 22 23 24 DASD 2 Drive Cage Models MDO MDS 06H8937 MDV MXT MYO MYR MYT 40 MZ1 MZV DASD 3 Drive Cage Models 000 ODV 06H8938 070 OXT OYO OYT 100 1DS 1Y0 1YT Diskette Drive see DASD PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 Hard Disk Drive see DASD PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 Casting I O Back Panel Models 96G2107 MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS 40 MZ1 MZV 300 Watt Power Supply Assembly 71G0044 with Switch Keyboard with Cable see Keyboards 101 102 Key on page 175 Memory Riser Card Models 96G3692 MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS 40 MZ1 MZV Miscellaneous Parts Kit 06H8940 32X5 16 Inch Screws 6 each Captive Screws 2 each Diskette Drive M3 Screws 2 each EMC Ground Contacts 4 each EMC Spring EMC Keyboard Mouse Clip FEM Nut 4 40 Screws 2 each FEM Nut 2 56 Screws 2 each Hard Drive 6 32 Screws 2 each EISA Blank Micro Channel Blank Memory Card Standoff System Board Edge Support System Board M3X8 Hex Screws 3 each System Board Standoff Thumb Screw Video Gasket Mouse 06H4595 PC Server 300 Label 06H6003 PC Server 320 Label 06H6004 Pressing I O Back Panel Old Models only 96G2411 Models MYO MYT MYR SCSI 2 Fast Wide Card Models OTO OXT 06H8574 0YO OYT 000 ODV MDS MZ1 SCSI Fast Wide ARRAY Card Models 06H507
170. 1 Scanner 217XX 1 Rewritable Optical If an external device and Drive power on LED is off check 2 SCSI Adapter or external voltages System Board 3 SCSI Cable 218XX 1 Changer Check for multi CD tray or juke box 219XX 1 SCSI Communications Device 24201Y0 24210Y0 1 ISDN 2 Adapter Be sure wrap plug is 2 ISDN 2 Wrap Plug attached 3 ISDN 2 Communications Cable 273XX 1 1Mbps Micro Channel Infrared LAN Adapter 27501 27503 1 ServerGuard Adapter 27506 27507 2 System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 109 Error Code FRU Action 27502 27504 27510 27511 27533 27534 27536 27537 1 ServerGuard Adapter 27509 27512 1 Remove redundant adapters run Auto Configuration program then retest 1 WMSELF DGS diagnostics file missing 2 WMSELF DGS diagnostics file incorrect 27535 1 3V Lithium Backup Battery 2 ServerGuard Adapter 27554 1 Internal Temperature out of range 2 ServerGuard Adapter 27555 27556 1 ServerGuard Adapter 2 Power Supply 27557 1 7 2V NiCad Main Battery Pack 2 ServerGuard Adapter 27558 27559 27560 27561 1 PCMCIA Type Il Modem 2 ServerGuard Adapter 27562 1 External Power Control not connected 2 External Power Control 3 ServerGuard Adapter 27563 27564 1 External Power Control 2 ServerGuard Adapter 275XX 1 Update Diagnostic Software 27801 to 27879 1 Personal Dictati
171. 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error time 2 System Board interval is too long between transmitted and received data Serious Memory Error 1 Memory Module Diags Cannot Continue 2 System Board Memory Test error Sorry You Need A Mouse 1 Mouse The mouse or mouse driver 2 System Board was not detected System Hangs while 1 System Board loading a diagnostic test System Hangs 1 Any device Go to Undetermined 2 Any adapter Problems on page 552 3 System Board Too Many Errors Test 1 Microprocessor Aborted 2 System Board Too many errors the Diagnostics Test cannot continue Transmit Error 1 Serial Port Cable Internal or external serial 2 System Board port loopback test failure Unable To Detect CD ROM 1 CD ROM Drive 2 System Board 3 CD ROM Cable 44 Server HMM Error Message Symptom FRU Action Video Adapter Failed Test Result Summary displayed if Fail was at the Quit Fail Pass menu of any video test Video Adapter 2 System Board 3 Display Write error on cylinder n Hard disk drive write error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed Write Errors 1 Diskette Diskette drive write error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Write Protected or 1 Insert a non write Unformatted protected formatted The diskette is Write diskette into the Protected or not formatted diskette drive then rerun the test 2 Dis
172. 178 1 Riser Card 2 System Board 183 1 Enter the administrator password 184 1 Enter new password Password removed due to check sum error 185 1 Set configuration and Corrupted boot sequence reinstall the boot sequence 186 1 Riser Card 2 System Board 189 1 More than three password attempts were made to access the computer 1XX 1 System Board Not listed above 201 1 Memory Module Memory data error 2 System Board 225 1 Unsupported Memory 229 1 L2 Cache Memory External cache test error 2 System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 99 Error Code FRU Action 262 POST detected a base memory or extended memory type error 1 Run Setup Check System Summary menu for memory type change See Setup Program on page 73 2 Run the Extended Memory Diagnostic tests 301 1 Keyboard 2 Keyboard Cable 3 System Board 303 1 Mouse With an 8603 error 2 Keyboard 3 Keyboard Cable 4 System Board 303 1 Keyboard With no 8603 error 2 Keyboard Cable 3 System Board 3XX 1 Keyboard Not listed above 2 Keyboard Cable 3 System Board 5XX 1 Display Adapter if installed 2 System Board 601 1 Diskette Drive A 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 System Board 604 1 Diskette Drive A And unable to run 2 Diskette Drive Cable diagnostics 3 System Board 604 1 Diskette Drive B And able to run diagnostics 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 System Board 605 1 Diskette Drive POS
173. 2 3Com Etherlink ISA Family OS 2 IBM Token Ring IBMTOKMP OS2 IBM SMP Network 16 4 ISA Token Ring Network Adapter IBM Token Ring IBMTOKMP OS2 IBM SMP 16 4 ISA 16 Token Ring Network Adapter IBM LAN Adapter IBMENI OS2 IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet ISA for Ethernet Intel TokenExpress OLITOK16 0S2 Use the NDIS 16S ISA driver on the adapter diskette Intel EtherExpress EXP16 0S2 Intel EtherExpress 16C ISA 16 Family SMC EtherCard SMC8000 0S2 Use the NDIS Elite 16 Ultra ISA driver on the adapter diskette If OS 2 LAN Server provides a device driver for the network adapter use the table above to determine the 518 PC Server HMM appropriate device driver to select during the installation process If OS 2 LAN Server does not provide the device driver use the NDIS device driver located on the diskettes supplied with the adapter Check the adapter documentation for installation instructions OS 2 Trap Errors The following information will be helpful in diagnosing trap errors Error Information Code 0000 See note 7 Application software error contact the 0001 software vendor s support 0002 See notes 4 6 8 and 9 Install CSDs run CHKDSK Replace the defective memory 0003 See note 7 Application software error contact the 0004 software vendor s support 0005 0006 Check the memory Run CHKDSK Contact the 0007 application software vendor s support 0008 0009 See
174. 253 Copy an Option Diskette 254 Testing the Computer 254 System Board Diagnostics 255 Additional Service Information 256 Configuration Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE 256 EISA ISA and PCI Adapters 257 ISA or EISA Features and Options 258 amp ERR Vd 258 Device Drivers 259 Sample Applications 259 PCI Features and Options 260 Assigning Interrupt Levels 260 Memory 260 EISA Configuration Diskette 261 Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette 261 Making Menu Selections 261 Recording EISA Configuration Settings 262 Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette 263 Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function 263 Configuration Models MZO MZV MZS MZE uu 264 Using the Configuration Setup Utility 265 Changing Settings 266 Starting the Configuration Setup Utility Program 267 System Summary 267 Micro Channel Configuration 267 Product Data 268 Configuring Devices and I O Ports 268 Assigning Serial Ports 269 Configuring Video Options 269 Date and Time 269 Defining System Security 269 Setting an Administrator Password 270 Setting a Power on Password 271 Defining a System Owners 272 Co
175. 3 24 94 Good DO 3840 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 7 7 Luse Select array to delete an press Del to delete the array Press Spacebar to view the stripe order 7 f you do not want to delete the array select No delete the array select Yes Note To use hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array If a defunct drive is still in a bay the status shows a blank bay as though there is no drive in that bay When you replace the drive the status will show RDY after you reconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop up window Note In some operating systems deleting an array and associated logical drives might change the drive letters assigned to the existing drives Redefining Space in an Array You can redefine space in a disk array in a number of ways For example you can combine a number of small logical drives to create a larger one or you can redefine the existing logical drive into several smaller drives Also you can install additional hard disk drives and create a larger logical drive than was possible with the existing storage capacity One method to redefine space in an array is to change the RAID level assigned to a logical drive For example if you assigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decided you needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5 you can use this procedure to replace the existing logical drive
176. 3 5 inch 1 44MB e Optional internal 3 5 inch 1 44MB 3 5 inch 2 88MB 5 25 inch 1 2MB CD ROM Drive Standard SCSI 2 4X CD ROM Keyboard Standard 101 key Mouse Standard IBM Mouse Expansion Bays and Slots e Three 32 bit PCI slots e Six 32 bit combination EISA ISA slots 22 drive bays 18 of them hot swap Video SVGA controller Compatibility Video graphics array VGA Enhanced graphics adapter EGA Color graphics adapter CGA Multicolor graphics array MCGA Hard Disk Drive Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent Can support up to 20 hard disk drives 18 of them hot swap Security Features Door lock e U bolt enabled PC Server 520 Type 8641 245 e Selectable drive startup e Cable cover optional Integrated Functions Vital product data VPD LED usability support Video connector Two serial connectors e Parallel connector e Mouse connector Keyboard connector e Battery backed clock and time date calendar Power Supply 434 watt with automatic range voltage selection 115 230 V ac Built in overload and surge protection e Power supply upgrade expansion option 220 watt automatic range voltage selection add on Built in overload and surge protection SCSI 2 Controller IBM PC Server SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter on non disk array models PC Server SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI RAID Adapter disk array models U
177. 3604 14 Processor Card Support 8203959 15 Guide Support 82G3603 16 Pedestal 82G3608 17 Slim Line CD ROM Drive 06H2150 18 2 88MB Diskette Drive 82G1888 19 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H3371 19 2GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H3372 20 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Wide 06H3956 DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 71G6291 DASD Hot Swap Cam Spring Shaft and Knob 06H5059 DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602 21 CD Storage Tray 06H5060 22 Front Bezel with Shield 8203595 23 Keylock with Keys 82G3606 24 DASD Door 82G3596 25 IBM Logo R 82G3601 26 5 25 Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer 82G3599 27 Control Panel Bezel 06H3595 28 Control Panel Card Assembly 06H3755 Ethernet Quad BT PeerMaster Server Adapter 06H4220 Ethernet Quad B2 PeerMaster Server Adapter 06 6042 Battery 33F8354 See Battery Notice on page 461 Keyboard with Cable 71G4646 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611 C2 Spring 1 each EMI Ground Clips 4 each Hinge Screws 2 each Lock Pawl 1 each Planar Mounting Boss 2 each Screws 4 each Mouse 96F9258 Power Cord 62X1045 Speaker with Bracket 33F 8444 PC Server 500 Type 8641 219 Cables Type 8641 Index Cables Type 8641 NOOO RWND DASD Status Cable Planar Control Panel Cable System Status Cable 1X4 Diskette Drive Signal Cable with power CD ROM SCSI Cable for 2 drives SCSI Fast Wide Cable for 1 drive Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 1 drive C2 Cable with Switch LED Dis
178. 391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286 U K English 1391406 U S English 06H9743 U S English E ME A use only 1396790 PC Server 520 Type 8641 323 Power Cords 324 Power Cords Arabic Belgium Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Hungary Israel Italy Latvia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Serbia Slovakia South Africa Spain Switzerland Switzerland French German U S English Yugoslavia PC Server HMM 14F0033 1339520 1339520 1339520 13F9997 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 14F0087 14F0069 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 14F0015 1339520 1339520 14F0051 62X1045 14F0033 1339520 PC Server 720 Type 8642 Features tue ae ae urge oe a Diagnostic Information Additional Service Information Administration Monitoring Utilities Advanced Functions Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration Restoring the Disk Array Configuration Using the Advanced Functions Changing the Write Policy Formatting Drives Changing the RAID Parameters Configuring the Disk Array RAID Technology Hard Disk Drive Capacities Additional Storage Capacity The RAID Configuration Program Screens DASD Tray SCSI IDs LED Hot Swap Drive Maintenance Obtaining Drive Status Bay Array Selection List
179. 4 82G3617 2 Diskette Drive 3X Signal Cable with power 0693405 3 SCSI Fast Wide Cable for 3 drives 06H6661 120 225 and 425 SCSI Fast Wide Cable for 3 drives 020 Only 06H6675 4 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 1 drive 82G3610 SCSI Fast Wide ID Select Cable 06H3957 5 SCSI Fast Wide Cable Flex for 1 drive 06H6145 C2 Cable with Switch 82G3612 Fan Cable Assembly 06H7870 Information Display Cable 2X13 06H8679 Dual Serial Cable Assembly 06H7868 Options Type 8642 4mm DAT Autoloader 06H7541 16MB ECC Memory SIMM 06H7761 32MB ECC Memory SIMM 06H7762 220 Watt Power Supply Assembly 06H3237 C2 Cable Cover 71G6290 Cable Cover Thumbscrew 61G3842 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Narrow 71G6292 P54C 100 66MHz Processor Card 71G0692 Eithernet PeerMaster Quad BT Adapter 06H4220 with coax cable connector Eithernet PeerMaster Quad B2 Adapter 06H6042 with twisted pair cable connector SCSI PCI Option CD to Backplane Cable 06H6876 SCSI Backplane to CD ROM Terminator Cable 06H3751 RAID Controller to Backplane Cable 83G3613 PC Server 720 Type 8642 401 Keyboards 101 102 Key Keyboards 101 102 Key Arabic 1391490 Belgium Dutch 1391414 Belgium French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 139
180. 45 Using a SCSI Drive as C and Another SCSI Drive as D 1 Be sure the computer s CMOS Setup is set to No Drives Installed as required for SCSI host adapters 2 Be sure the SCSI drive to be used as drive C is set to SCSI ID 0 See SCSI Disk Utility on page 542 3 Set the SCSI drive to be used as drive D to SCSI ID 1 4 Try enabling Include in BIOS Scan in the SCSI Device Configuration option of the SCSISelect utility See SCSI Device Configuration on page 538 5 Be sure to power off then power on the computer after changing any values on the host adapter in Setup or on a SCSI device 6 Be sure that SCSI parity checking is consistently enabled or disabled on the SCSI bus 7 Verify that the host adapter and the SCSI devices are properly configured and installed 8 Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated 9 Be sure the disk is formatted and has a DOS partition Run the Format Disk utility accessible through SCSISel ect See SCSI Disk Utility on page 542 Using a Standard Drive as C and a SCSI Drive as D 1 If a second hard disk drive is installed use the Setup program to map the second hard disk drive out of the configuration 2 Be sure the SCSI drive to be used as drive D is set to SCSI ID 0 You can use the SCSISelect utility to determine the SCSI address of the peripherals on the SCSI bus 3 Be sure the SCSI parity checking is consistently enabled or disabled on all devices on the SCSI bus
181. 5 IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Advanced Functions 1 Help 1 2 Back up config to diskette ch 1 ch 2 3 Restore config from diskette ae 4 Change write policy pa 5 Format drive 1 ONL A 1 ONL B Arr Array Log Size RAID Date mw pam ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status pol 5760 AO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 3 A C 5760 Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good WT C 3840 A2 1005 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good wT 4 0NL B 4 0NL D D 5760 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good c oy lg 5 Condo Bl 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good WT CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 6 Loni D Cl 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good WT DO 3840 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 7 7 Select logical drive and press Enter to toggle the write policy Note The information might be different from that shown in this screen The Logical Drive list contains the logical drive ID the size in megabytes of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date you created it The status of the logical drive is also shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive and rebuild the logical drive You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline means that th
182. 621S0 027622S0 027623S0 027624S0 027625S0 1 10Base T Adapter 1 10Base T Adapter 027626S0 POST Ethernet Port 1 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 1 2 10Base T Adapter 027627S0 POST Ethernet Port 2 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 2 2 10Base T Adapter 027628S0 POST Ethernet Port 3 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 3 2 10Base T Adapter 027629S0 POST Ethernet Port 4 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 4 2 10Base T Adapter 027630S0 027631S0 027632S0 027633S0 1 10Base T Adapter 027691S0 027692S0 027693S0 027699S0 1 Run Setup and verify the adapter configuration 2 10Base T Adapter 027701S0 027702S0 027703S0 027704S0 POST Flash Main Sector Checksum Failure 1 10Base2 Adapter Related Service Information 503 Error Code FRU Action 027705S0 027706S0 027707S0 027708S0 027709S0 027710S0 027711S0 027712S0 Verify proper seating of the DRAM SIMM on the adapter 1 10Base2 Adapter 02771350 02771450 02771550 02771650 02771750 02771850 02771950 02772050 POST SRAM failure 1 10Base2 Adapter 027721S0 027722S0 027723S0 027724S0 027725S0 1 10Base2 Adapter 027726S0 POST Ethernet Port 1 External Loopback Failure 1 Verify correct cabling of Port 1 2 10Base2 Adapter 027727S0
183. 696 16 P54C 100 66MHz Processor Card 71G0692 17 3 Cards Guide Support 06H8524 4 Cards Guide Support 06H8523 18 Guide 82G3604 Adjustable Card Guide Arm 06H8525 19 Pedestal 82G3608 20 Slim Line CD ROM Drive 2X 06H2150 CD ROM Drive 4X 88G4921 21 2 88MB Diskette Drive 82G1888 22 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Wide 06H3956 DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 71G8388 DASD Hot Swap Cam Spring Shaft and Knob 06H5059 SCSI Fast Wide Cable Flex for 1 drive 06H6145 DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602 23 2GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H3372 2ZS and 4ZS 24 Front Bezel with Shield 2X CD ROM 06H7874 Front Bezel with Shield 4X CD ROM 06H8686 25 Keylock with Keys 82G3606 26 DASD Door 82G3596 27 IBM Logo R 82G3601 28 5 25 Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer 2X CD ROM 8203599 28 5 25 Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer 4X CD ROM 06H8684 29 Control Panel Bezel 82G3607 Slim Bezel 4X CD ROM 06H8684 30 Control Panel Card 06H7097 Speaker with Bracket 33F 8444 Rubber Dome Switch Pad 06H7873 31 CD Storage Tray 06H5060 Keyboard with Cable 71G4646 Mouse 06H4595 Power Cord 62X1045 Real Time Clock with Battery 82G3620 See Battery Notice on page 461 400 PC Server HMM Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611 C2 Spring 1 EMI Ground Clips 4 EMI Ground Springs 4 Lock Pawl 1 System Board Mounting Clips 2 Screws 4 Side Cover Foam Gasket 1 3 4 5 Index Cables Type 8642 1 System Status Cable 1X
184. 79 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 14F0087 14F0069 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 13F9979 14F0015 13F9979 13F9979 14F0051 6952301 14F0033 13F9979 PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518 Features Sod Sige Gk dr Ree Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information Power on Self Test POST Power on Sequence Power Supplies Power Supply LED and Button Primary Power Supply Voltages Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages ase Rb US Power Supply Shutdowns Specifications Systems Supported Locations DASD DOOt Ala ae Emma Expansion Bays Front Cover Front Panel Controls 2 Identification Numbers Input Output Connectors Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8629 J12 Backplane SCSI ID Jumper Settings Hot Swap Tray FRU No 06H8631 07H0774 Front Panel LED Status Indicators Side Cover System Board System Board Connections U Bolt Security Optional Symptom to FRU Index Parts Listings e m ud aay Sy qu Cables 3518 Power Cords serva eeen EPA Sd mI S Copyright IBM Corp 1996 423 Features Expansion Bays 20
185. 8 MDS MZ1 100 1DS Shadow Box 96G2411 SVGA Card Models OXT OYO OYT 71G0031 1Y0 1YT SVGA Card Models 000 ODV 020 06H9114 OZV 100 10 120 PC Server 320 8640 171 Index Power PC Server 300 320 Type 8640 Battery Models MXT MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV see Battery Notice on page 461 Power Button with Spring Power Cord see Power Cords on page 176 Real Time Clock with Battery Models 000 ODV OXT OYO OYT 100 1DS 1Y0 1YT see Battery Notice on page 461 Index System Boards PC Server 320 Type 8640 172 4MB Memory SIMM Parity Models 8MB Memory SIMM Parity Models 000 ODV OXT OYO OYT 100 1DS 1Y0 1YT MYO MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZO MZ1 MZV 256KB Cache Models MDO MDV MDS MXT MYO MYT MYR MZO MZ1 MZV 512KB Cache Models MDO MDV MDS MYO MYT MYR MZO MZ1 MZV P54C 50 75 Processor with Heat Sink Models OTO OXT P54C 60 90 Processor with Heat Sink Models OYO OYT 1Y0 1YT P54C 60 90 Processor with Heat Sink Models MYO MYT MYR P54C 100 66 Processor with Heat Sink Models 020 OZV 120 P54C 100 66 Processor with Heat Sink Models MZO MZ1 MZV P54C 133 66 Processor with Heat Sink Models MDO MDV MDS P54C 133 66 Processor with Heat Sink Models 000 ODV 100 105 Heat Sink with Clip Models OTO OXT OYO
186. 9 8125420 81G5421 8125422 8125423 8125424 82G3280 8125425 8125426 8125427 8125428 8125429 8125430 82G3294 8125431 8125432 8125433 8125434 8125435 8125436 8125437 8125441 8125438 8125423 8125440 8125442 8125443 82G3278 1396790 8125447 Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520 Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520 South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520 Switzerland French German 14F0051 U S English 62X1045 U K Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520 PC Server 310 Type 8639 125 PC Server 320 Type 8640 Features 30 ir one c Gerad ee entem a 128 Diagnostics and Test Information 129 Additional Service Information 130 Checkpoint Codes 130 Configuration 135 Assigning Interrupt Levels 135 EISA Configuration Diskette 136 Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette 136 Making Menu Selections 136 Recording EISA Configuration Settings 137 Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette 137 Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function 138 EISA ISA and PCI Adapters 138 EISA ISA Features and Options 139 Riles 4 8 ete
187. 905 513 3367 905 316 2683 800 465 3299 905 316 3299 800 565 3344 800 268 3100 800 268 3100 800 387 8343 800 663 7662 800 263 2769 416 443 5808 Fax 416 443 5755 514 938 3022 905 316 4255 604 664 6464 204 934 2735 800 661 7768 800 465 1234 905 316 4148 905 316 4100 Fax 905 316 4150 905 316 4100 Fax 905 316 4872 905 316 4100 Fax 800 661 2131 800 565 3344 800 387 8483 416 443 5835 Fax 905 316 2445 905 316 3515 Fax 416 443 5778 800 505 1855 800 267 7472 Business Partner Marketing Support Business Partner Marketing Support Toronto Business Partner Marketing Support French Customer Relations Customer Relations Toronto Customer Service Dispatch Customer Service Parts Customer Support Center ISC Customer Service Repair Centre HelpClub Registration BM Direct BM Certification Administrator BM Certification Coordinator Mail to 50 Acadia Drive Markham Ontario L3R 083 BM HelpFax BM HelpFax Toronto BM HelpPC BM Information Network Support BM Information Network Support Toronto BM PC Service Partners Lexmark Product Information Parts Orders Exchange or Emergency Parts Regular Orders Exchange Parts Orders Inquiries PC Co Bulletin Board Montreal PC Co Bulletin Board Toronto PC Co Bulletin Board Vancouver PC Co Bulletin Board Winnepeg PS Marketing Support PSMT Publications Ordering Service Management Support Service Management Support Service Manag
188. 92F0407 92F0084 PC Server 300 Type 8640 49 Keyboards 101 102 Key Keyboards 101 102 Key Arabic 1391490 Belgium Dutch 1391414 Belgium French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia Croatia Bosnia 1393669 South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss French 1391412 Swiss German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286 U K English 1391406 U S English 71G4646 U S English E ME A use only 1396790 50 PC Server HMM Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520 Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520 South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520 Switzerland French German 14F0051 U S English 62X1045 U K Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520 PC Server 300 Type 8640 51 PC Server 310 Type 8639 Features l2 m S A e ut Rede ee Diagnostics and Test Information General Checkout Models OXT 020 027
189. 95 Input Output Connectors 296 Memory Module Connectors 297 System Board Locations 298 System Board Connections 299 System Board Jumpers 299 Locations Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL 301 Controls Indicators 301 Expansion Bays 302 Input Output Connectors 303 Memory Module Connectors 304 System Board Locations 305 System Board Connections 306 System Board Jumpers 307 Symptom to FRU Index 308 Checkpoint Codes 313 Parts Listings 318 System ew Se eae d WS A Rees 319 Keyboards 101 102 Key 323 Power Cords 324 244 Server HMM Features The following features of the PC Server 520 Type 8641 are divided into the following two categories e Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE e Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 246 Note All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE Microprocessor Pentium with 16KB of internal cache e Expandable to two microprocessors Cache Memory e On each processor 16KB of level 1 cache e 512KB of level 2 write back cache Memory e 32MB EOS 70ns expandable to 256MB Note Parity memory module kits are supported but must not be installed in combination with EOS memory Diskette Drive Standard One
190. 9582 Russian Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia Croatia Bosnia 1393669 South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss French 1391412 Swiss German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286 U K English 1391406 U S English 06H9743 U S English E ME A use only 1396790 402 PC Server HMM Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520 Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520 South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520 Switzerland French German 14F0051 U S English 62X1045 U K Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520 PC Server 720 Type 8642 403 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 Features auos Sista eux SO 406 Diagnostics and Test Information 407 Additional Service Information 407 Address Settings 407 Manual Plug Tape Drive 8 Bit 4 mm 407 gt SEE sate be 408 Typei2 ga ace ee ee KS 409 Devices 410 Specifications 411 Locations a SS wes 412 Front View 412 Rear View 413 Internal View 414 Backplane ae ec yao ee ee aE 415
191. Array Array Bay Bay 4 Change write policy 5 Format drive 1 Lon a 1 Arr Array Log Size RAID Date irt 2 ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status po 5760 AO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 3 ONL A 3 C B 5760 Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good WT C 3840 A2 1005 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 4 0NL 8 4 D D 5760 BO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good WT oy lg s Condo Bl 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good W CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 1 amp 0NL D Cl 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good W DO 3840 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 7 7 HSP Select logical drive and press Enter to toggle the write policy The default settings are Stripe unit size 8K Attention Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is stored in the logical drives the stripe unit cannot be changed without destroying data in the logical drives The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on a given disk before writing on the next disk To maximize the overall performance choose the stripe unit such that the stripe unit size is close to the size of the system I O request The default is set to 8K data bytes Rebuild priority Equal Rebuild priority can be set to equal high or low When the rebuild request is set to equal the rebuild request and system I O request get equal priority in the execution order When the re
192. BIOS level Operating system software Type and version level Related Service Information 553 m Important To eliminate confusion identical systems are considered identical only if they 1 2 3 Are the exact machine type and models Have the same BIOS level Have the same adapters attachments in the same locations Have the same address jumpers terminators cabling Have the same software versions and levels Have the same Reference Diagnostics Diskette version Have the same configuration options set in the system Have the same setup for the operation system control files Comparing the configuration and software set up between working and non working systems will often lead to problem resolution 554 PC Server HMM Phone Numbers U S and Canada Note EMEA customers should contact their Dealer or IBM Service organization Before you place a call to the Support Center refer to Problem Determination Tips on page 553 Authorized Dealers or Servicers Number Information 919 517 0001 800 528 7705 800 937 3737 800 426 2472 800 IBM DEAL 800 342 6672 303 924 4015 800 426 7763 800 237 5511 800 327 5711 800 426 1484 800 388 7080 Bulletin Board Service PC Company Bulletin Board Service TSS Only BM Business Partner Education BM Customer Engineer Technical Support BM Dealer Support Center BM Direct Desktop Software Sales BM Part Number ID and
193. BM prototype cards or modified options can give false errors and invalid system responses Refer to the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance manual Reference section related PS 2 reference information OS 2 Version Level Check To determine the OS 2 level on the computer you are servicing type SYSLEVEL at the OS 2 prompt then press Enter Related Service Information 521 PC Server Flash Diagnostics CMOS Access Information The following table provides the access information for Flash BIOS Diagnostics CMOS and Setup programs for PC Servers 522 Server HMM S9A V N ON y ys q 100g enexsiq V OW 024 2798 SOA Zd SOA ayeysiq 100g enexsiq VSIA 055 1798 S9A V N ON y ys q 100g enexsiq V OW 009 1798 SOA E ayaysiq 100g aneysiq V OW 055 0798 SOA Zd SOA y ys q 100g anexsiq VSIA 055 0798 SHIV O S9A ayaysiq 100g enexsiq VSIA 00 0798 SOA L4 SOA WO 14 WI V OW 015 6598 SOA enexsiq 100g enexsiq VSI 0 5 6598 uselJ dmes SOWO dnies SoWO sDeiq sseooy TWI enexsiq sng 959 523 Related Service Information Printer 1 Make sure the printer is properly connected and powered on 2 Run the printer self test If the printer self test does not run correctly the problem is in the printer Refer to the printer service manual If the printer self test runs correctly install a wrap plug in
194. Background The RAID controller requires two cables to be attached to the DASD backplane in order to maintain control of the RAID subsystem the SCSI signal cable wide and a much smaller Status cable The backplane in Bank C must be attached to SCSI Connector Channel 1 If installed DASD backplane in Bank D would be attached to SCSI Connector Channel 2 The same is true of the Status cables Status connector 1 must be attached to DASD backplane C and Status connector 2 must be attached to DASD backplane D if installed The signal cable and status cables for each channel may not be connected to the same backplane For example The Status cable for the backplane in Bank C is mistakenly connected to Bank D and vice versa In this case the RAID adapter is not communicating with the correct backplane but has no way of knowing this so erroneous status information is being presented to the RAID adapter Attempting to rebuild a fixed disk with the cables connected in this manner will probably result in customer data loss PC Server 500 Type 8641 201 In systems which have more than one DASD backplane installed make certain that the RAID Channel 1 SCSI signal cable and the RAID Channel 1 Status cable are both attached to the same backplane are not crossed SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Controller FRU P NO6H3059 DASD STATUS CONN Uchannet Uchannet 2U Chan1 Chan2
195. C 4 ONL B 4 ONL D r M 6 40 Drive ID IBM 0664N1H IM 4 s m s Londo Drive Capacity 1920 MB Soft Error 0 6 6 D Hard Error 0 Mise Error 0 7 CDR 7 Select drive using the Up Arrow 1 and Down Arrow keys press Enter to return V to the previous menu selection list As a drive is highlighted the information for that drive appears at the bottom of the Screen 5 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Note The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped Bay Array Selection List The status of the drives in the Bay Array selection list is defined as follows Status CDR DDD FMT HSP OFL ONL 480 Meaning CD ROM drive installed Defunct The drive is an online or hot spare drive that does not respond to commands If a RDY drive is defunct or powered down it shows as an empty bay a blank status not a DDD status Format The drive is being reformatted Hot spare The drive will replace a similar drive that becomes defunct in real time At that time its status changes to ONL and its array association appears Offline The drive is a good drive that has replaced a defunct drive in a RAID level 1 or level 5 array It is associated with an array but does not contain any valid data The drive s
196. CSI CD ROM drive Bays 5 9 are for 3 5 inch or 5 25 inch drives e The system board supports a maximum of two diskette interface devices You can install a second 3 5 inch diskette interface device in bay 2 Be sure the screw holes in the device line up with the screw holes in bay Bays 5 9 contain trays for housing 3 5 inch drives If you want to install a 5 25 inch drive in one of these bays you must remove screws and the tray before attempting to install the drive PC Server 320 Type 8640 159 You can install a full high drive between bays 6 and 7 by removing the trays from these bays You cannot install full high drives between bays 4 and 5 or between bays 8 and 9 e If you are installing one or two integrated drive electronics IDE drives you must purchase an IDE cable such as in the PC Server Cable Kit e f you are connecting two hard disk drives to the IDE controller you must reset the jumpers on one of the drives as specified in the documentation supplied with the drive e preinstalled hard disk drive was not supplied with the server and you plan to have more than four 8 bit internal SCSI drives including the CD ROM drive you must use an optional 7 drop SCSI cable in place of the 4 drop SCSI cable supplied with the server To install 16 bit devices you need a 16 bit cable and a 16 bit to 8 bit SCSI Internal Converter if you want to connect the CD ROM drive to the 16 bit cable See Internal SCSI Dr
197. D ID Cable Optional for Option No 96G3055 94G3057 94G3052 DASD ID Cable for Option No 71G9743 4X Non Hot Swap SCSI Cable Optional PC Server HMM 82G3617 06H8640 06H8641 06H7957 82G3612 06H7870 06H8679 06H8644 07H1696 06H8664 06H8647 Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 13F9979 Bulgaria 13F9979 Czech Republic 13F9979 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 13F9979 France 13F9979 Germany 13F9979 Hungary 13F9979 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 13F9979 Netherlands 13F9979 Norway 13F9979 Poland 13F9979 Portugal 13F9979 Serbia 13F9979 Slovakia 13F9979 South Africa 14F0015 Spain 13F9979 Switzerland 13F9979 Switzerland French German 14F0051 U S English 62X1045 U K Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 13F9979 PC Server Type 3518 451 Related Service Information Important The service procedures are designed to help you isolate problems They are written with the assumption that you have model specific training on all computers or that are familiar with the computers functions terminology and service information provided in this supplement and the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual part number 83G8990 form number S52G 9971 02 Safety Information 456 General Safety 456 Electrical Safety 457 Safety Inspection Guide 458 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive D VICes 2 ae ae tea qe s RR 460
198. D Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status 3 ONL A a ONL C 5760 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good B 5760 AL 1500 RATD 0 03 24 94 Good C 3840 2 1005 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good s s D 5760 BO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good Bl 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 s Lon D CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good Cl 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 7 7 Enter a value greater than 2 and less than the default value shown or 32 1024 whichever is lesser and press Enter Esc to quit form the size in megabytes that you want for the logical drive then press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action Information about the new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive list Note The size appearing in the Logical Drive list might be different from the size you typed The size of a logical drive is determined by a number of factors but basically the size must be divisible by the number of drives in the array Consider the following scenarios Scenario 1 The array consists of three 1GB drives You assign RAID level 0 which uses all the drives in the array with no parity storage and type 1000MB The number in the Size MB field will be 999 which is the number closest to and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3 Scenario 2 The array consists of three 1GB drives and you assign RAID level 5 Data is striped across all three drives in the array but the space equivalent to that of on
199. Diagnostics diskette into drive A Power on all external devices Step 001 continues PC Server 310 Type 8639 57 001 continued Power on the computer Check for the following responses 1 One beep 2 Readable instructions or the Main Menu DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES Yes No 002 If Rapid Resume is displayed do the following 1 Disable Rapid Resume See Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 2 Run the Diagnostics tests 3 Enable Rapid Resume after service is complete If the computer hangs during Rapid Resume do the following 1 Power off then power on the computer 2 When the hard disk drive activity light comes on press Ctrl Alt Del to exit Rapid Resume and restart the computer Rapid Resume is now turned off Go to the Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 003 ARE ALL ADAPTERS AND DEVICES INSTALLED IN THE COMPUTER HIGHLIGHTED ON THE MODULE TEST MENU Yes No 004 Go to Module Test Menu on page 67 005 Run the Advanced Diagnostics test If necessary refer to Additional Service Information on page 67 e If you receive an error go to Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 e If the test stops and you cannot continue replace the last device tested e If the computer has incorrect keyboard responses go to Keyboard on page 515 If the printer has
200. Expandable to two microprocessors Cache Memory e 256KB of level 2 cache upgradable to 512KB Memory Standard 16 min expandable to 256MB 70 ns parity 8 single inline memory module sockets Diskette Drives Standard one 3 5 inch 1 44MB e Optional internal Hard Disk Drive Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent Supports up to 7 internal hard disk drives CD ROM Drive e Standard SCSI 2 Keyboard and Mouse e 101 key keyboard e Mouse Expansion 6 EISA ISA slots 3 PCI slots 1 shared slot Up to 10 drive bays Video e SVGA Adapter e Compatibility Video graphics adapter VGA Enhanced graphics adapter EGA Color graphics adapter CGA Multicolor graphics array MCGA Security Features Bolt down capability Door lock e Supervisor and user passwords e Selectable drive startup Security cover optional Upgradable POST and BIOS e Upgradable EEPROM on the system board BIOS upgrades when available Integrated Functions Video port on an adapter 2 serial ports 1 parallel port e Mouse port Keyboard port e Battery backed clock and calendar SCSI 2 connectors on an adapter 128 PC Server HMM 2 internal connectors 1 external connector Power Supply 300 watt with voltage switch 115 230 V ac e Built in overload and surge protection SCSI 2 Controller varies by model IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter 2 interna
201. Finland France Germany Hungary Israel Italy Latvia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Serbia Slovakia South Africa Spain Switzerland Switzerland French German U S English Yugoslavia PC Server HMM 14F0033 1339520 1339520 1339520 13F9997 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 14F0087 14F0069 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 1339520 14F0015 1339520 1339520 14F0051 62X1045 14F0033 1339520 PC Server 500 Type 8641 Features Loue oo Lupe erm 178 Diagnostics and Test Information 178 Additional Service Information 179 Administration Monitoring Utilities 179 Advanced Functions 180 Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration 180 Restoring the Disk Array Configuration 181 Using the Advanced Functions 181 Changing the Write Policy 181 Formatting Drives 183 Changing the RAID Parameters 183 Configuring the Disk Array 185 RAID Technology 185 Hard Disk Drive Capacities 186 Additional Storage Capacity 186 The RAID Configuration Program Screens 186 Drive Maintenance 187 Obtaining Drive Status 188 Bay Array Selection List 188 Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure 189 Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications 190 Replacing a Faulty Drive 190 Drivers tmt seas a ie 191 Ins
202. I 2 controller from its default value of 7 SCSI Parity Checking Enable or disable parity checking on the SCSI 2 adapter or controller The default value is Enabled Host Adapter SCSI Configure SCSI 2 adapter or controller Termination termination The default value is Low On High On SCSI Device Configure SCSI device parameters Configuration Before you can make updates you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to configure Advanced Configuration Options View or change the settings for advanced configuration options These include e Startable CD ROM drive When set to On the CD ROM drive can be included as a startup device For this option to take effect you must insert a startable CD in the CD ROM drive e Initi3Extensions When set to On these BIOS extensions are enabled e Reverse Scan When Reverse Scan is set to Off and the SCSI controller is set to the default value of 7 scanning order proceeds from 0 to 6 then 8 to 15 When this choice is set to On the scanning order proceeds from SCSI ID 6 to 0 then 15 to 8 SCSI Disk Utilities To see the IDs that are assigned to each SCSI device or format a drive select SCSI Disk Utilities from the SCSISelect Utility program menu To use the utility program select a drive from the list Read the screens carefully before making a selection 548 PC Server HMM Using the Low Level Format Program On non disk arra
203. I interrupt to IRQ 14 Pins 11 12 Reserved Jumpers Jumper Setting W20 Pins 2 3 J5 Installed J6 Pins 1 2 PC Server 300 Type 8640 31 Symptom to FRU Index This index supports the PC Server 300 Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 The Symptom to FRU Index lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes X can be any number or letter Note For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus PRO diagnostics code refer to the manual for that device For information on Go to Additional service help Related Service Information For example 0S 2 Trap on page 453 errors Possible software and Software Hardware Mismatch hardware mismatch Problems on page 550 problems Not repairable by replacing FRUs Power supply problems Power Supply Voltages on page 20 32 PC Server HMM No Beep Symptoms No Beep Symptom FRU Action No beep fan runs and 000215XX is displayed Check memory 1 System Board Memory 2 Processor 3 System Board No beep fan runs and 000258XX is displayed Check memory 1 System Board No beep and the computer 1 Speaker Assembly is otherwise functional 2 Processor 3 System Board No beep
204. IBM PC Servers S30H 2501 01 Hardware Maintenance Manual March 1996 Use this manual with the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices in your manual Second Edition March 1996 The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time It is possible that this publication may contain reference to or information about IBM products machines and programs programming or services that are not announced in your country Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM produ
205. Listing IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 Features uu A hae Dae BAe RO Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information Locations s x A a PC Server 520 8641 Features oy De BE M Diagnostics and Test Information Models EZO EZV EZG EZS aos ee oe Ds Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Diagnostics and Test Information Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL 251 Additional Service Information 256 Locations Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE 294 Locations Models MZO MZV MZS MZE 301 Symptom to FRU Index 308 Parts Listings cairns le ae era TIO 318 PC Server 720 8642 325 Features 327 Diagnostic Information 328 Additional Service Information 330 locations gt 370 Symptom to FRU Index 376 PartsListing o Roxy 399 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 405 Features 3 smog mak ek 406 Diagnostics and Test Information 407 Additional Service Information 407 locations Een ee oho RAE s 412 Symptom to FRU Index Supplement 416 Parts Listing oe ORES 420 PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure T
206. Look Up BM PC HelpCenter BM Software Defect Support CSDs BM Software Ordering Publications BM Supplies Technical Hotline BM Warranty Parts Claims Center U S Customers and Helpware Subscribers Number Information 919 517 0001 800 426 8322 800 999 0052 800 237 4824 800 964 8523 800 742 2493 800 447 4700 800 426 2468 800 426 3333 800 IBM SERV 800 772 2227 800 426 7282 800 426 9402 Ext 150 800 241 1620 800 342 6672 800 237 5511 800 284 5933 914 962 0310 800 547 1283 800 551 2832 Bulletin Board Service PC Company Customer Education Business Unit Customized Operational Services EduQuest Educational Computers End User HelpDesk Support IBM Anti Virus Services IBM Authorized Dealer Referrals IBM Dealer Referral IBM Information Referral Service IBM Service IBM PC HelpCenter and HelpDesk IBM Technical Manuals Multimedia Information Center Multimedia HelpCenter OS 2 Information Line OS 2 Support Services Prodigy Prodigy User Questions Technical Coordinator Program SystemXtra for Personal Systems LAN Automated Distribution 2 OS 2 Bulletin Board OS 2 Application Assistance Center Technical Solutions Magazine Related Service Information 555 IBM Canada Customer and Servicer Support Number Information 800 661 PSMT 905 316 5556 514 938 6048 800 465 6600 905 316 6666 800 465 6666 800 263 2769 800 465 2222 416 443 5701 800 465 7999 800 465 7999
207. Menu 9 Press Ctrl A Test the Computer screen appears 10 If you received the correct responses select Options and follow the instructions on the screen 11 If you did not receive the correct responses reinstall the System Partition on the hard disk drive from the Reference Diskette NOoarRwn gt To Test the Base System PC Server 310 Type 8639 61 Notes 1 Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled before starting this procedure 2 f Rapid Resume is displayed during this procedure see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 3 Re run the Diagnostics tests To test the base system do the following 1 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Remove all media from the drives Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses a One Beep b IBM Logo 8 When the F1 prompt appears in the lower left hand corner of the screen press F1 a second IBM logo appears followed by the System Programs Main Menu 9 If you received the correct responses do the following a Press Ctrl A Test the Computer screen appears b Select System board diagnostics and follow the instructions on the screen c When the QAPlus Pro Main Menu appears press Ctrl A d Select Diagnostics e Select Module Test f If the Module Test Menu is correct run diagnostics g If the Module Test
208. Menu Choice Throughout the test programs pressing the first letter of an option on a menu is the same as moving to that item with the cursor and pressing Enter however this function is not enabled on Test Group Screens Using the Function Keys Use the following keys to maneuver throughout the test programs Keys Action Enter Select an item run the test module or run the test Down Moves the cursor down Arrow Up Moves the cursor up Arrow 1 F1 Calls up the appropriate Help information Use the up arrow key 1 or the down arrow key to scroll through the information Pressing F1 from within a Help screen provides a help index from which you can select different categories One of the important help categories is function key usage Pressing Esc exits Help and returns to where you left off Esc Go back to the previous menu Additional functions are available in the Test Module Selection screen and the Test Group screen using the following keys Keys Action Tab Move to test group or move to parameters Spacebar Toggle modules on off or toggle tests on off F2 View test results log 84 PC Server HMM Keys Action F10 Local menu Next logical unit number for example LUN 1 LUN 2 and so on Previous logical unit number Command Line Options The following Command Line Options are available when initiall
209. Menu is not correct go to Module Test Menu on page 67 10 If you did not receive the correct responses reinstall the System Partition on the hard disk drive from the Reference Diskette System Programs The system programs are utility programs for Micro Channel computers that allow you to Change the system configuration Set passwords e Change the date and time Set power management features e Test the computer The programs are installed in a special protected area of the hard disk drive called the System Partition The System Partition appears on the FDISK and FDISKPM screens for DOS and OS 2 so that the partition can be 62 PC Server HMM deleted and the disk space about 6MB can be used for other programs Before you delete the System Partition you must first use the Back up Restore system programs option on the system programs Main Menu to make current copies of the Reference Diagnostic and QAPlus Pro diskettes Without the System Partition you must use these diskettes to configure and diagnose the computer If the computer was manufactured without a hard disk drive the system programs were provided on three diskettes Reference Diskette Diagnostics Diskette e QAPlIus PRO for IBM Diskette Starting the System Programs You can start the system programs from the hard disk drive or from the Reference Diskette If an error occurs during startup the computer automatically starts the sy
210. Mode select parameters changed not an error 531x Medium format corrupted 532x Defect spare location unavailable 540x Device RAM failure 541x Data path diagnostic failure 542x Power on diagnostic failure 543x Message rejected 544x Internal controller error 545x Device was unable to reconnect 547x Interface parity error 548x Initiator detected error 549x Illegal command or command out of sequence error Format in progress not error 5 1 Spinup in progress 601x SCSI bus reset occurred 392 PC Server HMM Information 602x SCSI interface fault 610x Selection timeout error device not available 611x Unexpected bus free 612x Mandatory SCSI message rejected 613x Invalid SCSI phase sequence 620x Short length record error 702x Device not ready removable media devices 704x Device not ready non removable media devices 728x Media changed error would not clear 731x Medium format corrupted format unit interrupted format must be issued again 7FOx Format in progress prior format unit issued being completed 7F1x Spinup in progress Q Codes All error codes with 1 are developed using information returned by either an adapter or device The Q value defines the origin of the EE code that is reported Error codes EE with Q 4 or 5 might be reported that are not listed here or can actually have a definition other than
211. NonParity 1 Disable Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD B1 Init Seattle Cold Restore Mfg SAD 3 Test CPU Regs Cold Restore Mfg 4 Init RTC Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 6 Init Timer 0 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 7 Init Timer 2 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 8 Test DMA Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 9 Test Page Regs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 130 Server HMM Routine Boot Mode Code 1A Verify Refresh Cold Restore Mfg 1B Enable Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 1C Save ID Warm SAD 1D Test First 64k Cold Restore Mfg 1E Clear First 64k Cold Warm Restore Mfg 1F POST with Stack Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 20 Enable SAD BIOSE000 21 BIOS Shadow Cold Warm Restore Mfg B2 Shadow SCSI Cold Warm Restore Mfg 23 Phase 2 POST Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 24 Enable BIOS SAD 2000 24 Shadow VPD Cold Warm Restore Mfg 25 nit Key Board Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Data 26 Save ID Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD B3 Check P54C Cold Mfg 27 nit Q Boot Cold Warm Restore Mfg 28 Periph Config Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 2A nit Timeout Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Tables 2B Pos_Setup Cold Warm Restore Mfg 2F Test DMA Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Locations B4 nit DMA Regs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 30 Test PICs Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 31 nit Vector Table Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 32 Enable Timer Int Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 33
212. ODO sly Be Be eo General Checkout Models MDT MXT MZT From the Reference Diskette Test Options Test the Base System From the Diagnostics Diskette From the System Partition Test Options To Test the Base System System Programs Starting the System Programs From the Hard Disk Drive From the Reference Diskette System Programs Main Menu Module Test Menu Additional Service Information BlOS Levels Error Messages Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure POST Beep Codes Power on Password Power On Self Test POST Power Supply Processor Replacement Return Codes Setup Program Rapid Resume Manager Rapid Resume Running Rapid Resume Manager Standby x vxor mn Scheduler uo ave dut RSS Wake Up on Ring Formatting Diskettes Hard Disk Drive Boot When To Use the Low Level Format Program Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use File Edit r gt 7 ox xd ae RR IE File Edit Function Key Usage Diagnostics Control Keys System Board Memory Specifications System Board Repl
213. Other display symptoms not See Display on listed above including blank page 490 or illegible display 2 System Board 3 Display Power on indicator or hard 1 Power Supply disk drive in use light 2 System Board not on but computer 3 LED Cables works correctly Printer problems 1 See Printer on page 524 Program loads from the 1 Run Setup hard disk with a 2 Diskette Drive known good diagnostics 3 Diskette Drive Cable diskette in the first 3 5 inch 4 System Board diskette drive 5 Power Supply Serial or parallel port device 1 External Device failure system board port Self Test OK 2 External Device PC Server 310 Type 8639 3 Cable 4 System Board 117 Message Symptom FRU Action Serial or parallel port device failure adapter port 1 External Device Self Test OK External Device Cable Alternate Adapter System Board Riser Card Some or all keys on the keyboard do not work gom Keyboard Keyboard Cable System Board Clock Battery inaccurate Clock Battery See Battery Notice on page 461 System Board 118 Server HMM Parts Listings Service Position 10 119 PC Server 310 Type 8639 System Index System Unit PC Server 310 Type 8639 10 11 120 ISA Models 000 ODT OXT 020 OZT Micro Channel Models MDT MXT MZT Cover Top 06H1771 Models 000
214. Processor Card 10Bs 1 Bridge Card Bridge Interrupt Testing 2 Current Processor Card 3 System Board 10Cs 1 Any Processor Card Multiprocessor Test 2 System Board See Undetermined Failing 3 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 10Ds 1 Memory Card Multiprocessor Memory 2 Any Processor Card Test 3 System Board See Undetermined Failing 4 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 10Es 1 Memory Card Multiprocessor Memory Test 2 Any Processor Card 3 System Board 4 Bridge Card 10Fs 1 Memory Card Multiprocessor Memory 2 Any Processor Card Test 3 System Board See Undetermined Failing 4 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 110s 1 Memory Card Multiprocessor Memory 2 Any Processor Card Test 3 System Board See Undetermined Failing 4 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 111s 1 Memory Card Multiprocessor Memory 2 Any Processor Card Test 3 System Board See Undetermined Failing 4 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 PC Server 720 Type 8642 381 Multiprocessor Error Indication IP and FP Codes During the early POST code various multiprocessor bus errors might occur if they do the early POST code will display error information to the information panel in one of the following formats IP 1xx D S xx FP 1xx D S xx Character denoting the type of board card issuing the error as follows C for Processor Card M for Memory Card B for Br
215. Q 15 Pins 2 3 W43 ISA IDE uses DMA channel 6 Pins 1 2 ISA IDE uses DMA channel 7 Pins 2 3 ISA IDE uses P10 transfer Not installed Default Keyboard Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W10 PS 2 Mouse installed Default Installed PS 2 Mouse not installed Not installed Tag Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W24 7 Bit Tag Not installed 8 Bit Tag Installed 9 Bit Tag Default Installed Illegal Not installed W26 7 Bit Tag Installed 8 Bit Tag Installed 9 Bit Tag Default Not Installed Illegal Not installed 26 Server HMM BIOS Mode Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W6 BIOS in normal mode Default Pins 2 3 BIOS in boot recovery mode Pins 1 2 DPU Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W17 DPU generate parity Pins 1 2 CPU generate parity Pins 2 3 W18 DPU forces parity error Pins 1 2 DPU does not force parity error Pins 2 3 Default PCI Port Selection Jumper Configuration J20 PCI 1 master slave shared with EISA slot J17 J19 PCI 2 master slave J18 PCI 3 master slave PCI Compilant IRQ Jumper Header Jumper Setting J101 Open Default Pin 2 Route to ISA IRQ1 Pin 3 Route to ISA IRQ3 Pin 4 Route to ISA IRQ4 Pin 5 Route to ISA IRQ5 Pin 6 Route to ISA IRQ6 Pin 7 Route to ISA IRQ7 Pin 8 Route to ISA IRQ8 Pin 9 Route to ISA IRQ9 Pin 10 Route to ISA IRQ10
216. RAID configuration program To view the disk array configuration 206 PC Server HMM Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 Select View configuration The current disk array configuration information appears on the screen Press Enter to see the stripe order in the Bays Occupied Ch Bay field Press any key to continue Press Esc to return to the Main Menu PC Server 500 Type 8641 207 Locations System Board m 32 bit expansion slots video extensions J25 J27 Processor slot Parallel ports Serial ports Keyboard Pointing device connectors Power on Features jumper Privilege access password jumper Memory module connectors Tamper evident cable connector Power Supply connector Override jumper connector JMP1 Battery Diskette drive cable connector Reserved Pins 1 and 2 must be connected Operator panel cable connector EX FEY S m um 5H E E H il PLA Eg a 208 PC Server HMM Symptom to FRU Index Always start with General Checkout Micro Channel on page 18 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual The Symptom to FRU Index lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this index along with the Symptom to FRU Index Mi
217. SA configuration process and the EISA configuration process Step 2 Add or remove boards If the server is configured correctly this step provides a list of the devices installed in the EISA expansion slots The Add choice allows you to add ISA devices to the configuration If EISA adapters are PC Server 520 Type 8641 261 installed in the server and you have not copied the CFG file to the EISA Configuration Diskette you are prompted to insert the adapter s configuration diskette into the diskette drive The CFG file is copied to your diskette If the adapter s CFG file is copied to the EISA Configuration Diskette before starting the diskette and the adapter is installed in the server EISA devices are added automatically Step 3 View or edit details After adding EISA or ISA adapters in Step 2 use the Edit selection of this step to configure them Use the Edit Resources selection of this step for complex configurations If you change a setting in this Step you might have to change a switch or jumper setting on the system board or on a device Step 4 Examine switches or print report After Steps 1 and 2 have been completed correctly this step displays the correct switch and jumper settings for the installed devices that have switches and jumpers Also you can choose to print a system configuration report Step 5 Save and exit This step allows you to save the configuration or to discard the changes before exiting
218. SCSI device on the SCSI bus If selected the following information for each SCSI ID is displayed even if some SCSI IDs are not assigned to a device SCSI Device Configuration SCSI Device ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 Initiate Sync Negotiation yes yes yes yes yes yes Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 Enable Disconnection yes yes yes yes yes yes Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if BIOS is Disabled Send Start Unit Command no no no no no no Include in BIOS Scan yes yes yes yes yes yes Arrow keys to move cursor lt Enter gt to select option lt Esc gt to exit default Note The menu for the AHA 2940W adapter displays SCSI IDs 0 to 15 Initiate Sync Negotiation determines whether the host adapter initiates synchronous negotiation with the SCSI device However the host adapter always responds to synchronous negotiation if the SCSI device initiates it Note If Initiate Sync Negotiation is set to yes and the attached SCSI devices do not support synchronous negotiation the system may operate erratically or hang 538 PC Server HMM Maximum Sync Transfer Rate determines the maximum synchronous data transfer rate that the host adapter can support The host adapter supports rates up to the FAST SCSI maximum of 10MB per second The default value is 10 0 The AHA 2940W has a 16 bit 2 byte channel that provides an effective maximum synchronous transfer rate of 20 0MB per
219. SI connector ribbon cable AHA 2940 50 pin external connector 50 pin to 50 pin SCSI shielded cable AHA 2940W 68 pin external connector 68 pin to 68 pin SCSI shielded cable 530 PC Server HMM Disk Drive Configuration Problems Problems may occur if a combination of standard and SCSI drives are installed in the computer Standard hard disk drives can be set to the installed or not installed state by the Setup program supplied with computer SCSI drives are not controlled through the Setup program If SCSI and non SCSI drives are installed the non SCSl disk drive is always the boot drive Note If too many large capacity drives are set to start instantly at system power on this could cause the power supply to shut down See Power Supply Shutdowns on page 285 LED AHA 2940 2940W Adapters The red light emitting diode LED on the AHA 2940 2940W adapter lights up when the host adapter is performing activity on the SCSI interface or when other SCSI devices are using the SCSI bus An external LED connector is provided on the adapter so you can attach a cable to an externally visible LED Note If the light stays on when there is no activity on the SCSI bus one of the following failures may be indicated bus is hung The processor s failed e Unexpected activity is occurring or the SCSI cables are incorrectly installed If the SCSI cables are installed in reversed
220. SI adapter if RDDD is 0096 007x System interface control chip test failure 008x SCSI internal interface test failed 212 PC Server HMM QEET Information 00Ax SCSI external interface test failed 107x Adapter hardware failure 10Cx Command failed 10Ex Command error invalid command or parameter 10Fx Sequencing error 110x Adapter internal error log contains entries Reported if no other errors on adapter exist 180x Time out 181x Adapter busy error 182x Unexpected interrupt presented by adapter 183x Adapter register test failure 184x Adapter reset failure 185x Adapter buffer test failure on cached adapters 186x Adapter reset count expired 187x Adapter registers not cleared on reset 188x Card ID in adapter microcode did not match ID in POS registers 190x Expected device did not respond 19Yx DMA arbitration level conflict Y assigned arbitration level 220x Adapter hardware error 221x Global timeout on adapter device did not respond 222x Adapter DMA error 223x Adapter buffer defective 224x Command aborted by adapter 301x Invalid parameter in SCB 303x Command not supported 304x Command aborted by system 305x Command rejected buffer not disabled 306x Command rejected Adapter diagnostic failure 307x Format rejected 308x Assign rejected command in progress 309x Assign rejected device a
221. Scan Cold Warm Restore 2C TCPC Cold Warm Restore Mfg 49 TCPC Errors Cold Warm Restore 2D Find Serial Ports Cold Warm Restore Mfg 2E Find Parallel Cold Warm Restore Mfg Ports 68 CSET AFT Cold Warm Restore Mfg OPROM BF Get MC Data Cold Warm Restore 69 PCI Configure Cold Warm Restore Mfg 6A MFG Hook 65 MFG 6B Init Time Of Day Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD PC Server 520 Type 8641 315 Routine Boot Mode Code 6C Check For Cold Warm Restore SAD Locked Key Board 6D Init Enable NMI Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 6E Set Boot Speed Cold Warm Restore Mfg 6F Set Key Board Cold Warm SAD LEDs 71 nit Flush Key Cold Warm Restore SAD Board 72 Move Error Log Cold Warm Restore Mfg To EBDA 73 nit Disable Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Mouse 74 Sys Reset MFG 75 Phase 2 Exit Big Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Real 76 BOOT STRAP 1 Cold Warm MFG SAD 78 SAD BOOT SAD PROC 79 Start Boot N A Sequence 7A Read Boot N A Sector 7B Boot Sector N A Read Complete 7C Check for CE N A Boot Override 7F Xfer to boot code N A The following codes also produce a series of beeps The series of beeps are listed for each code followed by an explanation of the code CP Code Beeps Definition 82 1 3 CMOS write read failure 83 1 4 BIOS ROM checksum failure 84 2 1 Programmable Interval Timer test failure 85 2 2 DMA initialization failu
222. System board LEDs LEDs System Board and Adapter on page 346 System slows down or boots slowly See Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics on page 369 Check the processors and the System board PC Server 720 Type 8642 329 Additional Service Information The following information is for the PC Server 720 Type 8642 330 Administration Monitoring Utilities on page 331 Advanced Functions on page 331 Configuring the Disk Array on page 336 DASD Tray SCSI IDs LED Hot Swap on page 339 Drive Maintenance on page 340 Drivers on page 343 Front Operator Panel on page 344 Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 on page 345 LEDs System Board and Adapter on page 346 Light Emitting Diodes Liquid Crystal Display on page 349 Performing Common Tasks RAID Configuration on page 349 Power Supplies on page 356 Redefining Space in an Array on page 359 Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E on page 361 Service Processor Requirements on page 362 Specifications on page 363 Starting or Stopping the System on page 365 Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics on page 369 Viewing the RAID Configuration on page 369 PC Server HMM Administration Monitoring Utilities Several of the operating systems that your
223. T cannot unlock the 2 Diskette Drive Cable diskette drive 3 System Board 662 1 Diskette drive configuration error or wrong diskette drive type run Set Configuration 6xx 1 Diskette Drive Not listed above 2 System Board 3 External Drive Adapter 4 Diskette Drive Cable 5 Power Supply 762 1 Run Setup Math coprocessor 2 Math Coprocessor configuration error 3 System Board 7XX Not listed above 1 Math Coprocessor System Board 100 Server Error Code FRU Action 962 Parallel port configuration error Run Configuration 2 Parallel Adapter if installed 3 System Board 9XX 1 Printer 2 System Board 1047 1 16 Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter 107X 1 Check SCSI Check SCSI terminator terminator installation installation 2 SCSI Cable 3 SCSI Terminator 4 SCSI Device 5 SCSI Adapter 1101 Serial connector error possible system board failure Run Advanced Diagnostics 1101 1102 1106 System Board 1108 1109 2 Any Serial Device 1107 1 Communications Cable 2 System Board 1102 1 Run Advanced Card selected feedback error Diagnostics 1103 Port fails register check 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 System Board 1106 Serial option cannot be turned off 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 System Board 1107 1 Serial Device Cable 2 System Board 1110 1 Run Advanced Reg
224. Test Cold Warm Mfg Prompt 4C Test Memory Cold Restore Mfg 4D Clear EBDA Warm 4E CSET AFT M Cold Warm Restore Mfg TEST 4F Allocate EBDA Cold Warm Restore Mfg B6 Set Planar Info Cold Restore 314 PC Server HMM Routine Boot Mode Code 50 xfer ebda vars Cold Warm Restore Mfg B7 Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg B8 Init MP Cold Warm Restore Mfg Structures B9 CPU Speed Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 51 Set Warm Boot Warm Flag 52 Clear Speed Bits Cold Warm Mfg SAD 53 E FLOB Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 54 Enable System Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Interrupts 55 C2 Security Restore Check 56 Init Key Board Cold Warm Restore SAD 57 Test RTC Cold Warm Restore SAD 58 Check For NPX Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 59 reset hdctl Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5A FD INIT Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5B Set Floppy Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Config BA Unlock Early Cold Restore 5C Init A20 Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5D Cache Config Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 5E HD SETUP Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 62 Verify CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Config 70 Check For Setup Cold Warm Hot Key 63 Clear Screen Cold Warm Restore SAD BB Init IRQ Levels Cold Restore 65 IBM Cirrus DDC Cold BC PACP Arbitration Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD BD Enable Planar Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD SCSI 66 CSET BFR Cold Warm Restore Mfg OPROM BE Do ROM
225. The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk array configuration information in its EEPROM electronically erasable programmable read only memory module The disk array configuration is vital information To protect this information back up the information to diskette as soon as you have completed your tasks You need a blank formatted 3 5 inch diskette To back up the disk array configuration information to diskette 1 Label the blank diskette Disk Array Configuration Backup and date it 2 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 3 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 180 PC Server HMM 4 Select Backup config to diskette 5 Remove the RAID controller diskette from the drive and insert the blank diskette 6 Follow the instructions on the screen Restoring the Disk Array Configuration To restore the disk array configuration information in the RAID adapter EEPROM module use the RAID controller diskette and an up to date Disk Array Configuration Backup diskette Note Because dynamic changes in the configuration of your disk array occur due to hot spare drive replacement or other drive maintenance activity the configuration backup information on the diskette might be different from that in the adapter It is important that you back up the disk array configuration information frequently to keep the backup information on the diskette curre
226. Type 3518 433 Locations e DASD Door on page 435 Expansion Bays on page 436 Front Cover on 437 e Front Panel Controls page 437 e Identification Numbers on page 438 e Input Output Connectors on page 438 Hot Swap Backplane FRU 06H8629 on page 439 Hot Swap Tray FRU No 06H8631 07H0774 on page 441 Front Panel LED Status Indicators on page 442 Side Cover on page 443 System Board on page 444 e U Bolt Security Optional on page 445 434 Server HMM DASD Door PC Server Type 3518 435 Expansion Bays Open Bays Bank C Bays 1 6 Bank D Open Bays 1 6 Bays Bank E Bays 1 6 Bays Banks Supported Devices Bays B1 and B2 CD ROM drives internal SCSI hard disk drives or tape drives Banks C D and E Up to 18 SCA hot swap 3 5 inch hard disk drives 436 Server HMM Front Cover Front Panel Controls Enter Button Power On Off Button 44 Power Enable Switch 437 PC Server Type 3518 Identification Numbers Serial Number Machine Type Model Handle Input Output Connectors Note The following illustration shows the rear view of the Type 3518 Expansion Enclosure SCSI Connector Knockouts SCSI Connector Power Connector 438 Server HMM Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8629 Chaini
227. Ware IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines These programs include many of the functions contained in the IBM RAID configuration program but unlike that program they reside on top of your operating system and do not require you to start the program from a startable diskette or from a startable compact disc You can start these programs from your active operating system desktop Each of these monitoring programs allow you view the RAID configuration reconfigure the array when replacing a defective drive and perform tuning tasks such as changing the write policy To monitor the drive status with OS 2 Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows and Banyan Vines you must run the administration programs The RAID controller diskette contains files that must be installed when you use OS 2 NetWare or Banyan Vines See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for installation and usage instructions for OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for Netware and IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines For OS 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager see the ServerGuide CD documentation Advanced Functions You can select several utilities from the Advanced Functions menu They include Backup configuration to diskette Restore configuration to diskette Change the write policy Change the RAID parameters Format a drive Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration
228. a CKD DASD Emulator AWSDEV General interface for device drive emulation of 370 AWSFBA Fixed Block Architecture FBA DASD Emulator AWSICA Integrated Communications Adapter ICA support AWSOMA Optical Media Attach AWSPCSRV Allows communication directly between 390PC and OS 2 AWSPOSDD Supports dynamic POS mode of AWSICADD AWSSTART Starts 7432 managers under OS 2 AWSSTOP Stops 7432 managers under OS 2 AWSTAPE 3803 3420 Emulator AWSTFA Transparent File Access VM AWSWAIT Waits for 7437 managers to start under OS 2 AWS2540 2540 Card Reader Emulator AWS2703 2703 Emulator AWS2821 Printer Manager AWS3172 3172 Local Area Network LAN Gateway SNA der OS 2 AWS3215 OS 2 Typewriter Keyboard Emulator AWS3274 3274 Control Unit Emulator non SNA AWS5080 5080 Driver AWS9346 SCSI Quarter Inch Tape Drive Manager AWSC370 S 370 Channel Emulator Device Manager LAN3088 3088 Emulation over a LAN LAN3274 LAN 3270 sessions non SNA LAN3172 3172 LAN channel Station for transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP VM IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 229 Device Managers Function Name LAN3172 3172 LAN channel Station for transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP VM Device Map The PC Server 390 I O subsystem uses resources available on the PC Server System 390 to emulate the devices available on larger System 390 systems The following device mapping is used
229. a device by moving to it with the cursor keys and pressing Enter a small window appears You can select Format Disk or Verify Media from this menu e Format Disk performs a low level format on disk devices Note A low level format destroys all data on the drive Be sure to back up all data before performing this operation You cannot abort a low level format once it is started Most SCSI disk devices are pre formatted and do not need to be formatted again The Adaptec Format Disk utility is compatible with most SCSI disk drives Run it on hard disk drives or removable media drives that were previously used with non Adaptec host adapters e Verify Disk Media scans the selected device s media for defects Note Press Esc at any time to abort the Verify Disk Media utility If this utility finds bad blocks it prompts you to reassign them If you select yes the blocks will no longer be used Self Diagnostics AHA 2940 2940W Adapters AHA 2940 2940W host adapters execute a self diagnostics Power On Self Test POST during BIOS initialization If the diagnostics fails the BIOS displays the message Initialization failed and halts any further operation of the adapter If this occurs remove the adapter and check for the following Components that are not correctly installed or properly seated Broken wires Missing or damaged components e Conductive debris on the adapter If you see any ph
230. acement Test Programs Undetermined Problem Using the Test Programs Program Navigation Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice Using the Function Keys Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Command Line Options Viewing the Test Groups ace es de ede Changing Logical Unit Numbers Test Group Specifications Starting the Diagnostics Diskette Module Testing Mode Running Selected Module Tests Running All Selected Modules Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups Running an Individual Test Stopping Tests Vital Product Data Locations s at ch vs rm Rene de S eos Expansion Slots Riser Cards Channel Models Models Riser Card ISA Administrator Password Keylock Assembly Exploded View System Board System Board Continued Jumper Settings Bus CPU Speed MHz Settings Symptom to FRU Index Supplement Beep Symptoms No Beep Symptoms Numeric Error Codes Error Messages Miscellaneous Error Messages Parts LISUngs ex a So aide be Ree 54 System 2 sx s Lx 9 RR AY Keyboards
231. ach here 1 Display Connector The display signal cable attaches to IC JI the connector on this adapter 296 PC Server HMM Memory Module Connectors PC Server 520 Type 8641 297 System Board Locations Note A black square m indicates 1 REAL TIME pd 26 42 J12 amp D 215 043 JM 5 Bank 2 044 8 3 02 J13 Rz s J6 J23 PCI S gs 22 PCI2 Shared J21 PCI EISA Slot UPGRADE MAIN 20 EISA Slot 6 JID EISA Slot 5 CP CPU 018 EISA Slot 4 wsse Was w2 EU EISA 51013 w5 028 0029 1 U27 U30 Ji6 EISA Slot 2 U26 U31 025 U32 Ji5 EISA Slot 1 Monon Dporde Sockets 298 PC Server HMM W18 System Board Connections Header Configuration Connect To W12 W31 Speaker Speaker W18 W37 Power LED Pins 1 3 W24 W38 IDE Hard Drive LED IDE Hard Drive W35 CPU Fan Connector Fan W36 CPU Fan Connector Fan J1 J2 J26 Power Supply P1 to J1 Con
232. act discs Refer to the User s Guide that is shipped with the ServerGuide Compact Discs Microprocessor P54C 90 60MHz Processor Complex Memory e Standard 16 or 32 MB Varies by model 70 ns ECC Diskette Drives e Standard one 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drives Number of drives and drive capacities varies by model Keyboard and Mouse e 101 key Keyboard e Mouse Expansion 6 Micro Channel slots 6 Standard slots e Up to 20 bays Video e SVGA Adapter e Compatibility Video graphics adapter VGA Enhanced graphics adapter EGA Color graphics adapter CGA Multicolor graphics ARRAY MCGA Integrated Functions Video port on an adapter 2 serial ports 1 parallel port Mouse port Keyboard port Battery backed clock and calendar Power Supply Power Supply Standard Primary 434 watt Optional Secondary 220 watt SCSI Controller varies by model IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Adapter Enhanced SCSI 2 RAID Adapter Diagnostics and Test Information The following list contains problems and references for diagnosing a PC Server 500 Type 8641 178 PC Server HMM Notes Manual Always start with General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Problem Reference Error Codes Error Messages Symptom to FRU Index on page 209 DASD Adapter Problems For non disk array models see SCSISelect Utility Program on
233. adapters do not use every parameter Most adapters require only a PORT address b The SVGA video adapter in the server requires specific memory and I O address assignments to function properly To avoid configuration conflicts do not assign the following SVGA memory and I O addresses to other adapters or options in the server e Memory address space AQOOH C7FFH address spaces 02bE0h O2EFh 03B0h 03DFh 46E8h 10 After you type in all of the appropriate parameters press F10 11 At the next screen carefully verify that the information is correct then press Enter 12 At the Add Confirmation window press Enter again 13 In the next window add press Enter The adapter description appears in the selected slot 14 Verify the installation then press F10 15 At the next menu select Save and exit the configuration utility Note PCI devices do not require CFG files Device Drivers Device drivers are programs designed to support a specific type of hardware device They provide instructions that enable the computer to interact with the device or to take advantage of a device s special feature The device driver might ship with the operating system the application program or on the option diskette Not all devices require device drivers Refer to the documentation supplied with the option for additional information Sample Applications Some optional devices provide small applicat
234. again Note If a configuration error occurs a prompt appears before the operating system starts see Configuration Conflicts on page 274 Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change the configuration You must correctly exit from the Setup program to save the configuration information Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit menu option on the menu bar Select Exit menu from the menu bar Select Save changes and exit PC Server HMM Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE Option Default Value Boot sequence Cache State 1 Port COM2 Port Diskette access Diskette check Diskette controller Diskette Drive A Diskette Drive B Hard disk boot sector Large disk DOS compatibility LPT Port LPT mode Memory gap Memory Extended Bank 0 Socket 1 Bank 0 Socket 2 Bank 1 Socket 3 Bank 1 Socket 4 Bank 2 Socket 5 Bank 2 Socket 6 Bank 3 Socket 7 Bank 3 Socket 8 Total Memory Memory System Password on boot Post errors Set supervisor password Set user password Setup prompt Supervisor Password is Swap diskettes User password is Video BIOS Video System A then C Enabled 3F8 IRQ 4 2F8 IRQ 3 User Disabled Enabled 1 44MB 3 5 in Not installed Normal DOS 378 IRQ7 Output only Disabled 15MB 8MB Kit 8MB Kit 16MB 640MB Disabled Enabled Press Enter Press Enter Enab
235. all external devices Insert the Flash VPD diskette into diskette drive A Power on all external devices then power on the computer When the POST BIOS Update Utility appears type the number for your country language then press Enter If the computer serial number was previously recorded the serial number is displayed with the option to update it Press Y to update the serial number Type the 7 digit serial number of the computer you are servicing then press Enter Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the flash BIOS VPD update procedure PC Server 310 Type 8639 69 POST Beep Codes The Power On Self Test generates a beeping sound to indicate successful completion of POST or to indicate that the tests detect an error One beep and the appearance of text on the display indicates successful completion of the POST More than one beep indicates that the POST detects an error Power on Password To service Type 8639 computers with an active and unknown power on password power off the computer and do the following Note This procedure will not remove the Administrator Password Unplug the power cord and remove the top cover 2 Refer to System Board on page 92 for the jumper location 3 Move the password jumper to connect the center pin and the pin on the opposite end of the connector 4 Power on the computer The system senses the change in the position and erases the password
236. and numbering of the PCI and Micro Channel expansion slots Note the location of the shared expansion slots p E im Micro Channel Architecture en w Share jPa Slot Liye Share j iu as E PC Server 310 Type 8639 89 PCI ISA Models The following illustration shows the location and numbering of the PCI and ISA expansion slots Note the location of the shared expansion slots Share Siot pin j share Slot Ecc N 7 Riser Card ISA Administrator Password ISA Riser cards have an administrator password jumper located to the left of the battery Note This jumper will not remove the password The setting of this jumper determines if an Administrator Password can or cannot be set on the computer Important If the Administrator Password is lost or forgotten the password cannot be changed or removed If this occurs the system board must be replaced Jumper Position Results 1 2 pins closest to the Administrator Password can battery be set 2 3 pins farthest from the Administrator password battery cannot be set 90 PC Server HMM Keylock Assembly Exploded View PC Server 310 Type 8639 91 System Board
237. and the computer 1 System Board is not functional 2 Power Supply See Undetermined Problems on page 552 No beep fan runs power on LED lights memory may or may not count and blinking cursor continuously loops Processor 2 System Board No beep power on indicator 1 Switch Assembly does not come on and fan 2 Power Supply does not run 3 Processor 4 System Board 5 Any Device or Adapter No beep fan runs 1 System Board power on indicator is on 2 Processor and computer hangs during 3 Power Supply POST See Undetermined Problems on page 552 PC Server 300 Type 8640 33 Beep Symptoms Beeps symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses intervals without sound X can be any number Examples Beeps Description 4 Four continuous beeps 1 2 X One beep A pause or break Two beeps A pause or break number of beeps Beep Symptom FRU Action 4 1 Video Adapter 2 System Board 1 1 3 1 Run Setup See CMOS read write error Setup BIOS Utility on page 21 2 System Board 1 1 4 1 System Board ROM BIOS check error 1 2 X 1 System Board DMA error 1 3 1 1 System Board RAM refresh verification error 1 3 X 1 Memory Module not listed above 2 System Board The first 64KB RAM module failed 1 4 X 1 Memory Module An error was detected in the 2 Syste
238. ap Errors ac he IRA OS 2 Problems during a New Installation OS 2 Version Level Check PC Server Flash Diagnostics CMOS Access Information 0 Printer 2 o isis ee mee ee Ee artes SCSI Fast Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters AHA 2940 2840W Adapter Locations BIOS Startup Messages Booting the Computer from a SCSI Drive Computer Hangs or HOST Adapter Cannot Always Find the Drives 454 PC Server HMM 511 512 513 513 513 513 514 515 515 518 519 521 521 522 524 525 526 527 528 Connectivity Cables Devices 530 Disk Drive Configuration Problems 531 LED AHA 2940 2940W Adapters 531 Other Problems and Solutions 532 Problems Detected During Installation 533 SCSISelect Configuration Utility 534 SCSISelect Configuration Utility Control Keys 535 Starting the SCSISelect Configuration Utility 535 From the BIOS Banner 535 From the SCSISelect Configuration Utility Diskette 535 SCSISelect Configuration Utility Menus Options 536 Configuration View Host Adapter Settings Menu Options 536 Self Diagnostics AHA 2940 2940W Adapters 543 Termination Devices 544 Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters 544 Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations 545 Troubleshooting Checklist SCSI AHA 2940 2940W Adapters 545 Us
239. appears to the operating system as a single physical drive This grouping technique greatly enhances logical drive capacity and performance In addition if one 462 PC Server HMM of the hard disk drives fails becomes defunct the system continues to run with no operator intervention required at reduced performance Hard Disk Drive Capacities With a server it is important to understand the implications of hard disk drive capacities and how they influence the way you create disk arrays Different capacity drives are treated as if they all have the capacity of the smallest disk drive Therefore if you have four drives of 1GB 1GB 1GB and 2GB grouped in one disk array the total capacity of the array is 1GB times 4 or 4GB instead of the 5GB physically available Note The total capacity of the array without protection would be 4GB With RAID level 5 the usable data capacity would be 3GB Additional Storage Capacity When hard disk drives are added to the server you must configure a new disk array before the drives can be used Either reconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacity offered with the added drives or group the added drives into their own array see Creating a Disk Array on page 469 You also can create an array with only one drive The RAID Configuration Program Screens When you configure or view the disk array you will be using the IBM RAID configuration program on the SCSI 2 Fa
240. apter This optimizes SCSI bus performance If only one SCSI device is connected to the SCSI adapter set Enable Disconnection to no for optimum performance Related Service Information 539 Send Start Unit Command is supported by some SCSI devices and determines whether the Start Unit command SCSI command 1B is sent to the SCSI device most devices do not require this Enabling this option reduces the load on the power supply by allowing the host adapter to power on SCSI devices one at a time when you boot the computer Otherwise the devices all power on at the same time Most devices require that you set a jumper before they can respond to this command If this option is enabled for more than one SCSI device the Start Unit Command is sent first to the SCSI device with the lowest SCSI ID After this device responds to the host adapter the Start Unit Command is sent to the next highest SCSI ID with a setting of yes The default setting is no Note The Send Start Unit command setting is valid only if the host adapter BIOS is enabled Include in BIOS Scan determines whether the host adapter BIOS supports devices attached to the SCSI bus without the need for device driver software When set to yes the host adapter BIOS controls the SCSI device When set to no the host adapter BIOS does not search the SCSI ID for devices to control and device driver software is needed to control the SCSI device The
241. ard 4 Hard Disk Cable 5 Power Supply 1962 1 Possible hard disk Boot sequence error drive problem see Hard Disk Drive Boot Error on page 74 209X 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Cable 3 16 bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter 20XX 1 BSC Adapter Not listed above 2 Riser Card 102 PC Server HMM Error Code FRU Action 21XX 1 SCSI Device 2 16 bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter 3 Alternate BSC Adapter 4 Riser Card 2401 2402 1 Display If screen colors change 2401 2402 1 System Board If screen colors are OK 2 Display 2409 1 Display 2410 1 System Board 2 Display 2462 1 Run Configuration Video memory configuration 2 Video Memory error Modules 3 Video Adapter if installed 4 System Board 3015 3040 1 Network Attached Check for missing wrap 2 LF Translator or terminator plug on the 3 Cable Problem adapter 4 PC Network Adapter 5 Riser Card 30XX 1 PC Network Adapter 2 LF Translator 3 Cable Problem 4 Riser Card 3115 3140 1 Network Attached 2 LF Translator 3 Alternate PC Network Adapter 4 Cable Problem 5 Riser Card 31XX 1 Alternate PC Network Adapter 2 LF Translator 3 Cable Problem 4 Riser Card 36XX 1 GPIB Adapter 2 Riser Card 38XX 1 DAC Adapter 2 Riser Card 4611 4630 1 Multiport 2 Interface Board 2 Multiport 2 Adapter 4612 4613 4640 4641 1 Memory Module Package 2 Multiport 2 Adapter 4650 1 Multip
242. arm SAD LEDs 71 Init Flush Key Cold Warm Restore SAD Board 72 Move Error Log Cold Warm Restore Mfg To EBDA 73 Init Disable Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Mouse 74 Sys Reset MFG 75 Phase 2 Exit Big Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Real 76 BOOT STRAP 1 Cold Warm MFG SAD 78 SAD BOOT SAD PROC 79 Start Boot N A Sequence 7A Read Boot N A Sector 7B Boot Sector N A Read Complete 7C Check for CE N A Boot Override 7F Xfer to boot code N A The following codes also produce a series of beeps The series of beeps are listed for each code followed by an explanation of the code CP Code Beeps Definition 82 1 1 3 CMOS write read failure 83 1 1 4 BIOS ROM checksum failure 84 1 2 1 Programmable Interval Timer test failure 85 1 2 2 DMA initialization failure PC Server 320 Type 8640 133 CP Code Beeps Definition 86 1 2 3 DMA page register write read test failure 87 1 2 4 RAM refresh verification failure 88 1 3 1 1st 64K RAM test failure 89 1 3 2 1st 64K RAM parity test failure 90 2 1 1 Slave DMA register test in progress or failure 91 2 1 2 Master DMA register test in progress or failure 92 2 1 3 Master interrupt mask register test failure 93 2 1 4 Slave interrupt mask register test failure 95 2 2 2 Key board controller test failure 99 2 3 2 Screen memory test in progress or failure 9A 2 3 3 Scree
243. arrier Hot Swap Hard Disk Drive Screws Hot Swap Hard Disk Drive to Carrier 4 each 16 Bit 1 1 GB Hot Swap Hard Disk Drive 16 Bit 2 2GB Hot Swap Hard Disk Drive 16 Bit 4 5GB Hot Swap Hard Disk Drive Cable 16 Bit Address Disk Drive to Carrier Latch Feet 4 each Screws Feet 4 each Blank SCSI Panel Screws Blank SCSI Panel 2 each Fan Assembly includes Isolators and Finger Guard Cable Tie SCSI Fast Wide 1X Cable SCSI Wide 1X Cable Interposer 2 x 25 to 68 Pin Power Cord See page 422 Power Supply Screws Power Supply 4 each Screws Power Switch 2 each Cable Tie Media Kit 4AGB 8GB 4 mm Tape Drive 4GB 8GB 4 mm Tape Drive Data Cartridge 8191160 4GB 4 mm Tape Drive Diagnostic Cartridge 8191146 4 mm Tape Drive Cleaning Cartridge 21F8763 05H4680 27H2338 1668454 27H2338 05H4827 27H0863 1159519 26H9180 27H0840 26H9191 06H2187 44H7627 26H9206 06H8631 1147429 06H8560 06H8561 06H8563 06H8631 26H9207 26H9234 49G5445 27H0862 27H2338 27H0922 1159519 06H3231 70G9857 92F0324 26H9205 34H8186 34H8186 1159519 8191149 Encolsure Type 3517 421 422 Power Cords Arabic Belgium Bulgaria Czechoslovakia Denmark Finland France Germany Hungary Israel Italy Latvia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Serbia Slovakia South Africa Spain Switzerland Switzerland French German U S English U K Ireland Yugoslavia PC Server HMM 14F0033 13F99
244. arting the computer If the computer successfully restarts check the following SCSI bus termination See Termination Devices on page 544 Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters on page 544 and Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations on page 545 Cable connections One of the devices on the SCSI bus may be defective Booting the Computer from a SCSI Drive Be sure the standard hard disk drives are not configured in the system using the Setup program Note Standard hard disk drive means the disk drives s attached to the system by a standard ISA EISA non SCSI disk adapter example IDE drives Standard hard disk drives can be set to the installed or not installed state by the Setup program supplied with the computer The Setup program allows you to select a number of standard hard disk drives that are recognized by the system regardless of whether they are physically installed SCSI drives are not controlled through the Setup program 528 PC Server HMM Be sure the SCSI boot drive address is set to SCSI ID 0 and that there are no SCSI ID conflicts You can use the Adaptec SCSISelect Configuration Utility to determine the SCSI address of the devices attached to the SCSI bus Be sure that SCSI parity is consistently enabled or disabled on all devices on the SCSI bus Note All SCSI devices currently supported on PC Servers support parity checking To check the parity
245. ately Note Hot spare drive capability does not apply to logical drives assigned RAID level 0 Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 is not lost even though the drives function with reduced performance Scenario 2 e Only one hard disk drive fails hot spare drive is not defined or is a different size from the failed drive The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID levels 1 5 or a combination of these two levels No data will be lost but the system will operate at reduced performance until the defunct drive is replaced and rebuilt Related Service Information 481 Scenario 3 If more than one drive in an array fails all the data is lost in all of the logical drives of the array For this reason it is important that you replace and rebuild a defunct drive as soon as possible Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped single hard disk drive failure indicated by a DDD status in the Bay Array selection list causes logical drives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 to have a Critical status Data remains in logical drives with a Critical status but you must replace the one defunct hard disk drive promptly because if two hard disk drives were to fail all of the data in the array would be lost After you install a new hard di
246. ating systems that the disk array system supports The monitoring programs are OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor e 05 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for Novell NetWare IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan VINES These programs include many of the functions contained in the IBM RAID configuration program but unlike that program they reside on top of the operating system and do not require you to start the program from a startable diskette or from a startable compact disc You can start these programs from the active operating system desktop Each of these monitoring programs allows you to view the RAID configuration reconfigure the array when replacing a defunct drive and perform tuning tasks such as changing the write policy To monitor the drive status with OS 2 NetWare Microsoft Windows and VINES you must be running the administration programs The RAID Adapter Option Diskette contains files that you must install when you run OS 2 NetWare or VINES See the README file on the RAID Adapter Option Diskette for installation and use instructions for these monitoring utilities For OS 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager also see the ServerGuide CD documentation supplied with the server RAID Technology RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk drives in a server into an array that can be defined as a single logical drive This ogical drive then
247. ation information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 331 for instructions Deleting a Disk Array The last array created must be the first deleted Warning All the data and programs in the array are lost during this procedure Before proceeding back up any data and programs that you want to save 350 PC Server HMM To delete a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Array list 4 Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drive list then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array 5 Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears 6 If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array If a defective drive is still in a bay the status shows a blank bay as though there is no drive in that bay When you replace the drive the status will show RDY after you reconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop up window Note In some operating systems deleting an array and associated logical drives might change the drive letters
248. ations HALT on page 383 Checkpoint Codes CP The following checkpoints can be displayed on the information panel during early portions of the Power On Self Test POST code If the system hangs with one of these checkpoints displayed the FRU replacement should be as listed with the first FRU being the first item and so on The checkpoint code information is displayed on the information panel in the following format CP 1XX 1XX Checkpoint values as described below Notes 1 The checkpoint code will only be displayed by the default lowest slot number processor card Therefore only the default processor card is being tested during this time 2 If a 2 digit checkpoint code CP XX is displayed without a beep symptom go to No Beep Symptoms on page 384 and diagnose the no beep symptom 3 If a 2 digit checkpoint code CP XX is displayed with a beep symptom go to Beep Symptoms on page 385 and diagnose the beep symptom CP Code FRU 141 1 System Board Start of COM 1 Test 2 Bridge Card 3 Default Processor Card 142 1 Memory Card Start of SRAM Test 2 Bridge Card 3 Default Processor Card 4 System Board 143 1 Memory Card SRAM Test 2 Default Processor Card 3 System Board 144 1 Memory Card SRAM Test 2 Default Processor Card 3 System Board 145 1 Memory Card SRAM Test 2 Default Processor Card 3 System Board 146 1 Default Processor Transition to Prot
249. bay Bay Drive Drive Maximum Drive Width Type Height 1 6 3 5 inch Hard 41 3 mm 1 6 inches disk 7 5 25 inch CD ROM 41 3 mm 1 6 inches 8 9 3 5 inch Diskette 25 4 mm 1 inch 10 3 5 inch Hard 25 4 mm 1 inch with disk a drive in bay 9 41 3 mm 1 6 inches with no drive in bay 9 Note 1 Or a drive that connects to the diskette cable Be sure the holes in the drive align with the drive housing Table 2 Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes Disk Array Models 158 PC Server HMM Internal Drive Bays Non Disk Array Models Internal drives are installed in bays The bays are numbered 1 through 9 a 9 8 Ti 7 gt rum 6 5 3 A 2 12 EE Note If you install a drive that uses removable media diskette optical disc or tape you might need to remove or change the cover plate Bay 1 is for 3 5 inch hard disk drives only Some models are supplied with a hard disk drive preinstalled in bay 1 e Bays 2 and are for 3 5 inch diskette interface devices such as a diskette drive or tape backup unit that uses the diskette cable All models are supplied with a diskette drive preinstalled in bay 3 Bay 4 has a preinstalled S
250. bles Serial Port 1 which uses IRQ 4 If this happens and you do not want this feature disabled choose another IRQ for the adapter If you set the verification mode to manual the configuration utility program does not try to resolve a conflict Instead you have to determine if a resource conflict has occurred and then resolve the conflict When the verification mode is set to manual an asterisk appears on the View or edit details screen next to adapters in conflict If the EISA Configuration program cannot resolve a configuration error it deactivates the adapter and displays the deactivated status lt gt on the View or edit details screen Use the Advanced selection of the EISA Configuration Diskette s View or edit details screen to update or copy the server s system configuration information file see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 263 Change configuration resource allocations Use the built in Setup program to view or change system board resource allocations Use the Advanced selection of the EISA Configuration Diskette s View or edit details screen to view the available or the used system resources see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 263 Use the Edit Changes selection to change resource allocations for complex configurations Change adapter jumpers or switches Jumpers and switches define the system resources that a device can use If the settings a
251. build request is set to high the rebuild request will get a higher priority than a system I O request In a heavily loaded system with a high rate of system I O requests the high priority rebuild can significantly reduce the disk rebuild time at the expense of degraded handling of I O requests When the rebuild priority is set to low the rebuild I O requests can execute only if no pending system I O requests are pending In a moderate to heavily loaded system low rebuild priority will increase the disk rebuild time significantly and provide better System performance 488 PC Server HMM Note Rebuild priority can be changed without affecting data in the logical drives Parity placement RA r Attention Once a parity placement scheme is chosen and data stored it cannot be changed without destroying data Parity placement defines how parity is placed in the disk array with respect to data The following illustration shows both the Left Symmetric LS and Right Asymmetric RA parity placement in a four drive disk array Here AAA BBB and CCC are the data stripe units and PPO is the corresponding parity Similarly DDD EEE and FFF are the data stripe units and PP1 is the corresponding parity Right Asymmetric RA Left Symmetric LS Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PPO BBB CCC AAA CCC PPO DDD 1 FFF EEE FFF DDD GGG PP2 III III
252. by graphic 1 Replace memory module shown in graphic of adapter 206XX 1 SCSI 2 Adapter 2 Any SCSI Device 3 System Board 208XX 1 Any SCSI Device Verify there are no duplicate SCSI ID settings on the same bus 210XXXX Internal bus size unknown 210XXX1 External bus size unknown 1 SCSI Hard Disk Drive 2 SCSI Adapter or System Board 3 SCSI Cable 4 SCSI ID Switch on some models Tape Drive amber LED remains on 1 Tape Drive 2 SCSI Cable internal 3 SCSI Adapter or System Board 108 PC Server HMM Error Code FRU Action Tape Drive green in use 1 Tape Drive LED fails to come on 2 SCSI Adapter or System Board 3 SCSI Cable internal SCSI Cable external Tape automatically ejected 1 Tape Cassette from drive 2 Drive SCSI ID on rotary switch 1 Rotary Switch Circuit does not match SCSI ID Board set in configuration 2 Circuit Board Cable Verify drive switches 3 Tape Drive inside cover are set to zero Tape sticks breaks in 1 Tape Cassette drive Verify that the tapes used meet ANSI standard X3B5 212XX 1 SCSI Printer 2 Printer Cable 213XX 1 SCSI Processor 214XX 1 WORM Drive 215XXXC 1 CD ROM Drive 215XXXD CD ROM Drive 11 215XXXE Enhanced CD ROM 215XXXU Drive If an external device and Any CD ROM Drive power on LED is off check 2 SCSI Cable external voltages 3 SCSI Adapter or System Board 216XX
253. by the adapter and is available for definition TAP Tape drive installed 188 PC Server HMM Status Meaning UFM Unformatted The drive requires a low level format before it can be used in an array Blank Status Any of the following circumstances can cause the status area to be blank No hard disk drive is installed in that bay The bay contains a hard disk drive but the drive is not inserted correctly An array was deleted and a defective drive is still in the bay Anew drive was installed and the configuration program has not been restarted The status will change to RDY when the RAID configuration program is restarted Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure Depending on the circumstances there can be several possible results from a drive failure Example 1 e Only one hard disk drive fails hot spare drive is defined that is the same or greater size than the failed drive The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID level 1 level 5 or a combination of these two levels Then the hot spare will take over immediately Note Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 is maintained however system performance will be reduced Hot spare drive capability does not apply to logical drives assigned RAID level 0 Example 2 e Only one hard disk drive fails A hot spare drive is not defined The logical drives in the
254. cations Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE Controls Indicators Expansion Bays on page 295 Input Output Connectors on page 296 Memory Module Connectors on page 297 System Board Locations on page 298 System Board Connections on page 299 System Board Jumpers on page 299 Controls Indicators Power OK Indicator Hard Disk Drive Activity Indicator Power On Off Switch 294 PC Server HMM Expansion Bays Open Bays CD ROM Drive Bay A1 Diskette Drive Bay A2 Bank C Bays 1 6 Bank D Bays 1 6 gt Open Bays Bank E Bays 1 6 Not For additional internal drive information see Internal Drives Type 8641 on page 278 The server comes with one 3 5 inch 1 44MB diskette drive a SCSI CD ROM drive and a removable CD ROM storage compartment The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in your server varies according to the model CD ROM Drive All models come with a SCSI 2 CD ROM drive Diskette Drive The 3 5 inch 1 44MB diskette drive uses 1MB and 2MB diskettes Open Bays Your server has a special design that gives you the flexibility to use up to 18 hot swappable 3 5 inch hard disk drives There is additional open space in the top left bay for two more diskette drives or an additional SCSI drive For installation instructions and information on the types of drives that you can install i
255. ce on page 461 Ethernet Card Assembly 48G7170 Models 000 ODT OXT 020 027 Ethernet Card Assembly 48G7172 Models MDT MXT MZT Riser Card 5X5 06H4008 Models 000 ODT OXT 020 027 Riser Card 5X5 06H4023 Models MDT MXT MZT Power Cord see Power Cords on page 125 SCSI PCI Card Assembly 60H5715 Models ODO ODT 0Z0 OZT OXT MDT MXT MZT System Board without Memory 88G4270 and Processor Model OXT System Board without Memory 11H5545 and Processor Model MXT P54C 50 75MHz Processor Chip 06H5210 with Heat Sink Model OXT MXT P54C 66 100 Chip with Heat Sink 06H6063 Models 020 OZT MZT P54C 66 133 Chip with Heat Sink 06H9891 Models 000 ODT MDT System Board without Memory 60H7198 and Processor Models ODO ODT 020 027 System Board without Memory 60H7197 and Processor Models MZT MDT PC Server 310 Type 8639 121 Index DASD PC Server 310 8639 122 ISA Models OXT 020 2 000 ODT Micro Channel Models MDT MXT MZT 1 44MB Diskette Drive 93F2361 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT 1GB Fast Wide Hard Disk Drive 06H9079 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Diskette Drive Cable 06H6325 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MXT MZT Hard Disk Drive Cable 06H6326 Models 000 ODT 020 027 OXT MDT MZT LED amp Cable Hard Disk Drive 93F2388 Models 000 ODT 020 OZT OXT MDT MZT MKE CR 504 4X
256. ce the following parts with the power on when they are removed from their normal operating places in a machine Power supply units Pumps Blowers and fans Motor generators and similar units This practice ensures correct grounding of the units e If an electrical accident occurs Use caution do not become victim yourself Switch off power Send another person to get medical aid Safety Inspection Guide The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products Each machine as it was designed and built had required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury This guide addresses only those items However good judgment should be used to identify potential safety hazards due to attachment of non IBM features or options not covered by this inspection guide If any unsafe conditions are present you must determine how serious the apparent hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present Electrical hazards especially primary power primary voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal electrical shock Explosive hazards such as a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitor e Mechanical hazards such as loose or missing hardware 458 PC Server HMM The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a chec
257. configuration the screen displays a completion message then select Rebuild drive g Use the Up 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the OFL offline drive you want to rebuild then press Enter The progress of the rebuilding process appears on the screen h When the rebuilding process completes press Esc to return to the Main Menu The new configuration will be saved automatically i Backup the new configuration see Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 180 j Select Exit to end the RAID configuration program k Remove the diskette and press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the system Drivers The RAID adapter requires the installation of device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for detailed instructions If you install OS 2 from the ServerGuide CD the device drivers will be installed automatically however you install OS 2 from diskette you will need to install the device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette Installing Internal Drives The Type 8641 server supports the following drive types Diskette Hard disk e Rewritable optical disc Tape The server has hardware that lets you replace a failed hard disk drive without powering off the server Therefore you have the advantage of continuing to operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed These drives are also known as hot swappable drives PC Ser
258. configuration of the disk array occur due to hot spare drive replacement or other drive maintenance activity the configuration backup information on the diskette might be different from that in the adapter It is important that you back up the disk array configuration information frequently to keep the backup information on the diskette current To restore the RAID configuration information 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu and press Enter Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Select Restore config from diskette 5 Follow the instructions on the screen gt 484 PC Server HMM Using the Advanced Functions This section gives the procedures for using the advanced functions such as changing the write policy changing the RAID parameters and formatting a drive Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you to potential loss of data Read these warnings carefully before answering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAID configuration program Changing the Write Policy When you configure a logical drive the RAID adapter automatically sets the write policy to write through WT mode where the completion status is sent after the data is written to th
259. cro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes X can be any number or letter Note For IBM devices not supported by the Micro Channel diagnostics code refer to the manual for that device Beep Symptoms Beep Symptom FRU Action Continuous beep and a 1 Display Adapter blank display 2 Video Memory if used Run he Display Self Test 3 System Board One long and three short 1 Display Adapter beeps 2 Video Memory if used Run the Display Self Test 3 System Board RAID drives DDD recovery N A procedure not effective See RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective on page 200 No Beep Symptoms No Beep Symptom FRU Action Memory count hangs during 1 System Board POST Memory 2 Memory Option if installed 3 System Board 4 Processor Error Codes Error Code FRU Action 0210 Internal bus 1 SCSI Hard Disk Drive size unknown 2 SCSI Adapter or the 0210XXX1 External bus SCSI controller built size unknown into the system board 3 SCSI Cable 4 SCSI ID Switch on some models PC Server 500 Type 8641 209 Error Code FRU Action 02790XXX 02791XXX 1 Check power and 0 2792 02793XXX reseat adapter 0 27906XX 027907XX 2 Ethernet PeerMaster Eithernet adapter POST Server Adapter error 02799XXX 1 Run Setup and
260. cts programming or services in your country Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995 1996 All rights reserved Note to U S Government users Documentation related to Restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp ii PC Server HMM About This Supplement This supplement contains diagnostic information Symptom to FRU Indexes service information error codes error messages and configuration information for the following PC Servers and Expansion Enclosures 300 Type 8640 310 Type 8639 320 Type 8640 500 Type 8641 500 System 390 Type 8641 520 Type 8641 720 Type 8642 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518 This supplement should be used with the advanced diagnostic tests and the information in the IBM Personal System 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual part number 83G8990 form number S52G 9971 to troubleshoot problems effectively Important This manual is intended for trained servicers who are familiar with IBM PC Server products Before servicing an IBM product be sure to review Safety Information on page 456 Related Publications The following publications are available for IBM products For mo
261. curity menu then press Enter The Administrator Password screen appears 2 Select Delete Administrator Password then press Enter 3 confirmation window appears Press Enter to delete the administrator password Press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System Security menu Setting a Power on Password Whena power on password is set you must enter a password each time you start the system If you forget the power on password and an administrator password has been set use the administrator password at the power on prompt then start the Configuration Setup utility program and change the power on password If no administrator password has been set you must remove the battery before you can set a new password To set a power on password 1 Select Power on Password on the System Security menu then press Enter The Power on Password screen appears 2 Type the password in the Enter Power on password data field 3 Verify that you typed the correct password If you did not type the correct password press Esc and type the correct password 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the Enter Power on Password Again data field 5 Select Set or Change Power on Password to save the new password You can use any combination of up to seven characters A Z a z and 0 9 for the power on password Keep a record of the password ina secure place PC Server 520 Type 8641 271 To delete a power on password 1 Selec
262. d F7 To copy an active marked block of text to a new location move the cursor to the new location and then press F7 If there is no active block of text F7 is ignored F8 To delete an active marked block of text move the cursor within the active block and press F8 If there is no active block of text F8 is ignored PC Server 300 Type 8640 23 Key Description F10 Press F10 to save all changes and exit the file Notes 1 Always make a backup copy on self starting diskette of the AUTOEXEC BAT and CONFIG SYS files before making any changes 2 The default text editing mode of the File Editor is the insert mode To toggle between overtype and insert modes press Insert System Board Replacement Type 8640 computers have one or two processors and other components installed on the system board When replacing the system board remove all of the installed components from the old system board and install them on the new system board If the problem remains check the following The primary processor is installed and seated correctly in socket U2 on the system board e If installed the secondary processor is seated correctly in socket U3 on the system board e All other components removed from the old system board are installed and seated correctly on the new System board Note If the processor s are not seated correctly intermittent problems can occur
263. d in the EISA expansion slots The Add choice allows you to add ISA devices to the configuration If EISA adapters are installed in the server and you have not copied the CFG file to the EISA Configuration Diskette you are prompted to insert the adapter s configuration diskette into the diskette drive The CFG file is copied to your diskette If the adapter s CFG file is copied to the EISA Configuration Diskette before starting the diskette and the adapter is installed in the server EISA devices are added automatically Step 3 View or edit details After adding EISA or ISA adapters in Step 2 use the Edit selection of this step to configure them Use the Edit Resources selection of this step for 196 PC Server HMM complex configurations If you change a setting in this step you might have to change a switch or jumper setting on the system board or on a device Step 4 Examine switches or print report After Steps 1 and 2 have been completed correctly this step displays the correct switch and jumper settings for the installed devices that have switches and jumpers Also you can choose to print a system configuration report Step 5 Save and exit This step allows you to save the configuration or to discard the changes before exiting the program Use the Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow key to highlight your selection then press Enter to make your selection To help you track your progress a checkmark appears on the
264. d on the side of each power supply to secure them together Power Supply LED and Button The power good LED and button are located on the side of the primary power supply button The LED when lit indicates that the power supply is good If the LED fails to come on when the computer is powered on do the following While observing the LED on the power supply press the power supply button If the LED fails to light while you are holding the button in you may have a defective power supply If the LED lights when the button is pressed go to Power Supply Shutdowns on page 285 PC Server 520 Type 8641 283 Primary Power Supply Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 9096 ABCD x QOQOE Drive V Connector 1 47 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 3 4 8 5 25 5 4 11 52 12 6 5 7 10 8 13 2 B D 4 8 5 25 B A 11 52 12 6 Connectors P11 P12 and P13 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 1 411 52 12 6 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 2999 A D Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 48 5 25 B A 11 52 12 6 284 PC Server HMM Power Supply Shutdowns If the power supp
265. dapter or computer Features on page 492 Supported Systems on page 492 IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette on page 492 Operation Modes on page 492 Configuration Examples on page 494 Locations on page 500 Cabling for 10Base T Networks on page 501 Cabling for 10Base2 Networks on page 502 e Symptom to FRU Index on page 502 Parts Listing on page 508 Related Service Information 491 Features The IBM Quad BT or B2 PeerMaster Micro Channel Adapters provide the ability to connect your PS 2 Micro Channel server to four separate 10Mbps Ethernet LAN segments Quad BT refers to a 10Base T adapter Quad B2 refers to a 10Base2 adapter These adapters e Perform high performance data transfers between the host PC and adapter e Provide high performance data transfers among ports on an adapter e Provide high performance data transfers among ports across multiple adapters with no host processor intervention Provide a cost efficient high performance means to forward cross segment traffic without impacting server performance e Perform 64 bit data transfers across the Micro Channel at burst rates of 640Mbps which equals the total bandwidth of 64 Ethernet ports Supported Systems These adapters are type 5 Micro Channel adapters You can install them only in type 5 adapter system bus slots You can install type 5 adapters in IBM PS 2 Models 85 a
266. dapters See Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 263 for instructions The best way to resolve memory address conflicts is to change the addresses used by the application program or the device driver To do this use the EISA Configuration program If a device driver is causing a memory address conflict refer to the operating system documentation or the documentation supplied with the device drivers Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE hardware configuration error is detected configuration error message appears after the server completes POST and before the operating system is loaded You can bypass the error by pressing Esc while the error message is displayed The Configuration Setup utility program configures only the System hardware The program does not consider the 276 PC Server HMM requirements of the operating system or the application programs Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts 1 Run the Configuration Setup utility program to view and change resources used by the system board functions Record the current settings before making any changes See Setup Program Type 8641 on page 286 for instructions 2 Determine which adapter or device is causing the error 3 Change configuration resource allocations Use the built in Configuration Setup utility program to view or cha
267. dd press Enter The adapter description appears in the selected slot 14 Verify the installation then press F10 15 Atthe next menu select Save and exit the configuration utility Note PCI devices do not require CFG files Device Drivers Device drivers are programs designed to support a specific type of hardware device They provide instructions that enable the computer to interact with the device or to take advantage of a device s special feature The device driver might ship with the operating System the application program or on the option diskette Not all devices require device drivers Refer to the documentation supplied with the option for additional information Sample Applications Some optional devices provide small applications or sampler files These applications demonstrate the capabilities of the device and serve as software examples for programming the device Refer to the documentation supplied with the option for additional information To configure the server for an ISA or EISA adapter 1 Read the documentation supplied with the adapter 2 Copy any files with the extension of CFG from the option diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette See Files on page 139 for important information about configuring ISA adapters 3 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 137 4 Record the new configuration information see Recording EISA Configurati
268. de 0 to 914 mm 3000 ft System on 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Altitude 914m 3000 ft to 2133 m 7000 ft System off 10 to 43 C 50 110 F Maximum Altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Humidity System on 8 to 80 System off 896 to 8096 e Maximum altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Heat Output Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units BTU per hour Minimum configuration 150 BTU 44 watts Maximum configuration 3600 BTU 1055 watts Electrical Input e Sine wave input 50 to 60 Hz is required Input voltage Low range Minimum 90 V ac Maximum 137 V ac High range Minimum 180 V ac Maximum 265 V ac kilovolt amperes kVA approximately Minimum configuration as shipped 0 16 kVA Maximum configuration 1 0 kVA Total Power Available for Drives e Nominal operating current allowed 5 Vdc line 7 5 A base 20 5 A with upgrade 12 V dc 4 7 A base 17 7 A with upgrade 432 Server HMM Systems Supported There are two requirements for system units to support the PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518 The requirements are 1 Code to support up to 4 or more SCSI adapters 2 Already support 68 pin SCSI 2 adapters The systems currently supported are Model 85 Model 95 Server 300 Server 320 Server 500 Server 520 e Server 720 e future servers that meet the above requirements PC Server
269. default setting is yes Note The host adapter BIOS must be enabled for this setting to be valid Advanced Configuration Options Menu Advanced Configuration Options Host Adapter BIOS Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS Enabled Support Removable Disk Under BIOS as Fixed Disks Enabled Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives gt 1 GByt Enabled BIOS Support for More Than 2 Drives MS DOS R 5 HI and above Enabled Arrow keys to move cursor lt Enter gt to select option lt Esc gt to exit default Note Do not change these file options unless absolutely necessary 540 Server HMM Reset SCSI Bus at Host Adapter Initialization allows you to enable or disable a SCSI bus reset generated by the host adapter during its power on initialization and after a hard reset If enabled the SCSI bus resets the first time the host adapter is initialized If the host adapter BIOS is enabled the BIOS resets the SCSI bus then waits two seconds before scanning the bus for SCSI devices If Reset SCSI Bus at Host Adapter Initialization is disabled there is no two second delay The default setting is enabled Note Normally SCSI Bus Reset at Host Adapter Initialization should always be enabled Host Adapter BIOS enables or disables the host adapter BIOS The default setting is Enabled Note The host adapter must be enabled for the computer to boot from a SCSI hard dis
270. define then press Enter The Select RAID Level pop up window appears and the cursor is active in the window Note The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 to any logical drives defined in an array containing only one hard disk drive When this is the case the Select RAID Level pop up window will not appear If you have only two hard disk drives in the array the Select RAID Level pop up window appears but RAID level 5 is not selectable because you need at least three hard disk drives in an array to assign RAID level 5 to one of the logical drives You can define more than one logical drive for your array The only restriction is that the maximum number of logical drives you can define is eight Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RAID level you want to assign to these logical drives then press Enter Note Because the level you assign can influence the space needed for the drive you must assign a RAID level before you enter the size of the logical drive The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date that the logical drive was created The status of the logical drive also is shown Good All is well with the drive Critical You must replace the hard disk drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the dri
271. different capacities For example if the model came with two 1GB hard disk drives and you install a 2GB hard disk drive to create a RAID 5 disk array the total capacity of the array is 3GB instead of 4GB Therefore when creating arrays it is wise to add drives of equal capacity Additional Storage Capacity When you add hard disk drives to the server you must configure a new disk array before the drives can be used You can either reconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacity offered with the added drives or group the added drives into their own array see Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array on page 196 You also can create an array with only one drive The RAID Configuration Program Screens When you configure the disk array or even just view its configuration you will be using the IBM RAID configuration program on the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A Option Diskette also called the IBM RAID controller diskette The following figure is a compilation of many of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration also called the IBM RAID configuration program screens The list below the figure gives explanations of the numbered areas of the figure 1 This pop up allows you to select the RAID level you want to assign to the logical drive you are defining and it allows you to select the logical drive size You can enter the size in megabytes or you can accept the default value shown Whe
272. dow appears PC Server 720 Type 8642 359 10 360 Warning All the data in the array will be lost during this procedure Be sure to back up all data and programs that you want to save e If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use the hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array After you make your selection the Confirm pop up window will disappear and the cursor will be active in the menu If you want a drive defined as a hot spare refer to Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 350 for step by step instructions Create a new disk array and define logical drives See Creating a Disk Array on page 351 for instructions on creating a disk array and defining logical drives After you have established the new array and logical drive or drives select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive to prepare the drives in the array to receive data This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing in the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the proper value Insert a 3 5 inch formatted diskette in the primary drive select Advanced functions from the Main Menu then select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen Exit the RAID configuration program
273. drive the status will show RDY after you reconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop up window 194 PC Server HMM Note In some operating systems deleting an array and associated logical drives might change the drive letters assigned to the existing drives Creating a Disk Array To create a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 Note To create an array using hard disks in an existing array refer to Redefining Space in an Array on page 202 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Create disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Bay Array selection list Important In the following step when you press Enter to select a drive for an array you cannot deselect it by pressing Enter again as you can with the hot spare selection process Carefully determine which drives you want to include in the array before beginning the selection process If you change your mind after selecting the drives for an array you can delete the array by selecting Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu and begin again 4 Select each drive you want in the array by using the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the drive and then pressing Enter As you select each drive the status will change from RDY Ready to ONL Online
274. drive from the Create Delete Array menu The Create Delete Array menu screen appears the cursor is active in the Array list Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the array you want to define then press Enter The Select RAID Level pop up window appears and the cursor is active in the window Note The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 to any logical drives defined in an array containing only one hard disk drive When this is the case the Select RAID Level pop up window will not appear If you have only two hard disk drives in the array the Select RAID Level pop up window appears but RAID level 5 is not selectable because you need at least three hard disk drives in an array to assign RAID level 5 to one of the logical drives You can define more than one logical drive for your array The only restriction is that the maximum number of logical drives you can define is eight Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RAID level you want to assign to these logical drives then press Enter PC Server HMM Note Because the level you assign can influence the space needed for the drive you must assign a RAID level before you enter the size of the logical drive The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date that the logical drive was created
275. e jf Switch Bank Off 876543210 SCSI Bus Terminators On On Off lt 6 lt Upper Media Bay Position On Off On lt 5 lt Lower Media Bay Position 408 PC Server HMM Type 2 To set the address on a type 2 tape drive 1 Remove the SCSI bus terminator jumpers pins 6 and 8 2 Use the address pin jumpers provided with the tape drive to connect the upper and lower pins that correspond to the SCSI ID you want to use as illustrated SCSI ID Jumpers Pins 1 3 oe Address Pins Address 1 1 6 gt On On Off 4 Upper Media Bay Position Address Pins Address 1 1 bees gt On Off On lt Lower Media Bay Position Encolsure Type 3517 409 Devices The following illustration shows the seven device addresses for the 3517 storage unit Device Address 6 Media Bays 2 Hot Swap Bays 410 Server HMM Specifications Note If more than one 3517 is installed you must leave a minimum space of 2 5 cm 1 in between them and 15 cm 6 in in the back to meet cooling requirements Size Depth 483 mm 19 in Height 407 mm 16 in Width 197 mm 7 75 in Weight e Minimum configurat
276. e Service Guide SY32 0400 Symptom FRU Action The green light for the power Switch is not on and or the power supply fan is not running 1 Verify that the power cord to the 3517 has continuity Verify that the power source has been wired correctly and has the correct voltage Verify that the voltage selection switch is set to match the power source Verify that the power cord is plugged into the 3517 and the power source Verify that the power switch is on If the problem still exists replace the power supply The green light is flashing and the yellow light is off for all hot swap hard disk drives Press the power switch on the hot swap hard disk drive in hot swap bay 0 If the green light on the hot swap hard disk drive continues to flash replace the cooling fan If the green light on the hot swap hard disk drive is on and not flashing press the power switch on the remaining hot swap hard disk drives to turn their green lights on The green light should not be flashing Encolsure Type 3517 417 Symptom FRU Action The green light 1 Verify that the system SCSI cable for the power is correctly connected to the 3517 switch is on storage unit and the system and the green 2 Verify that the internal SCSI cable light on all and all power cables to the hotswap backplane are correctly connected disk drives is not flashing 3 Send the command
277. e diagonal resistors across U21 U24 See ECA042 The enhanced memory adapter has been redesigned without resistors so this note might not apply to the computer you are servicing Intermittent errors can be caused by outside sources of static noise or power Trap 0002 can be caused by a memory or adapter failure Read the message details It might be the system board system board memory or adapter Trap 0000 errors are software errors The customer should contact the software vendor for possible patches For 8570 systems refer to ECA059 ECA051 For 8580 AXX Models see ECAO051 for possible System board replacement to correct Trap 002 NMI or DOS parity errors System Aid Diskette A system aid diskette is now available for Trap 0002 errors Dealers can download it from the Technical Advisors Bulletin Board as file TRAP2LOG The diskette will read NVRAM and indicate which of four possible Sources caused the error The four possible errors and their causes are listed below Error Information Code 110 Usually a system board memory error If replacing the memory does not fix the problem suspect the System board 111 Channel Check Any adapter could cause this error but usually a memory adapter is the cause 520 112 Watchdog Timeout Could be hardware or software If replacing the system board does not fix the problem suspect the software PC Server HMM Error Information Code
278. e or it returns an error Screen messages indicate a conflict exists You can resolve conflicts by changing either the software or the hardware configuration 144 PC Server HMM Note Start the EISA Configuration Diskette to view the addresses used by the system board functions Use the Advanced function of Step 3 View or edit details to view the addresses used by the adapters See Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 138 for instructions Diagnostic Programs The Diagnostic program supplied with the server is the primary method of testing the server Option specific diagnostic files are supplied with some optional devices and adapters These files provide a more specialized test of the option Installing Additional Test Programs provides additional information about installing and using diagnostic files Also refer to the documentation supplied with the option for information on installing and running option specific diagnostics Installing Additional Test Programs You can add other test programs to the Diagnostic Diskette These other programs are usually provided on the diskette supplied with a device After you add the programs to the Diagnostic Diskette you can include information from the programs in the Test Log Before the test programs can find these programs to run as the User Diags test group information about them must be included in a file called USERDIAG CFG This is a
279. e 83 Additional Service Information The following information and tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware related problems BIOS Levels on page 68 Error Messages on page 68 Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure on page 69 Power on Password on page 70 Power On Self Test POST on page 70 Power Supply on page 71 Processor Replacement on page 72 Return Codes on page 72 Setup Program on page 73 Specifications on page 80 System Board Replacement on page 81 Test Programs on page 81 Undetermined Problem on page 83 PC Server 310 Type 8639 67 Using the Test Programs on page 84 e Vital Product Data on page 89 BIOS Levels An incorrect level of BIOS can cause false error and unnecessary FRU replacement Use the following information to determine the current level of BIOS installed in the computer the latest BIOS available for the computer and where to obtain the latest level of BIOS e Current Level BIOS information Run the Configuration Utility to determine the level of BIOS installed Sources for determining the latest level BIOS available 1 RETAIN 2 Bulletin board system BBS 3 HelpCenter 4 Levels 1 and 2 Support Sources for obtaining the latest level BIOS available 1 Bulletin board system BBS 2 HelpCenter 3 Levels 1 and 2 Support To update flash the BIOS see Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure on page 69 Error Messag
280. e Down Arrow key to select the logical drive for which you want to change the write policy Warning If you change the write policy to write back wait at least 10 seconds after your last operation before you power off the server It takes that long for the system to move the data from the cache memory to the storage device Failure to follow this practice can result in lost data 7 Press Enter to change the write policy Notice that WT changes to WB You can press Enter to alternate between WT and WB 8 When you have made your choice press Esc to return to the Advanced Functions menu PC Server 720 Type 8642 333 9 Select Exit The Confirm pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action 10 To return the setting to its original state select No To save your changes select Yes 11 Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 331 for more information Formatting Drives You can perform a low level format on drives with RDY ready OFL offline or UNF unformatted status Note The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functions menu provides a low level format If you install a new hard disk drive that requires a standard format use the Format command provided by your operating system The Format program works like the low level format program in the advanced diagnostics portion of the syst
281. e SCSI 2 adapter has one internal connector for an 8 bit cable and one internal connector for a 16 bit cable Non disk array models that are supplied with a preinstalled wide hard disk drive use a 16 bit internal connector Non disk array models that are not supplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive or supplied with a narrow hard disk drive use an 8 bit internal connector e On the disk array models the SCSI 2 adapter has two internal connectors for 16 bit cables Note To keep the external channel available for use on the preinstalled RAID adapter use Channel 2 for connecting internal SCSI devices PC Server 320 Type 8640 149 Internal Internal Channel 1 Channel 2 Eran O C External Channel 1 Tiu On all models the external connector is for 16 bit cable The SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter supports a total of seven 8 bit or fifteen 16 bit SCSI devices The SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter supports a total of fourteen 16 bit SCSI devices Note If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices you must follow the instructions given in External SCSI Devices on page 508 in addition to the instructions in this section Termination Internal SCSI Devices The devices at both ends of the SCSI bus must be terminated If you attach SCSI devices internal or external you must terminate the last device in the chai
282. e Speed Type Type 8639 4MB 70ns Parity SIMMs 8MB must be 16MB installed in 32MB matched pairs Note Use only 70ns memory module kits in your computer PC Server 310 Type 8639 79 Specifications Size Depth 448 mm 17 6 in Height 160 mm 6 3 in Width 420 mm 16 5 in Weight Min configuration 12 7 kg 28 0 Ib Max configuration 14 1 kg 31 0 Ib 1 Environment Air temperature System on 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F System off 10 to 43 C 50 to 110 F Humidity System on 896 to 8096 System off 896 to 8096 Maximum altitude 2134 m 7000 ft Heat Output Approximate heat output in BTUs per hour Min configuration 120 BTU 35 watts Max configuration 1060 BTU 310 watts 2 Deep sleep 15 BTU 4 watts Electrical Input e Sine wave input 50 to 60 Hz required Low range input voltage Min 110 Vac Max 125 Vac High range input voltage Min 200 V ac Max 240 V ac Input kVA approximately Min configuration as shipped 0 08 kVA Max configuration 0 52 kVA Airflow Approximately 0 56 cubic meters minute 20 CFM Acoustical Noise Emission Values e Average sound pressure levels At operator position 43 dB operating 43 GB idle At bystander position 1 meter 40 GB operating 40 GB idle e Declared upper limit sound power levels 5 0 bels operatin
283. e busy processor has completed its task The SMP capability also provides a level of high availability in that with some operating systems such as OS 2 SMP run in a uni processor mode if one of the processors should experience a failure This function will allow the LAN to continue operation so that service can be scheduled at a non critical time Locations e Input Output Connectors on page 156 e Internal Drive Bays Disk Array Models on page 157 e Internal Drive Bays Non Disk Array Models on page 159 System Board on page 161 e Connections on page 162 Jumpers on page 162 PC Server 320 Type 8640 155 Input Output Connectors ns i Power Connector KEEN Keyboard Connector i Mouse Connector Serial Connectors Parallel Connector doe ONY SCSI Connector Expansion Slots Display Connector Keyboard Connector The cable from the keyboard connects here Mouse Connector This is where the mouse cable connects to the server This connector sometimes is called an auxiliary device or pointing device port Serial Connectors Two 9 pin serial connectors A COM1 and B COM2 are provided The serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device usually connects here If you are using a 25 pin signal cable you need a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter cable Pa
284. e device Each VNET may represent a separate department or workgroup The four switched ports within each VNET provide a multisegment workgroup environment Isolating the two VNETs way of the server based router allows you to create a separation between the two departments You can configure the router to permit restricted traffic to pass between the departments 498 PC Server HMM VNET Switch Mode Combined VNETs and Traditional Nets Use this configuration only when you expect little or no cross VNET traffic Note This illustration above shows A five subnet network Net 1 Net 2 Net 3 Net 4 and Net 5 configured as one four segment VNET VNET1 on Card 1 and four traditional networks on Card 2 A network using PeerMaster adapters Note The same principles apply to Quad B2 configurations however hubs are not required for 10Base2 operation Cross subnet traffic such as traffic from Net 1 to Net 2 must be forwarded by a router The router can be internal to the server or an external stand alone device This VNET may represent a large department while the traditional networks may represent small workgroups You can configure the router to restrict traffic between departments Related Service Information 499 Locations 10Base T Adapter 10Base2 Adapter 500 PC Server HMM Cabling for 10Base T Networks Two types of network cables may be connected to the Quad BT PeerMaster adapter straigh
285. e drive is used for parity storage Therefore if you type 1000MB the number in the Size MB field remains 1000 because it is divisible by 2 drives which is the space available for data If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive you can create another by assigning either the same PC Server HMM or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive You can have as many as eight logical drives among four disk arrays 5 To return to the Create Delete Array menu press Esc To define more logical drives repeat steps 1 through 5 of this procedure 6 To leave this screen select Exit or press Esc A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action 7 To save the changes select Yes To maintain the disk array configuration that was in place before you made changes select No 8 If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5 you must select Initialize logical drive for proper operation This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the correct value a Select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive b Select the logical drives you want to initialize from the Logical Drive list by pressing the Spacebar the selected drives will appear highlighted To start the initialization press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action
286. e hard disk drive To improve performance you can change this write policy to write back WB mode where the completion status is sent after the data is copied to cache memory but before the data is actually written to the storage device Although you gain performance with write back mode it creates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure This is because the system gets a completion status message when the data reaches cache memory but before data is actually written to the storage device Attention If you change the write policy to write back wait at least 10 seconds after the last operation before you power off the server It takes that long for the system to move the data from the cache memory to the storage device Failure to follow this practice can result in lost data To change the write policy 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and turning on the system If the system already is turned on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu and press Enter 3 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 4 Select Change write policy from the Advanced Functions menu The cursor will be active in the Logical Drive list 5 Select the logical drive whose write policy you want to change A screen similar to the following appears Related Service Information 48
287. e logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost 6 Locate the Wrt pol Write Policy field in the Logical Drive list The write policy is shown as either WT write through which is the default setting or WB write back 7 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to select the logical drive whose write policy you want to change Attention If you change the write policy to write back wait at least 10 seconds after the last operation before you power off the server It takes that long for the system to move the data from the cache memory to the storage device Failure to follow this practice can result in lost data 8 Press Enter to change the write policy Notice that WT changes to WB You can press Enter to alternate between WT and WB 9 When you have made your choice press Esc to return to the Advanced Functions menu 486 PC Server HMM 10 11 12 Select Exit The Confirm pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action To return the setting to its original state select No To save the changes select Yes Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration on page 483 for more information Formatting Drives You can perform a low level format on drives with RDY ready OFL offline or UNF unformatted status Note The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functions menu provide
288. e power supply and the SCSI 2 controller are connected correctly Check the SCSI 2 controller and the SCSI 2 connector on the RAID Adapter Restart the system 4 If the drive is defunct a b Press Y Yes to reconfigure the system Press Ctrl Alt Del when instructed to restart the system The Main Menu appears At this point the drive status indicates DDD Attention Removing the wrong hard disk drive can cause loss of all data in the array Replace the defunct drive After you have replaced the drive press Enter The system will be reconfigured to include the drive and the drive s status will change to OFL When you see the configuration completion message select Rebuild drive Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the OFL offline drive you want to rebuild then press Enter Information and status messages about each stage of the rebuilding process appears on the screen When the rebuilding process is completed press Esc to return to the Main Menu The new configuration will be saved automatically Backup the new configuration see Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration Select Exit to end the RAID configuration program Remove the diskette and press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the system Advanced Functions You can select several utility programs from the Advanced Functions menu These include e Back up configuration to diskette e Restore configuration t
289. e standard hard disk drive or a boot program on the diskette drive after the initial hardware installation check the following f the AHA 2940 2940W LED and the SCSI drive LED are always on the SCSI cables might be installed in a reverse position between the host adapter and the drive f the AHA 2940 2940W BIOS message is not displayed on the screen during system boot the system does not recognize the host adapter BIOS Be sure that host adapter BIOS is enabled Be sure there are no address conflicts between a PCI device and an EISA or ISA device e f you see the message Host adapter not found the host adapter has detected an internal failure Be sure the host adapter is firmly seated in the PCI slot e f you see the message Host adapter found but not configured run the SCSISelect utility to configure the host adapter See SCSISelect Configuration Utility on page 534 Related Service Information 533 SCSISelect Configuration Utility The SCSI Select Configuration Utility program located on the ROM of the AHA 2940 and AHA 2940W adapters allows you to change the default settings for the adapter and the devices connected to the adapter The following are the default settings for the AHA2940 and AHA2940W adapters The following settings are for the adapter and the devices connected to the adapter Setting Default Value Host Adapter SCSI ID 7 SCSI Parity Checking Enabled Host Adapt
290. e synchronize array Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and the corresponding parity information is initialized to the correct value You can choose to initialize more than one logical drive at a time Also you can interrupt the initialization process at any time by pressing Esc Then you can either restart the initialization process by pressing Enter or you can end the process by pressing Esc again Synchronize logical drive Select this choice to recompute and rewrite the parity data on the drive for RAID levels 1 and 5 This selection does not alter data on the drive The synchronization process can be done on multiple logical drives Rebuild device Select this choice to rebuild logical drives The rebuild operation is supported only for RAID levels 1 and 5 Advanced functions Select this choice to change the write policy the way data is written to the drive to save the configuration information to a diskette to restore it from a diskette or to change RAID parameters This choice also allows you to do a low level format Drive information Select this choice to view information about the SCSI devices hard disk CD ROM tape and so on connected to the RAID adapter e Exit Select this choice to leave the Main Menu Related Service Information 467 Viewing the RAID Configuration Before creating or changing a disk array you can look at the current configuration by selecting View Configu
291. e the diskette and press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the system Drivers The RAID adapter requires the installation of device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for detailed instructions If you install OS 2 from the ServerGuide CD the device drivers will be installed automatically If however you install OS 2 from diskette you will need to install the device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette PC Server 720 Type 8642 343 Front Operator Panel The front panel front operator panel incorporates the standard function for System Maintenance Adapter Reporting Trouble SMART This panel consist of the following Light Emitting Diodes on page 349 A 2 line by 16 character LCD display Menu Buttons and Enter Button Power Enable Button e Start Stop Button on page 345 Front Panel Buttons The front operator panel contains seven buttons gt Buttons Enter Start Stop Power Enable Menu Buttons and Enter Button These buttons are currently non functional Power Enable Button The power enable button acts as a logical emergency power off switch When pressed set to off the computer s power is immediately removed all automatic and remote power on functions are disabled and the computer will not power on until the power enable button is pressed again Note This power enable button does not remove AC pow
292. eans that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you the drive is in a Critical state Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Array list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent During an initialization process the Write Policy area displays the percent initialized during a synchronization process it displays the percent synchronized 6 The information area tells you the action you can perform on this screen or pop up Drive Maintenance The following section provides information about status indicators for logical and hard disk drives and the results of a hard disk drive failure It also contains procedures for replacing defective drives and for redefining the space in an array by replacing logical drives PC Server 500 Type 8641 187 Obtaining Drive Status To see the ID capacity and other information about each of the hard disk drives attached to the RAID adapter 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 2 Select Drive information 3 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay Array selection list As a drive i
293. ect responses go to Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 NOOR 60 PC Server HMM From the Diagnostics Diskette m Important If the diagnostic program is started from the diagnostics diskette you will not have the option to test the Micro Channel options installed in the computer The Diagnostics Diskette is bootable The procedure for starting the Diagnostics Diskette when servicing a Type 8639 server is the same for all models See General Checkout Models OXT 0Z0 OZT ODO ODT on page 57 From the System Partition Starting the diagnostic programs from the System Partition gives you the option of testing the options installed in the computer or testing the base system To Test Options Notes 1 Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled before starting this procedure 2 f Rapid Resume is displayed during this procedure see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 3 Re run the Diagnostics tests To test the options installed in the computer do the following Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Remove all media from the drives Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses a One Beep b IBM Logo 8 When the F1 prompt appears in the lower left hand corner of the screen press F1 the IBM logo appears then the System Programs Main
294. ected Card Mode 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board PC Server 720 Type 8642 377 CP Code FRU 147 Port Initialization 1 Default Processor Card 2 Bridge Card System Board e 148 Jump to 32 Bit Assembly 1 Default Processor Card Code 2 Bridge Card 3 Memory Card 4 System Board 149 1 Default Processor Execution of 32 Bit Card Protected Mode 2 Bridge Card 3 Memory Card 4 System Board 14A Transition to C Code 1 Default Processor Card Bridge Card 3 System Board 14C Default Processor Card Setup Routines 1 Default Processor Card 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 14D Additional Default Processor Card Setup Routines 1 Default Processor Card 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 14E Additional Default Processor Card Setup Routines 1 Default Processor Card 2 Bridge Card System Board e 14F Additional Default Processor 1 Default Processor Card Card Setup Routines 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 150 1 System Board ROM Checksum 2 Bridge Card 3 Default Processor Card 151 1 Default Processor L2 Cache Flush on Default Card Processor Card 2 Bridge Card 3 Memory Card 4 System Board 152 1 Default Processor Default Processor Card Card Configuration 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board 153 1 Default Processor Default Processor Card and Bridge Card Initialization Card 2 Bridge Card 3 System Board
295. ecution order When set to high the rebuild request will get a higher priority than a system I O request In a heavily loaded system with a high rate of system I O requests the high priority rebuild can significantly reduce the disk rebuild time at the expense of degraded handling of I O requests When the rebuild priority is set to low the rebuild I O requests can execute only if there is no pending system I O requests In a moderate to heavily loaded System low rebuild priority will increase the disk rebuild time significantly and provide better system performance Note Rebuild priority can be changed without affecting data in the logical drives Parity placement RA Warning Once a parity placement scheme is chosen and data stored it cannot be changed without destroying data Parity placement defines how parity is placed in the disk array with respect to data The following illustration shows both the Left Symmetric LS and Right Asymmetric RA parity placement in a four drive disk array Here AAA BBB and CCC are the data stripe units and PPO is the corresponding parity Similarly DDD EEE and FFF are the data stripe units and PP1 is the corresponding parity Right Asymmetric RA Left Symmetric LS Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PPO CCC AAA BBB CCC PPO DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH KKK LLL PP3
296. ed electrician 460 PC Server HMM Battery Notice CAUTION Pour viter tout risque d explosion remplacez la pile selon les instructions du fabricant qui en d finit les quivalences Ne cherchez pas la d monter ou la recharger Ne l exposez ni au feu ni l eau Ne la mettez pas en court circuit Pour le reyclage ou la mise au rebut des piles usag es conformez vous la r glementation en vigueur Die Batterie kann bei unsachgemaBem Austauschen explodieren Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine gleichwertige vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen Die Batterie nicht zerlegen wiederaufladen oder kurzschlieBen Die Batterie vor Feuer und Nasse sch tzen Bei der Entsorgung der aufladbaren Batterie die rtlichen Richtlinien f r Sonderm ll sowie die allgemeinen Sicherheitsbestimmungen beachten Se la batteria sostituita in modo non corretto potrebbe esserci pericolo di esplosione Si raccomanda di sostituirla con una batteria dello stesso tipo o equivalente Non smontarla ricaricarla gettarla nell acqua o nel fuoco o cortocircuitarla Smaltire la batteria secondo la normativa in vigore DPR 915 82 successive disposizioni e disposizioni locali Hay peligro de explosi n si la bater a se sustituye incorrectamente No la desmonte recargue eche al fuego o al agua ni la cortocircuite Deseche la bater a tal y como disponga la normativa local Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
297. edia changed error would not clear 731x Medium format corrupted format unit interrupted format must be issued again 7FOx Format in progress prior format unit issued being completed 7F1x Spinup in progress PC Server 500 Type 8641 215 Q Codes All error codes with Q 1 are developed using information returned by either an adapter or device The Q value defines the origin of the EE code that is reported Error codes EE with Q 4 or 5 may be reported that are not listed here or can actually have a definition other than that given depending on the device Q Information 2 Command error field of command complete status block returned by the adapter 3 SCSI Status field of the command complete status block or command error field values indicating software problems lt 20H 4 Sense key value returned by a device Additional sense byte byte 12 of sense information from device 6 Device error code field of command complete status block 7 Device errors not normally considered an error but considered an error based on when the code was returned medium corrupted error on device with non removable media 216 PC Server HMM Test Status Codes Information Not applicable for error code Adapter initialization error Adapter reset Adapter register test Adapter buffer test phase 1 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 2
298. em programs It is provided in the IBM RAID configuration program so that you can perform a low level format on a drive controlled by the RAID adapter To perform a low level format 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Warning A low level format erases all data and programs from the drive 3 Select Format drive The low level format program starts 4 Follow the instructions on the screen You can perform a low level format on more than one drive at a time Changing the RAID Parameters You can change the RAID parameters using the advanced functions by selecting Change RAID parameters The default settings are Stripe unit size 8K The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on a given disk before writing on the next disk To maximize the overall performance this stripe unit should be chosen such that the stripe unit size is close to the size of the system I O request The default is set to 8K data bytes 334 Server HMM Warning Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is stored in the logical drives the stripe unit cannot be changed without destroying data in the logical drives Rebuild priority Equal Rebuild priority can be set to equal high or low When set to equal the rebuild request and system I O request get equal priority in the ex
299. em Board 1 Run Configuration Setup Run Diagnostics Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive System Board gud I 2401 Monitor type does not Run Setup and enter correct monitor type match CMOS 2 Video Display 3 Video Adapter 4 System Board 2462 1 Display Video controller error 2 System Board 000247100 Type 8641 1 L2 processor cache was disabled do the following Boot the system diagnostics Run the processor tests When asked if you want to turn on the processor cache reply yes and the error will be cleared 19990301 Fixed boot sector error no operating system installed 1 Install operating system to hard disk drive 8601 8603 Pointing Device Error Pointing Device 2 System Board 168 PC Server HMM Parts Listings EX 1 PC Server 320 Type 8640 169 System Note The model s listed for the following FRUs indicates FRUs that the models may contain at the time of shipping However other FRUs are supported in each model as options Index System Unit PC Server 320 Type 8640 1 2 10 12 13 15 16 18 18 17 17 19 170 Access Cover DASD Hot Swap Backplane Models 1Y0 MZ1 MYO MYT MYR MDV MDS MZO MZV 100 105 Hot Swap Shell Models 1D0 1DS 1Y0 1YT MYT MYR MDO MDV MDS MZ1 20 MZV Hot Swap Door Assembly Models 1Y0
300. em information c Set verification mode d Maintain SCI files EISA ISA and PCI Adapters Before installing a new device or program read the documentation supplied with it Reading the instructions helps you determine the steps required for installation and configuration The following list provides a preview of the actions that might be required to configure the server When installing different types of adapters at the same time install and configure them in the following sequence 1 ISA 2 EISA 3 138 PC Server HMM Note During POST the server automatically configures ISA Plug and Play and devices 1 Run the Setup program and record the current configuration settings 2 Backup the EISA Configuration Diskette See Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 136 3 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette and a Record the current settings b Install configuration files CFG Note If the CFG files were not supplied with the adapter see Files See Recording EISA Configuration Settings on page 137 and Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 137 4 Set jumpers or switches on the server system board See Jumpers on page 162 5 Set jumpers or switches on the device See the instructions supplied with the adapter 6 Install the adapter in the server 7 Install software programs See the installation instructions supplied with the soft
301. en press Ctrl Alt Del to start the RAID configuration program 4 Delete the existing array a Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array menu will disappear 202 PC Server HMM b Select Delete disk array The cursor will be active in the Bay Array list c Review the Logical Drive List Date Created column then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array Note You must delete disk arrays in descending order the last one created must be the first one deleted d Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears r Warning All the data in the array will be lost during this procedure Be sure to back up all data and programs that you want to save e If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use the hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array After you make your selection the Confirm pop up window will disappear and the cursor will be active in the menu If you want a drive defined as a hot spare refer to Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 193 for step by step instructions Create a new disk array and define logical drives See Creating a Disk Array on page 195 for instructions on creating a disk array and defining logical drives After you have established the new a
302. ence Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board 1804 No more memory below 1MB for PCI adapter 1 Run Reference Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board 1805 PCI option ROM checksum error 1 Remove Failing PCI Card 2 System Board 1962 No valid boot device found be sure the drive you want to start from is the boot sequence 1 Run Configuration Setup Run Diagnostics Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive System Board gv gos 2401 Monitor type does not Run Setup and enter correct monitor type match CMOS 2 Video Display 3 Video Adapter 4 System Board 2462 1 Display Video controller error 2 System Board 000247100 Type 8641 1 N A L2 processor cache was disabled do the following Boot the system diagnostics Run the processor tests e When asked if you want to turn on the processor cache reply yes and the error will be cleared 19990301 Fixed boot sector error no operating system installed 1 Install operating system to hard disk drive 8601 8603 Pointing Device Error Pointing Device 2 System Board 312 PC Server HMM Checkpoint Codes During POST the computer displays the status of the components being tested in the form of Checkpoint CP codes in the lower left hand corner of the screen The following is a list of the CP codes followed by the routine in process and the boot mode
303. er 1491X 14922 2 System Board 3 Display any type 14932 1 External Display 2 Display Adapter 16101 1 Riser Card Battery See Battery Notice on page 461 See Battery Notice on page 461 161XX 1 FaxConcentrator Adapter 164XX 1 120MB Internal Tape Drive 2 Diskette Cable 3 System Board 16500 1 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter 16520 16540 1 6157 Streaming Tape Drive 2 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter 166XX 167XX 1 Token Ring Adapter 2 System Board 3 Riser Card 18001 to 18029 1 Wizard Adapter 2 Wizard Adapter Memory 18031 to 18039 1 Wizard Adapter Cable 185XXXX 1 DBCS Japanese Display Adapter A 2 System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 107 Error Code FRU Action 20001 to 20003 1 Image Adapter A Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 20004 1 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 2 Image Adapter A Image Adapter A 20005 to 20010 1 Image Adapter A Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 200XX Not listed above 1 Image Adapter A Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 3 System Board 20101 to 20103 1 Printer Scanner Option 2 Image Adapter A 3 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 20104 1 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 2 Printer Scanner Option 3 Image Adapter A 20105 to 20110 1 Printer Scanner Option 2 Image Adapter A 3 Memory Module DRAM VRAM Image Adapter A Memory Test failure indicated
304. er BIOS displays a message when you boot the computer Normally this message lists the SCSI ID manufacturer model number and other information for each SCSI device that the BIOS detects If an initialization failure occurs the host BIOS displays a specific error message followed by a BIOS Installation Failure message The following are some of the installation failure messages and their meaning A drive larger than 1 gigabyte has been detected with 64 head 32 sector partitioning This drive is not compatible with the 255 head 63 sector translation which has been enabled on this adapter Data could be corrupted Please check your system setup Press any key to continue This message occurs only if Extended BIOS Translation is enabled in the SCSISelect utility It means that the BIOS detected a large capacity drive invalid partition in the master boot record Extended BIOS Translation is used only with MS DOS 5 0 or above You do not need to enable this option if you are using another operating system such as OS 2 or UNIX If you are using a driver larger than 1GB under MS DOS 5 0 or above and this message appears do the following 1 Run the SCSISelect utility and set Extended BIOS Translation to Disabled 2 Exit from the SCSISelect utility and back up the data on the disk drive if you want to save it 3 Perform a SCSI low level format with the Format Disk utility under SCSI Disk Utilities in the SCSISelect utility N
305. er Service Manager Service Quality Programs Service Quality Programs Skill Dynamics Education PS 1 Warranty Customer Helpline PS 1 Warranty Service DOAs Warranty Claim Fulfillment Warranty Claim Reimbursement Warranty Claim Reimbursement Warranty Claim Parts Inquiry Warranty Provider Support Hotline Warranty Service ThinkPad 556 PC Server HMM Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries AIX AT Enterprise Systems Architecture 390 FaxConcentrator HelpCenter IBM Micro Channel MVS ESA MVS DFP NetFinity 05 2 Personal System 2 Portmaster Presentation Manager PS 2 PS ValuePoint RETAIN 5 370 5 390 System 370 System 390 ThinkPad VM ESA VoiceType VSE ESA VTAM Virtual Machine Enterprise Systems Architecture The following terms are trademarks of other companies 3Com 3Com Corporation ActionMedia Intel Corporation Adaptec Adaptec Inc AHA Adaptec Inc American Power Conversion Corporation Banyan Banyan Systems Incorporated Cirrus Cirrus Logic Inc EtherCard Elite Standard Microsystems Corporation EtherExpress Intel Corporation EtherLink 3Com Corporation Gateway Gateway Systems Corporation Intel Intel Corporation Microsoft Microsoft Corporation MS DOS Microsoft Corporation NetWare Novell Inc Novell Novell Inc PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Pentium Intel Corporation QAPlu
306. er from the power supply or the service processor logic on the system board See also Starting or Stopping the System on page 365 344 Server HMM Start Stop Button The start stop button implements manual power on off functions under software control See also Starting or Stopping the System on page 365 Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 The Type 8642 server supports the following drive types Diskette Hard disk e Rewritable optical disc Tape The server has hardware that lets you replace a failed hard disk drive without powering off the server Therefore you have the advantage of continuing to operate your System while a hard disk drive is removed or installed These drives are also known as hot swappable drives Hot swappable drives have a green LED that shines through the knob on the tray containing the drive If the drive has a good electrical connection upon installation the LED illuminates The LED blinks briefly during power up and also blinks if the drive malfunctions Internal drives are installed in bays A diskette drive and a CD ROM drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models A removable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1 You can install two drives in bay B You can install hot swappable hard disk drives in banks C D and E only Banks C D and E each contain six bays Bank C supports up to six drives However the total number of SCSI drives that you can install i
307. er HMM Setting SCSI IDs for External Devices The internal channel connector you can only use one of the two internal channel connectors and the external channel connector on the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter accept SCSI IDs from 0 through 7 Each device attached to the external channel connector must have a unique SCSI ID and each device attached to the internal channel connector must have a unique SCSI ID For example you can have a SCSI ID of 0 on a device attached to the channel 1 connector and a SCSI ID of 0 on a device attached to the channel 2 connector of the same SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter However you cannot have a SCSI ID of 0 on two devices attached to the same channel connector Note Read the README file on the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette for updated information Select Option Diskette from the first menu screen Related Service Information 511 The following table shows an example of using one internal and one external channel on the RAID adapter Channel 2 is connected to bank A and Channel 1 is attached to an external DASD storage enclosure Refer to the documentation supplied with the storage enclosure for physical locations Displayed Displayed Bank and Channel Bay Bay SCSI ID Number Number Physical Location 1 1 External 0 1 2 External 1 1 3 External 2 1 4 External 3 1 5 External 4 1 6 External 5 2 1 A1 0 2 2 A2 1 2 3 A3 2 2 4 A4 3 2 5 A5 4 2
308. er SCSI Termination Enabled AHA 2940 Low On High On AHA 2940W Reset SCSI Bus at Host Enabled Adapter Initialization Host Adapter BIOS Enabled Support Removable Disks Boot only Under BIOS as Fixed Disks Extended BIOS Translation Enabled for DOS 1GB1 BIOS Support for More Than Enabled 2 Drives 1 Settings are valid only if the adapter BIOS is enabled Individual Settings The following settings are for each SCSI device connected to the adapter Setting Default Value Initiate Sync Negotiation Yes Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 10MB per second2 Enable Disconnection Yes Send Start Unit SCSI No Command Include In BIOS Scan Yes Initiate Wide Negotiations Enabled 1 Settings are invalid only if the adapter BIOS is enabled 2 20MB per second maximum synchronous transfer on AHA 2940W AHA 2940W adapters only 534 Server HMM SCSISelect Configuration Utility Control Keys Keys Action Response and 1 Moves the highlighted bar from one adapter selection to another If more than one adapter is displayed the PCI bus number and the PCI device number that correspond to the highlighted adapter are also highlighted Enter Selects the highlighted item Esc Returns to the previous menu F5 Switches between color and monochrome display modes F6 Resets all settings to the host adapter default settings Starting the SCSISelect Configuratio
309. erence DASD CD ROM or SCSI For non disk array models see Problems SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 For array models see Disk Array Configuration on page 461 Error Codes Error Symptom to FRU Index Messages on page 308 General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Power Supply Voltages See Power Supplies Type 8641 on page 283 Miscellaneous General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 The Diagnostic program supplied with the server is the primary method of testing the server Option specific diagnostic files are supplied with some optional devices and adapters These files provide a more specialized test of the option Installing Additional Test Programs on page 249 provides additional information about installing and using diagnostic files Also refer to the documentation supplied with the option for information on installing and running option specific diagnostics Diagnostic Files The Diagnostic program supplied with the server is the primary method of testing the server Option specific diagnostic files are supplied with some optional devices and adapters These files provide a more specialized test 248 PC Server HMM of the option Installing Additional Test Programs on page 145 provides additional information about installing and using diagnostic files Also refer to the documentation supplied with the option for information on installing and running option specific
310. erver responsiveness is not impaired by heavy cross segment traffic The adapters perform two types of frame switching port to port and peer to peer Port to port Peer to peer Occurs when the source and destination ports both reside on the same adapter The adapter forwards data packets between ports 1 and 2 of adapter 1 Card 1 Note Port to port switching is completely transparent to the server microprocessor Occurs when the source and destination ports reside on separate adapters Peer to peer switching is accomplished through peer data transfers across the Micro Channel bus The adapters forward data packets between port 1 of adapter 1 Card 1 and port 1 of adapter 2 Card 2 Related Service Information 497 VNET Switch Mode Multiple VNETs This illustration above shows A configuration of two network numbers Net 1 and Net 2 An 8 port network with two Quad BT PeerMaster adapters Card 1 and Card 2 each configured as an independent VNET two VNETs Note The same principles apply to Quad B2 configurations however concentrator hubs are not required for 10Base2 operation The curved arrow that passes through the LAN drivers protocol stacks and router in the server represents the connection between the two subnets Net 1 and Net 2 Cross subnet traffic such as traffic from Net 1 to Net 2 must be forwarded by a router The router can be internal to the server or an external stand alon
311. es Messages generated by the software the operating System or application programs generally are text messages but they also can be numeric Basically there are five types of error messages POST error messages POST beep codes Diagnostic error messages Software generated messages Multiple messages Error Message Description POST Error Messages Displayed when POST finds problems with the hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration POST Beep Codes Sounds emitted from the speaker if POST finds a problem One beep indicates POST completed successfully Multiple beeps indicate a problem was found by the POST Diagnostic Error Messages Displayed when a test program finds a problem with a hardware option 68 PC Server HMM Error Message Description Software Generated Error Displayed if a problem or Messages conflict is found by an application program the operating system or both For an explanation of these messages refer to the information supplied with that software package Multiple Messages The first error that occurs can cause additional errors Follow the suggested action of the first error displayed In this case the system displays more than one error message Always follow the suggested action instructions for the first error message displayed Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure 1 2 3 Power off the computer and
312. es to the DMA Page Register 1 System Board Door Is Open 1 Close door on device being tested 2 Device being tested 3 System Board Drive x Media y Mismatch The capacity listed for the drive in the File Allocation Table ID does not match the calculated capacity of the drive 1 Check diskette and diskette drive capacity 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board EISA Configuration NVRAM Bad 1 Replace battery then run Setup 2 System Board Error in video buffer Bad bits The video memory test failed 1 Video Adapter 2 System Board 3 Display Exception Interrupt In Protected Mode Diags Cannot Continue Server error all system tests will stop Remove one adapter at a time until the symptom goes away 1 Any Adapter 2 System Board 3 Processor Extended Memory Test Failed An error was detected in Extended Memory Memory Module 2 System Board FF Stuck Key 1 Keyboard Keyboard error 2 System Board Floppy Drive Failed 1 Diskette Drive One or more diskette drives 2 System Board failed 3 Diskette Drive Cable General Function Failed 1 Any Adapter Remove one adapter at a 2 System Board time until the symptom goes away 3 Processor 40 PC Server HMM Error Message Symptom FRU Action Hard Drives Failed One or more of the Hard Disk Drive tests detected an error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if
313. ette drive and turning on the system If the system already is turned on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears 3 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 4 Select Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Array list 5 Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drive list then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array Attention All the data and programs in the array will be lost during this procedure 6 Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears 476 PC Server HMM IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 4 1 98 Create Delete Array 1 Help an ch 1 ch 2 2 Define hot spare drive 3 Delete disk array Array Arrays Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive ilona 1 Lone FT MESS ag SES R m Arr Array Log Size RAID Date pem d le ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status A 5760 0 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 3 Lona 3 Lome 5760 Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good C 3840 A2 1005 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 4 Ohl D 7 0 1500 RAID 5 94 Go D 5760 BO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 2 Cowl a Bi 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good CO 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 6 Lon D Cl 1170 RAID 1 0
314. etup error 762 1 Run Processor configuration Configuration Setup error 2 Run Diagnostics 962 Parallel port error 1 Disconnect external cable on parallel port 2 Internal Cable 3 System Board 1162 System board serial port 1 or 2 error 1 Disconnect external cable on serial port 2 Run Configuration 1300 Operating system not Run Setup with known good diskette found 2 Fixed Disk Drive 3 Fixed Disk Adapter 4 Diskette Drive 5 System Board 1701 1 Run Setup Fixed Disk X failed 2 Fixed Disk Drive 3 Fixed Disk Adapter 4 System Board 1702 1 Run Setup Fixed Disk Drive Controller 2 Fixed Disk Adapter failed 3 Fixed Disk Drive 4 System Board 1801 1 Run Reference No room for PCI option Diskette ROM 2 Failing Adapter 3 System Board 1802 No more I O space available for PCI adapter 1 Run Reference Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board 1803 No more memory above 1MB for PCI adapter 1 Run Reference Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board PC Server 320 Type 8640 167 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 1804 No more memory below 1MB for PCI adapter 1 Run Reference Diskette 2 Failing Card 3 System Board 1805 PCI option ROM checksum error 1962 No valid boot device found be sure the drive you want to start from is the boot sequence 1 Remove Failing PCI Card 2 Syst
315. f S 0 replace the system board PC Server 720 Type 8642 395 Error Code FRU Action 009005s0vvwviiii Unsupported PCI device 1 Remove the unsupported PCI adapter 009010s0vvwiiii PCI data parity error 1 If S lt gt 0 replace the PCI adapter Or If S z 0 replace the system board 009011s0vvwiiii PCI data parity error 1 If S 0 replace the PCI adapter Or If S 0 replace the system board 009020s0vvwiiii PCI address parity error 1 If S 0 replace the PCI adapter Or If S z 0 replace the system board 009030s0vvwiiii PCI system error 1 If S 0 replace the PCI adapter Or If S z 0 replace the system board PCI Error Messages Error Message FRU Action PCI device s removed since last power up PCI vendor ID xxxx device ID xxxx previously in slot x 1 One or more add in devices appears to have been removed since the last execution of POST This could be due to a catastrophic failure of the PCI device rather than its actual physical removal PCI device s added since last power up PCI vendor ID xxxx device ID xxxx in slot x 1 One or more add in devices has been added since the last execution of POST It may have been moved from another slot This is not an error The device was enabled and had resources assigned 396 Server HMM Error Message FRU Action
316. f windows and other objects on the screen When the computer is restarted with the power on switch the Scheduler or Wake Up on Ring it quickly returns to full power operation in exactly the same state The programs that were being used will reappear in the state they were in when you suspended operation of the computer Running Rapid Resume Manager To select and activate deactivate or change Rapid Resume Manager do the following 1 From the Windows Program Manager select IBM Management Plus 2 Select Rapid Resume Manager 3 View or change settings 4 Follow the instructions on the screen PC Server 310 Type 8639 73 Standby When the Standby feature is enabled it initiates reduced power modes for the display microprocessor and hard disk drive after a specified period of inactivity The default setting for automatically initiating standby is 20 minutes The display is blanked and the hard disk drive spins down enters a reduced power state Any use of the keyboard mouse or hard disk drive causes the computer to exit standby and return to full power operation For example if 40 minutes is selected as the specified period the computer goes into standby state if the mouse keyboard or microprocessor is not active for more than 40 minutes To select and activate deactivate or change the Standby feature see Running Rapid Resume Manager on page 73 Scheduler Use the Scheduler to set a time for the computer
317. fields The System Summary choice appears on the full Configuration Setup menu and also on the limited Configuration Setup user s menu Micro Channel Configuration Select Micro Channel Configuration to view or change the configuration of Micro Channel devices The Micro Channel Configuration screen appears displaying the status of adapters in the Micro Channel slots To configure a Micro Channel adapter or to change configuration settings on a Micro Channel adapter the System prompts you to insert the Reference Diskette The system programs Main Menu appears and displays the following choices 1 Start operating system PC Server 520 Type 8641 267 Backup of system diskettes Set View Micro Channel Configuration Copy an option diskette 5 Test the computer Boom The Set View Micro Channel Configuration utility program allows you to work with the configuration information for Micro Channel adapters See Using the System Diskettes on page 252 for additional instructions Press F3 to return to the Configuration Setup menu without changing the Micro Channel adapter configuration Micro Channel adapters and some other options are supplied with an Option Diskette This diskette has files that the server uses to recognize the new option and set it up to operate correctly The Micro Channel Configuration choice appears only on the full Configuration Setup menu Product Data Select Product Data to view specitic in
318. fis ESSE aE SU 139 Device Drivers 141 Sample Applications 141 Momo nores n ee 141 PCI Features and Options 142 Configuration Conflicts 142 Changing the Software Configuration 148 Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 143 Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts 144 Diagnostic Programs 145 Installing Additional Test Programs we ee 145 USERDIAG CFG Example 147 Internal SCSI Drives 147 Setting SCSI IDs for Internal Devices 148 Termination Internal SCSI Devices 150 Power Supply 152 Setup Program 153 Specifications 154 System Board Replacement 155 Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing 155 Locations A onu er re Gee as ROW 155 Input Output Connectors 156 Internal Drive Bays Disk Array Models 157 Internal Drive Bays Non Disk Array Models 159 System Board 161 Connections 162 ve ee oe woo 162 Symptom to FRU Index 164 Parts Listings 169 System s hoo s vog ee 4 eu os 170 Keyboards 101 102 Key 175 Power Cords 176 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 127 Features Note All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup Microprocessor e Pentium with 16KB of internal cache e
319. following Command Line Options are available when initially starting the diagnostic program from within its directory Type QAPLPRO XXX where XXX represents one of the following from the list below then press Enter Command Action B amp W The B amp W command line option forces the program to load in Black and White Monochrome mode which is often more readable on laptop computers LOG file The LOG file command line option directs the test programs to start using a specified Error Log file INT10 The INT10 command line option forces the test programs to use the BIOS for screen writes OXXX The OXXX command line option where XXX test group for example MBD MEM VID HDU FDU KBD COMILPT and so on omits the designated test group from testing USRCONFIG The USERCONFIG file command line file option tells the test programs to look for a user diagnostic configuration file other than the default USERDIAG CFG SCRIPT The SCRIPT file R command line option file R with the R runs the selected script Please see Scripting on page 10 fora description of scripting Note You can use a instead of a as the command line switch Viewing the Test Groups As you move the cursor bar up or down in the Test Module Selection window the right hand screen changes to show the attributes parameters and the selected tests of the corresponding Test Group The diam
320. for the primary power supply connector cable that connects to the optional power supply Failure to do So will cause the power supply connector cable to be crimped when the plate is replaced Note Tabs are located on the side of each power supply to secure them together Primary Power Supply Voltages Ifthe voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 2 3 5 E f j 72 WE J j Di s rive gt Connector 1 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum Connectors P11 P12 and P13 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 1 11 5 12 6 PC Server 500 Type 8641 199 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK A D Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 4 8 5 25 11 52 12 60 If the power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems Too many devices are set to start instantly see Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 549 There are too many large capacity devices installed The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning
321. for Assembly CMOS and DOS do not 2 System Board Match Controller Diagnostic Test 1 Hard Disk Drive Failed Adapter An error was detected while if installed testing the Hard Disk 2 Hard Disk Drive Controller Adapter 3 System Board Cylinder 0 errors 1 Hard Disk Drive Test detected an error 2 Hard Disk Drive reading the first cylinder of Adapter the hard disk drive if installed 3 System Board Device is Not Ready 1 Ensure the device is Ready the Device powered on or 2 Replace failing device Press Any Key 3 Device Adapter if installed 4 System Board PC Server 310 Type 8639 111 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Disk Error Encountered Opening Output File Press Any Key To Continue Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board DMA X Failed Main Components Test detected an error while testing the DMA controller 1 System Board DMA Page Register Failed DMA page register error 1 System Board Drive x Media y Mismatch FAT ID mismatch with 1 Check diskette and diskette drive capacity installed drive 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board Error in video buffer 1 Video Adapter Bad bits 2 System Board Video memory test error 3 Display Exception Interrupt In Protected Mode Diags Cannot Continue Server error remove one adapter at a time until the symptom goes away 1 Any Adapter System Board 3 Processor
322. formation The following additional service information is for the PC Server 320 Type 8640 Checkpoint Codes Configuration on page 135 e Configuration Conflicts on page 142 Diagnostic Programs on 145 e Internal SCSI Drives on page 147 Power Supply on page 152 Setup Program on page 153 e Specifications on page 154 System Board Replacement on page 155 e Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing on page 155 Checkpoint Codes During POST the computer displays the status of the components being tested in the form of Checkpoint CP codes in the lower left hand corner of the screen The following is a list of the CP codes followed by the routine in process and the boot mode CP Routine Boot Mode Code 01 Its A Reset Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 00 Init Chip NS Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 12 Periph Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 03 Disable Video Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 05 Phase 1 Enter Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Big Real Enable Local Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD APIC 06 Cache Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 07 Init Refresh Cold Restore Mfg 08 Wait For RTC Cold Restore Mfg 0A Std CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS 0C Ext CMOS Cold Warm Restore Mfg Checksum NS C SET INIT Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 0 Check Parity Cold Warm Restore Mfg
323. formation about the PC Server 520 such as the machine type and model the system serial number the system board identifier and the revision level or issue date of the flash EEPROM and BIOS Changes that you make on other menus are reflected on this summary screen You cannot edit any of the fields The Product Data choice appears on the full Configuration Setup menu and also on the limited Configuration Setup user s menu Configuring Devices and I O Ports You can view or change the assignments for devices and ports Some programs and devices require specific assignments Review the documentation that comes with the device for more information To view or change the assignments for devices video or serial or parallel ports 1 Power on the system When the F1 prompt appears press F1 The Configuration Setup Utility menu appears 2 Select Devices and Ports 3 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the assignment that you want to change Use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to Scroll through the list of available choices and make a selection If the assignment conflicts with another assignment an asterisk appears next to the conflicting setting You must change one of the conflicting settings to a value that does not conflict 4 When you complete all changes to the menu press Esc to return to the Configuration Setup menu 268 PC Server HMM Assigning Serial Ports The system
324. g 4 8 idle 1 Maximum configuration weight depends on options installed Figures above are a system fully populated with options 2 Maximum power and heat specifications are based on the 200 watt maximum capacity of the system power supply 3 For additional information see the SO Supplier s Declaration available from IBM 80 PC Server HMM System Board Replacement Notes 1 The BIOS and Vital Product Data VPD for the computer you are servicing must be installed on the new system board FRU after it is installed in the computer To do this you must run the Flash Update program using the Flash Update diskette shipped with the new system board FRU See BIOS Levels on page 68 Vital Product Data on page 89 and Flash BIOS VPD Update Procedure on page 69 2 Always ensure the latest level of BIOS is installed on the computer A down level BIOS may cause false errors and unnecessary replacement of the system board 3 The processor is a separate FRU from the system board and is not included with the system board FRU If you are instructed to replace the system board do the following 4 Install the processor from the old system board on the new system board 5 If any of the following options are on the old System board install them on the new system board e External cache memory and cache tag RAM Memory modules e Extended video memory 6 Ensure that the new system board jumpe
325. g saving or formatting Data or programs can be overwritten if you select an incorrect drive Diagnostic error messages appear when a test program finds a problem with a hardware option For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion See Return Codes on page 72 General error messages appear if a problem or conflict is found by an application program the operating system or both For an explanation of these messages refer to the information supplied with that software package Notes 1 Before replacing any FRUs ensure the latest level of BIOS is installed on the system A down level BIOS may cause false errors and unnecessary replacement of the system board For more information on how to determine and obtain the latest level BIOS see BIOS Levels on page 68 2 f multiple error codes are displayed diagnose the first error code displayed 3 If the computer hangs with a POST error to Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 95 4 f the computer hangs and no error is displayed go to Undetermined Problem on page 83 5 f a device is not highlighted on the Module Test menu that device may be defective 001 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Insert the
326. g Support form number SC33 6508 VM ESA Programming and Workstation Guide form number SC33 6509 VM ESA Guide for Solving Problems form number SC33 6510 VM ESA Guide to Systems Functions form number SC33 6511 VM ESA System Control Statements form number SC33 6513 VM ESA Diagnosis Tools form number 33 6514 e MVS ESA manuals One of the following MVS ESA SP V4 Library Guide form number GC28 1601 MVS ESA SP V5 Library Guide with JES2 form number GC28 1423 MVS ESA SP V5 Library Guide with JES3 form number GC28 1424 One of the following DFSM MVS V1R2 General Information Library Guide form number GC26 4902 PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 233 MVS DFP V3R3 Guide and Master Index form number GC26 4553 One of the following VTAM V3R4 1 for MVS ESA Release Guide form number LY43 0054 VTAM V3R4 2 for MVS ESA Release Guide form number LY43 0062 VTAM V4R1 for MVS ESA Release Guide form number GC31 6441 VTAM V4R2 for MVS ESA Release Guide form number GC31 6492 One of the following ISPF and ISPF DPF V3r5 Getting Started form number SC34 4256 ISPF Version 4 Getting Started form number SC34 4440 Both of the following TSO E Version 2 Library Guide form number CG28 1866 TCP IP for MVS V3R1 Planning and Migration Guide form number SC31 7189 Operating System Architecture References System 370 Principles of Operation fo
327. gical drive you can create another by assigning either the same or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive You can have as many as eight logical drives among four disk arrays 5 To return to the Create Delete Array menu press Esc To define more logical drives repeat steps 1 through 5 of this procedure 6 To leave this screen select Exit or press Esc A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action 7 To save your changes select Yes To maintain the disk array configuration that was in place before you made changes select No 8 If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5 you must select Initialize logical drive for proper operation This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the correct value a Select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive 354 PC Server HMM b Select the logical drives you want to initialize from the Logical Drive list by pressing the Spacebar the selected drives will appear highlighted To start the initialization press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action r Warning If you select Yes in the Confirm pop up window information in the logical drive will be overwritten with zeros Select Yes to confirm that you want to initialize this logical drive The initialization p
328. guration as DDD b Press Ctrl Alt Del to reboot the system Install the new drive into the bay d Select Rebuild Drive from the Main Menu then select Replace Drive rt e Highlight the correct DDD Drive in the bay you are replacing The system will start the drive After starting successfully the drive status wil change from DDD to OFL f Select Rebuild Drive from the Rebuild Menu The Rebuild Menu is a selection on the Main Menu g Highlight the correct OFL Drive in the bay you are rebuilding The system will rebuild the drive from 0 to 100 After the system has successfully rebuilt the drive it will change the drive from OFL to ONL and save the configuration If a fatal error occurs during the above procedure replace only the original drive back into the system that has not been rebuilt successfully yet Then do the following to restore the configuration from diskette a Insert the Option Diskette into the default diskette drive then press Ctrl Alt Del b Select Restore Configuration from diskette on the Advanced Options Menu from the Main Menu c Remove the Option Diskette and insert the diskette with the backup configuration into the default diskette drive and type in the file name for that particular system Then proceed replacing and rebuilding drives wherever you off If during the restoring from diskette an Adapter Is Respondi
329. h Mouse 06H4595 P54C 66 100MHz Processor Chip 75H8846 with Heat Sink Models EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EZO EZV P54C 66 100MHz Processor Chip 96G2415 with Heat Sink Models MZS MZE MZL MZO MZV 54 66 133MHz Processor Chip 96G2423 with Heat Sink Models ED1 EDE EDL EDO EDV P54C 66 133MHz Processor Chip 06H9492 Models MDE MDL MDO MDV Power Supply Adapter Board 06H8977 SCSI 2 Hard File Card 06H5078 Models ED1 EDE EDL SCSI 2 RAID PCI Card 06H5078 Models EZ1 EZS EZE EZL SCSI Fast Wide Card 06H8574 Models EDO EDV EZO EZV Speaker with Bracket 33F8444 SVGA Card 06H9114 Models ED1 EDE EDL EDO EDV SVGA Card 71G0031 Models EZ1 EZS EZE EZL 20 EZV PC Server HMM Index Power PC Server 520 Type 8641 Battery Models MDE MDL MZS MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV see Battery Notice on page 461 Power Cord see Power Cords on page 324 Real Time Clock with Battery Models ED1 EDE EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV 20 EZV see Battery Notice on page 461 Index DASD PC Server 520 Type 8641 13 4X CD ROM Drive 14 1 44MB Diskette Drive 15 2GB Hard Disk Drive Index Options PC Server 520 Type 8641 220W Power Supply Assembly P54C 66 100MHz Processor Chip with Heat Sink 33F8354 06H3398 88G4921 93F2361 06H3372 06H3237 06H6063 PC Server 520 Type 8641 321 Cables PC Server 520 Type 8641 f 1 _ 2 5 Index Cab
330. he RAID level you want to assign to the logical drive you are defining and it allows you to select the logical drive size You can enter the size in megabytes or you can accept the default value shown When you need to confirm an action the Confirm pop up appears in this area 2 You can select any of the choices that appear on the menus PC Server 720 Type 8642 337 3 The Bay Array selection list shows each bay in the server for each channel numbered 1 through 7 The abbreviation in the bay indicates the status of the drive installed in the bay Selections are made from this list to determine which bays hard disk drives are in the arrays The letter to the right of the bay identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in that bay is grouped Note The Channel Bay Array area on the screen does not reflect the physical configuration of the server The hard disk drives are installed in horizontal banks of bays in banks C D and E there are 6 bays numbered 1 through 6 from left to right See Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 on page 345 to see the physical location of the hard disk drives 4 The Array list shows you the array ID and the size in megabytes of the array Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Logical Drive list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process 5 The Logical Dri
331. he disk rebuild time at the expense of degraded handling of I O requests When the rebuild priority is set to low the rebuild I O requests can execute only if there is no pending system I O requests In a moderate to heavily loaded System low rebuild priority will increase the disk rebuild time significantly and provide better system performance Note Rebuild priority can be changed without affecting data in the logical drives Parity placement RA Warning Once a parity placement scheme is chosen and data stored it cannot be changed without destroying data Parity placement defines how parity is placed in the disk array with respect to data The following illustration shows both the Left Symmetric LS and Right Asymmetric RA parity placement in a four drive disk array Here AAA BBB and CCC are the data stripe units and PPO is the corresponding parity Similarly DDD EEE and FFF are the data stripe units and PP1 is the corresponding parity Right Asymmetric RA Left Symmetric LS Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PPO BBB CCC AAA PPO DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH JJJ KKK LLL PP3 PP3 JJJ KKK LLL In some situations you may want to try LS parity placement to improve performance The default parity placement is RA e Read ahead On Normally the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter transfers data
332. he left in the Bay Array selection list area in the previous figure are the bay IDs Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RDY ready drive you want to define as the hot spare then press Enter The RDY changes to HSP hot spare You can press Enter again to toggle between HSP and RDY Press Esc when you have finished The cursor will become active in the Create Delete Array menu Related Service Information 475 7 f you want to create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 469 8 If you are finished a Select Exit or press Esc A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your change Note The changes you make are not saved until you confirm them by selecting Yes in the Confirm pop up window b Select No if you do not want the drive you selected to be a hot spare select Yes to define it as a hot spare drive c Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration on page 483 for instructions Deleting a Disk Array The last array created must be the first deleted r Attention All the data and programs in the array are lost during this procedure Before proceeding back up any data and programs that you want to save To delete a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary disk
333. he power supply connector cable to be crimped when the plate is replaced Note Tabs are located on the side of each power supply to secure them together Power Supply LED and Button The power good LED and button are located on the side of the primary power supply button The LED when lit indicates that the power supply is good If the LED fails to come on when the computer is powered on do the following While observing the LED on the power supply press the power supply button If the LED fails to light while you are holding the button in you may have a defective power supply If the LED lights when the button is pressed go to Power Supply Shutdowns on page 358 356 PC Server HMM Primary Power Supply Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK fice aN SN ABCD j Drive UN Connector 1 4 7 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 3 44 8 5 25 5 4 411 5 12 6 5 7 10 8 13 2 B D 4 8 5 25 B A 411 5 12 6 Connectors P11 P12 and P13 Lead Lead V de V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 1 11 5 12 6 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages Ifthe voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 92999 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 48 5 25 B A
334. his includes the SureTest BIOS test tool and a virus detection test In addition you can also choose whether to run the power on self test POST in enhanced or quick mode Select Start Options then use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to advance through each data field The Start Options choice appears only on the full Configuration Setup menu Advanced Setup Select Advanced Setup to change values for advanced hardware features such as cache control and ROM shadowing A warning message appears when you select this choice to alert you that the system may malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly Follow the instructions on the screen carefully Select Advanced Setup then use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to advance through each data field When you restart the server after adding or replacing an amp cash you must enable the cache Use the following procedure 1 Start the Configuration Setup utility program Select Advanced Setup Select Cache Control Select Cache State Press the Left Arrow lt or Right Arrow key to change the cache state to Enabled Qv R0 PC Server 520 Type 8641 273 The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the full Configuration Setup menu Configuration Conflicts The resources used by a server consist of interrupt request levels IRQs direct memory access channels DMAs ports for example serial and parallel and memory
335. ht IBM Corp 1996 221 Features The following is a list of models of the IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 Note All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup Microprocessor e Pentium 90 MHz PC Server Complex 390PC 390 Processor Complex Memory Standard 32 MB 70 ns ECC Diskette Drives e Standard one 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent Keyboard and Mouse e 101 key keyboard e Mouse Expansion 6 Micro Channel slots 6 Standard slots 1 shared slot e Up to 10 drive bays Video e SVGA Adapter e Compatibility Video graphics adapter VGA Enhanced graphics adapter EGA Color graphics adapter CGA Multicolor graphics array MCGA Integrated Functions Video port on an adapter 2 serial ports 1 parallel port e Mouse port Keyboard port e Battery backed clock and calendar Power Supply Standard Primary 434 watt e Optional Secondary 220 watt SCSI Controller varies by model e SCSI RAID Hard Disk Drive Adapter SCSI Fast Wide hard Disk Drive Adapter 222 PC Server HMM Diagnostics and Test Information In addition to the error reporting capability of the S 390 Microprocessor Complex the PC Server System 390 has two sets of diagnostics to help locate hardware problems See Error Reporting P 390 on page 234 PC Server 500 Reference and Diagnostics Diskettes See the diagnostic inf
336. icing before replacing a FRU e The tray is not seated properly The computer is not configured properly The tray backplane or drive is defective PC Server 720 Type 8642 339 Drive Maintenance The following section provides information about status indicators for logical and hard disk drives and the results of a hard disk drive failure It also contains procedures for replacing defective drives and for redefining the space in an array by replacing logical drives Obtaining Drive Status To see the ID capacity and other information about each of the hard disk drives attached to the RAID adapter 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 2 Select Drive information 3 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay Array selection list As a drive is highlighted the information for that drive is shown at the bottom of the screen 4 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Note The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped Bay Array Selection List The status of the drives in the Bay Array selection list is defined as follows Status Meaning CDR CD ROM drive installed DDD Disk Drive Defunct The drive is an online or hot spare drive that does not respond to commands If a RDY drive is defective
337. idge Card Slot number of the board card issuing the error If you receive an IP or FP error do the following 1 2 382 Replace the board card issuing the error If replacing a FRU does not correct the problem reinstall the FRU you removed from the computer then continue with the next step Remove all cards boards of the same type identified by the error code one at a time until you locate the failing card board Example if the error code identified a memory card and replacing the memory card in the slot identified by the error code does not correct the problem remove all memory cards one at a time until you locate the failing board If the problem remains replace the FRUs in the following order a Memory Card b Processor Card c Bridge Card d System Board PC Server HMM Halt Indications HALT during the early POST code a fatal error is detected the system will display a halting message with a corresponding error code to indicate the reason for the halt condition The message will be displayed on the information panel in the following format HALT XXXxxx Where is the following code number replace the FRU s in the order listed If present ignore the last three digits xxx Note The exceptions to the above three or six digit error code format are the following error codes e HALT 02 e HALT 107C Halt Code FRU 02 1 System Board COM 1 fail
338. ies to perform their tasks See Icons System 390 on page 235 The utilities can be invoked from an OS 2 command prompt without using one of the PC Server System 390 interactive interfaces Some of the utilities can also be used to implement user written device managers 224 PC Server HMM The OS 2 utilities and their functions are Utility Function ALC EXE Allocate files as FBA DASD display volume information and change volume labels AWSCFG CMD Invoke the PC Server System 390 Configurator AWSCMLT EXE Configure logical terminal sessions on PC Server System 390s and OS 2 workstations AWSMOUNT EXE Change the DASD or tape configuration dynamically AWSPROF EXE Record the name and location of the DEVMAP to use as the default for the Configurator and initial program load IPL AWSSTART EXE Start PC Server System 390 device managers AWSSTAT EXE Display or change the status of the 370 I O subsystem and device managers BLDLIST CMD Build a file containing a list of SEND RECEIVE or COPY commands for all the files in a specified subdirectory CLRIO EXE Issue a CLEAR instruction to devices attached to the S 370 Channel Emulator A C370TRC EXE Take low level trace of the S 370 Channel Emulator A DEV2NAME CMD IPL CMD Create an American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCIl file from a DEVMAP file Start the channel processor and IPL
339. ile using the EISA Configuration diskette 3 The EISA Configuration diskette must be used to configure computers that have a EISA configuration For information on how to use the EISA Configuration diskette refer to the documentation shipped with the system 4 The procedure for starting the Set Utility will not work in an OS 2 DOS Window Starting Setup During the POST To start the program during the POST do the following 1 Power On the computer 2 During the POST memory test press and then release the Spacebar then press and release the CTR ALT S keys simultaneously System Utilities The Diagnostic Diskette contains utilities for formatting diskettes performing a low level format on a hard disk and editing Formatting Diskettes To format a diskette within the Diagnostic programs select one of the following options PC Server 300 Type 8640 21 Format A high density 1 44MB Format A low density 720KB Format B high density 1 44MB Format B low density 720KB After selecting one of the above options to format a diskette follow the instructions that appear on the screen Using the Low Level Format Program Depending on the hard disk capacity the Low Level Format program could take up to two hours When To Use the Low Level Format Program Use the Low Level Format program When you are installing software that requires a low level format e When you get recurring messages from the te
340. ilt into the system board 3 SCSI Cable 4 SCSI ID Switch on some models 026109XX 1 Display Display problem 026111XX 1 Video Adapter Video adapter problem 386 PC Server HMM Error Code FRU Action 02790XXX 02791XXX 02792XXX 02793XXX 027906XX 027907XX Ethernet adapter POST error 1 Check power and reseat adapter 2 Ethernet PeerMaster Server Adapter 02799XXX Communications to the Ethernet PeerMaster Server Adapter failed or the adapter failed 1 Run Setup and verify the Ethernet PeerMaster Server Adapter configuration 2 Ethernet PeerMaster Server Adapter 0279XXXX 1 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A FRU No 06H3059 2 System Board 3 Signal Pass Through Card if installed 028309XX 1 Display Display problem 028310XX 1 System Board System board video problem 028331XX 1 System Board System board video Error Messages Error Message FRU Action Drive in channel X bay X does not respond Installation stopped See Undetermined Problems on page 552 1 Replace the drive in the bay indicated 2 Any PCI Adapter 3 System Board Controller does not respond to commands no logical drive installed RAID Adapter 2 System Board PC Server 720 Type 8642 387 SCSI Non SCSI Error Code Format This section contains an explanation of the encoded SCSI and non SCSI POST error codes a
341. information This usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device If a conflict does occur refer to Configuration Conflicts Configuration Conflicts The resources used by a server consist of interrupt request levels IRQs direct memory access channels DMAs ports for example serial and parallel and memory This information is useful when a resource configuration conflict occurs Conflicts in the configuration occur if device is installed that requires the same resource as another device For example if you install an ISA network adapter and an EISA network adapter both requesting RQ 5 only one of the adapters can be configured e device resource is changed for example changing jumper settings e device function is changed for example assigning COM 1 to two different serial ports Aninstalled software program requires the same resource as a hardware device for example an expanded memory specification EMS device driver that uses the address required by the SVGA video adapter The steps required to resolve a configuration error are determined by the number and variety of hardware devices and software programs install in the system 142 PC Server HMM If a hardware configuration error is detected a configuration error message appears after the server completes POST but before the operating system starts You can bypass the error or start one of the configuration utility
342. ing On the System Stopping or Powering Off the System Power On Off Scenarios Starting the RAID Configuration Program RAID Program Keys Main Menu Selections Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics Viewing the RAID Configuration Locations oc Eae aaa Sh e Bays e a GUAE es Connectors Rear View Controls Indicators Front View Hot Swap Backplane SCSI ID Jumper ROM Address Jumper Setting Termination Hot Swap Back Plane SCSI 2 Fast Wide RAID Adapter A SCSI Fast Wide Adaptec Adapter System Board Symptom to FRU Index Corollary Error Codes Checkpoint Codes CP Test Error Indication Test Point Codes Multiprocessor Error Indication IP and FP Codes ue eh J Halt Indications HALT Micro Channel Error Symptoms Codes No Beep Symptoms Beep Symptoms Error Codes Error Messages SCSI Non SCSI Error Code Format PCI Error Format and Error Codes Messages Testing PCI Adapter Cards Accessing Checking the PCI Device List Parts Listing Soi di ea ee Keyboards 101 102 Key Power Cords 326 Server HMM Features In addition to the following features the Type 8642 Server is shipped with a ServerGuide package
343. ing a SCSI Drive as C and Another SCSI Drive a8 Di aux 4 Sek le he 546 Using a Standard Drive as C and a SCSI Drive as XA E nA Go Nx ind 546 SCSISelect Utility Program 547 Starting the SCSISelect Utility Program 547 SCSISelect Utility Program Options 547 Configure View Host Adapter Settings 547 SCSI Controller Settings Description 548 SCSI Disk Utilities 548 Using the Low Level Format Program 549 When Use the Low Level Format Program 549 Starting the Low Level Format Program 549 Setting the Motor Start Jumper 549 ServerG ide x nA GI sS 550 Software Hardware Mismatch Problems 550 Undetermined Problems 552 Problem Determination Tips 553 Phone Numbers U S and Canada 555 Related Service Information 455 Safety Information The following section contains the safety information that you need to be familiar with before servicing an IBM mobile computer General Safety Follow these rules to ensure general safety 456 Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after maintenance When lifting any heavy object 1 Ensure you can stand safely without slipping 2 Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet 3 Use a slow lifting force Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to lift 4 Lift by standing or b
344. ins 1 2 J35 Pins 1 2 Cache Selections Jumper Configuration Setting J2 Pentium write through cache Installed Pentium write back cache Not installed Default DACK Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W16 DACK 6 Pins 1 2 DACK 7 Pins 2 3 Keyboard Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W6 PS 2 Mouse installed Default Installed PS 2 Mouse not installed Not installed Clock Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J5 66MHz clock speed Default Installed 50MHz clock speed Not installed Pentium Clock Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J6 Oscillator for U15 Default Pins 1 2 Clock synthesizer Pins 2 3 30 PC Server HMM BIOS Mode Selection Jumper Configuration Setting w2 BIOS in boot recovery mode Pins 1 2 BIOS in normal mode Default Pins 2 3 Secondary Cache Selection Configuration J3 J4 J35 No secondary Pins 1 2 Pins 1 2 cache Reserved Pins 1 2 Pins 2 3 256KB secondary Pins 2 3 Pins 1 2 Pins 1 2 cache 512KB secondary Pins 2 3 Pins 2 3 Pins 2 3 cache W17 IRQ Selection Selection Setting Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 5 Pins 1 2 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 9 Pins 3 4 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 10 Pins 5 6 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 11 Pins 7 8 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 15 Pins 9 10 Redirect modified PC
345. ion r Warning If you select Yes in the Confirm pop up window information in the logical drive will be overwritten with zeros Select Yes to confirm that you want to initialize this logical drive The initialization process begins and you can see its progress in the Pct Int Percent Initialized column of the Logical Drive list d To stop the initialization at any time press Esc Then press Esc again to return to the menu or press Enter to continue initializing the drive To back up the disk array configuration to diskette you will need a 3 5 inch formatted diskette To back up the disk array configuration a Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu b Select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen A pop up window shows the default file name of CONFIG You can change the file name by typing over the default The Backup program will assign a file name extension of dmc PC Server HMM Power Supplies The Type 8641 computers is shipped with a primary power supply An additional or optional power supply can be added to the computer Connectors are used to transfer the primary power supply voltages and signals from the primary power supply to the optional power supply The following illustrations show how the two power supplies are connected m Attention When replacing the primary power supply cover plate rotate the plate 180 This will leave an opening
346. ion 2 devices 20 kg 44 Ib Note The weight of the 3517 is between 18 and 32 kg 39 7 and 70 5 Ib It takes two persons to safely lift the unit Operating Environment e Air temperature 16 to 32 C 60 8 to 89 6 F Relative Humidity 2096 to 8096 e Wet Bulb 23 0 C 73 4 F maximum e Voltage 115 230 Maximum altitude 2135 m 7000 ft Electrical Input e Input voltage Low range Minimum 90 V ac Maximum 137 V ac High range Minimum 180 V ac Maximum 265 V ac Input kilovolt amperes kVA approximately Low range input 0 76 kVA High range input 0 96 kVA Encolsure Type 3517 411 Locations Front View Top Cover Green Light Control Panel Power Switch Front Cover Media Bay 6 Media 5 Lock Hot Swap Bays Latch Hot Swap Hard Drive Power Switch Green Light Yellow Light 412 PC Server HMM Rear View Voltage Selection Switch System SCSI Cable Blank SCSI Panel Encolsure Type 3517 413 Internal View Chassis Backplane Manual Plug Devices To Manual Plug Devices A Screwlock 2X x Internal SCSI Cable 414 PC Server HMM Backplane SCSI Connector 12 V Power _ Connector T 5 V Power Connector b Hot Swap Drive Connector 5X Fa
347. ion Setup menu Defining System Security To control access to the server you can implement several of the security measures described in the User s Reference including defining two levels of password protection securing diskette access and a system owners name that displays during startup PC Server 520 Type 8641 269 Notes 1 The default values for all security related data fields are given in Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE on page 287 and Setup Program Default Settings Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 288 2 The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration Setup menu After you set the power on or administrator password Enter password appears on the screen each time you power on the server The passwords do not appear on the screen as you type them When you enter the correct password OK appears on the screen If you enter the wrong password Incorrect password appears on the screen and Enter password is again displayed After three incorrect attempts you must power off the server and start again Setting an Administrator Password The administrator password sometimes called the supervisor password allows the administrator to control who has access to some features of the server including the Configuration Setup utility program If an administrator password is set the password must be entered to display the complete men
348. ion of the function keys and keyboard keys when you are using the File Editor Key Description Arrows Home Move the cursor to the place in the text where you want to make changes Press Home once to move the cursor to the start of the current line Press Home twice to move to the beginning of the file Press Home three times to move to the beginning of the file End Press End once to move the cursor to the end of the current line Press End twice to move the cursor to the end of the current screen Press End three times to move the end of the file F2 Press F2 to be in search mode You are prompted to enter the search word or words on a reverse highlighted line at the bottom of the File Edit Screen After typing in the search word press Enter F3 Press F3 to find the next occurrence of a search word F4 Press F4 to mark the start of a block of text if you have not previously marked it If you previously marked the block of text pressing this key unmarks the text block F5 Press F5 to complete the block marking started with F4 If you did not previously press F4 to start marking a block of text F5 is ignored F6 Press F6 while the cursor is within the active block to move an active marked block of text Move the cursor to the new location where the active block is to be moved then press F6 again If there is no active block of text F6 is ignore
349. ions or sampler files These applications demonstrate the capabilities of the device and serve as software examples for programming the device Refer to the documentation supplied with the option for additional information To configure the server for an ISA or EISA adapter 1 Read the documentation supplied with the adapter 2 Copy any files with the extension of CFG from the option diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette PC Server 520 Type 8641 259 See Files on page 258 for important information about configuring ISA adapters 3 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 263 4 Record the new configuration information see Recording EISA Configuration Settings on page 262 5 Save the new configuration settings to the EISA Configuration Diskette and to the nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 263 6 Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter 7 Install the adapter in the server PCI Features and Options PCI devices automatically communicate with the server s configuration information This usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device If a conflict does occur refer to Configuration Conflicts on page 274 Assigning Interrupt Levels A rotational interrupt technique to is used to configure PCI adapters This technique enables you to install a variety of PCI adapters
350. isk drive motors start instantly at power on If the jumper is removed POST starts the drives sequentially Some drives are shipped with the motor start jumper installed to reduce POST time If many large capacity drives are added to the computer and they are set to start at power on the power supply might shut down If this happens it means that the total motor start surge current of a multiple drive startup exceeds the reserve current Related Service Information 549 capacity of the power supply You might have to remove one or more motor start jumpers Note Non IBM drives use either a jumper or a switch to Set the motor start mode To set the SCSI ID on a Rewritable Optical Drive do the following 1 Position the device so that the three position jumper is at the lower right corner 2 Refer to the table below to position the Rewritable Optical Drive jumpers for IDs 6 through 0 SCSI Jumpers SCSI Jumpers ID 123 ID 123 6 Ei 2 5 iI 1 o ff 4 0 3 ServerGuide It is important that you read and understand the following information whether you choose to install an operating system that is available in the ServerGuide package or you choose to install your own operating system One of the easiest and most efficient ways to install an operating system and take advantage of a wide variety of the latest software for the network environment is to use ServerGuide You
351. ister test failed Diagnostics 2 System Board 1116 1 Run Advanced Interrupt error Diagnostics 1117 1 Run Advanced Failed baud rate test Diagnostics 1162 1 Run Configuration Serial port configuration error 2 Serial Adapter if installed 3 System Board 11XX 1 System Board Not listed above 1201 1 System Board 2 Any Serial Device PC Server 310 Type 8639 101 Error Code FRU Action 1202 1206 1208 1 Dual Async 1209 12XX Adapter A 2 System Board 3 Any Serial Device 1207 1 Communications Cable 2 Dual Async Adapter A 13XX 1 Game Adapter 1402 Information only Printer not ready 1403 Information only No paper error or interrupt failure 1404 System board timeout failure 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 1405 1 Run Advanced Parallel adapter error Diagnostics 1406 1 Run Advanced Presence test error Diagnostics 14XX 1 Printer Not listed above Check printer before replacing system board 2 System Board 15XX 1 SDLC Adapter 1692 Boot sequence error 1 Run FDISK to ensure at least one active partition is set active 16XX 1 36 38 Workstation Adapter 1762 1 Run Configuration Hard disk drive configuration See Setup error Program on page 73 1780 Disk Drive 0 1 See Power Supply 1781 Disk Drive 1 on page 71 1782 Disk Drive 2 2 Hard Disk Drive 1783 Disk Drive 3 3 System Bo
352. ive hardware The following is a list of common machine check errors PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 235 236 Can t open find s file RC d2 Control Store Parity Error Try END P 370 and IPL again Uncorrectable memory error at s x daughter card code s No status available PS 2 used invalid S 370 address code s fic s addr s Internal use of invalid S 370 address code s fic s addr s code s x fic s addr s x PC Server HMM Power On Self Test POST When you power on or re boot the computer the computer runs the following two power on self tests POSTs Note These tests are run consecutively without intervention BIOS Code Checks the memory system resides on the system board direct access storage board device DASD configuration etc If you receive a POST error from the BIOS code refer to the Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual Licensed Internal Checks the P 390 processor Code LIC card and attached memory written to files on the hard card disk drive If you receive a POST error 165 from the P 390 LIC code see Error Reporting P 390 on page 234 Product Overview The IBM PC Server 500 System 390 is a PC Server 500 see PC Server 500 Type 8641 on page 177 with an IBM S 390 Microprocessor Complex see Locations on page 241 installed The S 390 Microprocessor Comple
353. ive in the window Note appear The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 to any logical drives defined in an array containing only one hard disk drive When this is the case the Select RAID Level pop up window will not If you have only two hard disk drives in the array the Select RAID Level pop up window appears but RAID level 5 is not selectable because you need at least three hard disk drives in an array to assign RAID level 5 to one of the logical drives You can define more than one logical drive for the array The only restriction is that the maximum number of logical drives you can define is eight Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RAID level you want to assign to these logical drives then press Enter Select a RAID LEVEL IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Select RAID Level Create Delete Array 1 RAID 5 2 0 77 ee T Lh id 1 mp1 2 Defin fe drive bead nan Delete disk array Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 0NL A 1 0NL B 6 Exit 2 L 0NL 2 Con C Arr Array Log Size RAID Date ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status Lon a 3 Lome 5760 AO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 8 5760 Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good ONE BO 3840 A2 1005
354. ive test 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable detected an error 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board GP KBD The keyboard test detected an error GP MBD The system board test Keyboard 2 System Board System Board 2 Processor detected an error 3 Real Time Clock Assembly GP_MEM The memory test 1 Memory Module Kit detected an error 2 System Board GP_PDV 1 Mouse The mouse test failed 2 System Board GP_PRT 1 Printer The printer test detected an 2 System Board error 3 Printer Cable GP VID 1 Video Adapter The video test detected an 2 System Board error 3 Color Display GRPCDR 1 CD ROM The CD ROM test detected an error 38 PC Server HMM Error Messages Error Message Symptom FRU Action Arithmetic Functions Microprocessor Failed 2 System Board An error was detected during the CPU Test Base Memory Test Failed 1 Memory Module An error was detected in 2 System Board base memory Battery Error 1 Replace the battery and run Setup 2 System Board Boot Sector Unreadable 1 Hard Disk Drive A boot sector read error 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable was detected on the hard 3 Hard Disk Drive disk drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Bus Noise Test Failed 1 Memory Module The RAM Test detected an 2 System Board error in the memory bus Butterfly Cylinder Access 1 Hard Disk Drive Test Failed 2 Hard
355. ives on page 147 for additional information The IBM 3 5 inch rewritable optical disc drive requires a special mounting bracket The following table shows the widths types and maximum heights for the drives that you can install in each bay Bay Drive Drive Maximum Drive Width Type Height 1 3 5 inch Hard 25 4 mm 1 inch disk with a drive in bay 2 41 3 mm 1 6 inches with no drive in bay 2 2 3 3 5 inch Diskette 25 4 mm 1 inch 4 5 25 inch CD ROM 41 3 mm 1 6 inches 5 9 3 5 inch Hard 41 3 mm 1 6 inches or disk 5 25 inch removable media2 Notes 1 drive that connects to the diskette cable Be sure the holes in the drive align with the drive housing 2 Removable media include CDs optical discs and tapes Table 3 Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes Non Disk Array Models 160 Server HMM System Board QA REAL TIME NON NN CLOCK S E IB Bank 0 U36 ani N 038 Bank 1 2 gt 043 5 2 044 J8
356. jueuno y sKejdsiq Dd 7 1 pesojoue eui Ajuo WOS oj swoj e pue jeuueu oy eui sKe dsiq S92I 9p 1595 pue 196 ssajdepe eui peufiisse ssejppe y s ejdsiq dew Aejdsig unq pue eui 10 UOIFEWOJU eui pue ung eui seJ01seJ pue dn yoeg eui Aq pardos oN eui 10159 uonduosoeg 65 PC Server 310 Type 8639 ayes useJjeJ pue Aouanbe jejuozuou e 1 pue adh Ke dsip ay esoouo Aejdsip 195 19npoud ei eui mouy osje si uogeuuojul siy uleis s pue JosseooJd eui 10 ay sKejdsip pue jenas eui pue jag Aun j
357. k drive connected to the host adapter The following SCSISelect options cannot be used unless the host adapter BIOS is enabled Support Removable Disks Under BIOS as Fixed Disks Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drivers gt 1 GByte BIOS Support for More Than 2 Drives Send Start Unit SCSI Commands Include In BIOS Scan Support Removable Disk Under BIOS as Fixed Disk allows you to control which removable media drives are supported by the host adapter BIOS It is only valid if the host adapter BIOS is enabled The default setting is Boot Only The following choices are available Boot only Only the removable media drive designated as the boot device is treated as a hard disk drive All Disks All removable media drives supported by the BIOS are treated as hard disk drives Related Service Information 541 Disabled Removable media drives not treated as hard disk drives In this situation software drivers are needed because the drivers are not controlled by the BIOS Note Support for removable media drives means only that the host adapter BIOS allows you to use a removable media drive as if it were a hard disk drive If you remove the media while the drive is powered on data may be lost If you want to be able to remove the media while the drive is powered on install the removable media device driver and set this option to Disabled Extended BIOS Translation
358. kette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable PC Server 300 Type 8640 45 Miscellaneous Error Messages Message Symptom FRU Action The Address Exceeds The Size Of Your Memory An invalid memory address was entered The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if an invalid memory address was entered at the at the Enter Memory Address Of Bad Chip prompt That Number is Out Of Range An invalid bit number was entered The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if an invalid bit number was entered at the Enter the Bad Bit prompt 1 Enter correct address 2 Memory Module 3 System Board Enter correct number 2 Memory Module 3 System Board You Cannot Delete the Motherboard The Remove Board option was selected The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if the Remove Board option was selected while the system board was displayed 1 Make the correct selection 2 Memory Module System Board Processor Pie 46 PC Server HMM Parts Listing PC Server 300 Type 8640 47 System Index System Unit PC Server 300 Type 8640 POND 48 Access Cover 3 5 Hard Disk Drive Tray s 1 each Base Frame Assembly Front Bezel Door Asse
359. klist Begin the checks with the power off and the power cord disconnected Checklist 1 2 3 Check exterior covers for damage loose broken or sharp edges Power off the computer Disconnect the power cord Check the power cord for a Athird wire ground connector in good condition Use a meter to measure third wire ground continuity for 0 1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and frame ground b The power cord should be the appropriate type as specified in the parts listings c Insulation must not be frayed or worn Remove the cover Check for any obvious non IBM alterations Use good judgment as to the safety of any non IBM alterations Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions such as metal filings contamination water or other liquids or signs of fire or smoke damage Check for worn frayed or pinched cables Check that the power supply cover fasteners screws or rivets have not been removed or tampered with Related Service Information 459 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices Any computer part containing transistors or integrated circuits ICs should be considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD ESD damage can occur when there is a difference in charge between objects Protect against ESD damage by equalizing the charge so that the machine the part the work mat and the person handling the part are all at the same charge Notes 1 Use product s
360. l and parallel ports e Video adapter Printer Keyboard Mouse Flexible Allows you to Test Run groups of tests in batch Control e Specify parameters to use for each test for example video modes disk cylinders port addresses and so on e Specify the number of passes you want to run one to continuous Log the test results to a text dBase DBF format file Save all test settings for future use e View System Information e View the server s configuration information For example you can view the IRQ DMA assignments memory usage device drivers and so on Select System Utilities Runa low level format also contains system utilities Format a diskette Error Messages Messages generated by the software the operating system or application programs generally are text messages but they also can be numeric Basically there are five types of error messages POST error messages Diagnostic error messages POST beep codes e Software generated messages Multiple messages Error Description Message POST Displayed when POST finds problems with Error the hardware or detects a change in the Messages hardware configuration POST Sounds emitted from the speaker if POST Beep finds a problem One beep indicates POST Codes completed successfully Multiple beeps indicate a problem was found by the POST 6 PC Server HMM
361. l connectors one 8 bit and one 16 bit One 16 bit external connector IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter Two 16 bit internal connectors One 16 bit external connector Diagnostics and Test Information The following list contains problems and references for diagnosing a PC Server 320 Notes The QAPlus PRO diagnostic program recognizes the primary processor as LUN 1 and the secondary processor as LUN 2 During testing the program automatically tests LUN 1 You must select LUN 2 if you want the program to test the secondary processor The type of DASD diagnostics required to test the hard disk controller adapter and drives is determined by the type of hard disk adapter installed in the computer Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Problem Reference Error Codes Error General Checkout Messages QAPlus PRO on page 4 and the Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual DASD Adapter Problems For non disk array models see SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter see Disk Array Configuration on page 461 Memory General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Power Supply Voltages Power Supply on page 152 Miscellaneous General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 PC Server 320 Type 8640 129 Additional Service In
362. le you might use QAPLPRO USRCONFIG MYTESTS CFG PC Server 520 Type 8641 249 USERDIAG CFG Example An example USERDIAG CFG file might look like the following Program Name Test Command Line Description Parameter BBSMODEM EXE 9600 Baud 5 5 Line Modem TEST1 EXE Generic 1 TEST2 EXE Generic 2 TESTALL EXE CMD 1 1 TESTALL EXE CMD 2 2 TESTALL EXE CMD 3 3 Note You can have more than one command line parameter for any given test When you view these tests on the Test Group window for the User Diag test group they appear as follows 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem Generic 1 Generic 2 CMD 1 CMD 2 CMD 3 The diagnostic program automatically assigns a test number to each test The test numbers start at 201 and continue upward as needed The numbers for the tests listed above are as follows 202 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem 203 Generic 1 204 Generic 2 205 CMD 1 206 CMD 2 207 CMD 3 250 PC Server HMM Diagnostics and Test Information Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL The following is a list of problems and references for diagnosing the above named computers Notes The System Board Diagnostics tests are the primary method for testing the computer See System Board Diagnostics on page 255 The QAPlus PRO diagnostic program recognizes the primary processor as LUN 1 and the secondary processor as LUN 2 During testing the program automatically tests LUN
363. led Note Minimum operating requirements vary for each computer For example AT Bus computers require 256KB of memory Micro Channel computers require 1MB of memory IML drive in the drive startup sequence IML systems only If the computer is a workstation no drives a default hard disk drive is not required 3 Power on the computer If the problem remains suspect the system board then the processor board in that order Note If the problem goes away when you remove adapter from the bus adapter and replacing that adapter does not correct the problem suspect the System board processor board then the bus adapter in that order Problem Determination Tips Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations that can be encountered use the following information to assist you in problem determination If possible have this information available when requesting assistance from Service Support and Engineering functions Machine type and model Processor or hard disk upgrades Failure symptom Do diagnostics fail What when where single or multiple systems 15 the failure repeatable Has this configuration ever worked has been working what changes made prior to it failing 15 this the original reported failure Reference Diagnostics Diskette Version Type and version level Hardware configuration Print print screen configuration currently in use
364. led Disabled Normal Disabled Shadowed SVGA PC Server 520 Type 8641 287 Setup Program Default Settings Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL Option Default Value Cache State Enabled Cache Size 256KB Diskette Drive A 1 44MB 3 5 in Diskette Drive B not installed Disketteless Operation Disabled Keyboard Numlock State On Keyboard Speed Fast Keyboardless Operation Mode Disabled Machine Type Model 8641 Memory Extended 360KB Bank 0 socket 16MB Kit Bank 0 socket 16MB Kit Bank 1 socket Bank 1 socket Bank 2 socket Bank 2 socket Bank 3 Socket Bank 3 Socket Total Memory 32MB Memory System 640KB Memory Type EOS Microprocessor Pentium Microprocessor Speed 100 MHz Monitor Horizontal Frequency Not Used Refresh Rate For 640x480 60 Hz Refresh Rate For 800x600 Undefined Refresh Rate For 1024x768 Undefined Refresh Rate For 1280x1024 Undefined Refresh Rate For 1600x1200 Undefined Monitorless Operation Disabled Mouse Installed Parallel Port 3BCh IRQ 7 Parallel Port Mode Standard Parallel Port Mode Extended Power On Self Test Enhanced ROM Shadowing F0000h FFFFFh Enabled System BIOS E8000h EFFFFh Enabled E0000h E7FFFh Enabled DFFFFh Disabled D8000h DBFFFh Disabled D4000h D7FFFh Disabled D0000h D3FFFh Disabled CC000h
365. les PC Server 520 Type 8641 1 2 3 3 3 gt 322 System Status Cable 1X4 Diskette Drive Signal Cable Diskette Drive Power Cable SCSI Fast Wide Cable 1X SCSI Fast Wide Cable 2X SCSI Fast Wide Cable 3X Models EDO EDV SCSI Fast Wide Cable 3X Models ED1 EDE EDL MDE MDL Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 1X SCSI Fast Wide Flex Cable 1X DASD Status Cable C2 Cable Models MDE MDL MDO MDV C2 Cable Models MZS MZE MZL 20 MZV Parallel Data Cable Models ED1 EDE EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV EZ0 EZV POS ID Select Cable Narrow SCSI Fast Wide ID Select Cable Serial Data Cable 2x Models ED1 EDE 06H3404 06H9345 06H8982 06H6876 06H3751 06H6675 06H6661 82G3610 06H6145 06H9343 82G3612 06H8059 06H2166 06H3592 06H3957 06H2165 EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV EZO EZV PC Server HMM Keyboards 101 102 Key Keyboards 101 102 Key Arabic 1391490 Belgium Dutch 1391414 Belgium French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia Croatia Bosnia 1393669 South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss French 1391412 Swiss German 1
366. licy PC Server 500 Type 8641 181 10 11 182 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Select Change write policy from the Advanced Functions menu The cursor will be active in the Logical Drive list Select the logical drive whose write policy you want to change The Advanced Functions screen appears Note Your information might be different from that shown in this screen The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size in megabytes of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date you created it The status of the logical drive is also shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive and rebuild the logical drive You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost Locate the Wrt pol Write Policy field in the Logical Drive list The write policy is shown as either WT write through which is the default setting or WB write back Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to select the logical drive whose write policy you want to change Warning If you change the write policy to write back wait at least 10 seconds after your last operation before
367. lied with the PC Server System 390 software These commands can be invoked from VM sessions running on the PC Server System 390 to access host VM data and OS 2 files and to interact with the OS 2 environment These are included with the VM Starter System supplied with the PC Server The following is a list of commands and their functions PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 223 Command Function CACHE Install and control CMS minidisk cache in the PC Server System 390 virtual machines HDETACH Detach a host VM minidisk HLINK Establish a link from a PC Server 390 VM session to the host VM minidisk HQUERY Display information about host minidisks LTRENAME Rename the title bar for a 3270 session MOUNT Associate an OS 2 file specification with a PC Server System 390 emulated tape drive 052 Execute an OS 2 command from a PC Server System 390 virtual machine PCOPY Copy import export files between OS 2 and VM PIPE OS2 Uses the OS2FILE stage command in a pipeline running under CMS to read or write an OS 2 file on an associated OS 2 system TFA Activates the Transparent File Access functions in a PC Server System 390 virtual machine OS 2 Utilities Several OS 2 utilities are provided with the S 390 Microprocessor Complex programs to help control and operate the PC Server System 390 The interactive functions invoked by the PC Server System 390 icons use some of these utilit
368. lity finds multiple AHA 2940 2940W host adapters in your system the PCI Bus and PCI device number of each adapter is displayed As you move the highlighted bar to different host adapters using the up and down arrow keys the red light on the corresponding adapter installed in the system lights to allow you to identify the correct adapter The Option menu is displayed after you select a host adapter Configuration View Host Adapter Settings Menu Options AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Configuration SCSI Channel Interface Definitions Host Adapter SCSI ID PETIT A SCSI Parity Checking Enabled Host Adapter SCSI Termination Enabled Additional Options SCSI Device Configuration Press Enter Advanced configuration Options Press Enter F6 Reset to Host Adapter Defaults s keys to move cursor Enter to select option Esc to exit default 536 PC Server HMM Host Adapter SCSI ID changes the host adapter SCSI ID from its default value of 7 AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Arrow keys to move cursor lt Enter gt to select option lt Esc gt to exit default Note The menu for the A 2940W adapter displays SCSI IDs 0 to 15 SCSI Parity Checking enables or disables host adapter SCSI parity checking AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Enabled Disabled Arrow keys to move cursor
369. lity support is especially important for but not limited to all LAN adapters and RIPL applications Software Failures After a Hardware Change After the initial installation any changes in the hardware configuration addition or changes of adapters or features might result in computer failures and require the reinstallation of the operating system or the software revisions Specific hardware configuration changes such as memory address interrupt level or programmable option select might result in a computer failure if the software has unique operating requirements Undetermined Problems You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify the failure the Devices List is incorrect or the system is inoperative Note If you suspect a software mismatch is causing failures solid or intermittent be sure to see Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 550 Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are not correct replace the power supply If the voltages are correct return here and do the following 1 Power off the computer 2 Remove or disconnect the following one at a time until you find the failure power on the computer reconfigure each time Any external devices e Surge suppressor device on the computer e Modem printer mouse or non IBM devices Each adapter Drives e Memory Module Kits Bus adapter 552 PC Server HMM Math coprocessor if instal
370. llation instructions 4 Install the device in the server 5 Start the Reference Diskette and a Record the current settings b Install the configuration files CFG 6 Install software programs See the installation instructions supplied with the software 7 Resolve configuration conflicts See Configuration Conflicts on page 274 Using the Configuration Setup Utility The built in Configuration Setup utility program provides a convenient method to configure various system settings The configuration information is stored in CMOS In most cases the server will operate using the default settings Always run the Configuration Setup utility program if you have added or removed any hardware option or if you receive an error message instructing you to do so Review the following information and the information supplied with the device before making changes Note Record the current settings before making any changes PC Server 520 Type 8641 265 The following menu appears when you start the Configuration Setup utility program Included with each selection is a short description of its purpose Note When a power on password is entered and an administrator password also is set a limited version of the menu appears To change the settings the administrator password must be entered System Summary Displays the current settings for all system functions such as processor type speed a
371. lled in bay A in all models A removable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1 You can install two drives in bay B You can install hot swappable hard disk drives in banks C D and E only Banks C D and E each contain six bays Bank C supports up to six drives However the total number of SCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank C combined is six on a single SCSI cable The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank C varies according to the model You can install up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives in bank E Note The bank letter designations are located on both vertical rails on the front of the server The bay slot numbers are located on the top of bank C and the bottom of bank E 278 PC Server HMM Open Bays Bank C Bays 1 6 Bank D Bays 1 6 Bank E Bays 1 6 CD ROM Drive Bay A1 Diskette Drive Bay A2 gt Open Bays A bezel sometimes called a cover plate or face plate covers the front of bay B2 only If you install a drive that uses removable media such as diskettes optical discs or tapes you might have to change this bezel PC Server 520 Type 8641 279 Considerations e Bay A comes with one SCSI CD ROM drive and one 3 5 inch 1 44MB diskette drive Bay A supports one 5 25 inch and one 3 5 inch half high diskette interface device supports One 5 25 inch full high removable media o
372. llel port Pointing device port Keyboard port 3 3V power connector Remote update jumper J25 CE use only Power connector 5V power connector Bank select jumper JMP5 Processor board slots Power on password jumper JMP1 Memory processor slot Fan connector Memory card slot Bus slots Bridge card slot Diskette drive cable connector Bad CMOS jumper J42 Operator panel cable connector Slot 1 emm Slot 2 c Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 J Slot 6 A feto HO soo For default settings refer to the label located inside the system PC Server 720 Type 8642 375 Symptom to FRU Index The information in this index should be used with the Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual This index contains the following information e Corollary error codes CP EP TP IP FP and HALT pages 376 through 384 Micro Channel Error Symptoms Codes on page 384 See also the additional error symptoms and codes for the Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual e SCSI non SCSI error codes SCSI Non SCSI Error Code Format on page 388 e PCI error code
373. llowing information is for the PC Server 520 Type 8641 Configuration Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE Configuration Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 264 Configuration Conflicts on page 274 Internal Drives Type 8641 on page 278 e Power Supplies 8641 on page 283 Setup Program Type 8641 on page 286 Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE on page 287 Setup Program Default Settings Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 288 e Specifications 8641 on page 289 e Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing on page 290 System Board Replacement Type 8641 on page 290 Type 5 Adapter Installation Type 8641 Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 291 Configuration Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE Note DASD and other adapters may require additional configuration information Configuration is the allocation of the server resources to organize and interconnect hardware devices and software programs The steps required to configure the above named servers depend on the number and variety of devices and programs installed For information about configuring the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter see Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 465 These servers support the following types of adapters Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI E
374. lock architecture FBA device manager The FBA device manager gets the request for device 100 It looks in the DEVMAP entry for device 100 to fill out the OS 2 file name for 9336 device 100 The device map points to the OS 2 file that emulates the 370 disk drive for example D VM MAINT 191 for a VM system or D VSDISRES 140 for a virtual storage extended VSE system A request is issued to OS 2 to read the data from the OS 2 file name MAINT 191 in the VM directory of disk drive D or from the OS 2 file name DOSRES 140 in the WSE directory of disk drive D OS 2 issues the request for the data to the PC Server device containing disk drive D The data is passed back up the line until it is presented to the requesting VM or VSE program The Configurator requires the following four files to operator correctly For information on the content of these files refer to the Introducing the PC Server 500 System 390L manual Form Number GC24 5717 00 supplied with the computer DEVMAP xxx DMKRIO ASM DMKSYS ASM USER DIR IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 227 Configurator Structure S 390 The following illustration shows the hierarchy of menus in the PC Server System 390 Configurator Online help is available for most of the menus Configurator Logo Configurator Password Functions Main Me
375. lready assigned 30Ax Command rejected device not assigned 30Bx Command rejected maximum LBA exceeded 30Cx Command rejected 16 bit card slot address range exceeded 313x Invalid device for command 3FFx Status not returned by adapter 401x Recovered error not an error condition 402x Device not ready PC Server 500 Type 8641 213 Information 403x Device medium error 404x Device hardware error 405x Illegal request for device 406x Device unit attention would not clear 407x Device data protect error 409x Device vendor unique error 40Ax Copy operation aborted by device 40Bx Device command aborted 40Cx Device search data command satisfied 40Dx Device volume overview residual data remains in buffer 40Ex Device mismatch source data did not match medium data 500x Check condition on device no sense data returned 501x No index or sector 502x Seek incomplete 503x Write fault 504x Drive not ready 505x Drive not selected 506x No track zero found 507x Multiple drives selected 508x Logical unit communication failure 509x Head positioning error track following error 510x CRC or ECC error on ID field 511x Unrecoverable read error 512x No address mark ID field 513x No address mark data field 514x Record not found 515x Seek error 516x Data synchronization error 517x
376. ly shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems many devices are set to start instantly See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 549 There are too many large capacity devices installed such as hard disk drives The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning guide form number G41G 2927 for more information Attention Unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before checking voltages to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 PC Server 520 Type 8641 285 Setup Program Type 8641 To access the Setup program 1 286 Remove all diskettes from the server Note Never start the Setup program while using the EISA Configuration program Power on the server and watch the screen Be ready to act quickly After the IBM logo screen appears and then quickly disappears you are prompted to Press F1 or F2 to enter SETUP As soon as you see that prompt press the correct F key F1 or F2 If the Setup program screen doesn t appear restart the system and try
377. m Board first 64 of RAM 2 1 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 2 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 3 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 4 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 3 1 X 1 System Board The DMA register failed 34 PC Server HMM Beep Symptom FRU Action 3 2 4 System Board The keyboard controller 2 Keyboard failed 3 3 4 1 Video Adapter Screen initialization failed 2 System Board 3 Display 3 4 1 1 Video Adapter The screen retrace test 2 System Board detected an error 3 Display 3 4 2 1 Video Adapter POST is searching for video 2 System Board ROM PC Server 300 Type 8640 35 Error Codes Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0000 SCSI Adapter not enabled 1 Be sure the adapter Device and Bus Master fields are enabled in the PCI configuration program Refer to the documentation that was shipped with the computer 002X 1 SCSI Adapter 008X 1 Check SCSI Check for proper installation of SCSI terminators terminators for proper installation SCSI Cable SCSI Terminator SCSI Device SCSI Adapter 0115 Protected mode cannot be enabled 1 System Board 0164 POST detected a base memory or expansion memory size mismatch 1 Run Setup and ensure the memory Size is co
378. main menu next to the completed steps You can access help information through Help windows which remain active e Information windows which appear automatically as a result of some configuration activities e The Help F1 prompt which allows you to access the Help Menu for screens displaying the prompt To remove the Help Menu press Esc Recording EISA Configuration Settings Record the configuration settings you made in Step 3 View or edit details and Step 4 Examine switches or print report on a separate sheet and store it in a safe place for future reference If a printer is attached to the server you can use the Print Screen key to print these settings The settings are helpful when you install additional options Also record the new settings each time you make changes Be sure to record the current configuration settings for the user Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette Using a backup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette can prevent damage to the original diskette see Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 136 To start the EISA Configuration Diskette do the following 1 Insert the EISA Configuration Diskette into the diskette drive 2 Power on the computer or if it is already on shut down the operating system and restart the computer 3 When the first screen appears type CF and press Enter Follow the instructions on the screen until the main menu Steps in configuring the computer
379. maintenance activity the configuration backup information on the diskette might be different from that in the adapter It is important that you back up the disk array configuration information frequently to keep the backup information on the diskette current To restore the RAID configuration information 1 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the system If the system is already on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Restore config from diskette 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Using the Advanced Functions This section gives the procedures for using the advanced functions such as changing the write policy changing the RAID parameters and formatting a drive Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you to potential loss of data and should be heeded before answering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAID configuration program Changing the Write Policy When you configure a logical drive the RAID adapter automatically sets the write policy to write through WT mode where the completion status is sent after the data is written to the hard disk drive To improve performance you can change this write policy to write back WB mode where the completion status is sent after the data is copied to cache memory but before the data is actually written to the storage device 332 Server HMM Although you gai
380. mbly PC Server 300 Label Power Button with spring Keylock Assembly with keys Bezel 5 25 Blank Bezel 3 5 Blank Speaker Fan Assembly with Connector Card Guide Pedestal DASD 3 Drive Cage Diskette Drive see DASD Hard Disk Drive see DASD 300W Power Supply with Switch System Board Pentium without Memory and Processor Models OPO OPT 1P0 1PT Processor Chip Pentium 60MHz Models OPO OPT 1PO 1PT System Board 486DX2 66 without Memory and Processor Models ONO ONJ 1NO 1NJ Processor Chip 486DX2 66 Models ONO ONJ 1NO 1NJ 4MB Memory SIMM Parity Models ONO ONJ 1NO 1NJ 8MB Memory SIMM Parity Models OPO OPT 1PO 1PT 16MB Memory SIMM Parity 32MB Memory SIMM Parity 486 Real Time Clock with an internal battery Models ONO ONJ 1NO 1NJ see Battery Notice on page 461 Pentium Real Time Clock with internal battery Models OPO OPT 1P0 1PT see Battery Notice on page 461 486 Heat Sink with Clip Models ONO ONJ 1NO 1NJ Pentium Heat Sink with Clip Models OPO OPT 1PO 1PT Keyboard with Cable see Keyboards 101 102 Key on page 50 Key Lock Cable PC Server HMM 06H8930 06H2652 06H8933 06H8935 06H6003 06H2191 33F8433 71G0771 71G0770 06H2649 06H2647 71G0757 96G2412 06H8938 71G0044 71G0747 06H2680 71G0033 06H2679 73G3233 73G3234 60G2950 73G3235 06H3397 06H3398 06H2179 06H2180 06H8766 Index System Unit PC Server 300
381. memory available to start the memory test Memory Module 2 System Board PC Server 300 Type 8640 41 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Missing QAPlus PRO Files s One or more Diagnostic support files are missing 1 Diagnostic Diskette NO LOOP BACK PLUG Skipping External loopback test 1 Install wrap plug on the serial port rerun test No wrap plug installed 2 System Board Not ready 1 Ready Printer Printer not on line or not 2 Printer ready 3 Printer Cable 4 System Board Not ready error ready drive A DMA Transfer test error 1 Ensure that a known good formatted diskette is in drive a then rerun the test 2 System Board No type amatic repeat Note At least one repeat key must be tested during this test or an error will occur The Type amatic test detected an error Keyboard 2 System Board Not used by any standard device The IRQ is not currently being used by a non standard device 1 System Board Numeric Proc Failed The NPU TEST detected an error Microprocessor 2 System Board Parallel Ports Failed Test Report Summary message 1 System Board Pass N Errors Drive X Failed The read write test failed on the diskette drive 1 Diskette Drive 2 System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable Pass N Drive Not Ready The diskette drive door is open or defective 1 Ensure diskette drive
382. ms do not find a problem or you want to perform in depth testing the Module Testing mode provides a method to run individual tests on a single module For example you can run an individual test for the diskette drive or you can run groups of tests for several modules In the Module Testing mode you can define how many times each test should run and how the test program should log the errors To start the Module Testing mode 1 Start the diagnostics diskette See Starting the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette on page 10 2 Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu 3 Select Module Tests from the next menu 4 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the highlight bar from one selection to the next 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Note As you scroll down the selection menu the Test Group window to the right changes to correspond to the highlighted Module Running Selected Module Tests To run all selected tests for a test group 1 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the cursor to your selection 2 Press Enter Note A 4 appears next to your selection Running All Selected Modules To run all selected test modules 1 Use the down arrow key to move the cursor to the last choice Run All Selected Modules 2 Press Enter Note A appears next to your selection Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups To change selected tests in a Test Group 1 In the Module Tests Men
383. mware computer or run the The driver is not able to system configuration communicate with the program to check for adapter possible system conflicts 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 203 Board diags failed to 1 Restart your complete computer or run the The driver is not able to system configuration communicate with the program to check for adapter possible system conflicts 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 301 POST Flash Main 1 10Base T or 10Base2 Sector Checksum Failure Adapter 302 POST was not performed board 303 POST Test Sequencer Internal Failure 304 POST Flash Boot Sector Checksum 305 POST DRAM Size 1 Verify proper seating Detection Failure of the DRAM SIMM The power unit is down on the adapter 2 10Base T or 10Base2 Adapter 306 POST DRAM Byte 1 Verify proper seating 8 bit Wide Failure of the DRAM SIMM 307 POST DRAM Short on the adapter 16 bit Wide Failure 2 10Base T or 10Base2 308 POST DRAM Word 32 bit Wide Failure 309 POST DRAM Long 64 bit Wide Failure 310 POST DRAM Trip 96 bit Wide Failure 311 POST DRAM Quad 128 bit Wide Failure 312 POST DRAM Addressability Failure The power unit is down Adapter Related Service Information 505 Error Message FRU Action 313 SRAM Size Detection Failure 314 SRAM Byte 8 bit Wide Failure 315 SRAM Short 16 bit Wide Failure 316 SRAM Word 32 bit Wide Failure 317 SRAM Long 64 bit Wide
384. n Utility You can start the SCSISelect utility program from the BIOS banner if the adapter BIOS is enabled or from the SCSISelect Configuration Utility diskette shipped with the computer From the BIOS Banner The BIOS banner is displayed when you power on or reboot the computer The banner lists the model number and SCSI ID of the SCSI devices connected to the adapter To start the utility do the following 1 Power off then power on the computer or reboot the computer 2 When the BIOS banner is displayed on the screen press Ctrl A From the SCSISelect Configuration Utility Diskette To start the utility from the SCSISelect Configuration Utility diskette do the following 1 Insert the SCSISelect Configuration Utility diskette into diskette drive A 2 Atthe DOS prompt type A 2940cfg exe 3 Press Enter Related Service Information 535 SCSISelect Configuration Utility Menus Options If the SCSISelect utility detects only one AHA 2940 2940W host adapter in your system it displays the following Options menu lr AHA 2940 2940W at Bus Device xx xxh Would you like to configure the host adapter or run the SCSI disk utilities Select the option and press Enter Press F5 to switch between color and monochrome modes Options Configure View Host Adapter Settings SCSI Disk Utilities keys to move cursor lt Enter gt to select option lt Esc gt to exit default Note If the SCSISelect uti
385. n ASCII text file It must include the following three items for each test to run Program Name COM and EXE files only Test Description of the test to be run Command line parameters to be passed to the program identified in the first item of this list PC Server 320 Type 8640 145 Notes All of the information for a given test must be on a single line and a semicolon must separate the items on the line Make sure you press Enter at the end of each line of text in the USERDIAG CFG file This creates a carriage return line feed CR LF which is necessary for the User Diagnostics to be found and executed If the program executable file is in a directory other than the QA directory or other directory you have designated to contain the QA files that directory must be listed in the PATH section of the AUTOEXEC BAT You can use a CFG file other than USERDIAG CFG if you use the command line USRCONFIG filename when running the diagnostic programs For example you might use QAPLPRO USRCONFIG MYTESTS CFG 146 PC Server HMM USERDIAG CFG Example An example USERDIAG CFG file might look like the following Program Name Test Command Line Description Parameter BBSMODEM EXE 9600 Baud 5 5 Line Modem TEST1 EXE Generic 1 TEST2 EXE Generic 2 TESTALL EXE CMD 1 1 TESTALL EXE CMD 2 2 TESTALL EXE CMD 3 3 Note You can have more than one command line parameter for any given tes
386. n You must remove the termination from the other devices within the chain If you attach external devices to a non disk array model with internal devices attached you must also change the termination setting of the SCSI 2 adapter from the default in the SCSISelect utility program as described in SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 Note Read the README file on the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette for updated information Select Option Diskette from the first menu Termination on disk array models is automatically set The requirements for terminating internal SCSI devices on non disk array models are e f you attach internal SCSI devices to only one of the SCSI 2 adapter internal connectors you must terminate the last internal device on the bus cable and disable the termination on the other devices connected to the internal SCSI connector The SCSI 2 adapter is already terminated f you attach internal SCSI devices to both of the SCSI 2 adapter internal connectors you must 150 PC Server HMM terminate the last internal device on each internal cable and disable the termination on the other devices connected to the internal SCSI connectors You must also change the termination setting of the SCSI 2 adapter from the default in the SCSISelect utility program as described in SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 Note You can use only one of the two internal SCSI con
387. n shut down the operating system and restart the computer 3 When the first screen appears type CF and press Enter Follow the instructions on the screen until the main menu Steps in configuring the computer appears 4 Use the Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow key to advance through the items on the screen Use the Tab key to select choices on the bottom of the Screen Press the Esc key to return to a previous menu 5 Press Enter to make a selection 6 Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change edit the configuration information Note Adapters installed in the server appear automatically on the EISA Configuration screens after you copy the adapter s configuration file file with an extension of CFG to the EISA Configuration Diskette If you want to manually add an adapter that you have not yet installed in the server add it using Step 2 from the menu To configure ISA adapters follow the instructions on the screen Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function Locking an ISA adapter reserves the selected resources and prevents the system from using them to resolve resource conflicts Use the Advanced function to lock ISA boards An exclamation mark appears next to locked adapters To use the Advanced functions do the following 1 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette 2 Atthe main menu select Step 3 The View or edit details scree
388. n P Connector Backplane Encolsure Type 3517 415 Power Supply The power supply is mounted at the top back of the 3517 Power Switch Screws 2X LED Cable 5 Mounting amp Grounding Screw Holes 4X Voltage Selection 42 Switch To Manual lt Plug Devices To Backplane Power Cord Connector Attention The Voltage Selection Switch is two position switch on the power supply The switch can be set to 115 V ac in USA or 230 V ac in some other countries The switch must be set to match the input voltage at the wall outlet before connecting the power cord If the 3517 is connected to the wrong level of voltage input the 3517 will not operate and the power supply can be damaged The power supply is not autoranging Symptom to FRU Index Supplement The information in this supplemental index supports the SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 The index lists symptoms and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use the index to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing this unit 416 PC Server HMM m Important The information in this manual is intended for service representatives who are trained to repair the IBM 3517 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Before servicing an IBM product be sure to review Safety Information on page 456 For additional information refer to the 3517 Model 001 SCSI Multi Storage Enclosur
389. n appears 3 Press F7 The Advanced functions screen appears 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to a Lock or unlock boards b View additional system information C Set verification mode d Maintain SCI files PC Server 520 Type 8641 263 Configuration Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL The Configuration Setup utility programs are stored in CMOS These programs allow you to do the following Set the system date and time Define input and output device parameters e Define system security The PC Server 520 Reference Diskette and the PC Server 520 Diagnostic Diskettes supplied with the server provide additional configuration and diagnostic support for the system board disk drives and other system components The PC Server 520 Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskette supports the Micro Channel adapters The PC Server 520 Models MXO MXT MYO MYT MYR supports the following types of adapters Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI e Micro Channel Architecture Three hardware configuration utility programs are supplied with the server e Configuration Setup e SCSISelect e System programs on the Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes The built in Configuration Setup utility program configures system board functions such as serial and parallel port assignments and the startup sequence for drives installed in the server It also allows you to set passwords for starting up and accessing the Configuration Setup utility
390. n bay B and bank C is six The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank C varies according to the model you purchased You can install up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives in bank E Note The bank letter designations are located on both vertical rails on the front of the server The bay slot numbers are located on the top of bank C and the bottom of bank E A cover plate sometimes called a bezel or face plate covers the front of bay B2 only If you install a drive that uses removable media diskette optical disc tape you might install and adjust the cover plate after you install the drive in bay B2 PC Server 720 Type 8642 345 Considerations Bay A comes with one SCSI CD ROM drive and one 3 5 inch 2 88MB diskette drive Bay B supports One 5 25 inch full high removable media or non removable media device or One 5 25 inch half high removable media device and one 3 5 inch half high removable media device or Two 3 5 inch or two 5 25 inch slim high or half high removable media devices Note Only one of the devices installed in bay B can be a SCSI device You cannot install hot swappable drives in bay B Supports eighteen 3 5 inch slim high hot swappable hard disk drives or nine 3 5 inch half high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks C D and E Banks C D and E can accommodate six slim high drives or three half high drives or a combinati
391. n each bay see Configuration Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 264 or Configuration Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE on page 256 Hard Disk Drive All models come with a SCSI 2 adapter The number and capacity of the hard disk drives varies depending on your model PC Server 520 Type 8641 295 Input Output Connectors Display Connector gt Expansion Slots SCSI Connector Non Disk Array Models SCSI Connector Disk Array Models Mouse Connector Keyboard Connector I Serial Connectors Parallel Connector SCSI Connector Knockout Power Connector Power Connector The power cable connects here Keyboard Connector The keyboard cable connects here Mouse Connector The mouse cable connects here This port also is called an auxiliary device or pointing device port Parallel Connector One 25 pin parallel connector is provided This is where the signal cable for a parallel printer or other parallel device connects to your server SCSI Connector Knockout This knockout allows access to the internal connector on a second SCSI 2 adapter Serial Connectors Two 9 pin serial connectors A and B are provided The serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device usually connects here If you are using a 25 pin signal cable you need a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter cable SCSI Connector External small computer system interface SCSI devices att
392. n page 428 e Specifications on page 432 e Systems Supported on page 433 Power on Self Test POST Each time the expansion enclosure is powered on it performs a series of tests called the power on self test or POST the tests detect a problem an error message appears on the information panel If you suspect a problem or an error message appears refer to Symptom to FRU Index on page 446 Power on Sequence Note The expansion enclosure can be powered on without connecting it to a server However the expansion enclosure must be connected to a server before the drives installed in the enclosure can be used To power on the expansion enclosure do the following 1 Locate the keys then unlock and open the door on the front of the expansion enclosure 2 If the server is powered on power it off 3 Lift the transparent Power Enable Switch cover on the front panel and press the Power Enable Switch the Power OK indicator will illuminate 4 Then press the Power On Off switch located just above the Power Enable Switch The information panel will display IBM 3518 5 Power on the server The power on self test POST begins 6 Check the monitor connected to the server The screen displays the IBM logo and a number that represents the amount of available server memory The server beeps once to indicate that it is working properly 426 PC Server HMM Notes 1 If you hear more than
393. n performance with write back mode it creates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure This is because the system gets a completion status message when the data reaches cache memory but before data is actually written to the storage device To change the write policy 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Change write policy from the Advanced Functions menu The cursor will be active in the Logical Drive list 4 Select the logical drive for which you want to change the write policy The Advanced Functions screen appears Note Your information might be different from that shown in this screen The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size in megabytes of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date you created it The status of the logical drive is also shown Good All is well with the drive Critical Replace the hard disk drive and rebuild the logical drive You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost 5 Locate the Wrt pol Write Policy field in the Logical Drive list The write policy is shown as either WT write through which is the default setting or WB write back 6 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or th
394. n retrace tests in progress or failure 9B N A Search for video ROM in progress 9C N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits 9D N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits 9E N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits AO 3 1 1 Timer tick interrupt test failure Al 3 1 2 Interval timer channel 2 test failure A3 3 1 4 Time Of Day clock test failure A7 3 2 4 Comparing CMOS memory size against actual A8 3 3 1 Memory size mismatch occurred DO N A Cache State D1 N A Cache Init D2 N A Cache Restore D3 N A Cache Config D4 N A Cache Flush D5 N A Cache Enable D6 N A Cache Disable D7 N A Cache Custom eth N A CSET BFR VIDROM e5h N A CSET AFT CMCFG 194 PC Server HMM Configuration Note DASD and other adapters may require additional configuration information Configuration is the allocation of the server resources to organize and interconnect hardware devices and software programs The steps required to configure the above named severs depend on the number and variety of devices and programs installed For information about configuring the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter see Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 465 These servers support the following types of adapters Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI Extended Industry Standard Architecture EISA Industry Standard
395. n you need to confirm an action the Confirm pop up appears in this area 2 You can select any of the choices that appear on the menus 3 The Bay Array selection list shows each bay in the server for each channel numbered 1 through 7 The abbreviation in the bay indicates the status of the drive installed in the bay Selections are made from this list to determine which bays hard disk drives are in the arrays The letter to the right of the bay identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in that bay is grouped 186 Server HMM Note The Channel Bay Array area on the screen does not reflect the physical configuration of the server The hard disk drives are installed in horizontal banks of bays in banks C D and E there are 6 bays numbered 1 through 6 from left to right See Installing Internal Drives on page 191 to see the physical location of the hard disk drives 4 The Array list shows you the array ID and the size in megabytes of the array Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Logical Drive list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process 5 The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive for example A1 the size of the logical drive the RAID level assigned to the logical drive the date it was created and the write policy The status of the logical drive also is shown Good m
396. nal device it must be terminated Since the SCSI 2 adapter is already terminated do not change the termination setting Cabling Requirements Before you install external SCSI devices you must have the correct external SCSI cables See Table 4 on page 510 for information on cable lengths The cables must have the proper connector for the SCSI 2 adapter on one end and the proper connector for the first external device on the other end The SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus adapter can support a total of 15 devices and the SCSI 2 PCI Bus RAID adapter can support a total of 14 devices provided that you do not exceed the maximum cable lengths listed in Table 4 on page 510 If you are using a SCSI data transfer rate greater than 5MB per second the maximum length of the SCSI bus cable must not exceed 3 meters 9 8 feet If you are using a SCSI data transfer rate of 5MB per second or slower the maximum length of the SCSI bus cable must not exceed 6 meters 19 7 feet These lengths apply to the combined lengths of the internal and external cables Adhering to these standards ensures that the server operates properly Related Service Information 509 The following table shows the maximum cable lengths for connecting SCSI devices based on data transmission rates Note The maximum cable length for an external cable is determined by subtracting the length of the internal cable being used from the maximum length of SCSI cable that can be
397. nced PS 2 Servers Planning and Selection Guide GG24 3927 PC Server HMM Contents About This Supplement Related Publications General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO General Checkout QAPlus PRO Diagnostics QAPlus PRO PC Server 300 8640 Features gt unu ke ah See e REM Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information Locations 486DX2 System Board Locations Pentium System Board Symptom to FRU Index PartsListing PC Server 310 8639 Featules aie be Sy el ue ik Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information 2 Locations Symptom to FRU Index Supplement Parts Listings 24 d uk Brae te ketone PC Server 320 8640 Features Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information Locations 4 44k gee a bd dee Symptom to FRU Index Parts Listings PC Server 500 8641 Features Aus soe ae ee Stan Diagnostics and Test Information Additional Service Information Locations System Board Symptom to FRU Index Parts
398. nd 95 and later version PS 2 Micro Channel servers Network Operating System Requirements Use one of the following network operating systems e OS 2 LAN Server 2 x or 3 x Novell NetWare 3 1x or 4 0x IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette The PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette is shipped with the PeerMaster Server Adapter options The diskette contains the following Device drivers Setup programs e enablers Diagnostic programs Operation Modes Mode Description Traditional Adapter Used when you expect little or no cross subnetwork traffic VNET Switch Used when you need to build subnets to provide cross segment traffic 492 PC Server HMM Traditional Adapter Mode When the adapter is operating in this mode the drivers for the adapter register each individual LAN segment with the network operating system NOS as a unique subnet The NOS views the adapter as four separate adapters Each network segment must be configured with a unique network number Notes Do not externally join using bridges switches or concentrators ports of adapters e You can configure as many nodes as you need the adapter places no limit on the number of nodes per port e Ensure that each port is bound to the protocol with a unique network number VNET Switch Mode Notes Do not externally join using bridges switches or concentrators
399. nd detailed information about each code Error messages are displayed on the screen as three four five eight twelve or thirteen digits An X in an error message can be any number The shorter POST errors are highlighted in the Symptom to FRU Index Some digits will represent different information for SCSI errors versus non SCSI errors The following figure shows which digits display the shorter POST errors The figure also defines additional SCSI information RDDDPLSCB QEET LI L Test state Error code Extension Qualifier Q internal 1 external Capacity of the device Slot number of the device LUN usually 0 PUN SCSI ID Device Number Reserved Digit usually 0 Notes 1 Non IBM device error codes and documentation supersede this list 2 Duplicate SCSI ID settings will cause misleading error symptoms or messages For example SCSI error code 0210501A0 decodes as follows Digit Information 0 Reserved digit usually 0 210 Device number 210 indicates hard disk 5 SCSI ID assigned is 5 0 Logical Unit Number not used usually 0 1 The adapter is installed in slot 1 A The device capacity is 60MB A 60MB 0 The device is connected to the internal bus RDDD Codes for Adapters RDDD Device Type or Information 0037 SCSI on the system board 0096 SCSI adapter with cache 388 PC Server HMM RDDD
400. nd memory You cannot change any information from this screen Micro Channel Configuration Displays the status of adapters in the Micro Channel expansion slots For additional information or to change the information displayed you are prompted to insert the Reference Diskette Product Data Displays specific information about the server Devices and I O Ports Displays a menu from which you can view or change the current settings for the serial and parallel ports mouse diskette drives and video Date and Time Allows you to change the current date and time in the battery backed memory e System Security Allows you to set a power on password or to set an administrator or supervisor level password You also use this option to control access to a diskette drive and to define a system owners name that displays on startup Start Options Allows you to select startup options such as the keyboard speed You can also set the startup sequence of diskette and hard disk drives Advanced Setup Allows you to change system functions such as cache control and ROM shadowing Changing Settings In most cases the server will operate using the default settings and you need to change the settings only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable or change device function for example defining diskette types You can advance through the screens by pressing the Page Up PgUp or Page Down PgDn key Use the Up Arrow
401. nector P2 to J2 P3 to J26 J6 Mouse Connector Mouse J8 Keyboard Connector Keyboard J9 Parallel Port Parallel Device Connector J10 Floppy Drive Diskette Drive Connector J11 Serial Port COMM A Serial Device Connector J12 Serial Port COMM B Serial Device Connector J13 ISA IDE Connector IDE Hard Drive N A SCSI LED SCSI Option Card N A SCSI Device SCSI Option Card Connector System Board Jumpers Jumper Description Setting W1 L1 Cache Mode Open L1 Write Back Default Closed L1 Write Through W2 Reserved Open w5 L2 Cache Size Pins 1 2 L2 Cache Size 256K Default Pins 2 3 L2 Cache Size 512K W6 CPU Clock Pins 1 2 Pentium 60 90MHz Pins 2 3 Pentium 66 100MHz W10 Reserved Pins 2 3 Default W16 Reserved Pins 1 2 Default W17 Reserved Closed Default PC Server 520 Type 8641 299 Jumper Description Setting W20 wei Monitor Selection Reserved Open Monochrome Monitor Setting Closed Color Monitor Setting Default Open AT Style Keyboard Closed PS 2 Style Keyboard and Mouse Default W22 Reserved Open Default W23 Reserved Open Default W25 ISQ IDE IRQ Select Pins 1 2 ISA IDE using IRQ 14 Primary IDE Controller Default Pins 2 3 ISA IDE using IRQ 15 Secondary Controller W30 Reserved Open Default
402. nectors on the SCSI 2 adapter if you connect both internal and external devices A CD ROM drive is installed in bay 4 of non disk array models and bay 7 of disk array models In non disk array models that are supplied with a narrow hard disk drive a narrow 8 bit cable is provided In non disk array models that are not supplied with a hard disk drive The CD ROM drive is terminated Anarrow 8 bit cable is provided in these models If you install 8 bit drives above the CD ROM drive in bays 5 9 remove the termination from those drives e f you install a drive in bay 1 you must terminate that drive and remove the termination from the CD ROM drive e f you install a 16 bit device you must purchase 16 bit cable and a 16 bit to 8 bit SCSI Internal Converter to connect the CD ROM drive to the 16 bit cable Refer to the instructions supplied with the SCSI device for more information about termination PC Server 320 Type 8640 151 Power Supply Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the power on indicator is not on and if the power supply fan is not running check the power cord for proper installation and continuity If the power cord is OK either the power supply is defective or a defective device is causing the power supply to shut off Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are incorrect replace the power supply If the voltages are cor
403. ng Hot Swap Drive Connector Connectors ATN System Status LC OSS Connector Pad hos E SCSI 2 Connector Power Connectors SCSI ID J1 J9 SCSI 2 Input Connector Ea J2 2 SCSI 2 Output Daisy Chain Connector Power Connectors PC Server Type 3518 439 J12 Backplane SCSI ID Jumper Settings The Backplane SCSI ID Address Jumper a pin block with four pairs of pins J12 is located on the rear of the backplanes in banks C D and E When two backplanes are daisy chained in the enclosure the first backplane address jumper for example Bank C must be set to LO defining the SCSI IDs as 0 through 5 The second backplane in this example bank D must be set to either Reverse defining the SCSI IDs as 5 through 0 or HI defining the SCSI IDs as 8 through D The default no jumper installed is to set the addresses to LO If the SCSI adapter supports more than eight SCSI devices per SCSI channel the second backplane can be set either HI or Reverse However if the SCSI adapter supports eight or less SCSI devices per channel the second backplane must be set to Reverse The following jumper settings are for SCSI ID jumper J12 Jumper Position Description 2468 Sets SCSI IDs to low J12 T starting from 0 bay 1 to 5 6 1357 2468 Sets SCSI IDs to reverse die i starting from 5 bay 1 to
404. ng To Controller Commands message appears do the following a Press Ctrl Alt Del and restore the configura from the backup copy of the RAID Support Related Service Information left Not tion 517 Diskette again until it comes back and says restoration completed successfully 15 After all drives are replaced and rebuilt successfully power off then power on the server Network Adapters Supported Dual Processor Servers If you are having trouble with the installation or operation of a network adapter using OS 2 for SMP 2 11 and OS 2 LAN Server 4 0 ensure that the network adapter device driver supports dual processors The following list of network adapters and device drivers which support dual processors have been verified to work with IBM PC Servers with dual processors OS 2 for SMP 2 11 and OS 2 LAN Server 4 0 m Important The architecture of the adapter and the architecture of the slot the adapter is installed in must be the same Examples An EISA adapter must be installed in a EISA slot and a Micro Channel adapter must be installed in a Micro Channel slot Network Adapter Device Driver LAN Server 4 0 MPTS 3Com Token Link IBMTOKMP OS2 IBM SMP IIL EISA Token Ring Network Adapter 3Com EtherLink II ELNKII OS2 3Com 3C503 3C503 16 ISA EtherLink 11 Adapter 3Com EtherLink III ELNK3 0S2 3Com Etherlink EISA Family OS 2 3Com EtherLink III ELNK3 0S
405. nge system board resource allocations Jumpers and switches define the system resources a device uses If the settings are incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared a conflict occurs and the device will remain deactivated by the configuration program 4 Change system board jumpers or switches Refer to the system board diagram inside the server or System Board Jumpers on page 307 5 Remove the device or adapter Some configurations are not supported for example you cannot operate the server with two PCI SVGA adapters installed Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts The memory address space and interrupt levels IRQs used by some hardware options might conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the EMS EMS is used only with DOS If a conflict exists one or more of the following conditions might exist The system cannot load the operating system The system does not work An application program does not operate or it returns an error Screen messages indicate a conflict exists You can resolve conflicts by changing either the software or the hardware configuration Note Start the Configuration Setup utility program to view the addresses used by the system board functions Changing the Software Configuration The best way to resolve memory address conflicts is to change the addresses used by the application program or the device driver Thi
406. ngs AAA 318 Server HMM System Note The model s listed for the following FRUs indicates FRUs that the models may contain at the time of shipping However other FRUs are supported in each model as options Index System Unit PC Server 520 Type 8641 15 16 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 Base Frame LED Panel Assembly System Board with 512K Cache without SVGA SCSI Models ED1 EDE EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV EZO EZV System Board with SVGA amp SCSI without Cache Models MDE MDL MZS MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV Die Cast Assembly Models ED1 EDE EDL EZ1 EZS EZE EZL EDO EDV 220 EZV Die Cast Assembly Models MDE MDL MZS MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV Fan Mounting Support Right Side Door 3 Fan Assembly Pedestal Wheel with Axle 434W Power Supply Assembly 8 Card Guide 4 Card Guide Support Models MDE MDL MZS MZE MZL MDO MDV MZO MZV Pedestal CD ROM Drive see DASD PC Server 520 Type 8641 Diskette Drive see DASD PC Server 520 Type 8641 Hard Disk Drive see DASD PC Server 520 Type 8641 DASD Tray Assembly Hot Swap with Cable Models ED1 EDL EDV MDE MDL MDO MDV DASD Tray Assembly Hot Swap Wide Models EZ1 EZS EZE EZL 20 EZV MZS MZE MZL MZO MZV Front Bezel with Shield Keylock with Key DASD Door
407. nimum 90 V ac Maximum 137 V ac High range Minimum 180 V ac Maximum 265 V ac kilovolt amperes kVA approximately Minimum configuration as shipped 0 16 kVA Maximum configuration 1 0 kVA Total Power Available for Drives Nominal operating current allowed amp 5 Vdc line 10 A base 23 A with upgrade 12 V dc line 10 A base 23 A with upgrade PC Server 520 Type 8641 289 Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing Some PC Server computers incorporate a 100MHz Pentium processor and a second upgradeability processor socket on the system board to support Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing SMP The SMP capability extends processing performance by allowing tasks to be dispatched to the next available processor rather then being queued until the busy processor has completed its task The SMP capability also provides a level of high availability in that with some operating systems such as OS 2 SMP run in a uni processor mode if one of the processors should experience a failure This function will allow the LAN to continue operation so that service can be scheduled at a non critical time System Board Replacement Type 8641 Notes e clock speed jumper must be set to match the speed of the processor s installed on the system board e For system board socket and jumper locations see Locations Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE on page 294 nopage System B
408. nit Keyboard Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 34 Clear Memory Cold Restore Mfg Size Error 35 Check Cold Warm Restore Mfg Configuration 36 Mfg Boot Fork Cold Restore Mfg 37 PCI Reset Cold Warm Restore Mfg B5 NVRAM check Cold Warm Restore Mfg 38 PCI Video Cold Warm Restore Mfg 3B Sign On Cold Warm Restore Mfg 3C Test Timer Tick Cold Restore Mfg 3F Enable Video SAD 40 CSET BFR Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD SIZMEM 41 Size Memory Cold Warm Restore Mfg Above 64k 42 CSET AFT SIZ Cold Warm Restore Mfg MEM 43 Test Timer 2 Cold Warm Restore Mfg 44 Password Not Cold Restore Entered PC Server 320 Type 8640 131 Routine Boot Mode Code 45 Test PS 2 Mouse Cold Warm Restore Mfg 46 Check For Cold Restore Mouse Buttons 47 Init Key Board Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD Flags 48 Test Key Board Cold Warm Restore 4B Memory Test Cold Warm Mfg Prompt 46 Test Memory Cold Restore Mfg 4D Clear EBDA Warm 4E CSET AFT M Cold Warm Restore Mfg TEST 4F Allocate EBDA Cold Warm Restore Mfg B6 Set Planar Info Cold Restore 50 xfer ebda vars Cold Warm Restore Mfg B7 Init Cold Warm Restore Mfg B8 Init MP Cold Warm Restore Mfg Structures B9 CPU Speed Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 51 Set Warm Boot Warm Flag 52 Clear Speed Bits Cold Warm Mfg SAD 53 E FLOB Cold Warm Restore Mfg SAD 54 Enable System
409. nking green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray When a hard disk drive is good a solid green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray If you partially or completely remove a good drive instead of the defective one your server might lose valuable data This situation is especially relevant if you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array However the RAID controller can rebuild the data you need provided that certain conditions are met See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 for more details If you have a non disk array model an illuminated drive tray knob means the drive is a good one An unilluminated drive tray knob means the drive is defective or no power is being supplied to the drive To remove a drive from bank C D or E do the following steps 1 Find the drive you plan to remove 2 f you have a disk array model and a drive has failed ensure that you have selected the correct drive for removal by verifying that the light on the tray s knob is blinking 3 Unlock the drive by turning the knob directly above it 90 degrees 4 Disconnect the drive from the connector on the backplane by grasping the handle on the drive tray and pulling the drive out of the server Store the drive in a safe place 204 PC Server HMM Note If you have a disk array model you must reconfigure your disk arrays after removing hard disk dri
410. not correct the problem replace the 10Base T or 10Base2 adapter Parts Listing Quad BT 10Base T PeerMaster Micro 06H4220 Channel Adapter Quad B2 10Base2 PeerMaster Micro Channel 06H6042 Adapter Quad BT and Quad B2 Option Diskette 06H6380 External SCSI Devices Note You cannot use both internal connectors on the SCSI 2 adapter and also use the external connector For disk array models with the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter you cannot use the internal channel 1 connector and the external connector at the same time If you intend to use the external connector connect internal SCSI 2 devices to the internal channel 2 connector See the following figure Internal Internal Channel 1 Channel 2 E _ 000000000 External 1 LI LI Termination Requirements The requirements for terminating external SCSI devices are e f you attach both internal and external SCSI devices you must terminate the last internal device and the last external device For non disk array models you must also change the termination setting of the 508 PC Server HMM SCSI 2 adapter in the SCSISelect utility program as described in SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 so that the SCSI 2 adapter is no longer terminated e If you attach only external devices to the SCSI 2 adapter you must terminate the last device on the cable If you install only one exter
411. ns e You should be able to vary the screen intensity by adjusting the contrast and brightness controls The screen should be white light gray with a black margin test margin on the screen Note The location of the test margin varies with the type of display The test margin might be on the top bottom or one or both sides If you do not see any test margin on the screen replace the display If there is a test margin on the screen replace the system board Note During the first two or three seconds after the display is powered on the following might occur while the display synchronizes with the computer e Unusual patterns or characters Static crackling or clicking sounds A power on hum on larger displays A noticeable odor might occur on new displays or displays recently removed from storage These sounds display patterns and odors are normal do not replace any parts If you are unable to correct the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 Ethernet Quad BT and B2 PeerMaster Micro Channel Adapters The following service information supports the IBM Eithernet Quad BT 10Base T and B2 10Base2 PeerMaster Micro Channel adapters 490 PC Server HMM Warning Do not install PeerMaster adapter in slot 4 of an IBM PS 2 Model 85 or 95 server Pressure resulting from contact with foam mounted to the side panel might result in damage to the a
412. nt To restore the RAID configuration information 1 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the system If the system already is on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Restore config from diskette 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Using the Advanced Functions This section gives the procedures for using the advanced functions such as changing the write policy changing the RAID parameters and formatting a drive Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you to potential loss of data and should be heeded before answering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAID configuration program Changing the Write Policy When you configure a logical drive the RAID adapter automatically sets the write policy to write through WT mode where the completion status is sent after the data is written to the hard disk drive To improve performance you can change this write policy to write back WB mode where the completion status is sent after the data is copied to cache memory but before the data is actually written to the storage device Although you gain performance with write back mode it creates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure This is because the system gets a completion status message when the data reaches cache memory but before data is actually written to the storage device To change the write po
413. nto drive A and put in a filename for this backup The default filename is config If you use the same backup diskette for more than one system be sure to give each system a different filename and keep track of the specific filenames Exit the Advanced Options menu then select View Configuration from the Main Menu If applicable identify which bay contains the hot spare drive Pull the Hot Spare drive out of its bay then exit out of View Configuration and the Main Menu Press Ctrl Alt Del When prompted press Y to update the configuration with the HSP bay as DDD You are now ready to pull out the first drive to be replaced The first drive to replace should be the drive suspected of having the highest probability of stiction If there is not a SUSPECT drive then choose an order you would like to replace them in PC Server HMM 12 13 14 such as Bays 1 2 3 4 etc Just remember the replacement order Check off the bays on your chart after each drive has been successfully replaced Note Remember the hot spare drive is pulled out first and is left out during replacement rebuilding of the other drives It then becomes the last drive replaced and its status turns to HSP The hot spare doesn t require rebuilding it s a spare In the order you have chosen do the following for each drive being replaced a Pull out the drive and reboot the RAID Suppo Diskette Press to update confi
414. nu F1 ds F3 F4 Help Update Update Update Change System User System F5 4 Configurator Devices Data Envioronment Password Select End Userid Save All Then Exit User Function Update All Selection I F7 370 IT Sessions r 1 F2 F3 F4 Save All Update Update Update F8 Not System User User Exit Environment Minidisks Links F9 1 Display Not Found Quit Do F10 Not Save Anything Device Managers The PC Server System 390 supplies several device managers to support emulation of 370 I O devices The device managers are OS 2 applications that are started when S 390 Microprocessor Complex is IPL ed with a device map containing device definitions that use the device managers Each device manager is identified by name on the PC Server 390 Configuration screen that is used to perform device mapping See Microprocessor Complex Configuration S 390 on page 226 Do not confuse this configuration program with the PC Server 500 Configuration program See Configuration Server 500 on page 226 The following is a list of device managers and their function 228 PC Server HMM Note For detailed information about device drivers refer to the Introducing the PC Server 500 System 390L manual Form Number GC24 5717 00 supplied with the computer Device Managers Name Function AWSCDK Count Key Dat
415. o Aue eui Jo e peal ejns swaysAs pesn eq ued jo ay ys q sonsouDeig eur uo ejqejre e jeuonippe 1noqe uoneuuojur 196 TIYLSNIN eur asn moy sequoseg pues Siu 4 5 5 pue y sKejdsiq 40419 uiejs s e dsig seDueuo pue 5 19 ejdsig BOW uondo Aq suondo oJI eui 1521 10 eseq eui 1521 0 Jejnduio2 eui 1591 eoiep ue yey e sey onsouDeip pue seidoo ayeysip uondo ue 5 uo uo ayem qpuelg e eui y eDueuo sBumes eseui IM uieis s eui 198 S N Jamod J 910N 195 uonduosoeg
416. o diskette Change the write policy Change the RAID parameters Format a drive Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk array configuration information in its electronically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM module The Related Service Information 483 disk array configuration is vital information To protect this information back up the information to diskette as soon as you have completed the tasks You need a blank formatted 3 5 inch diskette To back up the disk array configuration information to diskette 1 Label a blank diskette Disk Array Configuration Backup and date it 2 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 3 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu and press Enter 4 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 5 Select Backup config to diskette 6 Remove the RAID Adapter Option Diskette from the drive and insert the blank diskette 7 Follow the instructions on the screen Restoring the Disk Array Configuration To restore the disk array configuration information in the RAID adapter EEPROM module use the RAID Adapter Option Diskette and an up to date Disk Array Configuration Backup diskette Note Because dynamic changes in the
417. oard Locations on page 298 for PCI EISA models Locations Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 301 nopage System Board Locations on page 305 for micro channel models Type 8641 computers have one or two processors and other components installed on the system board When replacing the system board remove all of the installed components from the old system board and install them on the new system board If the problem remains check the following primary processor is installed and seated correctly in the primary processor socket on the System board If installed the secondary processor is seated correctly in the secondary processor socket on the system board All other components removed from the old system board are installed and seated correctly on the new system board Note If the processor s are not seated correctly intermittent problems can occur 290 PC Server HMM Type 5 Adapter Installation Type 8641 Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL The PC Server Type 8641 Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL supports type 5 Adapters in Micro Channel expansion slots 5 and 6 However because Type 5 adapters are longer and wider than standard Micro Channel adapters the adapter support bracket must be repositioned Note If the server was shipped with PeerMaster adapter installed the bracket has already been repositioned 1 Remove the fan assembly a Disc
418. ogical drive size You can enter the size in megabytes or you can accept the default value shown When you need to confirm an action the Confirm pop up appears in this area 2 You can select any of the choices that appear on the menus 3 The Bay Array selection list shows each bay in the server for each channel numbered 1 through 7 The abbreviation in the bay indicates the status of the drive installed in the bay Selections are made from this list to determine which bays hard disk drives are in the arrays The letter to the right of the bay identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in that bay is grouped Note The Channel Bay Array area on the screen does not reflect the physical configuration of the server The hot swappable hard disk drives are numbered 1 through 6 from top to bottom 4 The Array list indicates the array ID and the size in megabytes of the array When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Logical Drive list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process 5 The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive for example A1 the size of the logical drive the RAID level assigned to the logical drive the date it was created and the write policy The status of the logical drive is also shown PC Server HMM Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the drive or do a rebuild operation You will have
419. on System Adapter 2 System Board 27880 to 27889 1 External FRU Speaker Microphone 1999030X Hard disk reset failure Possible hard disk drive problem see Hard Disk Drive Boot Error on page 74 110 PC Server HMM Error Messages Error Message Symptom FRU Action Address Exceeds the Size of Your Memory 1 Enter the correct address An invalid memory address 2 Memory Module was entered Diagnostics 3 System Board Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option Arithmetic Functions 1 Microprocessor Failed 2 System Board An error was detected during the CPU Test Base Memory Test Failed 1 Memory Module An error was detected in 2 System Board base memory Boot Sector Unreadable 1 Hard Disk Drive A boot sector read error 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable was detected on the hard 3 Hard Disk Drive disk drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Bus Noise Test Failed 1 Memory Module RAM Test detected an error 2 System Board in the memory bus Butterfly Cylinder Access 1 Hard Disk Drive Test Failed 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive Test 3 Hard Disk Drive detected mismatch between Adapter the data read and the data if installed stored on the drive 4 System Board Clock Stopped 1 Real Time Clock Real time clock has stopped Assembly working 2 System Board CMOS Clock Test Failed 1 Real Time Clock Time and Date Settings
420. on sometimes referred to as a patch to the direct driver software Make certain the software is current and that all known revisions are installed The IBM on line bulletin board sometimes referred to as PCPROD and other software tools sources such as Novell Netware should be referenced by the software support personnel for any revisions provided by the appropriate software vendor The most likely cause of these types of problems when direct driver software is involved is the failure to obtain the latest revisions from the software vendor Software Installation It is very important to follow the vendor s installation procedures The software should not be migrated from another system unless the installation instructions indicate that migration is supported especially from a different model in the product line Related Service Information 551 m Important Migrating adapters from slower systems to faster systems might cause problems This is due to device specific system specific or time dependent software code that controls these devices Adapter and Software Compatibility Hardware adapters for some operating systems must be approved by the software vendor to be compatible with that software The approval is specific to the system adapter E C level and the software version Contact the software vendor to confirm that system and adapter configuration is supported by their software level The compatibi
421. on Settings on page 137 5 Save the new configuration settings to the EISA Configuration Diskette and to the nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 137 6 Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter 7 Install the adapter in the server Memory After you add or remove extended memory you must update the EISA Configuration Diskette Note Not performing the following procedure could result in memory errors and in the operating system not recognizing the added or removed memory PC Server 320 Type 8640 141 1 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette see Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 137 2 Select Step 3 View or edit details The system information appears 3 Under Advanced System Feature Setup select Total System Memory 4 Select the correct amount of memory then press F10 Note It is possible to install single inline memory modules SIMMs in combinations where the total amount of memory installed does not appear on the memory configuration screen In the unlikely event that this occurs select the next lower setting on the memory configuration menu and all of the installed memory will be supported on the server 5 Return to the Main Menu save the configuration and exit from the utility program PCI Features and Options PCI devices automatically communicate with the server s configuration
422. on of both drive sizes If you use a combination remember that one half high drive uses the equivalent space of two slim high drives If you install drives in bank D or E you will remove the fan assembly on the rear of the server install a direct access storage device DASD backplane in banks D and E and install an optional 220 watt power supply Each backplane has six connectors to support up to six hard disk drives LEDs System Board and Adapter LED s are located on the system board bridge card processor card and memory card The LEDs indicate conditions listed on the following pages 346 PC Server HMM si eui ueuM pied JosseooJd p129 au jo uejqoud eue os JosseooJd eui uo ON Josseooid eAnoejeq aqq e nosjeq p129 eui jo uonezi eniur uejqoud ee os JosseooJd uo ON ejejduioo eui jo jnjsseoong ejejduioo y jo uorpezijeniur jnjsseoong 431 p129 y jo uejqoud eue jos JO pasamod si ueuw JosseooJd ay uo s pue uonezipeniui Buung Josseooud uo si pue Buung
423. ond mark indicates a module selected for testing The indicated attributes are characteristics of the selected test module that are used by the test programs to determine which tests to run or how to run selected tests Attributes are also used to limit the allowable range of parameters for example ending cylinder Parameters are values you select to establish the scope of tests For example you can select Extended Memory testing parameters and limit the testing to a specific range of test blocks by specifying the starting and ending memory block This might be appropriate if prior experience indicates that problems are likely to exist in a General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO 9 specific area of memory By selecting these limiting parameters you reduce memory testing time Scripting Scripting allows you to select specific groups of tests testing parameters and options Your selection is saved for later use as a test Script To set up a test script first select all the appropriate test groups and specific tests you want to run from the Module Testing section under Diagnostics You should also select appropriate testing parameters and options See Program Navigation on page 8 for instructions to save a test script Changing Logical Unit Numbers In some instances you can have more than one logical unit number LUN for a particular module LUNs represent individual devices within a test group or module Fo
424. ondary Cache Selection 29 Default Settings 30 Cache Selections 30 Selection 30 Keyboard Selection 30 Clock Selection 30 Pentium Clock Selection 30 BIOS Mode Selection 31 Secondary Cache Selection 31 W17 IRQ Selection 31 Reserved Jumpers 31 Symptom to FRU Index 32 No Beep Symptoms 33 Beep Symptoms 34 Error Codes oe GO es 36 Error Messages 39 Miscellaneous Error Messages 46 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 15 Parts Uisting gt as Gok Reset Ae ee a OS 16 System xo d Moe a oe SOK AG Keyboards 101 102 Key Power Cords PC Server HMM Features The following table contains the features for PC Server 300 Type 8640 computers Hard Disk Drive Machine Type Feature Description 8640 0NO 1NO Processor 486DX2 66MHz Video VGA SVGA 1 Slots Bays 8 9 Memory 8 128MB Selectable Startup Yes Shipped to order or without a drive Hard Disk Drive 8640 0NJ 1NJ Processor 486DX2 66MHz Video VGA SVGA 1 Slots Bays 8 9 Memory 8 128MB Selectable Startup Yes Hard Disk Drive 728MB IDE 8640 1 Processor Pentium 60MHz Video VGA SVGA 1 Slots Bays 8 9 Memory 16 192MB Selectable Startup Yes Shipped to order
425. onfiguration Diskette on page 261 3 Start the EISA Configuration Diskette and a Record the current settings b Install configuration files CFG Note If the CFG files were not supplied with the adapter see Files on page 258 See Recording EISA Configuration Settings on page 262 and Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 263 4 Set jumpers or switches on the server system board See System Board Jumpers on page 299 5 Set jumpers or switches on the device See the instructions supplied with the adapter 6 Install the adapter in the server 7 Install software programs See the installation instructions supplied with the software 8 Resolve configuration conflicts See Configuration Conflicts on page 274 PC Server 520 Type 8641 257 ISA or EISA Features and Options Some ISA and most EISA devices are supplied with option diskettes These diskettes can contain any or all of the following types of information e Configuration files CFG Diagnostic files DGS Device drivers Sample applications mini applications Files A configuration file is required to configure the server for ISA or EISA adapters You must copy this configuration file which has a file name extension of CFG from the device diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette before installing the device in the server The configuration file reserves the system resources that the adapter needs
426. onfiguration program has not been restarted The status will change to RDY when the RAID configuration program is restarted Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure Depending on the circumstances there can be several possible results from a drive failure Example 1 e Only one hard disk drive fails hot spare drive is defined that is the same or greater size than the failed drive The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID level 1 level 5 or a combination of these two levels Then the hot spare will take over immediately Note Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 is maintained however system performance will be reduced Hot spare drive capability does not apply to logical drives assigned RAID level 0 Example 2 e Only one hard disk drive fails A hot spare drive is not defined e logical drives in the array are assigned RAID levels 1 5 or a combination of these two levels PC Server 720 Type 8642 341 Then no data will be lost but the system will operate at reduced performance until the defective drive is replaced and rebuilt Example 3 If more than one drive fails all data is lost Therefore it is important that you replace and rebuild a defective drive as soon as possible Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk i
427. onfirm them by selecting Yes in the Confirm pop up window b Select No if you do not want the drive you selected to be a hot spare select Yes to define it as a hot spare drive c Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 180 for instructions Deleting a Disk Array The last array created must be the first deleted Warning All the data and programs in the array are lost during this procedure Before proceeding back up any data and programs that you want to save To delete a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Array list 4 Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drive list then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array 5 Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears 6 If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array If a defective drive is still in a bay the status shows a blank bay as though there is no drive in that bay When you replace the
428. onnect the three fan assembly cables from the power supply Attention To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation handle the fan assembly carefully b Remove the two screws that hold the fan assembly in place c Remove the fan assembly by pulling it up and out PC Server 520 Type 8641 291 2 Press the raised area in the middle of the bracket then press the bracket toward the rear of the server and lift out You might need a screwdriver to release the bracket from the server 3 Reposition the card guides on the adapter support bracket a Lift the tabs on the top of the top card guide to release it from the bracket b Align the card guide tabs with the slots closest to the front of the bracket The card guide will extend beyond the bracket c Hook the tabs on the bottom edge of the card guide on the flange on the back of the bracket then press the card guide forward until it snaps into place 4 Holding the bracket at an angle insert the tabs on the back of the card guide into the slots closer to the front of the server 5 Press the bracket to the right until it snaps into place 6 Carefully reinstall the fan assembly with the two screws that you removed in step 1b on page 291 292 PC Server HMM 7 Reconnect the fan assembly cables PC Server 520 Type 8641 293 Lo
429. or without a drive 8640 1PT Processor Video Slots Bays Memory Selectable Startup Hard Disk Drive Pentium 60MHz VGA SVGA 1 8 9 16 192MB Yes 1GB SCSI 1 SVGA for AP and EMEA only PC Server 300 Type 8640 17 Diagnostics and Test Information The following list contains problems and references for diagnosing a PC Server 300 Type 8640 Notes The QAPlus PRO diagnostic program recognizes the primary processor as LUN 1 and the secondary processor as LUN 2 During testing the program automatically tests LUN 1 You must select LUN 2 if you want the program to test the secondary processor The type of DASD diagnostics required to test the hard disk controller adapter and drives is determined by the type of hard disk adapter installed in the computer e Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 4 Problem Reference Error Codes Error Symptom to FRU Index on Messages page 32 DASD Adapter Problems For non disk array models see SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter see Disk Array Configuration on page 461 Memory Symptom to FRU Index on page 32 Power Supply Voltages Power Supply Voltages on page 20 Miscellaneous Symptom to FRU Index on page 32 Additional Service Information The following additional service information is for the PC Ser
430. ork with two PeerMaster adapters configured in the VNET Switch mode see VNET Switch Mode Single VNET on page 496 An 8 port network with two PeerMaster adapters each configured as an independent VNET see VNET Switch Mode Multiple VNETs page 498 An 8 port network with two PeerMaster adapters one configured in the VNET Switch mode and the other in the Traditional Adapter mode see VNET Switch Mode Combined VNETs and Traditional Nets on page 499 You can use PeerMaster adapters to create a variety of network configurations The following examples illustrate some basic network configurations that you can create Use these examples as guidelines to determine the best configuration for your needs 494 PC Server HMM Traditional Adapter Mode This illustration shows server with two Quad BT PeerMaster adapters configured in the Traditional Adapter mode The network protocol views each LAN segment as a separate subnet with its own network number Clients on all ports have direct access to the server Note The same principles apply to Quad B2 configurations however concentrator hubs are not required for 10Base2 operation configuration of eight separate network numbers Curved arrows illustrating the basic flow of cross subnet traffic The server based router accepts and forwards all frames that require routing between subnets e Software layers
431. ormation for the Server 500 in your manual 5 390 Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics and Option Diskette See Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics S 390 on page 239 A diskette containing diagnostics and hard disk recovery programs is also provided for the RAID controller that comes with the Array model of the PC Server System 390 Additional Service Information The following information is for the PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 CMS Commands and Utility Programs Configuration on page 226 Device Managers on page 228 e Device Map on page 230 Diagnostic Flow Chart S 390 on page 231 e Documentation and Related IBM Manuals 390 on page 232 Error Reporting P 390 on page 234 e Icons System 390 page 235 Initialization S 390 on page 235 e Machine Check Error Messages 235 Power On Self Test POST on page 237 e Product Overview on page 237 Software Facilities Server System 390 on page 238 CMS Commands and Utility Programs Several conversational monitor system CMS commands and utility programs are supplied with the PC Server System 390 software in addition to those provided by the OS 2 VM ESA and VSE ESA operating systems These are essential to the operation of the 370 functions on the PC Server System 500 CMS Commands CMS commands are included with the VM Starter System supp
432. ort Interface Cable PC Server 310 Type 8639 103 Error Code FRU Action 46XX Multiport 2 Adapter Not listed above 2 Multiport 2 Interface Board 3 Memory Module 5600 1 Financial System 2 Controller Adapter 5962 1 Run Configuration CD ROM configuration 2 CD ROM Drive error 3 CD ROM Adapter 4 System Board 62XX 1 1st Store Loop Adapter 2 Adapter Cable 63XX 1 2nd Store Loop Adapter 2 Adapter Cable 64XX 1 Network Adapter 71XX 1 Voice Adapter 74XX 1 Display Adapter if installed 2 Riser Card 76XX 1 Page Printer Adapter 78XX 1 High Speed Adapter 79XX 1 3117 Adapter 80XX 1 PCMCIA Adapter 84XX 1 Speech Adapter 2 Speech Control Assembly 3 Riser Card 8601 8602 1 Pointing Device Mouse 2 System Board 8603 8604 1 System Board 2 Pointing Device Mouse 86XX 1 Mouse Not listed above 2 System Board 89XX 1 PC Music Adapter 2 MIDI Adapter Unit 3 Riser Card 91XX 1 Optical Drive 2 Adapter 96XX 1 SCSI Adapter 2 Any SCSI Device 3 System Board 104 PC Server HMM Error Code FRU Action 10101 10102 10104 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109 10111 10112 10113 10114 10115 10116 10103 10110 101171 1 Have customer verify correct operating system device drivers are installed and operational 2 Modem 1 System Board 2 Data Fax Modem 10117 Not listed above 1 Check system
433. ot 4 1 98 Create Delete Array Press escape to return to previous menu 474 PC Server HMM IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Help Ch 1 2 Define hot spare drive Afia raya 3 Delete disk array Bay Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 0NL A 1 B 6 Exit 2 Lont A 2 Lon c a 3 Lon 4 ONL B 4 RDY 5 Lont B 5 Roy 6 6 7 7 Select a choice using the Up Arrow 1 and Down Arrow 4 keys and press Enter 4 Select Define hot spare drive The cursor will become active in the Bay Array selection list Select a HSP or RDY drive and Enter to change state IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Create Delete Array 15 Hel i 2 EE drive Mes ns Delete disk array 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 ONL A 1 ONL B 6 Exit 2 ONL A 2 ONL C 3 Lona Lon 4 B 4 Leroy 5 Loni B 5 6 6 RDY 7 7 HSP Note drive status meanings Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY ONL DDD OFL or HSP state SCSI tape and CD ROM drives are not shown They appear when you select drive information Refer to Bay Array Selection List on page 480 for the The numbers shown on t
434. ot or startup drive should have a SCSI ID of 6 Therefore if the server was not supplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive and you install hard disk drives set the SCSI ID of the first drive the boot drive to 6 Note If the BIOS is version M54PE_08 or earlier and you have two PCI SCSI adapters installed in the PCI slots the system will start from the hard disk drive attached to the SCSI adapter with the least amount of Read only memory ROM and the lowest ROM address space In the case of equal ROM size the system scans from slot 1 to 3 and assigns slot 1 as the lowest ROM address Therefore in order for the system to load the operating system correctly connect the startup drive to the SCSI adapter with the lowest ROM address space If the version of BIOS is later than M54PE_08 and you have two PCI SCSI adapters installed in the PCI slots the system will start from the hard disk drive attached to the SCSI adapter in descending order from slot 3 to slot 1 If the disk array model was supplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive in bay 1 this drive is the startup drive and it already has a SCSI ID of 0 The SCSI ID of the preinstalled hard disk drive in bay 1 of non disk array models is set to 6 Refer to the instructions supplied with the SCSI devices for information about setting a SCSI ID The SCSI 2 adapter in the server has two internal connectors and one external connector On non disk array models th
435. ote All data on the target drive will be lost when you run the Format Disk utility Back up your data before you run it 4 In the SCSISelect Advanced Configuration Options menu set Extended BIOS Translation to Enabled 5 Partition the drive again 6 Restore data to the drive if necessary Device connected but not ready This message appears if the host adapter receives no answer when it requests data from an installed SCSI device The host adapter skips this device and moves to the next device on the bus Related Service Information 527 Do the following if you see this message when you request data from the SCSI drive 1 Run the SCSISelect utility and access SCSI Device Configuration Locate the SCSI ID of the host adapter and set Send Unit Commands to yes 2 Exit the SCSISelect utility and request data from the drive again 3 If the message still appears follow the drive manufacturer s instructions to make sure the drive is Set to spin up when the power is switched on Start unit request failed The BIOS was unable to send a Start Unit Command to the device Run the SCSISelect utility and disable Send Start Unit Command for the device Time out failure during SCSI Inquiry command or Time out failure during SCSI Test Unit Ready command or Time out failure during Start Unit command An unexpected time out occurred Try disconnecting the SCSI device cables from the host adapter and then st
436. otherboard Remove Board option was selected The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option 116 PC Server HMM 1 Make the correct selection Memory Module System Board 4 Processor Miscellaneous Error Messages Message Symptom FRU Action Changing colors 1 Display Computer will not power off See Power Supply on page 71 1 Power Switch 2 System Board Dead computer 1 Power Switch See Power Supply on 2 Power Supply page 71 3 System Board Diskette drive in use light 1 Diskette Drive remains on or does not light 2 System Board when drive is active 3 Diskette Drive Cable Flashing cursor with an 1 System Board otherwise blank display 2 Primary Hard Disk Drive 3 Hard Disk Drive Cable Incorrect memory size Run the Memory during POST tests 2 Memory Module 3 System Board Insert a Diskette icon 1 Diskette Drive appears with a known good 2 System Board diagnostics diskette in the 3 Diskette Drive Cable first 3 5 inch diskette drive 4 Network Adapter Intensity or color varies from 1 Display left to right of characters 2 System Board and color bars No power or fan not running 1 See Power Supply on page 71 Nonsystem disk or disk error type message with a known good diagnostic diskette Diskette Drive System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable
437. ount exceeded Diagnostics 10470 10471 10472 Controller wrap error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 10473 Corrupt data Low level format might be required Information only 10480 1 Hard Disk Drive ESDI 2 Drive Cable 3 System Board 10481 ESDI drive D seek error 10482 Drive select acknowledgement bad 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 106X1 Check Configuration 2 Ethernet Adapter 10635 10651 10660 1 Power off computer wait ten seconds then power on the computer 2 Ethernet Adapter 1 Check Cables 2 Ethernet Adapter 106XX 1 Ethernet Adapter Not listed above 107XX 1 5 25 inch External Diskette Drive 2 5 25 inch Diskette Drive Adapter A 109XX 1 ActionMedia Check the adapter cables Adapter A 2 System Board 112XX This adapter does not have cache 106 PC Server HMM 1 SCSI Adapter 2 Any SCSI Device 3 System Board Error Code FRU Action 119XX 1 3119 Adapter 121XX 1 Modem Adapter 2 Any Serial Device 3 System Board 136XX 1 ISDN Primary Rate Adapter 2 System Board 137XX 1 System Board 141XX 1 Realtime Interface Coprocessor Portmaster Adapter A 143XX 1 Japanese Display Adapter 2 System Board 14710 14711 1 System Board Display Adapter 2 Adapter Video Memory 148XX 1 Display Adapter 14901 14902 1 Display Adapt
438. our selection 2 Press Tab to move into the expanded Test Group window 3 Scroll to the test you want to select or deselect Attention Items indicated by a directly adjacent red text on color screens are destructive tests 4 Press the spacebar at the highlighted test to toggle between select indicated by a and deselect Note Pressing the first letter of a test does not activate the test unlike menu operation 5 Press Enter Running an Individual Test To run an individual test 1 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move to the highlighted bar to the test you want to run 2 Press Enter to run the test Note The results of the test appear in the lower right hand Test Log window Also if you enabled Test Logging the results are recorded in the Test Log 3 When the test completes press Esc to return to the Test Group Menu Stopping the Tests To stop running a specific test or stop testing after you have started a test press Esc while the test is running The test pauses at the first possible opportunity and the Skip Abort Test Menu appears with the following options Option Action Continue The test program begins testing where it left off Skip to next test The test program skips the current test but remaining tests for the selected Test Module continue Skip to next group The test program skips the remaining tests in the current test group
439. ower Supply Drive Connector Voltages supply fan runs the power supply is OK 2999 7 If the voltages are correct and the power B Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B A 48 5 25 B D 4 11 52 12 6 430 PC Server HMM Power Supply Shutdowns If the power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems many devices are set to start instantly See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 549 There are too many large capacity devices installed such as hard disk drives The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning guide form number S41G 2927 for more information Also ensure that the fans operate when the machine is powered on Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 PC Server 3518 431 Specifications Size e With pedestal Depth 635 mm 25 in 835 mm 32 8 in with cable cover Height 635 mm 25 in Width 247 mm 9 75 in Weight e Minimum configuration as shipped 29 1 kg 64 Ib Environment e Air temperature System on 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Altitu
440. p The mark indicates a module selected for testing The indicated attributes are characteristics of the selected test module that are used by the test programs to determine which tests to run or how to run selected tests Attributes are also used to limit the allowable range of parameters for example ending cylinder Parameters are values you select to establish the scope of tests For example you can select Extended Memory testing parameters and limit the testing to a specific range of test blocks by specifying the starting and ending memory block This might be appropriate if prior experience indicates that problems are likely to exist in a specific area of memory By selecting these limiting parameters you reduce memory testing time Scripting Scripting allows you to select specific groups of tests testing parameters and options Your selection is saved for later use as a test Script To set up a test script first select all the appropriate test groups and Specific tests you want to run from the Module Testing section under Diagnostics You should also select appropriate testing parameters and options See Program Navigation on page 84 for instructions to save a test script Changing Logical Unit Numbers In some instances you can have more than one logical unit number LUN for a particular module LUNs represent individual devices within a test group or module For example you might have two diskette drives or two
441. pecific ESD procedures when they exceed the requirements noted here 2 Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use have been certified ISO 9000 as fully effective When handling ESD sensitive parts Keep the parts in protective packages until they are inserted into the product Avoid contact with other people e Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to eliminate static on your body e Prevent the part from touching your clothing Most clothing is insulative and retains a charge even when you are wearing a wrist strap Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide a static free work surface The mat is especially useful when handling ESD sensitive devices e Select a grounding system such as those listed below to provide protection that meets the specific service requirement Note The use of a grounding system is desirable but not required to protect against ESD damage Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground ground braid or green wire ground Use an ESD common ground or reference point when working on a double insulated or battery operated system You can use coax or connector outside shells on these systems Use the round ground prong of the AC plug on AC operated computers Grounding Requirements Electrical grounding of the computer is required for operator safety and correct system function Proper grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a certifi
442. ped with the server e Verify the disk array configuration The disk array model comes configured as one logical drive view the disk array configuration go to Viewing the RAID Configuration on page 369 and select View Configuration from the Main Menu To create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 351 e Back up the disk array configuration See Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 331 After you configure the disk array you can complete setup by installing an operating system from the ServerGuide compact disc that was shipped with the server or from the diskettes that came with the operating system To install an operating system from the ServerGuide CD see the ServerGuide CD documentation 336 PC Server HMM RAID Technology RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk drives in a server into an array that can be defined as a single logical drive This logical drive then appears to the operating system as a single physical drive This grouping technique greatly enhances logical drive capacity and performance In addition if one of the hard disk drives fails becomes defective the server continues to run with no operator intervention required at reduced performance The defective drive can be replaced without powering off the server hot swap For more information about hot swappable hard disk drives see Installing Internal Drives Type 8642 on page 345
443. per ROM Address Jumper Setting r Notes computers only Do not install a computers The following settings for PC Server 720 f more than one backplane is installed in the computer each backplane must have a different ROM address setting backplanes installed in PC Server 320 ROM address jumper on Jumper Position Description C Address for a backplane installed in Bank C location shown on page 370 D Address for a backplane installed in Bank D location shown on page 370 E Address for a backplane installed in Bank E location shown on page 370 Termination Hot Swap Back Plane The hot swap back plane is automatically terminated Drives connected to the hot swap back plane should not be terminated PC Server 720 Type 8642 373 SCSI 2 Fast Wide RAID Adapter A System Status Connectors Channel 1 Channel 2 A N EX N n Co Y ir nsnm T E H Channel 2 s A 24 SCSI Fast Wide Adaptec Adapter 50 pin Internal SCSI Connector 68 pin Wide Internal SCSI Connector External LED Connector 5 374 Server HMM System Board PCI Micro Channel connectors PCI speed select jumper J24 CE use only Power on features jumper JMP4 Serial connector Video port Password write enable jumper JMP2 Para
444. pgradable POST and BIOS Two 256KB flash ROMs Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL The features for the PC Server 520 Type 86451 Micro Channel Models MZO MZV MZS MZE and MZL are Microprocessor Pentium with 16KB of internal cache clock rate varies by model e Expandable to two microprocessors Cache Memory e 512KB of level 2 cache Memory e 32MB EOS 70ns expandable to 256MB Note Parity memory module kits are supported but must not be installed in combination with EOS memory Diskette Drives Standard One 3 5 inch 1 44MB e Optional internal 3 5 inch 2 88MB 3 5 inch 1 44MB 5 25 inch 1 2MB Hard Disk Drive Number and capacity of standard drives varies by model Supports up to 18 internal hard disk drives Hot swap bays standard on some models available on all models CD ROM Drive Standard SCSI 2 246 PC Server HMM Keyboard and Mouse e 101 key keyboard e Mouse Expansion Bays and Slots e Six 32 bit Micro Channel slots two 32 bit PCI slots 22 drive bays 18 of them hot swap Video Super video graphics SVGA connector Compatibility Video graphics adapter VGA Color graphics adapter CGA Multicolor graphics array MCGA Security Features e Bolt down capability Door lock e Administrator and power on passwords Selectable startup drive Security cover optional e C2 security optional Upgradable POST and BIOS
445. pin internal connectors and 68 pin external connector 544 PC Server HMM Termination for Multiple Computer Configurations If more than one computer is attached to the SCSI bus you can configure the adapter to provide termination when the adapter host computer is powered off The termination is applied only when the computer containing the adapter is powered off and another computer connected to the SCSI bus accesses the device To activate this termination install a jumper on J4 on the adapter Troubleshooting Checklist SCSI AHA 2940 2940W Adapters Most problems that occur during installation result from errors in preparing and connecting devices on the SCSI bus Answer these questions first if a problem occurs during installation 1 Are the power cables and SCSI cables properly connected 2 15 the Host adapter firmly seated and secure in a 5 volt PCI slot that is capable of bus mastering 3 Is the SCSI cable installed correctly throughout the SCSI bus 4 Are the PCI bus slot parameters set correctly in the computer s Setup program Note The PCI bus is designed to assign the IRQ port address and BIOS address settings You may need to assign some of these values manually in the Setup program 5 15 each adapter including the host adapter set to a unique SCSI ID 0 7 for the AHA 2940 and 0 15 for the AHA2940W 6 Is the termination set correctly Related Service Information 5
446. play Cable POS ID Select Cable Wide Index Options Type 8641 220 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Narrow POS ID Select Cable Narrow 220 Watt Power Supply Assembly PC Server HMM 06H5081 06H3406 06H3404 06H3405 06H3751 82G3613 82G3610 82G3612 06H6138 06H3957 71G6292 06H3592 06H3237 IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 Features Loss Soa ge oe ERR Ree 222 Diagnostics and Test Information 223 Additional Service Information 223 CMS Commands and Utility Programs 2 228 CMS Commands 223 OS 2 Utilities 224 VSE ESA TMOUNT Utility 226 Configuration 226 Configuration Server 500 226 Microprocessor Complex Configuration S 390 226 Configurator Structure 659390 228 Device Managers 228 Device 230 Diagnostic Flow Chart 8 390 231 Documentation and Related IBM Manuals 390 232 Error Reporting P 390 2 2 aaa 234 Icons System 390 235 Initialization 65390 235 Machine Check Error Messages 235 Power On Self Test POST 237 Product Overview 237 Software Facilities Server System 390 238 Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics S 390 239 Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette S 990 S 239 Locations 241 Listing eremo R RR RD 241 Copyrig
447. ppears the next time the system is powered on showing you which drive is defective 2 If the drive is not damaged for example it is not inserted correctly a Power off the system 342 PC Server HMM b Correct the problem Remove the diskette from the drive Restart the system 3 If the drive is defective a b Press Y Yes to reconfigure the system Press Ctrl Alt Del when instructed to restart the system The Main Menu appears Select Rebuild device At this point the drive status shows DDD Warning Removing the wrong hard disk drive can cause loss of all data in the array Replace the defective drive Refer to Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E on page 361 After you have replaced the drive press Enter The system will reconfigure to include the drive and the status of the drive will change to OFL Allow the system to complete the configuration the screen displays a completion message then select Rebuild drive Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the OFL offline drive you want to rebuild then press Enter The progress of the rebuilding process appears on the screen When the rebuilding process completes press Esc to return to the Main Menu The new configuration will be saved automatically Back up the new configuration see Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 331 Select Exit to end the RAID configuration program Remov
448. press Esc To select a menu item press the number of the item or use the Up Arrow 1 key or Down Arrow key to highlight the item then press Enter Related Service Information 465 IBM PC ServeRaid Adapter Disk Array Configuration Ver 1 XX Adapter Bus 0 Host 2 ID Null Configuration Select Configuration Source NOOR Flash EEprom as Source NVRAM as Source NVRAM POCL as Source Hard Disk Drive HDD as Source HDD as Source with Rearrange Specific HDD as Source Exit Select a choice using the Up Arrow 7 and Down Arrow keys and press Enter Press escape to return to previous menu The Main Menu contains the following choices Help Select this choice when you need additional information View configuration Select this choice to see the existing disk array configuration Create delete array Select this choice to define a hot spare drive to select the drives for an array you want to create or to delete an existing array The Create delete array screen also has choices for defining a logical drive and formatting a drive Whenever you make changes to the disk array configuration and select Exit the Confirm pop up window will appear You must select Yes to save and activate the changes 466 PC Server HMM e lnitialize synchronize array Select this choice after creating an array to Setthe drive to a predetermined value For proper operation of RAID levels 1 and 5 you must select Initializ
449. problems a single beep sounds and the first screen of your operating system or application program appears If the POST detects a problem an error message appears on your screen A single problem can cause several error messages to appear When you correct the cause of the first error message the other error messages probably will not appear on the screen the next time you turn on the system POST Beep Codes The Power On Self Test generates a beeping sound to indicate successful completion of POST or to indicate that the tests detect an error One beep and the appearance of text on the display indicates successful completion of the POST More than one beep indicates that the POST detects an error Test Programs The QAPlus PRO test programs developed by DiagSoft for IBM are the primary method of testing the PC Server You can use them to test the IBM components of the system and some external devices The amount of time required to test all components depends on the number of components The more optional adapters and devices you have attached to your system the longer the testing takes The test programs on the Diagnostic Diskette include the following features General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO 5 Feature Description Advanced Identifies most problems associated with the Diagnostic following major components Tests System board Hard disk drives Diskette drives CD ROM drives RAM e Seria
450. program The built in SCSI 2 utility program SCSISelect Utility program allows you to configure the SCSI devices that you install in the server Use SCSISelect to change default values resolve configuration conflicts and perform a low level format on a SCSI hard disk drive in a non array model See SCSISelect Utility Program on page 547 264 PC Server HMM The Reference and Diagnostic diskettes provide additional support for configuration and diagnostic activities The Reference Diskette provides options for backing up and restoring the system diskettes copying option diskettes configuring Micro Channel adapters and testing the computer The PC Server 520 System Board Diagnostic Diskette provides diagnostic tests for the system board disk drives and other system components The PC Server 520 Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskette provides diagnostic tests for Micro Channel adapters Note Before installing a new device or program read the documentation supplied with it Reading the instructions helps you determine the steps required for installation and configuration The following is a preview of the actions that might be required to configure the server 1 Run the Configuration Setup utility program and record the current configuration settings 2 Set jumpers or switches on the server s system board See System Board Jumpers on page 307 3 Set jumpers or switches on the device See the device insta
451. ptional P 390 32MB or P 390 96MB Memory Card attached to the P 390 Processor Card When the processor card is installed with a memory card attached the voltages for the memory card are provided by the system board slot adjacent to the slot occupied by the processor card Together the P 390 Processor Card and a P 390 32MB or P 390 96MB Memory Card occupy two adjacent slots on the system board Snap Spacer Memory Connector dapt process aa Connector End Mounting Holes Parts Listing System Unit Type 8641 P 390 Microprocessor Complex 17H5372 P 390 32MB Memory Card 26H2931 P 390 96MB Memory Card 26H2978 S 370 Channel Emul A Adapter 06F3160 S 370 Channel Emul A Cable 80F 1939 4 10GB DDS2 4mm Drive 16G8454 IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 241 PC Server 520 Type 8641 Features rnt Se eg ert a 245 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE 245 Models MZO MZV MZS MZL 246 Diagnostics and Test Information Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZB a Gg eee He a S 248 Diagnostic Files 248 Installing Additional Test Programs 249 USERDIAG CFG Example 250 Diagnostics and Test Information Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL 251 Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes 252 Using the System Diskettes 252 Starting the Operating System 253 Backing Up System Diskettes 253 Setting Micro Channel Configuration
452. pue eui jo doo dnyoeg e Ssejoeysip uejs s aui dn x oeg uiejs s yoeg ulejs s y speo pue 5 ay uiojs s ues uonduosoeg Server HMM 64 UO ues 1dujeme eui ey seAup eui jo eouenbes y 4 smoly eouenbes 4 195 e JaAsas se aq ay JI 391049 141 10996 pjay si e peeds au 559002 e pue piowssed uo jewod si e qejre e jo sed suosied pezuouineun Aq 1e1ndujoo y jo esn eui 9105405 195 peeds p eoq y 195 Ajunoes pue 195 euin pue y euin pue 19S 19S eseui 1ouueo dn sues 1ejndujoo eui uoee peunfijuoo sjueuoduioo 194 esneoeg siajdepe pue 1 euuooiJeju JUBUOdWOD
453. pyright IBM Corp 1996 243 Restricting Access to Diskette Drives 500272 Defining the Start Options 273 Advanced Setup 273 Configuration Conflicts 274 Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE tot ce thee Ba gts ie o dre o 274 Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 274 Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts 276 Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE fete Stn Meat 276 Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 277 Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts 277 Changing the Software Configuration 277 Internal Drives Type 8641 278 Considerations 280 SCSI Drives 280 Power Supplies Type 8641 283 Power Supply LED and Button 283 Primary Power Supply Voltages 284 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages s Toro een 284 Power Supply Shutdowns 285 Setup Program Type 8641 286 Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641 Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE 287 Setup Program Default Settings Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL 288 Specifications 8641 289 Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing 290 System Board Replacement Type 8641 290 Type 5 Adapter Installation Type 8641 Models MZO MZV 25 MZE MZL 291 Locations Models EZO EZV EZL EZS EZE 294 Controls Indicators 294 Expansion Bays 2
454. r non removable media device or One 5 25 inch half high removable media device and one 3 5 inch half high or one inch high removable media device or Two 3 5 inch or two 5 25 inch slim high or half high removable media devices Note Unless you install an additional SCSI cable only one of the devices that is installed in bay B can be a SCSI device e You cannot install hot swappable drives in bay B e The PC Server 520 supports eighteen 3 5 inch slim high hot swap hard disk drives or nine 3 5 inch half high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks C D and E Banks C D and E can accommodate six slim high drives or three half high drives or a combination of both drive sizes If you use a combination remember that one half high drive uses the equivalent space of two slim high drives e f you install drives in bank D or E you must remove the fan assembly on the rear of the server install a direct access storage device DASD backplane in bank D or E and install an optional 220 watt power supply For non disk array models you might need to install an additional SCSI 2 adapter An address jumper is located on the rear of each backplane You must set the jumpers on these backplanes as described in Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8388 on page 512 SCSI Drives Some drives have a special design called small computer system interface or SCSI This design allows you to attach mul
455. r settings match the old system board jumper settings 7 the new system board does not correct the problem reinstall the options on the old system board reinstall the old system board then replace the processor Test Programs The Diagnostics test programs developed by DiagSoft for IBM are the primary method of testing the computer You can use them to test the IBM components of the system and some external devices The amount of time required to test all components depends on the number of components The more optional adapters and devices you have attached to your system the longer the testing takes The test programs on the Diagnostic Diskette include the following features PC Server 310 Type 8639 81 Feature Description Advanced Diagnostic Tests Identifies most problems associated with the following major components System board Hard disk drives Diskette drives CD ROM drives RAM Serial and parallel ports Video adapter Printer Keyboard Mouse Flexible Test Control Allows you to Run groups of tests in batch Specify parameters to use for each test for example video modes disk cylinders and port addresses Specify the number of passes you want to run one to continuous Log the test results to a text dBase DBF format file Save all test settings for future use View System Information View the server s configuration information For example you can
456. r example you might have two diskette drives or two hard disk drives or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the computer This configuration might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group Or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the system which might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group From either the Module Test Menu or the Test Group window you can change to a different LUN where applicable by pressing the plus key next LUN or the minus key previous LUN Test Group Specifications In the upper right hand portion of the testing screen or just the upper portion if you switched to an individual test group screen are the specifications for the related test group Note In the Hard Disk Test Group specification area if a software program was to compress your drive the indicated size is the compressed size of the logical drive Starting the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette 1 Insert the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette into drive A 2 Power on the computer 3 When the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Main Menu is displayed press Ctrl A 4 Select Diagnostics then press Enter 5 Follow the instructions that appear on your screen If an error is displayed go to the Symptom to FRU Index for the system you are servicing 10 PC Server HMM Module Testing Mode If the test progra
457. r slot XX run Setup then run the EISA Configuration Utility Battery CMOS Chip 2 System Board 162 1 Run Configuration error Configuration Setup 0163 1 Battery CMOS Chip Real Time Clock error 2 System Board 164 1 Run Configuration Memory configuration changed 165 Micro Channel adapter configuration changed 1 Run Configuration insert Reference diskette 0171 1 Battery CMOS Chip System battery is dead 2 System Board 0173 1 Run Setup System CMOS checksum 2 Battery CMOS Chip bad 3 System Board 0174 1 Run Setup Invalid ISA Configuration 2 Look for configuration conflicts 3 Battery CMOS Chip 0175 1 Run Setup EISA Configuration Error 2 Run EISA run the configuration utility Configuration Utility 3 Battery CMOS Chip 4 System Board 176 1 Run Computer cover or cable Configuration Setup cover was removed without a key being used 177 178 Hardware error Run Diagnostics 2 System Board PC Server 320 Type 8640 165 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 184 1 Run Power on password Configuration Setup corrupted 185 1 Run Drive startup sequence Configuration Setup information corrupted 186 1 Run System board or security Configuration Setup hardware error 2 System Board 189 1 Run Configuration An attempt was made to enter the access the computer with administ
458. r that uses simple function key commands To access the File Editor ilg 2 Select File Editor from the Utility Menu then press Enter Insert a diskette into Drive A or Drive B before selecting the file you want to edit then select the file you want to edit from the Files selection box Make your changes The arrow keys move the cursor and the function keys perform search and block editing functions See File Edit Function Key Usage When you are done press F10 to update the file with the changes you made or press Esc to quit the editing process without saving the changes File Edit Function Key Usage The following information describes the function of the function keys and keyboard keys when you are using the File Editor Key Description Arrows Move the cursor to the place in the text where you want to make changes Home Press Home once to move the cursor to the start of the current line Press Home twice to move to the beginning of the file Press Home three times to move to the beginning of the file End Press End once to move the cursor to the end of the current line Press End twice to move the cursor to the end of the current screen Press End three times to move the end of the file F2 Press F2 to be in search mode You are prompted to enter the search word or words on a reverse highlighted line at the bottom of the File Edit Screen After typing in the
459. rallel Connector One 25 pin parallel port is provided This is where the signal cable for a parallel printer or other parallel device connects to the server SCSI Connector Attach external SCSI devices here Display Connector The display signal cable attaches to the connector on this adapter 156 Server HMM Internal Drive Bays Disk Array Models Internal drives are installed in bays The bays are numbered 1 through 10 O DOA FWD Cover plates sometimes called bezels cover the front of some installed drives If you install a drive that uses removable media diskette optical disc or tape you might need to remove or change the cover plate Bays 1 6 are for 3 5 inch hot swappable hard disk drives Bay 7 has a preinstalled SCSI CD ROM drive Bays 8 and 9 are for 3 5 inch diskette interface devices such as a diskette drive or a tape backup unit that uses the diskette cable The system board in the server supports a maximum of two diskette interface devices You can install a second 3 5 inch diskette interface device in bay 9 Bay 10 is for a 3 5 inch hard disk drive only Be sure the screw holes in the device line up with the screw holes in bay Disk array models are supplied with a 2 drop SCSI cable PC Server 320 Type 8640 157 The following table shows the widths types and maximum heights for the drives that you can install in each
460. ration from the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program To view the disk array configuration 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears 3 Select View configuration The current disk array configuration information appears on the screen 4 Press Enter to see the stripe order in the Bays Occupied Ch Bay field In the following example data for the B array is striped across Channel 1 bay 4 Channel 1 bay 5 and Channel 2 bay 1 IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 4 1 98 View Configuration Cth 2 Ch 2 Bays Occupied Arrays 1 4 5 2 ONL Arr Array Log Size RAID Date Eoi ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status 5760 A0 0 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 3 Loni A 3 Loni B 5760 Al 0 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good C 3840 A RAID 1 03 24 94 Good A ONE MP 00 D 5760 0 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 0 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 00 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good 6 6 ONL 0 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good 3840 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good 7 7 5 Press any key to continue 5 Press any key to retu
461. rator an invalid password password 201 1 Memory SIMM Memory test error 2 System Board 0214 1 Memory SIMM System RAM failed at 2 System Board offset XXXX 0215 1 Memory SIMM Failing Bits XXXX 2 System Board 0216 1 Memory SIMM Extended RAM failed at offset XXXX System Board 0221 Shadow RAM failed at offset Memory SIMM 2 System Board 0254 System board Cache error Cache disabled System Board Cache 2 System Board 229 Cache memory test error Be sure the cache memory is enabled Cache memory 2 System Board 0301 Keyboard or keyboard controller error Keyboard 2 System Board 0302 1 Unlock the keyboard Keyboard locked 2 Keyboard 3 System Board 0303 1 Keyboard Keyboard Error stuck key 2 System Board 604 1 Diskette Drive Diskette drive error 2 Drive Cable 3 System Board 0610 1 Run Setup Incorrect drive A type 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 166 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0612 1 Run Setup Incorrect drive B type 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 0632 1 Run Setup Diskette drive A error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 0642 1 Run Setup Diskette drive B error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable 662 1 Run Diskette drive configuration Configuration S
462. rd was entered The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if an invalid memory address was entered at the Enter Memory Address Of Bad Chip prompt PC Server 310 Type 8639 115 Error Message Symptom FRU Action That Number is Out Of Range An invalid bit number was entered Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option 1 Enter the correct number 2 Memory Module 3 System Board Too Many Errors Test Aborted Too many errors the Diagnostics Test cannot continue Microprocessor 2 System Board Transmit Error Internal or external serial port loopback test failure Serial Port Cable 2 System Board Video Adapter Failed Test Result Summary displayed if Fail was at the Quit Fail Pass menu of any video test Video Adapter 2 System Board 3 Display Write error on cylinder n Hard disk drive write error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed Write Errors Diskette drive write error Diskette Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable PQs Write Protected or Unformatted Diskette is Write Protected or not formatted 1 Insert a non write protected formatted diskette into the diskette drive then rerun the test Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable RON You Cannot Delete the M
463. re 86 2 3 DMA page register write read test failure 87 2 4 RAM refresh verification failure 88 3 1 1st 64K RAM test failure 89 3 2 1st 64K RAM parity test failure 90 2 1 1 Slave DMA register test in progress or failure 91 2 1 2 Master DMA register test in progress or failure 92 2 1 3 Master interrupt mask register test failure 93 2 1 4 Slave interrupt mask register test failure 95 2 2 2 Key board controller test failure 316 Server HMM CP Code Beeps Definition 99 2 3 2 Screen memory test in progress or failure 9A 2 3 3 Screen retrace tests in progress or failure 9B N A Search for video ROM in progress 9C N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits 9D N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits 9E N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits 9F N A Screen believed operable mode in low two bits AO 3 1 1 Timer tick interrupt test failure Al 3 1 2 Interval timer channel 2 test failure 3 1 4 Time Of Day clock test failure 7 3 2 4 Comparing CMOS memory size against actual A8 3 3 1 Memory size mismatch occurred DO N A Cache State D1 N A Cache Init D2 N A Cache Restore D3 N A Cache Config D4 N A Cache Flush D5 N A Cache Enable D6 N A Cache Disable D7 N A Cache Custom eth N A CSET BFR VIDROM e5h N A CSET AFT CMCFG PC Server 520 Type 8641 317 Parts Listi
464. re incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared a conflict occurs and the device remains deactivated by the configuration PC Server 520 Type 8641 275 program Use the EISA Configuration Diskette s Step 4 Examine switches or print report screen to verify switches see Making Menu Selections on page 136 Read the documentation supplied with the device 5 Change system board jumpers or switches Remove the cover then refer to the system board diagram inside the server 6 Remove the device or adapter Some configurations are not supported for example you cannot operate the server with two ISA SVGA adapters installed Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts The memory address space and interrupt levels IRQs used by some hardware options might conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the EMS EMS is used only with DOS If there is a conflict one or more of the following conditions might exist The system cannot load the operating system The system does not work An application program does not operate or it returns an error Screen messages indicate a conflict exists You can resolve conflicts by changing either the software or the hardware configuration Note Start the EISA Configuration Diskette to view the addresses used by the system board functions Use the Advanced function of Step 3 View or edit details to view the addresses used by the a
465. re information contact IBM or an IBM Authorized Dealer For Information About See Publication PS 2 Computers IBM Personal System 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual S52G 9971 PS ValuePoint Computers IBM PS ValuePoint Hardware Maintenance Service and Reference S61G 1423 Laptop Notebook Portable and ThinkPad Computers L40 CL57 N45 N51 P70 P75 ThinkPad 300 350 500 510 710T Expansion Unit Dock Dock IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 S82G 1501 ThinkPad Computers ThinkPad 340 355 360 370 700 701 720 750 755 IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 S82G 1502 ThinkPad Computers ThinkPad 365 760 IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 3 S82G 1503 Monitors Displays February 1993 IBM PS 2 Display HMM Volume 1 SA38 0053 Monitors December 1993 IBM Color Monitor HMM Volume 2 S71G 4197 IBM Monitors P Series February 1996 IBM Monitor HMM Volume 3 S52H 3679 IBM 2248 Monitor February 1996 IBM Monitor HMM Volume 4 S52H 3739 Disk Array technology overview and using the IBM RAID Configuration Program Configuring Your Disk Array booklet S82G 1506 Installation Planning for Personal System 2 computers Personal System 2 Installation Planning and Beyond G41G 2927 Installation Planning for Advanced Personal System 2 Servers Adva
466. rect and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 552 P1 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 6 1 Power Good 5 6 2 4 8V 5 25V 5 6 3 11 52V 12 60V 5 6 4 10 8V 13 2V P2 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 2 3 4 5V 5 5V 1 2 4 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 5 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 6 4 8V 5 25V P3 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 8V 5 25V 152 PC Server HMM P4 and P6 1 4 L1 mmmm Co Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 4 8V 5 25V 2 3 4 11 52V 12 6 P5 P7 and P8 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 11 52V 12 6 2 3 4 4 8V 5 25V Setup Program To access the Setup program 1 Remove all diskettes from the server Note Never start the Setup program while using the EISA Configuration program 2 Power on the server and watch the screen Be ready to act quickly 3 After the IBM logo screen appears and then quickly disappears you are prompted to Press F1 or F2 to enter SETUP As soon as you see that prompt press the correct F key F1 or F2 If the Setup program screen doesn t appear restart the system and try again Note If a configuration error occurs a prompt appears before the operating system starts see Configuration Conflicts on page 274
467. red on before the AC power interruption it will power on when power is restored Note If the Power Enable button is not on and the AC is interrupted the system will not power on and check to see if it should be on until the next time the Power Enable button is pressed The white power on button is used to power on or off the computer You must press and hold this button for about two seconds on some models Starting the RAID Configuration Program If you have not yet created the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette RAID controller diskette see the ServerGuide CD documentation To start the RAID configuration program Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the server If the server is already on press Ctrl Alt Del If you have more than one RAID adapter you will get an adapter selection screen Otherwise the Main Menu appears RAID Program Keys Key Program Response F1 Selects Help from any menu 366 PC Server HMM Key Program Response Esc Returns to the previous screen or to the previous work area of a screen Up 1 and Down Arrows Highlights the item to be selected Enter Selects the highlighted item Main Menu Selections Note Whenever you make changes to the disk array configuration and select Exit the Confirm pop up window will appear You must select Yes to sa
468. replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer s instructions Do not disassemble it recharge it throw it into fire or water or short circuit it Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations Disk Array Configuration The following information contains step by step procedures to perform the tasks necessary to configure add change or delete one or more disk arrays The hard disk drive in disk array model comes configured as one logical drive To view the disk array configuration go to Viewing the RAID Configuration on page 468 e To create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 469 To backup the disk array configuration see Backing Up the Disk Array Configuration on page 483 Related Service Information 461 Device Drivers The RAID adapter requires the installation of device drivers See the README file on the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette for detailed instructions If you install an operating system from the ServerGuide CD the device drivers will be installed automatically If however you install an operating system from diskettes you will need to install the device drivers See the README file on the RAID Adapter Option Diskette for installation instructions Administration Monitoring Utilities The RAID Adapter Option Diskette contains RAID monitoring utility programs for several oper
469. rm number GA22 7000 Enterprise Systems Architecture 390 Principles of Operation form number SA22 7201 Enterprise Systems Architecture 390 Data Compression form number SA22 7208 Softcopy BM Online Library Omnibus Edition VM Collection form number SK2T 2067 IBM Online Library Omnibus Edition VSE Collection form number SK2T 0060 BM Online Library Omnibus Edition MVS Collection form number SK2T 0710 Error Reporting P 390 The S 390 Microprocessor Complex uses the following methods of error reporting e POST Error 165 configuration If this error is displayed and the P 390 card does not appear on the installed devices list it is an indication that one or more of the following problems exist Missing or bad ADF or DGS files Missing or incorrect statement in the config sys file The statement for the P 390 should be the last line in the config sys file Dialog Box Machine Check Errors If an error is detected during or after initialization of the P390 card a Dialog Box with a Machine Check error is displayed If this occurs run the P 390 Diagnostic and Option diskette For a list of common 234 PC Server HMM Machine Check errors see Machine Check Error Messages on page 235 AWS Error Log Contains ASKI test information about failures that occurred during operation Located in the P390 subdirectory on the hard disk drive path C P390 AWSERROR
470. rn to the View Configuration screen 6 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu 468 PC Server HMM Performing Common Tasks The Create Delete Array menu of the RAID configuration program contains the more common tasks for configuring disk arrays The procedures to complete these tasks are Creating a Disk Array Defining Logical Drives on page 470 Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 474 e Deleting a Disk Array page 476 e Redefining Space in an Array on page 477 Creating a Disk Array You can create disk arrays from the existing drives Later storage capacity can be added to the server without disturbing existing data by installing additional hard disk drives and creating additional arrays To create a disk array 1 Insert the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and power on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears Note To create an array using hard disks in an existing array refer to Redefining Space in an Array on page 477 3 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 4 Select Create disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Bay Array selection list IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 4 1 98 Create Delete Array
471. rocess begins and you can see its progress in the Pct Int Percent Initialized column of the Logical Drive list To stop the initialization at any time press Esc Then press Esc again to return to the menu or press Enter to continue initializing the drive 9 To back up the disk array configuration to diskette you will need a 3 5 inch formatted diskette To back up the disk array configuration a b Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen A pop up window shows the default file name of CONFIG You can change the file name by typing over the default PC Server 720 Type 8642 355 Power Supplies Caution Always unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before replacing the power supply to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge The Type 8642 computer is shipped with a primary power supply An additional or optional power supply can be added to the computer Connectors are used to transfer the primary power supply voltages and signals from the primary power supply to the optional power supply The following illustrations show how the two power supplies are connected Caution When replacing the primary power supply cover plate rotate the plate 180 This will leave an opening for the primary power supply connector cable that connects to the optional power supply Failure to do so will cause t
472. rray and logical drive or drives select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive to prepare the drives in the array to receive data This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing in the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the proper value Insert a 3 5 inch formatted diskette in the primary drive select Advanced functions from the Main Menu then select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Esc or selecting Exit while on the Main Menu A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your action PC Server 500 Type 8641 203 10 Reinstall your operating system and device drivers then restore your data and programs Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E Locate the drive you are removing You do not have to power off the server to remove a drive from banks C D and E Warning If you are removing a failed hard disk drive that is part of a disk array in bank C D or E you must not accidentally remove a good drive Before you attempt to remove a defective drive thoroughly review the information displayed on your server s screen to determine the location of the failed drive Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications on page 190 explains the codes that your server uses to indicate a defective drive When a hard disk drive fails a bli
473. rrect See Setup BIOS Utility on page 21 2 Run the Expanded Memory Diagnostic tests 0601 1 Set Configuration Diskette configuration error 0610 1 Diskette Drive Cannot find diskette controller for drive A 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 0612 Cannot find diskette controller for drive B 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 0616 1 Diskette Drive Diskette drive reset failed Adapter 0632 1 Diskette Drive A Diskette drive 0 seek failure 0642 1 Diskette Drive B Diskette drive 1 seek failure 0653 1 Format diskette Diskette not formatted or defective 2 Diskette 36 PC Server HMM Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0655 Diskette drive controller failed Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 107X 1 Check SCSI Check for proper installation of SCSI terminators terminators for proper installation SCSI Cable SCSI Terminator SCSI Device SCSI Adapter 1701 Hard disk drive failed Press F1 to restart the System Hard Disk Drive 1702 Hard disk drive controller error 1 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 2 System Board 1704 Hard disk drive configuration error controller failed 1 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 2
474. rrected Fan 2 System Board Planar E705 Overheat Power supply overheated and the enclosure was shutdown Power Supply Fan 3 System Board Planar Blank information panel If the Power OK indicator is on and the fans are running operation will probably not be affected However no diagnostic errors messages will be displayed 1 Information Display Cable 2 Information Display Assembly 3 System Board Planar No power Be sure the power cords and cables are properly plugged in the expansion enclosure is properly enabled and powered on and the electrical power source is active Power Cord 2 Power Supply PC Server Type 3518 447 Parts Listings t a 1 L5 Ya m UP 113 009 077 WU WU Van Ww 46 6 0 22 19 2021 18 448 Server HMM Index System Unit Type 3518 Base Frame 4X CD ROM Information Display Assembly Display Panel Support Panel Die Cast Additional Micro Channel Blanks Flex Plate Fan Mounting Support Right Side Door Fan Assembly Pedestal Wheel 470 Watt Power Supply 220 Watt Power Supply Upgrade System Board Planar Pedestal DASD Tray Hot Swap Wide DASD Tray Hot Swap Narrow Optional for Option 70G8492 Hard Disk Drive Op
475. rror occurred after device testing completed 394 PC Server HMM Error Format and Error Codes Messages PCI Error Code Format The following is an explanation of the encoded PCI error codes Error codes are displayed on the screen as eight or sixteen digits as follows DDDD DDSO VVVVIIII Device Error Device ID Vendor Number Reserved usually 0 PCI Slot Number 0 System board For example PCI error code 005A0210vvvviiii decodes as follows Digit s Information 005A 02 PCI device disabled due to Built in Self Test failure 1 The device is in PCI slot number one 0 Reserved Could be any number PCI vendor ID iiii Could be any number PCI device ID PCI Error Codes Error Code FRU Action 00900100vvvviiii System board PCI device does not respond 009002s0vvvviiii PCI device Built in Self Test failure 1 System Board 1 If S lt gt 0 replace the PCI adapter Or If S 0 replace the system board 009003s0vvvviiii PCI device resource allocation failure No resource available for the requested memory or C0000 DFFFF ROM address space 1 Run the PCI Utility or the Micro Channel Change Configuration Utility to change system resource allocation 009004s0vvwiiii PCI device ROM checksum failure 1 If S 0 replace the PCI adapter Or I
476. rs and printers Setting SCSI IDs for Internal Devices For non disk array models Fast Wide 16 bit devices support SCSI IDs 0 to 15 narrow 8 bit devices support SCSI IDs 0 to 7 For disk array models the external channel connector supports SCSI IDs 0 to 7 the internal channel connector only one of the two internal channel connectors can be used at one time also supports SCSI IDs 0 to 7 Note For disk array models devices attached to the external connector and internal connector are accessed independently A SCSI ID of 0 assigned to an internal device and a SCSI ID of 0 assigned to an external device does not create a conflict Table 1 SCSI IDs for Preinstalled SCSI Devices SCSI ID Bay Device Non Disk Array Models 6 1 Hard Disk Drive 3 4 CD ROM Drive 7 N A SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter Disk Array Models 0 53 1 6 Hot Swappable Hard Disk Drives4 6 7 CD ROM Drive N A SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus RAID Adapter Note 1 This only applies to models with a hard disk drive preinstalled in bay 1 2 Or non disk array models with the hot swap bay option installed 3 SCSI IDs are hard coded into the hot swap bay backplane 4 Two hard disk drives are preinstalled in some disk array models in bays 1 and 2 The SCSI IDs for the two hard disk drives are 0 and 1 148 PC Server HMM The drive from which you will start the non disk array server also known as the bo
477. s Servers Supported The 3517 can be attached to any PC Server that supports a SCSI 2 adapter 406 PC Server HMM Diagnostics and Test Information If a problems occurs with the 3517 see Symptom to FRU Index Supplement on page 416 Additional Service Information The following information is for the SCSI Multi Storage Enclosure Type 3517 Address Settings e Specifications page 411 Address Settings Manual Plug Tape Drive 8 Bit 4 mm Two types of manual plug tape drives 8 bit 4 mm can be used in the 3517 type 1 and type 2 They can be identified by the location of the SCSI signal cable connector on the rear of the drive assembly as shown under Type 1 on page 408 and Type 2 on page 409 When viewing the rear of a type 1 tape drive the SCSI signal cable connector is located on the top half of the rear of the drive assembly When viewing the rear of a type 2 tape drive the SCSI signal cable connector is located on the bottom half of the rear of the drive assembly Set the address switches or pins as applicable on the manual plug tape drives before installing the drives in the media bays See pages 408 and 409 Encolsure Type 35177 407 Type 1 To set the address on a type 1 tape drive 1 Remove the SCSI bus terminators if they are installed 2 Move the switches on the switch bank as illustrated SCSI Connector 50 to 68 Pin Interposer Manual Plug Tape Driv
478. s Architecture VES ESA or Multiple Virtual Storage Enterprise Systems Architecture MVS ESA manuals IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 231 Documentation and Related IBM Manuals 390 PC Server System 390 Booklets and Manuals The PC Server System Library form number S19H 1252 contains two manuals User s Guide User s Reference IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Introduction form number GC24 5717 IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Installation Configuration and User s Guide for VM ESA form number SC24 5718 IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Installation Configuration and User s Guide for VSE ESA form number SC24 5719 IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Installation Configuration and User s Guide for MVS ESA form number SA22 7210 e 05 2 Manual User s Guide to OS 2 Warp part number 83G8300 VM ESA Manuals The Virtual Machine Enterprise Systems Architecture Library Guide and Master Index for VM ESA Release 2 2 form number GC24 5518 VM ESA Product Overview VM ESA General Information form number GC24 5651 VM ESA Introduction and Feature Summary form number SC24 5651 VM ESA Planning Administration Installation and Service VM ESA Installation form number SC24 5526 VM ESA Service Guide SC24 557 VM ESA Introduction and Feature Summary form number SC24 5651 VM ESA Planning and Administration form number SC24 5519 VM ESA Connectivi
479. s DiagSoft Inc QAPlus PRO DiagSoft Inc Quantum Quantum Corporation RIPL CTA Incorporated SCSISelect Adaptec Inc SMC Standard Microsystems Corporation SCO The Santa Cruz Operation Inc TokenExpress Intel Corporation VINES Banyan Systems Incorporated XENIX Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Copyright IBM Corp 1996 557 Part Number 70H0751 Printed in U S A
480. s a low level format If you install a new hard disk drive that requires a standard format use the Format command provided by the operating system The Format program is provided in the IBM RAID configuration program so that you can perform a low level format on a drive controlled by the RAID adapter To perform a low level format 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is turned on press Ctrl Alt Del Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Note A low level format erases all data and programs from the hard disk drive Before proceeding back up any data and programs that you want to save Select Format drive The low level format program starts Follow the instructions on the screen You can perform a low level format on more than one drive at a time Related Service Information 487 Changing the RAID Parameters You can change the RAID parameters using the advanced functions by selecting Change RAID parameters IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Advanced Functions 1 Help 2 BackeuB co Ch 1 Ch 2 Back up config to diskette 3 Restore config from diskette
481. s are being replaced in a RAID Array Related Service Information 515 m Important 1 2 Keeping track of which drives are located in which bays Have a backup copy of the current RAID configuration The drives might have been swapped multiple times Always inspect the connectors for damage If the fixed disks are being replaced due to suspected STICTION problems the drive head is bound to the drive disk the main Idea is not to power off the server If the IBM F W Streaming RAID Adapter Option Diskette is at version 2 3 it is strongly recommended that version 2 22 be obtained and used during this procedure Version 2 3 turns off all the fixed disks the array during the rebuild process This will expose the remaining drives to possible stiction Use version 2 3 after all drives have been replaced 10 11 516 Make a Chart of Bays 1 through 6 and write in each bay the original disk drive Serial Number and the New disk drive serial number for that particular bay While still installed in the system place stickers on the drives indicating what bays they are in Do the same to the new drives once they are installed Insert the IBM F W Streaming RAID Adapter Option Diskette Version 2 22 into the default diskette drive Do not use Version 2 3 Press Ctrl Alt Del to soft boot the system then select Advanced Options Select Backup Configuration to Diskette from this menu Insert a blank diskette i
482. s can be done by using the Configuration Setup utility program PC Server 520 Type 8641 277 If a device driver is causing a memory address conflict refer to the operating system documentation or the documentation supplied with the device drivers Internal Drives Type 8641 Adding different types of drives allows the server to read different types of media and store more data Several types of drives are available such as Diskette Hard disk e Rewritable optical disc Tape The server has hardware that allows you to replace a failed hard disk drive without powering off the server Therefore you have the advantage of continuing to operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed These drives are known as hot swap drives Hot swap drives have a green light on the knob of the tray that contains the drive If the drive has a good electrical connection upon installation the light illuminates The light blinks briefly during power on For disk array models the light also blinks if the drive malfunctions For non disk array models the light turns off if the drive malfunctions Each hot swappable drive that you plan to install must have a hot swap drive tray attached Trays are available for two drive types narrow and wide The narrow tray has a 50 pin drive connector The wide tray has a 68 pin drive connector Internal drives are installed in bays diskette drive and a CD ROM drive are preinsta
483. s from the Advanced Functions menu They include e Backup configuration to diskette Restore configuration to diskette Change the write policy Change the RAID parameters Format a drive Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk array configuration information in its EEPROM electronically erasable programmable read only memory module The disk array configuration is vital information To protect this information back up the information to diskette as soon as you have completed your tasks You need a blank formatted 3 5 inch diskette PC Server 720 Type 8642 331 To back up the disk array configuration information to diskette 1 Label the blank diskette Disk Array Configuration Backup and date it 2 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 3 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 4 Select Backup config to diskette 5 Remove the RAID controller diskette from the drive and insert the blank diskette 6 Follow the instructions on the screen Restoring the Disk Array Configuration To restore the disk array configuration information in the RAID adapter EEPROM module use the RAID controller diskette and an up to date Disk Array Configuration Backup diskette Note Because dynamic changes in the configuration of your disk array occur due to hot spare drive replacement or other drive
484. s grouped single hard disk drive failure indicated by a DDD status in the Bay Array selection list causes logical drives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 to have a Critical status Data remains in logical drives with a Critical status but you must replace the one defective hard disk drive promptly because if two hard disk drives were to fail all of the data in the array would be lost After you install a new hard disk drive the Replace process changes the drive status from DDD to OFL if there is a Critical logical drive After the Rebuild process the hard disk drive status changes from OFL to ONL Asingle or multiple hard disk drive failure causes logical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 to have an offline status Data in logical drives with an offline status is lost However with a multiple disk drive failure when the defective drives are part of the same array logical drives in that array will have an offline status This means that data is lost in all the logical drives in that array regardless of which RAID level is assigned Replacing a Faulty Drive Note The hard disk drive indicator light will blink when the drive has failed and needs to be replaced DDD state only To replace a faulty drive 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 If the drive failed while the system was powered down a screen a
485. s highlighted the information for that drive is shown at the bottom of the screen 4 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Note The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped Bay Array Selection List The status of the drives in the Bay Array selection list is defined as follows Status Meaning CDR CD ROM drive installed DDD Defective The drive is an online or hot spare drive that does not respond to commands If a RDY drive is defective or powered down it shows an empty bay a blank status not a DDD status FMT Format The drive is being reformatted HSP Hot spare The drive will replace a similar drive that becomes defective in real time At that time its status changes to ONL and its array association is displayed OFL Offline The drive is a good drive that has replaced a defective drive in a RAID level 1 or level 5 array It is associated with an array but does not contain any valid data The drive state remains OFL during the rebuild phase ONL Online The drive is part of an array If this drive fails logical drives defined in the array in which this drive is grouped will have a status of offline if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 0 with a good status or Critical if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with a good status RDY Ready The drive is recognized
486. s messages PCI Error Format and Error Codes Messages on page 395 Testing PCI Adapter Cards on page 398 e Accessing Checking the PCI Device List on page 398 Always start with General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual The Symptom to FRU Index lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes X can be any number or letter See Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 19 in the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual for additional error codes Note For IBM devices not supported by this supplement or the PS 2 Hardware Maintenance Manual refer to the manual for that device Corollary Error Codes Corollary error codes can be displayed on the information panel during early portions of the Power On Self Test POST code If the system hangs with one of these checkpoints displayed a Halt code may also be displayed see Halt Indications HALT on page 383 FRU replacement is listed with the first FRU being the first item replaced and so on The types of Corollary Error Codes are Checkpoint Codes CP on page 377 Test Error Indication EP on page 379 Test Point Codes TP on page 380 e Multiprocessor Error Indication IP and FP Codes on page 382 376 PC Server HMM Halt Indic
487. search word press Enter 76 F3 Press F3 to find the next occurrence of a search word PC Server HMM Key Description F4 Press F4 to mark the start of a block of text if you have not previously marked it If you previously marked the block of text pressing this key unmarks the text block F5 Press F5 to complete the block marking started with F4 f you did not previously ress F4 to start marking a ock of text F5 is ignored bi F6 Press F6 while the cursor is within the active block to move an active marked block of text Move the cursor to the new location where the active block is to be moved then press F6 again If there is no active block of text F6 is ignored F7 F8 To copy an active marked block of text to a new location move the cursor to the new location and then press F7 If there is no active block of text F7 is ignored To delete an active marked block of text move the cursor within the active block and press F8 If there is no active block of text F8 is ignored F10 Press F10 to save all changes and exit the file Notes 1 Always make a backup copy on a self starting diskette of the AUTOEXEC BAT and CONFIG SYS files before making any changes 2 The default text editing mode of the File Editor is the insert mode To toggle between overtype and insert modes press Insert Diagnostics Control
488. sed for redundant storage Therefore if you type 1000MB the Size MB remains 1000 because it is divisible by 2 drives which is the space available for data If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive you can create another by assigning either the same PC Server 500 Type 8641 197 9 198 or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive You can have as many as eight logical drives among four disk arrays To return to the Create Delete Array menu press Esc To define more logical drives repeat steps 1 through 5 of this procedure To leave this screen select Exit or press Esc A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action To save your changes select Yes To maintain the disk array configuration that was in place before you made changes select No If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5 you must select Initialize logical drive for proper operation This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the correct value a Select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive b Select the logical drives you want to initialize from the Logical Drive list by pressing the Spacebar the selected drives will appear highlighted To start the initialization press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your act
489. server To start the System Diskettes 1 Insert the backup copy of the Reference Diskette into the primary diskette drive 2 Power on the system Or if the system is powered on insert the Reference Diskette and press Ctrl Alt Del The system begins the power on self test If a power on or administrator password is set the system prompts you to enter it Note If an administrator password is set you must enter it to access the Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes After a few moments the system programs Main Menu appears and displays the following choices a Start operating system b Backup of system diskettes c Set View Micro Channel Configuration d Copy an option diskette e Test the computer 3 Use the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight a choice then press Enter You can get help about any selection by highlighting it and pressing F1 The active keys are shown at the bottom of the screen When you finish making changes 1 Press F3 to exit without saving the changes 2 Press Enter to save the changes You are prompted to restart the computer so that the changes will take effect You can get online help for each task by pressing F1 252 PC Server HMM Starting the Operating System To start the operating system 1 Select Start operating system from the Main Menu and then follow the instructions on the screen 2 When prompted remove the Reference Di
490. server supports also support for disk array models RAID monitoring programs The monitoring programs are OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor e 05 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager e OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for NetWare IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines These programs include many of the functions contained in the IBM RAID configuration program but unlike that program they reside on top of your operating system and do not require you to start the program from a startable diskette or from a startable compact disc You can start these programs from your active operating system desktop Each of these monitoring programs allow you view the RAID configuration reconfigure the array when replacing a defective drive and perform tuning tasks such as changing the write policy To monitor the drive status with OS 2 Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows and Banyan Vines you must run the administration programs The RAID controller diskette contains files that must be installed when you use OS 2 NetWare or Banyan Vines See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for installation and usage instructions for OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for NetWare and IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines For OS 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager see the ServerGuide CD documentation Advanced Functions You can select several utilitie
491. sk drive the Replace process changes the drive status from DDD to OFL if there is a Critical logical drive After the Rebuild process the hard disk drive status changes from OFL to ONL single or multiple hard disk drive failure causes logical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 to have an Offline status Data in logical drives with an Offline status is lost However with a multiple disk drive failure when the defunct drives are part of the same array logical drives in that array will have an Offline status This means that data is lost in all the logical drives in that array regardless of which RAID level is assigned Replacing a Faulty Drive To replace a faulty drive Note The hard disk drive indicator light blinks when the drive has failed and needs to be replaced DDD status only 1 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive and powering on the system If the system already is powered on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu If the drive failed while the system was powered down a screen appears the next time the system is powered on showing you which drive is defunct 3 If the drive is not damaged for example it is not inserted correctly 482 PC Server HMM a b Power off the system Correct the problem Make sure that the cables to th
492. sk may be physically damaged Verify and format the media with SCSI Select 04h Hardware error The disk drive may be defective Consult the hardware documentation and contact the manufacturer 05h Illegal request The Adaptec formatting utility does not support a low level format of this device however the device may already be low level formatted by the manufacturer 06h Unit attention The removable media may be write protected Disable write protection and run the utility again 532 Server HMM The Additional Sense Code field provides more information about the error The computer locks up when the Esc key is pressed to exit SCSI Select If this happens power off then power on the computer Any settings you changed before you tried to exit the program were recorded in the EEPROM and will not be lost One of the SCSI devices in the computer will not allow you to disable termination How can it be attached to the SCSI bus Attach the device on the end of the SCSI bus so that you do not need to disable termination After connecting the LED cable to the host adapter the light stays on all the time and the computer hangs The red LED on the AHA2940 2940W normally lights when there is activity in the SCSI bus If the light stays on when there is no activity on the SCSI bus the SCSI cables might be installed in a reverse position Problems Detected During Installation If the system will not boot from th
493. skette then press Enter to restart the computer from a diskette or hard disk drive The server restarts Backing Up System Diskettes Select Backup of system diskettes from the Main Menu to backup the system diskettes or to restore the configuration information from the system diskettes This is useful in case the battery fails or a change that you made to the configuration information causes a problem and you need to change it back to its previous setting Note Store the original system diskettes in a safe place Always use the backup copies when configuring and troubleshooting the server The system prompts you to switch the diskettes and label the diskette Note You will need to have a formatted diskette for each system diskette that you copy Setting Micro Channel Configuration Select Set View Micro Channel Configuration from the Main Menu to view change backup or restore system configuration of Micro Channel adapters Follow the instructions on the screen The following figure shows a Micro Channel configuration screen PC Server 520 Type 8641 253 Change Configuration Slot 1 IBM Ethernet Adapter A Adapter Media Type Selection Autosense System Interrupt Level Interrupt Micro Channel I O Address Streaming Date Select Enabled Faitfiess cec ene Fairness ON Level 5 Fi Help F3 Exit F5 Previous F6 Next F7 Bkwd F8 Fwd F10 Save
494. splayed on the SCSISelect Utility program menu e Configure View Host Adapter Settings SCSI Disk Utilities Configure View Host Adapter Settings To view or change the SCSI 2 controller settings select Configure View Host Adapter Settings and follow the directions on the screen Refer to the following table for information on the choices on this menu Host Adapter SCSI ID Select this choice to change the SCSI ID of the SCSI 2 controller from its default value of 7 SCSI Parity Checking Select this choice to enable or disable SCSI 2 adapter parity checking The default value is Enabled Host Adapter SCSI Termination Select this choice to configure SCSI 2 controller termination The default value is Low On High On SCSI Device Configuration Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters Before you can make updates you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to configure Advanced Configuration Options Related Service Information 547 Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration options These options include setting the SCSI ID scanning order and enabling support for a startable CD ROM and for Int13Extensions SCSI Controller Settings Description The following is a list of the Configuration View Host Adapter Settings and descriptions SCSI Controller Settings Description Host Adapter SCSI ID Change the SCSI ID of the SCS
495. ss to the diskette drives is disabled select the System Security menu option and then select Secure Diskette Drives Press the Left Arrow lt or Right Arrow key to toggle the entry to Disable in the Diskette Drive Access data field If the administrator password is enabled the password must be before you can change this setting 272 PC Server HMM Defining the Start Options Start options take effect when you start the server You can select keyboard operating characteristics such as the keyboard speed You can also specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off The server uses a startup sequence to determine the diskette drive hard disk drive or network adapter from which the operating system will be loaded You can specify up to four devices in the Startup Device data fields For example you can define a startup sequence that checks for a startable diskette in the primary diskette drive then checks the hard disk drive in bay 1 You can enable the server to run without checking for the presence or state of a monitor keyboard or diskette drive The devices are disabled after the power on self test POST completes and the operating system has loaded This allows you to enter a password and update the Configuration Setup utility program in keyboardless operation and to start the system programs from the Reference Diskette in disketteless operation You can select the tests that the server runs at startup T
496. st programs directing you to run the Low Level Format program on the hard disk As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive Hard Disk Drive Preparation When the Low Level Format program is finished restore to the hard disk all the files that you previously backed up 1 Partition the remainder of the hard disk for your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 2 Format the hard disk using your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 3 Install the operating system You are now ready to restore the files File Editor The File Editor is an ASCII text editor that uses simple function key commands To access the File Editor 1 Select File Editor from the Utility Menu then press Enter 2 Insert a diskette into Drive A or Drive B before selecting the file you want to edit then select the file you want to edit from the Files selection box 3 Make your changes The arrow keys move the cursor and the function keys perform search and block editing functions See File Edit Function Key Usage on page 23 22 PC Server HMM 4 When you are done press F10 to update the file with the changes you made or press Esc to quit the editing process without saving the changes File Edit Function Key Usage The following information describes the funct
497. st Wide PCI Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette also called the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette The following figure is a compilation of many of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration also called the IBM RAID configuration program screens followed by an explanations of the numbered areas of the figure Related Service Information 463 IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Cdnfiguration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 4 1 98 Size 1 of Logical Create Delete Array Drive MB Help 4 F Ch 2 3840 2 Define hot spare drive 3 Delete disk array Bay 4 Create disk array 5 Define Logical drive 1 0NL 1 Hon 8 6 Exit 2 Loni 2 ont Arr Array Log Size RAID Date ID Size MB Drv MB Level Created Status 3 a cow AQ 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good WT Al 1500 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good WT A2 1005 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good WT BO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good WT 0 03 24 94 Good WT 6 6 Lon D 24 94 Good WB 71 03 24 94 Good 7 7 HSP C1 Enter a vplue greater than 2 and less than the default value shown or 3251024 whichever is lesser and press Enter Esc to quit form 1 464 4 5 6 This pop up allows you to select the RAID level you want to assign to the logical drive you are defining and it allows you to select the l
498. stem programs to help you isolate and correct the problem If you do not want the system programs to automatically start when an error occurs change the Bypass System Programs on error setting in the system programs From the Hard Disk Drive To start the system programs from the hard disk drive do the following 1 Remove all media from all the drives 2 Power off the computer then power it back on The IBM logo appears on the screen 3 When the F1 prompt appears press F1 A second IBM logo appears followed by the system programs main menu From the Reference Diskette To start the system programs from the Reference Diskette do the following 1 Power off the computer 2 Remove all media from the drives 3 Insert the Reference Diskette into the primary diskette drive 4 Power on the computer After a few seconds the IBM logo appears on the screen then a second IBM logo screen appears followed by the system programs main menu System Programs Main Menu The following tables contain a listing of the System Programs Main Menu items followed by a description of the item PC Server 310 Type 8639 63 peypeq ueneq y uoneuuojur y dn yoeg 14 uiojs s ssed g oui osje ued noA sJjejdepe oy jo
499. t When you view these tests on the Test Group window for the User Diag test group they appear as follows 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem Generic 1 Generic 2 CMD 1 CMD The diagnostic program automatically assigns a test number to each test The test numbers start at 201 and continue upward as needed The numbers for the tests listed above are as follows 202 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem 203 Generic 1 204 Generic 2 205 CMD 1 206 CMD 2 207 CMD 3 Internal SCSI Drives The server supports small computer system interface SCSI drives You can attach multiple SCSI drives to the preinstalled SCSI 2 adapter If you install additional SCSI devices in a non disk array model you must set a unique identification ID for each SCSI device that you connect to the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus adapter so that the SCSI 2 adapter can identify the devices and ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time The SCSI IDs in disk array models with the SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Bus Adapter are hard coded in the backplane of the hot swap bay and preset for the CD ROM drive Do not attempt to change the SCSI IDs for internal SCSI devices on disk array models PC Server 320 Type 8640 147 Refer to Table 1 on page 148 before setting SCSI IDs Do not set the SCSI IDs for other devices to these values Note Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices such as scanne
500. t Power on Password on the System Security menu then press Enter The Power on Password menu appears 2 Select Delete Power on Password then press Enter 3 confirmation window appears Press Enter to delete the power on password Press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System Security menu Defining a System Owners Name When you specify a system owners name that name will be displayed each time that your server is started If the administrator password is enabled the password must be entered before you can set change or delete the system owners name 1 Select System Owners Name on the System Security screen and press Enter The System Owners Name screen appears 2 Type the name in the Enter System Owners Name String data field 3 Press the Down Arrow key to select the Set Change System Owners Name data field 4 Press Enter to set the name or change a previously defined name You can use any combination of up to 15 characters and spaces in your system owners name To delete the system owners name select Delete Stored System Owners Name and press Enter Restricting Access to Diskette Drives The setting for the Secure Diskette Drives option controls who has access to the diskettes user and administrator or administrator only Your server comes with this feature set to Enable so that both the user and administrator have access to diskette drives To change this setting so that the acce
501. t SP power on the RTC s Power State bit is checked to determine if the system should stay powered on after an AC power failure 362 PC Server HMM Specifications Size Depth 755 mm 29 7 in Height 622 mm 24 5 in Width 353 mm 13 9 in Depth with cable cover 807 mm 31 8 in Weight e Configured with one hard disk drive 31 3 kg 69 Ib Environment e Air temperature System on 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Altitude 0 to 914 mm 3000 ft System on 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Altitude 914m 3000 ft to 2133 m 7000 ft System off 10 to 43 C 50 110 F Maximum Altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Storage 1 to 60 C 34 to 140 F Humidity System on 8 to 80 System off 896 to 8096 Maximum altitude 2133 m 7000 ft Heat Output Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units BTU per hour Minimum configuration 155 BTU 44 watts Maximum configuration 3 600 BTU 1055 watts Electrical Input e Sine wave input 50 to 60 Hz is required e Input voltage Low range Minimum 90 V ac Maximum 137 V ac High range Minimum 180 V ac Maximum 265 V ac Input kilovolt amperes kVA approximately Minimum configuration as shipped 0 16 kVA Maximum configuration 1 0 kVA Total Power Available for Drives e Nominal operating current allowed base with expansion upgrade 45Vdcline 10 A base 23 A with upgrade 12 V
502. t through and crossover Note Use straight through cables when connecting your adapter to an external 10Base T concentrator hub Straight Through Use crossover cables to directly connect your adapter to another 10Base T device such as a workstation server or another adapter Crossover cables create dedicated segments A dedicated segment is two point to point devices connected to a dedicated link Crossover Attention Ensure that you do not externally join ports of adapters using bridges switches or concentrators Related Service Information 501 Cabling for 10Base2 Networks To connect any port of the Quad B2 PeerMaster adapter to a 10Base2 thin Ethernet cable segment A thin Ethernet cable segment is the length of the cable between the repeaters do the following Notes Avoid severe bending of the cable 2 Do not exceed 185 meters 600 feet of interconnection without using a signal repeater to attach another network segment 3 Do not attach more than one Quad B2 PeerMaster 10Base2 port to the same 10Base2 network segment E 1 Attach a bayonet connector BNC T connector to the BNC network port at the rear of the computer 2 Attach the end of the coaxial cable to an open end of the T connector 3 Attach the other end of the cable to an open end of the T connector at the rear of the next workstation in which a 10 2 is installed then continue
503. tall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer PC Server HMM Electrical Safety Observe the following rules when working on electrical equipment Important Use only approved tools and test equipment Some hand tools have handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when working with live electrical currents Many customers have near their equipment rubber floor mats that contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock Find the room emergency power off EPO switch disconnecting switch or electrical outlet If an electrical accident occurs you can then operate the switch or unplug the power cord quickly Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has hazardous voltages Disconnect all power before Performing a mechanical inspection Working near power supplies Removing or installing main units Before you start to work on the machine unplug the power cord If you cannot unplug it ask the customer to power off the wall box that supplies power to the machine and to lock the wall box in the off position If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits observe the following precautions Ensure that another person familiar with the power off controls is near you Remember Another person must be there to
504. talling Internal Dives 191 Considerations 192 Performing Common Tasks 193 Defining a Hot Spare Drive 193 Deleting a Disk Array 194 Creating a Disk Array 195 Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array 196 Defining Logical Drives 196 Power Supplies 199 Primary Power Supply Voltages 199 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages 200 RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective 200 Redefining Space in an Array 202 Removing a Drive from Bank C D orE 204 Starting the RAID Configuration Program 205 RAID Program Keys 205 Main Menu Selections 205 Viewing the RAID Configuration 206 Locations System Board 208 Symptom to FRU Index 209 Beep Symptoms 209 No Beep Symptoms 209 Error Codes x at atk A eae 209 Error Messages 210 SCSI Error Code Format 210 Listing o 2r mue aoe ho Ane era 218 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 177 Features In addition to the following features the PC Server 500 is shipped with a ServerGuide package that contains a set of ServerGuide Compact Discs CDs The easiest and most efficient way to set up the server install an operating system and take advantage of the latest software for the network environment is to use the ServerGuide comp
505. tate remains OFL during the rebuild phase Online The drive is part of an array If this drive fails logical drives defined in the array in which this drive is grouped will have a status of Offline if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 0 with a good status or Critical if the PC Server HMM logical drive is assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with a good status RDY Ready The drive is recognized by the adapter and is available for definition TAP Tape drive installed UFM Unformatted The drive requires a low level format before it can be used in an array Blank Status Any of the following circumstances can cause the status area to be blank No hard disk drive is installed in that bay The bay contains a hard disk drive but the drive is not inserted correctly An array was deleted and a defunct drive is still in the bay drive was installed and the configuration program has not been restarted The status will change to RDY when the RAID configuration program is restarted Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure Depending on the circumstances there can be several possible results from a drive failure Scenario 1 Only one hard disk drive fails hot spare drive is defined that is the same size as the failed drive The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID level 1 level 5 or a combination of these two levels The hot spare will take over immedi
506. that contains a set of ServerGuide Compact Discs CDs The easiest and most efficient way to set up the Type 8642 server install an operating system and take advantage of the latest software for the network environment is to use the ServerGuide compact discs See the ServerGuide CD documentation Type gt 8642 020 8642 120 8642 228 8642 428 Feature Processor Pentium Pentium Pentium Pentium Speed 66 100MHz 66 100 2 66 100 2 66 100MHz Processor 1 1 2 4 Qty Memory 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 60ns ECC Video SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA Hard Disk Open Open 2x2 4x2 Drive 25GB 25GB RAID No Yes Yes Yes CD ROM Yes Yes Yes Yes Drive Diskette 2 88MB 2 88MB 2 88MB 2 88MB Drive PC Server 720 computers incorporate additional processor slots on the system board for installing up to six 66 100MHz Pentium processor cards to support Symmetric Multiprocessors Multiprocessing SMP The SMP capability extends processing performance by allowing tasks to be dispatched to the next available processor rather then being queued until the busy processor has completed its task The SMP capability also provides a level of high availability in that with some operating systems such as OS 2 SMP the system will run in a uni processor mode if one of the processors should experience a failure This function will allow the LAN to continue operation so that service can be scheduled at a non critical time
507. that given depending on the device Q Information 2 Command error field of command complete status block returned by the adapter 3 SCSI Status field of the command complete status block or command error field values indicating software problems 20H 4 Sense key value returned by a device Additional sense byte byte 12 of sense information from device 6 Device error code field of command complete status block 7 Device errors not normally considered an error but considered an error based on when the code was returned medium corrupted error on device with non removable media PC Server 720 Type 8642 393 Test Status Codes Information Not applicable for error code Adapter initialization error Adapter reset Adapter register test Adapter buffer test phase 1 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 2 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 3 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 4 on cached adapters Zl Oo gt Adapter buffer enable buffer size retry enable Device assignment sequence Device not ready initial unit attention clearing Device reset Device starting phase Device in process of starting Device block size determination Device self test Device single block read LBA Device double block read LBA E
508. the program Use the Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow key to highlight your selection then press Enter to make your selection To help you track your progress a checkmark appears on the main menu next to the completed steps You can access help information through Help windows which remain active Information windows which appear automatically as a result of some configuration activities e The Help F1 prompt which allows you to access the Help Menu for screens displaying the prompt To remove the Help Menu press Esc Recording EISA Configuration Settings Record the configuration settings you made in Step 3 View or edit details and Step 4 Examine switches or print report on a separate sheet and store it in a safe place for future reference If a printer is attached to the server you can use the Print Screen key to print these settings The settings are helpful when you install additional options Also record the new settings each time you make changes Be sure to record the current configuration settings for the user 262 PC Server HMM Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette Using a backup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette can prevent damage to the original diskette see Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette on page 261 To start the EISA Configuration Diskette do the following 1 Insert the EISA Configuration Diskette into the diskette drive 2 Power on the computer or if it is already o
509. the EISA Configuration Diskette s View or edit details screen to view the available or the used System resources see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 138 Use the Edit Changes selection to change resource allocations for complex configurations 4 Change adapter jumpers or switches Jumpers and Switches define the system resources that a device can use If the settings are incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared a conflict occurs and the device remains deactivated by the configuration program Use the EISA Configuration Diskette s Step 4 Examine switches or print report screen to verify switches see Making Menu Selections on page 261 Read the documentation supplied with the device 5 Change system board jumpers or switches Remove the cover then refer to the system board diagram inside the server 6 Remove the device or adapter Some configurations are not supported for example you cannot operate the server with two ISA SVGA adapters installed Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts The memory address space and interrupt levels IRQs used by some hardware options might conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the EMS EMS is used only with DOS If there is a conflict one or more of the following conditions might exist The system cannot load the operating system The system does not work An application program does not operat
510. ting the RAID Configuration Program on page 366 2 Select View configuration The current disk array configuration information appears on the screen 3 Press Enter to see the stripe order in the Bays Occupied Ch Bay field 4 Press any key to continue 5 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu PC Server 720 Type 8642 369 Locations Bays 370 PC Server HMM Connectors Rear View SCSI 2 Connector either or Expansion Slots Serial Connectors Display Connector Parallel Connector Mouse Connector Keyboard Connector Power Connector PC Server 720 Type 8642 371 Controls Indicators Front View Power OK Indicator Hard Disk Drive Activity Indicator _ DASD Error Indicator Processor Complex Error Indicator Power Enable Indicator All Subsystems Indicator Good Indi Information Panel Keypad 4 Menu Buttons Enter Button Power On Off Button Power Enable Switch 372 PC Server HMM Hot Swap Backplane Front View SCSI ID Jumper two backplanes are connected to the same adapter one backplane must be set to high and the other one to low SCSI ROM Address ID Description Jumper Setting HI High Assigns SCSI IDs 8 to D to the backplane LO Low Assigns SCSI IDs 0 to 5 to the backplane Rear View Er E Address um
511. tion Diskette s View or edit details screen to change the setting see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 138 If the automatic verification mode is set the configuration program attempts to resolve conflicts for you However this might disable adapters or system board features For example if you choose IRQ 4 for an adapter the program disables Serial Port 1 which uses IRQ 4 If this happens and you do not want this feature disabled choose another IRQ for the adapter If you set the verification mode to manual the configuration utility program does not try to resolve a conflict Instead you have to determine if a resource conflict has occurred and then resolve the conflict PC Server 320 Type 8640 143 When the verification mode is set to manual an asterisk appears on the View or edit details screen next to adapters in conflict If the EISA Configuration program cannot resolve a configuration error it deactivates the adapter and displays the deactivated status on the View or edit details screen Use the Advanced selection of the EISA Configuration Diskette s View or edit details Screen to update or copy the server s system configuration information file see Using EISA Configuration Diskette Advanced Function on page 138 3 Change configuration resource allocations Use the built in Setup program to view or change system board resource allocations Use the Advanced selection of
512. tion Program on page 205 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu Warning A low level format erases all data and programs from the drive 3 Select Format drive The low level format program starts 4 Follow the instructions on the screen You can perform a low level format on more than one drive at a time Changing the RAID Parameters You can change the RAID parameters using the advanced functions by selecting Change RAID parameters The default settings are Stripe unit size 8K The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on a given disk before writing on the next disk To maximize the overall performance this stripe unit should be chosen such that the stripe unit size is close to the size of the system I O request The default is set to 8K data bytes r Warning Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is stored in the logical drives the stripe unit cannot be changed without destroying data in the logical drives e Rebuild priority Equal PC Server 500 Type 8641 183 Rebuild priority can be set to equal high or low When set to equal the rebuild request and system I O request get equal priority in the execution order When set to high the rebuild I O request will get a higher priority than a system I O request In a heavily loaded system with a high rate of system I O requests the high priority rebuild can significantly reduce t
513. tional Front Bezel with Shield 4X CD ROM Keylock with Keys DASD Door IBM Logo Restricted 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel 4X CD ROM Diskette Drive Bezel Rubber Dome Switch Pad Control Panel Bezel Control Panel Card Assembly 4 mm DAT Autoloader Optional Control Panel Cable Jumper DASD Mounting Plate Hinges with Screws Hot Swap Back Plane Assembly Hot Swap Cam Spring Shaft Knob Miscellaneous Parts Kit Screws 4 each Lock Pawl 1 each EMI Ground Clip 4 each System Board Mounting Clip 2 each C2 Spring 1 each Miscellaneous Parts Kit Blackplane Jumpers 4 each Screws 4 each Standoff 4 each Power Cord see Power Cords on page 451 06H8685 82G3614 06H7961 06H8657 06H8627 82G3618 82G3594 82G3616 82G3609 06H3589 06H3237 06H8625 82G3608 06H8631 07H0744 06H9379 82G3606 8263596 8263601 0698684 0698670 0697873 8263607 7597652 0697514 0698663 82803602 8203600 06H8629 07H0498 82G3611 07H0745 PC Server Type 3518 449 Cables Type 3518 Index Cables Type 3518 1 2 3 450 System Status Cable 1X4 with 4 connectors Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 2X with 2 connector Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 2X Short with 2 connectors SCSI Fast Wide Cable 1X Short with 1 connector C2 Cable with Switch Fan Cable Assembly Information Display Cable Hot Swap Back Plane Chaining Optional DAS
514. tiple drives to a single SCSI 2 adapter Note Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices such as scanners and printers The server comes with a SCSI 2 adapter The number of preinstalled SCSI hard disk drives varies according to model If you install additional SCSI devices each SCSI 280 PC Server HMM device that is connected to the adapter needs a unique identification ID so that the SCSI 2 adapter can identify the devices and ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time If you need to set IDs for SCSI devices refer to the instructions that came with those devices The server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot swap drives These IDs are determined by the drive locations in the bays The SCSI ID for the preinstalled 4X CD ROM drive in bay A is set to 6 and the SCSI ID for the SCSI 2 adapter is set to 7 The processing sequence for SCSI devices is set according to their IDs Through the SCSISelect utility program you can specify the scanning order for these devices That is you can specify whether the scanning sequence proceeds from 0 to the highest numbered SCSI ID or whether it proceeds in descending order The standard scanning sequence proceeds from 0 to 6 then 8 to 15 However this convention does not apply if you use the reverse scan feature of the SCSISelect Utility program Use the processing sequence that best suits the system configuration
515. to function properly Some ISA adapters are supplied with a diskette that contains the CFG file for the adapter If ISA adapters are installed that were not supplied with their own CFG files you must use the PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette for the system you are servicing to create a unique CFG file for each adapter Note The unique CFG files are slot sensitive That is they should not be used to configure identical adapters in multiple systems unless you install the adapters in the same expansion slots within each system To create a unique CFG file for an ISA adapter do the following 1 Insert the IBM PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette for the system you are servicing into diskette drive A 2 Start the configuration utility program 3 At the main menu select Step 2 Add or remove boards 4 At the next menu select the slot in which you installed the adapter 5 At the next screen select OK 6 At the next screen press F5 then select Create CFG file 7 Press Enter 8 At the Create a board CFG file screen type in the adapter manufacturer and description for example IBM Token Ring then press Enter 9 Refer to the adapter documentation for information about specific configuration parameters such as IRQ or DMA channel required for the adapter Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter the appropriate parameters on the menu 258 Server HMM Notes a Normally ISA
516. tor passwords e Selectable drive startup Upgradable POST and BIOS Upgradable EEPROM on the system board e POST BIOS upgrades when available PC Server 310 Type 8639 55 Input Output Connectors Video port Two serial ports Parallel port Auxiliary device port Keyboard port SCSI 2 Fast Wide PCI Adapter One external port 8 bit One internal port 8 bit Ethernet Adapter 10Base T 10Base2 10Base5 Power Supply e 200W with voltage switch 115 230 V ac e 43 3V x5 V and 12V outputs e Built in overload and surge protection Diagnostics and Test Information The diagnostic procedure required for servicing a PC Server 310 Type 8639 is determined by the architecture of the server For ISA Models 000 ODT OXT 020 and OZT go to General Checkout Models OXT 020 027 ODO ODT on page 57 e For Micro Channel Models MDT MZT to General Checkout Models MDT MXT MZT on page 59 56 PC Server HMM General Checkout Models OXT 020 027 ODO ODT This general checkout procedure is for Type 8639 Model OXT 020 027 ODO ODT servers If you are servicing a Type 8639 Models MDT MXT MZT server see General Checkout Models MDT MXT MZT on page 59 Attention The drives in the computer you are servicing might have been rearranged or the drive startup sequence changed Be extremely careful during write operations such as copyin
517. ty Planning Administration and Operation form number SC24 5448 VM ESA Group Control System Reference for 370 form number SC24 5531 VM ESA Running Guest Operating Systems form number SC24 5522 e VM ESA Operation and End Use VM ESA System Operation form number SC24 5528 VM ESA CMS User s Guide form number SC24 5460 VM ESA CMS Command Reference form number SC24 5461 VM ESA Command and Utility Reference form number SC24 5519 232 PC Server HMM VM ESA Diagnosis VM ESA System Messages and Codes form number SC24 5529 VM ESA Diagnosis Guide form number LY24 5250 VM ESA CP Diagnosis Reference form number LY24 5251 VM ESA Dump Viewing Facility form number SC24 5530 VSE ESA Manuals The VSE Enterprise Systems Architecture Library Guide form number GC33 6519 e VSE ESA Product Overview VSE ESA General Information form number GC33 6501 e VSE ESA Planning and Installation IBM VSE Enterprise System Architecture Planning form number SC33 6503 IBM VSE Enterprise System Architecture Installation and Service form number SC33 6504 VSE Enterprise Unattended Node Support form number SC33 6512 VSE ESA Administration and Operation VSE ESA Administration form number SC33 6505 IBM VSE Enterprise System Architecture Operation form number SC33 6506 VM ESA Messages and Codes form number SC33 6507 VM ESA Networkin
518. u use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move the cursor to your selection 2 Press Tab to move into the expanded Test Group window 3 Scroll to the test you want to select or deselect Warning Items indicated by a directly adjacent red text on color screens are destructive tests 4 Press the spacebar at the highlighted test to toggle between select indicated by a and deselect General Checkout Diagnostics QAPlus PRO 11 Note Pressing the first letter of a test does not activate the test unlike menu operation 5 Press Enter Running an Individual Test To run an individual test 1 Use the up and down arrow keys 1 and to move to the highlighted bar to the test you want to run 2 Press Enter to run the test Note The results of the test appear in the lower right hand Test Log window Also if you enabled Test Logging the results are recorded in the Test Log 3 When the test completes press Esc to return to the Test Group Menu Stopping the Tests To stop running a specific test or stop testing after you have started a test press Esc while the test is running The test pauses at the first possible opportunity and the Skip Abort Test Menu appears with the following options Option Action Continue The test program begins testing where it left off Skip to The test program skips the current test but next test remaining tests for the selected Test Module continue
519. u for the Configuration Setup utility program Otherwise a limited version of the Configuration Setup utility program menu appears the user cannot change any settings Notes 1 If an administrator password is set and then forgotten it cannot be overridden or removed 2 Before you set an administrator password you must set the administrator password jumper to the change position To set an administrator password 1 Select Administrator Password on the System Security screen then press Enter The Administrator Password screen appears 2 Type the password in the Enter Administrator Password data field 3 Verify that you typed the correct password If you did not type the correct password press Esc and type the correct password 270 Server HMM 4 Repeat steps 2 on page 270 through 3 on page 270 for the Enter Administrator Password Again data field 5 Select Set or Change Administrator Password to save the new password then press Enter The system prompts you to change the administrator password jumper to the locked position after changing the password The password becomes effective immediately after you select Set or Change Administrator Password You can use any combination of up to seven characters A Z a z and 0 9 for the administrator password Keep a record of the password in a secure place To delete an administrator password 1 Select Administrator Password on the System Se
520. un the system board diagnostics the system should first be booted from the reference diskette Then select either option 5 Test the computer or press Ctrl A to bring up the test menu options in customer or advanced diagnostic mode respectively To run the system board diagnostic select option 1 from this menu and insert the system board diagnostic diskette when prompted For additional information see Diagnostics and Test Information Models MZO MZV MZS MZE MZL on page 251 The following is the step by step procedure for running the diagnostic diskette to test the system board This procedure can also be used with the Module Tests option from the Diagnostics Menu 1 Boot the Reference Diskette 2 From the Main Menu select option 5 Test Computer 3 From the Test the Computer menu select option 1 System Board Diagnostics 4 Remove the Reference Diskette and insert the QAPIus PRO Diagnostics Diskette 5 Follow prompts Initialization takes approximately 4 minutes At the QAPlus PRO Main Menu select Diagnostics Select Quick Check 8 At the System Board Group look for LUN 1 of 2 or LUN 2 of 2 This indicates which CPU the diagnostics are actually testing Use the and keys to change the CPU selected The LUN message is at the top right of the display 9 Use the Spacebar and Cursor keys to select or de select groups PC Server 520 8641 255 Additional Service Information The fo
521. ure 2 Bridge Card 101 1 System Board COM 1 failure 2 Bridge Card 3 Default Processor Card 102 1 Memory Card Memory failure 2 System Board 3 Default Processor Card 103 1 Bridge Card Bridge failure 2 Default Processor Card 3 System Board 104 1 Any Processor Card Processor card failure 2 System Board See Undetermined Failing 3 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on page 369 105 1 Memory Card Memory failure 2 System Board 3 Default Processor Card 106 1 Processor Card Unknown POST path 2 System Board Note This is a software error and the system should be re flashed with the latest level of the POST code If the error persists a faulty processor card may be the cause PC Server 720 Type 8642 383 Processor Diagnostics on page 369 Halt Code FRU 107 1 Bridge Card Unexpected interrupt or 2 System Board trap 3 Any Processor Card See Undetermined Failing 4 Memory Card page 369 107C 1 Processor Card NMI error 2 Bridge Card 3 remaining Processor Cards 4 System Board 108 1 Memory Card Not enough memory found 2 Default Processor Card 3 System Board 109 1 Memory Card Memory error 2 System Board 3 Default Processor Card 1FF 1 Memory Card Miscellaneous fatal error 2 Any Processor Card See Undetermined Failing 3 Bridge Card Processor Diagnostics on 4 System Board Micro Channel Error Symptoms Codes No Beep Symptoms No
522. used based on the speed of the data transfer 5MB Per Second or Slower Data Transmission Rates Note Maximum cable length internal cable length external cable length Maximum Length of SCSI cable 6 meters 19 7 ft Length of 4 drop SCSI narrow cable 1 meter 3 3 ft Length of 7 drop SCSI Fast Wide cable 1 5 meters 4 9 ft When a narrow internal cable is used the maximum length of the SCSI external cable 5 meters 16 4 ft 6 meters 1 meter 5 meters 19 7 ft 3 3 ft 16 4 ft When a Fast Wide internal cable is used the maximum length of the SCSI external cable 4 5 meters 14 8 ft 6 meters 1 5 meter 4 5 meters or 19 7 ft 4 9 ft 14 8 ft Greater Than 5MB Per Second Data Transmission Rate Note Maximum cable length internal cable length external cable length Maximum Length of SCSI cable 3 meters 9 8 ft Length of 4 drop SCSI narrow cable 1 meter 3 3 ft Length of 7 drop SCSI Fast Wide cable 1 5 meters 4 9 ft When a narrow internal cable is used the maximum length of the SCSI external cable 2 meters 6 5 ft 3 meters 1 meter 2 meters or 9 8 ft 3 3 ft 6 5 ft When a Fast Wide internal cable is used the maximum length of the SCSI external cable 1 5 meters 4 9 ft 3 meters 1 5 meter 1 5 meters or 9 8 ft 4 9 ft 4 9 ft Table 4 Maximum External SCSI Cable Lengths 510 PC Serv
523. ust have a different ROM address setting Do not install a ROM address jumper on backplanes installed in PC Server 320 computers To identify the location for the backplane jumper see Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8388 on page 512 Jumper Position Description C Address for a backplane installed in Bank C D Address for a backplane installed in Bank D E Address for a backplane installed in Bank E Termination Hot Swap Back Plane The hot swap back plane is automatically terminated Drives connected to the hot swap back plane should not be terminated IDE Controllers Note This information applies to non Micro Channel computers Related Service Information 513 Some severs have an IDE controller on the system board You can connect two drives to the IDE controller on non disk array models and one drive to the IDE controller on disk array models If you plan to do this you must purchase an IDE cable The IDE controller is for low speed devices such as tape drives but you can connect hard disk drives When you connect two drives to the IDE controller one drive is the primary master and the other is the secondary or alternate subordinate To set the jumpers to the secondary mode follow the instructions in the documentation supplied with the drives Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply A 9 pin serial port cable is supplied with the server You
524. vanced functions from the Main Menu then select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Esc or selecting Exit from the Main Menu A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your action Reinstall the operating system and device drivers then restore the data and programs Drive Maintenance Drive maintenance consists of the following How to obtain drive status information Results of a hard disk drive failure Procedure for replacing defunct drives Procedure for redefining the space in an array by replacing logical drives Obtaining Drive Status To see the ID capacity and other information about each of the hard disk drives attached to the RAID adapter 1 2 3 Start the RAID configuration program by inserting the IBM RAID option diskette into the primary diskette drive and turning on the system If the system already is turned on press Ctrl Alt Del Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu then press Enter Select Drive information from the Main Menu Related Service Information 479 4 Use the Up 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay Array IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration Ver 3 00 Adapter in Slot 3 1 98 Drive Information Ch 1 Ch 2 Array Array ONL A 1 B ONL A 2 C 3 ONL A 3 ONL
525. ve Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable the data on that drive is lost The Logical Drive Size pop up window shows the space in this array that is available for logical drives PC Server 720 Type 8642 353 4 Type the size in megabytes that you want for the logical drive then press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action Information about the new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive list Note The size appearing in the Logical Drive list might be different from the size you typed because it appears in binary equivalent The size of a logical drive is determined by a number of factors but basically the size must be divisible by the number of drives in the array Consider the following examples Example 1 There are three 1GB drives in the array You assign RAID level 0 which uses all the drives in the array with no parity storage and type 1000MB The Size MB will be 999 which is the number closest to and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3 Example 2 There are three 1GB drives in the array and you assign RAID level 5 Data is striped across all three drives in the array but the space equivalent to that of one drive is used for redundant storage Therefore if you type 1000MB the Size MB remains 1000 because it is divisible by 2 drives which is the space available for data If you do not use the entire array for this lo
526. ve and activate the changes Selection Program Response Help Provides additional information View configuration Displays the existing disk array configuration Create delete array Selects the drives defines a hot spare drive for an array you want to create or deletes an existing array This selection also has choices for defining a logical drive and formatting a drive Initialize synchronize array Select this choice after creating an array to e Set the drive to a predetermined value For proper operation of RAID levels 1 and 5 Note Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and the corresponding parity information is initialized to the correct value e Initialize more than one logical drive at a time Interrupt the initialization process at any time by pressing Esc Restart the initialization process by pressing Enter the process by pressing Esc again PC Server 720 Type 8642 367 Selection Program Response Synchronize logical drive Recomputes and rewrites the parity data on the drive You can select this choice to recompute parity data for RAID levels 1 and 5 This selection does not alter data on the drive The synchronization process can be done on multiple logical drives Rebuild device Rebuilds logical drives The rebuild operation is supported only for RAID levels 1 and 5
527. ve list identifies the logical drive for example A1 the size of the logical drive the RAID level assigned to the logical drive the date it was created and the write policy The status of the logical drive also is shown Good All is well with the drive Critical You must replace the drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you the drive is in a Critical state Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Array list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent During an initialization process the Write Policy area displays the percent initialized during a synchronization process it displays the percent synchronized 6 The information area tells you the action you can perform on this screen or pop up 338 PC Server HMM DASD Tray SCSI IDs LED Hot Swap The SCSI IDs for DASD installed in the DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly FRU number 06H3956 are set by the automatic configuration program for the computer When a drive is initialized the LED mounted on the back of the tray in which the drive is installed should blink a few times and then stay on Continuous blinking or failure of the LED to stay on might be caused by one of the following Note Always run the diagnostic programs for the computer you are serv
528. ver 300 Type 8640 Adapters Supported Memory on page 19 Power Supply Voltages on page 20 Setup BIOS Utility on page 21 e System Utilities on page 21 System Board Replacement on page 24 Adapters Supported The PC Server 300 Type 8640 supports Industry Standard Architecture ISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture EISA and Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI adapters 18 PC Server HMM The connectors and the location of the components on the supported adapters are shown below Memory The PC Server 300 Type 8640 has four 36 bit 72 pin SIMM sockets on the system board The system board can accommodate memory from 8MB up to 128MB 192MB on some models The following are the memory requirements for the PC Server 300 Type 8640 computer Atleast two SIMM sockets must be filled Start with bank 0 then work your way up The SIMMs must be rated at 70NS or better Recommended that the SIMMs have tin lead contacts Banks 0 and 1 must have the same size memory installed f memory is installed in banks 2 and 3 the memory for Banks 2 and 3 be the same size PC Server 300 Type 8640 19 Power Supply Voltages Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the power on indicator is not on and if the power supply fan is not running check the power cord for proper installation and continuity If the power
529. ver 500 Type 8641 191 Hot swappable drives have a green LED that shines through the knob on the tray containing the drive If the drive has a good electrical connection upon installation the LED illuminates The LED blinks briefly during power up and also blinks if the drive malfunctions Internal drives are installed in bays A diskette drive and a CD ROM drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models A removable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1 You can install two drives in bay B You can install hot swappable hard disk drives in banks C D and E only Banks C D and E each contain six bays Bank C supports up to six drives However the total number of SCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank C is six The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank C varies according to the model you purchased You can install up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives in bank E Note The bank letter designations are located on both vertical rails on the front of the server The bay slot numbers are located on the top of bank C and the bottom of bank E A cover plate sometimes called a bezel or face plate covers the front of bay B2 only If you install a drive that uses removable media diskette optical disc tape you might install and adjust the cover plate after you install the drive in bay B2 Considerations Bay A comes with one SCSI CD ROM drive and one 3 5 inch 2 88MB diskette drive
530. verify Communications to the the Ethernet Ethernet PeerMaster Server PeerMaster Server Adapter failed or the Adapter adapter failed configuration 2 Ethernet PeerMaster Server Adapter 0279XXXX 1 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A FRU No 06H3059 2 System Board 3 Signal Pass Through Card if installed Error Messages Error Message FRU Action Drive in channel X bay X 1 Replace the drive in does not respond the bay indicated Installation stopped Controller does not respond RAID Adapter to commands no logical 2 System Board drive installed SCSI Error Code Format This section provides an explanation of the encoded SCSI and non SCSI Post error codes and detailed information about each code Error messages are displayed on the screen as three four five eight twelve or thirteen digits An X in an error message can be any number The shorter POST errors are highlighted in the Symptom to FRU Index Some digits will represent different information for SCSI errors versus non SCSI errors The following figure shows which digits display the shorter POST errors The figure also defines additional SCSI information Notes 1 Non IBM device error codes and documentation supersede this list 2 Duplicate SCSI ID settings will cause misleading error symptoms or messages 210 PC Server HMM RDDDPLSCB LI QEET Test state Error code Extension Qualifier
531. ves See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 205 for details Starting the RAID Configuration Program To start the RAID configuration program 1 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the server If the server is already on press Ctrl Alt Del If you have more than one RAID adapter you will get an adapter selection screen Otherwise the Main Menu appears RAID Program Keys Key Program Response F1 Selects Help from any menu Esc Return to the previous screen or to the previous work area of a screen Up 1 and Down Highlights the item to be selected Arrows Enter Selects the highlighted item Main Menu Selections Note Whenever you make changes to the disk array configuration and select Exit the Confirm pop up window will appear You must select Yes to save and activate the changes Selection Program Response Help Provides additional information View configuration Displays the existing disk array configuration Create delete array Selects the drives defines a hot spare drive for an array you want to create or to deletes an existing array This selection also has choices for defining a logical drive and formatting a drive PC Server 500 Type 8641 205 Selection Program Response Initialize synchronize Select this choice after creating array an array to e Set the drive
532. ware 8 Resolve configuration conflicts See Configuration Conflicts on page 142 EISA or ISA Features and Options Some ISA and most EISA devices are supplied with option diskettes These diskettes can contain any or all of the following types of information e Configuration files CFG Diagnostic files DGS e Device drivers Sample applications mini applications Files A configuration file is required to configure the server for ISA or EISA adapters You must copy this configuration file which has a extension of CFG from the device diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette before installing the device in the server The configuration file reserves the system resources that the adapter needs to function properly Some ISA adapters are supplied with a diskette that contains the CFG file for the adapter If ISA adapters are installed that were not supplied with their own CFG files you must use the PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette PC Server 320 Type 8640 139 for the system you are servicing to create a unique CFG file for each adapter Note The unique CFG files are slot sensitive That is they should not be used to configure identical adapters in multiple systems unless you install the adapters in the same expansion slots within each system To create a unique CFG file for an ISA adapter do the following 1 2 3 10 11 12 140 Insert the IBM PC Server
533. with a logical drive assigned the new RAID level To redefine the space in a disk array first you must delete the array The last disk array defined must be the first deleted In all cases when you delete an array all the data and programs in the array are lost Related Service Information 477 If you have data and programs that you want to save they must be backed up and then restored You might want to use a high speed backup device such as a tape drive to backup large amounts of data To redefine the space in an array 1 2 478 Back up all data and programs in the array If needed install additional hard disk drives Refer to the User s Reference for information about selecting drive sizes r Attention In all cases when you delete an array all the data and programs in the array are lost Insert the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskette drive then press Ctrl Alt Del to start the RAID configuration program Select Start RAID Configuration Program from the PC DOS start up menu the Main Menu appears Delete the existing array a Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array menu will disappear b Select Delete disk array The cursor will be active in the Bay Array list c Review the Logical Drive List Date Created column then press the Up Arrow 1 key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array Note
534. writing to a diskette 1 2 Disable writing to a diskette Cache 1 2 D 256KB Cache 2 3 1MB Cache J101 1 2 D 2 3 Bus Core Ratio 2 3 1 2 Bus Core Ratio PWD 1 2 D Password enabled 2 3 Password reset Bus CPU Speed MHz Settings The following table contains the Bus CPU Speed Settings Jumper 50 75 60 90 66 100 60 120 66 133 J26 2 3 2 3 1 2 J27 2 3 1 2 1 2 94 PC Server HMM Symptom to FRU Index Supplement The Symptom to FRU Index lists error symptoms and possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Always begin with General Checkout Models OXT 020 027 ODO ODT on page 57 This index can also be used to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing a computer If you are unable to correct the problem using this index go to Undetermined Problem on page 83 Notes e If you have both an error message and incorrect audio response diagnose the error message first e If you cannot run the diagnostic tests but did receive a POST error message diagnose the POST error message e f you did not receive any error message look for a description of your error symptoms in the first part of this index e Check all power supply voltages before you replace the system board See Power Supply on page 71 Important 1 Some errors are indicated with a series of beep codes See Beep Symptoms on page 96 2 The processor is a
535. x and S 390 programs provide the hardware and software required to run 390 based applications on the PC Server 500 System 390 PC Server Processor 390 Processor Complex Complex OS 2 390 Operating System D e gt lt gt OS 2 Application 390 Application Communications 390 LIC V Manager 2 OS 2 Device gt Drivers Ed 370 I O Subsystem Communication Buffer om o gt Shared memory windows PC Server Memory 390 Memory IBM PC Server 500 System 390 Type 8641 237 Software Facilities Server System 390 Note Knowledge of System 390 and CP 390 architecture is essential to the proper use of these processor control functions Information about System architecture is found in BM Principles of Operation GA22 7201 VM ESA and VSE ESA use the same problem determination tools on the PC Server 390 for debugging 390 operating system and applications problems as they do on 390 mainframe systems Standard OS 2 debugging tools can be used to assist with problems with the 390 environment on the PC Server 390 since many of the functions use OS 2 facilities and PC Server devices The 390 Processor Complex Programs also have the following tools for controlling and debugging the system 390 Manual Operations Provides the function of the 390 hardware console as on mainframe systems 390 Status Window Displays the processor status word PSW and current status of the 39
536. x Adapter reset failure 185x Adapter buffer test failure on cached adapters 186x Adapter reset count expired 187x Adapter registers not cleared on reset 188x Card ID in adapter microcode did not match ID in POS registers 190x Expected device did not respond 19Yx DMA arbitration level conflict Y assigned arbitration level 220x Adapter hardware error 390 PC Server HMM QEET Information 221x Global timeout on adapter device did not respond 222x Adapter DMA error 223x Adapter buffer defective 224x Command aborted by adapter 301x Invalid parameter in SCB 303x Command not supported 304x Command aborted by system 305x Command rejected buffer not disabled 306x Command rejected Adapter diagnostic failure 307x Format rejected 308x Assign rejected command in progress 309x Assign rejected device already assigned 30Ax Command rejected device not assigned 30Bx Command rejected maximum logical block address LBA exceeded 30Cx Command rejected 16 bit card slot address range exceeded 313x Invalid device for command 3FFx Status not returned by adapter 401x Recovered error not an error condition 402x Device not ready 403x Device medium error 404x Device hardware error 405x Illegal request for device 406x Device unit attention would not clear 407x Device data protect error 409x
537. xtended Industry Standard Architecture EISA Industry Standard Architecture ISA The following hardware configuration utility programs are supplied with the server Built in Setup program Configures system board functions such as the integrated drive electronics IDE controller and serial and parallel port assignments that you install It also allows you to set passwords for starting up and accessing the Setup program PC Server 520 EISA Configuration Diskette 256 PC Server HMM Configures EISA and ISA adapters boards Built in SCSI 2 adapter utility program SCSISelect Utility program Configures SCSI devices installed in non disk array models e Configuration Option Diskette Configures SCSI devices in disk array models EISA ISA and PCI Adapters Before installing a new device or program read the documentation supplied with it Reading the instructions helps you determine the steps required for installation and configuration The following list provides a preview of the actions that might be required to configure the server When installing different types of adapters at the same time install and configure them in the following sequence 1 ISA 2 EISA 3 PCI Note During POST the server automatically configures ISA Plug and Play and PCI devices 1 Run the Setup program and record the current configuration settings 2 Backup the EISA Configuration Diskette See Backing Up the EISA C
538. y models you have the option of formatting your hard disk using the Low Level Format feature of the SCSISelect Utility program Depending on the hard disk capacity the Low Level Format program could take up to two hours Note For disk array models you must use the programs provided on the RAID Configuration diskette to format your hard disk drives Refer to Disk Array Configuration on page 461 for instructions When To Use the Low Level Format Program Use the Low Level Format program When you are installing software that requires a low level format When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to run the Low Level Format program on the hard disk Asalast resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive Note For information about backing up all of the files see the operating system documentation for the system you are servicing Starting the Low Level Format Program Attention The Low Level Format program erases all data and programs 1 If the hard disk is working make a backup copy of all the files and programs on the hard disk 2 Select Format disk from the SCSISelect Disk Utilities menu then follow the instructions on the screen 3 To install an operating system refer to the ServerGuide CD documenation Setting the Motor Start Jumper The jumper in position illustrated above is the motor start jumper If the jumper is installed all hard d
539. y pushing up with your leg muscles this action removes the strain from the muscles in your back Do not attempt to lift any objects that weigh more than 16 kg 35 Ib or objects that you think are too heavy for you Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer or that makes the equipment unsafe Before you start the machine ensure that other service representatives and the customer s personnel are not in a hazardous position Place removed covers and other parts in a safe place away from all personnel while you are servicing the machine Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over it Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows If your hair is long fasten it Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a nonconductive clip approximately 8 centimeters 3 inches from the end Do not wear jewelry chains metal frame eyeglasses or metal fasteners for your clothing Remember Metal objects are good electrical conductors Wear safety glasses when you are hammering drilling soldering cutting wire attaching springs using solvents or working in any other conditions that might be hazardous to your eyes After service reinstall all safety shields guards labels and ground wires Replace any safety device that is worn or defective Reins
540. y starting the diagnostic program from within its directory Type QAPLPRO XXX where XXX represents one of the following from the list below then press Enter Command Action B amp W The B amp W command line option forces the program to load in Black and White Monochrome mode which is often more readable on laptop computers LOG file The LOG file command line option directs the test programs to start using a specified Error Log file INT10 The INT10 command line option forces the test programs to use the BIOS for screen writes The OXXX command line option where XXX test group for example MBD MEM VID HDU FDU KBD COM LPT and so on omits the designated test group from testing USRCONFIG file SCRIPT file R The USERCONFIG file command line option tells the test programs to look for a user diagnostic configuration file other than the default USERDIAG CFG The SCRIPT file R command line option with the R runs the selected script Please see Scripting on page 86 for a description of scripting Note You can use a instead of a as the command line Switch PC Server 310 Type 8639 85 Viewing the Test Groups As you move the cursor bar up or down in the Test Module Selection window the right hand screen changes to show the attributes parameters and the selected tests of the corresponding Test Grou
541. ype 3518 en Le ev Rec RNC 423 Features cen Sede et OR E 424 Diagnostics and Test Information 425 Additional Service Information 426 locationis am eue p eR ett pes 434 Symptom to FRU Index 446 Parts Listings lt aie 6 ot Gey ey ty sl as 448 Related Service Information 453 Safety Information 456 Battery Notice 461 Disk Array Configuration 461 Drive Maintenance 479 BISplay aeter ra en ets 490 Ethernet Quad BT and B2 PeerMaster Micro Channel Adapters 490 External SCSI Devices 508 Hot Swap Backplane FRU No 06H8388 su us IDE Controllers 513 Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply 514 Keyboard 515 Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement RAID Array 515 Network Adapters Supported Dual Processor Servers cag tee eee Eee as 518 OS 2 Trap Errors 519 PC Server Flash Diagnostics CMOS Access Information uso ede Ak 522 Printer 220 eles Caw a ea ee 3035 524 vi PC Server HMM SCSI Fast Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters AHA 2940 2940W 525 SCSISelect Utility Program 547 Setting the Motor Start Jumper 549 ServerGuide iu coe Sot Baa See 550 Software Hardware Mismatch Problems 550 Undetermined Problems
542. ysical damage replace the adapter Related Service Information 543 Termination Devices Note Hot Swap Back Planes are automatically terminated Do not terminate devices connect to a Hot Swap Back Plane Each connector on the adapter and the devices attached to the connector make up a separate daisy chain Termination is required on the last device in each chain If only one device is attached termination is required for that device Termination AHA 2940 2940W Adapters Use the following information to determine the termination required for the adapter then run the SCSISelect Utility Configuration program if required To run the SCSISelect Configuration Utility program see SCSISelect Configuration Utility on page 534 and Starting the SCSISelect Configuration Utility on page 535 AHA 2940 Adapter Adapter Termination Devices Connected To Enabled Internal connector only Enabled External connector only Disabled Internal and external connectors AHA 2940W Adapter Adapter Termination Devices Connected To Low On High On 68 pin internal connector only Low On High On 68 pin external connector only Low On High On 50 pin internal connector only Low Off High Off 68 pin internal and 68 pin external connectors Low Off High On 50 pin and 68 pin internal connectors Low Off High On 50 pin internal and 68 pin external connectors Invalid 50 pin and 68
543. ystem Board 151 1 Run Diagnostics Real time clock error 2 System Board 161 1 Battery Real time clock battery error 0162 Models EXX 1 Battery CMOS Chip Configuration error for slot 2 System Board XX run Setup then run the EISA Configuration Utility 162 Type 8641 Models 1 Run MXX Configuration Setup Configuration error 0163 Models EXX Battery CMOS Chip Real Time Clock error 2 System Board 163 Type 8641 Models 1 Run Configuration set time and date Time of day not set 164 1 Run Configuration Memory configuration changed 165 1 Run Configuration Micro Channel adapter insert Reference configuration changed diskette 0171 1 Battery CMOS Chip System battery is dead 2 System Board 0173 1 Run Setup System CMOS checksum 2 Battery CMOS Chip bad 3 System Board 0174 1 Run Setup Invalid ISA Configuration 2 Look for configuration conflicts 3 Battery CMOS Chip PC Server 520 Type 8641 309 run the configuration utility Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0175 Models EXX 1 Run Setup EISA Configuration Error 2 Run EISA Configuration Utility Computer cover or cable cover was removed without a key being used 3 Battery CMOS Chip 4 System Board 175 Type 8641 Models 1 Run Diagnostics MXX 2 System Board Hardware error 176 1 Run Configuration Setup hardware error 177 178 1
544. ystem Board One long and three short 1 Display Adapter beeps 2 Video Memory if used Run the Display Self Test System Board PC Server 720 Type 8642 385 Error Codes The following codes might appear on the display and or the information panel Error Code FRU Action 000095XX System complex failure 1 Memory Card 2 Bridge Card 3 Processor Card 4 System Board 000113XX The first memory card is missing or not operational 1 Memory Card 000114XX Any Adapter 2 System Board 00016400 1 Memory Card Memory size changed 00021700 1 Memory Card Multi bit ECC error 00024000 1 Memory Card 000297XX 009503XX 1 System Board 009505XX 2 Processor Card 009506XX 3 Bridge Card 4 Memory Card 01290050 01290051 1 System Board 01290052 01290053 2 Bridge Card 01290054 01290055 3 Processor Card 01290056 4 Memory Card 5 Any PCI Card 01296000 1 Replace the Processor not supported Processor Card 0129910X 1 Replace the adapter Adapter in slot X has an invalid serial number in the slot indicated 013010XX 1 System Board 12 failed to respond 01300AXX 1 System Board Slot LED problem 01300BXX 1 Display Panel Display panel problem 2 Power Switch Panel 3 System Board 0210XXXX Internal bus 1 SCSI Hard Disk Drive size unknown 2 SCSI Adapter or the 0210XXX1 External bus size unknown SCSI controller bu

IBM PC Server Hardware Maintenance Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents